Subaru 2022 WRX Base User Manual

(1,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Foreword

SFWAA

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this

manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its

operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such

as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the

SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the

nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this

manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU

CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and

designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any

obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles

previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and

covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some

explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your

vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next

owner will need the information found herein.

SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN

“SUBARU” and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.

(2,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

(3,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

This manual describes the following vehicle type.

(2,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

(1,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Table of Contents

Keys and Doors ........................................................................................................ 101 Chapter 2

Instruments and Controls....................................................................................... 141 Chapter 3

Climate Control ......................................................................................................... 247

Audio ........................................................................................................................... 267 Chapter 5

Interior Equipment ................................................................................................... 269 Chapter 6

Starting and Operating............................................................................................ 281 Chapter 7

Driving Tips ............................................................................................................... 363 Chapter 8

In Case of Emergency ............................................................................................. 377 Chapter 9

Appearance Care ...................................................................................................... 409 Chapter 10

Maintenance and Service ....................................................................................... 417 Chapter 11

Specifications............................................................................................................ 461 Chapter 12

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects .................................... 477 Chapter 13

Index............................................................................................................................ 495 Chapter 14

Chapter 4

Illustrated Index ...........................................................................................................13

Chapter 1Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags ..............................................................................29

Introduction ....................................................................................................................1

(2,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

(3,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

sint

Warranties ........................................................... 2

Warranties for U.S.A. ............................................. 2

Warranties for Canada ........................................... 2

Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada ............... 2

How to Use This Owner’s Manual ..................... 2

Using Your Owner’s Manual ................................... 2

Safety Warnings .................................................... 3

Safety Symbol ....................................................... 4

Abbreviation List ................................................... 4

Vehicle Symbols ................................................. 5

Safety Precautions When Driving ..................... 5

Seatbelt and SRS Airbag........................................ 5

Child Safety........................................................... 5

Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide) ................ 6

Drinking and Driving.............................................. 7

Drugs and Driving ................................................. 7

Driving When Tired or Sleepy................................ 8

Modification of Your Vehicle .................................. 8

Use of Cell Phones/Texting and Driving ................. 8

Driving Vehicles Equipped with Navigation

System ............................................................... 8

Driving with Pets................................................... 8

Tire Pressures....................................................... 9

Attaching Accessories .......................................... 9

General Information ......................................... 10

California Perchlorate Advisory ............................10

Noise from under the Vehicle ...............................10

Vehicle Data Recording ........................................10

Event Data Recorder ............................................10

Introduction

(4,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Warranties

s00aa

& Warranties for U.S.A.

s00aa01

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of

America, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in the United

States come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranties

. Federal Emission Control Systems

Warranties

. California Emissions Control Sys-

tems Warranties

All warranty information, including applic-

ability, details of coverage and exclusions,

is in the “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for Canada

s00aa05

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru

Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Emission Control System Warranty

All warranty information, including applic-

ability, details of coverage and exclusions,

is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties except for U.S.A.

and Canada

s00aa06

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

How to Use This Owner’s

Manual

s00ab

& Using Your Owner’s Manual

s00ab01

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle,

follow the instructions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may

result in serious injury and damage to your

vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter contains the

information you want.

Introduction

This chapter informs you general informa-

tion before driving.

Illustrated Index

This chapter informs you about the vehicle

layout with illustrations.

Chapter 1: Seat, Seatbelt and SRS

Airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and Doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Warranties

(5,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Chapter 3: Instruments and Controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and how

to use the instruments and other switches.

Chapter 4: Climate Control

This chapter informs you how to operate

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you about your audio

system.

Chapter 6: Interior Equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and Operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving Tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In Case of Emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem, such as a flat tire or

engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance Care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and Service

This chapter informs you when you need to

take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUBARU running

properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about the dimen-

sions and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer Information and

Reporting Safety Defects

This chapter informs you about Tire

information, Uniform tire quality grading

standards and Reporting safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

For EyeSight system:

For details about the EyeSight system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the EyeSight system.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle

shown in the illustrations may differ from

your vehicle in terms of equipment.

& Safety Warnings

s00ab02

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to you

or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual care-

fully in order to gain a better understanding

of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to your

vehicle, or both, could result if the

caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions how to make better use of your

vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

How to Use This Owner’s Manual

Introduction

(6,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Safety Symbol

s00ab03

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “Do

not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

& Abbreviation List

s00ab04

You may find several abbreviations in this

manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-

tions are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation Meaning

ABS Anti-lock brake system

A/C Air conditioner

AKI Anti knock index

ALR Automatic locking retractor

ALR/ELR

Automatic locking retractor/

Emergency locking retractor

AVH Auto Vehicle Hold

AWD All-wheel drive

BSD Blind Spot Detection

CVT

Continuously variable trans-

mission

DRL Daytime running light

EBD

Electronic brake force distri-

bution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

GAW Gross axle weight

GAWR Gross axle weight rating

GPS Global positioning system

GVW Gross vehicle weight

GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating

LATCH

Lower anchors and tethers for

children

Abbreviation Meaning

LCA Lane Change Assist

LED Light emitting diode

MIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT

Methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl

MT Manual transmission

OBD On-board diagnostics

RAB

Reverse Automatic Braking

system

RCTA Rear Cross Traffic Alert

RON Research octane number

SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive

SRH

Steering Responsive Head-

light

SRS

Supplemental restraint sys-

tem

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS

Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem

How to Use This Owner’s Manual

(7,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Vehicle Symbols

s00ac

There are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to

“Warning and Indicator Lights” �P26.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Read these instructions care-

fully

Wear eye protection

Battery fluid contains sulfuric

acid

Keep children away

Keep flames away

Prevent explosions

Safety Precautions When

Driving

s00ad

& Seatbelt and SRS Airbag

s00ad01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle must

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers must

always wear seatbelts when in

the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-

mental Restraint System) airbag

does not do away with the need to

fasten seatbelts. In combination

with the seatbelts, it offers the

best combined protection in case

of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always sit

upright and well back in the seat

as far from the steering wheel as

practical while still maintaining

full vehicle control and the front

passenger should move the seat

as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” �P42.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System Airbag)” �P68.

& Child Safety

s00ad02

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will

be caught between the passen-

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle Symbols

Introduction

(8,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

ger and objects inside the vehi-

cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, infants

and small children should always

be seated in the REAR seat in an

infant or child restraint system

which is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. If

a child is too big for a child

restraint system, the child should

sit in the REAR seat and be

restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seating

positions. Never allow a child to

stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Place children in the REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in

a child restraint system or in a

seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill

children, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Always turn the child safety locks

to the “LOCK” position when

children sit in the rear seat.

Serious injury could result if a

child accidentally opens the door

and falls out. Refer to “Child

Safety Locks” �P130.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window. Re-

fer to “Windows” �P131.

. Never leave unattended children,

adults or animals in the vehicle.

They could accidentally injure

themselves or others through

inadvertent operation of the ve-

hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,

temperature in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to them.

. Help prevent children, adults or

animals from locking themselves

in the trunk. On hot or sunny

days, the temperature in the trunk

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause death or serious

heat-related injuries including

brain damage to anyone locked

inside, particularly for small chil-

dren.

. When leaving the vehicle, close

all windows and lock all doors.

Also make certain that the trunk

is closed.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” �P42.

. For the child restraint system, refer to

“Child Restraint Systems” �P51.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System Airbag)” �P68.

& Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon

Monoxide)

s00ad03

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

Safety Precautions When Driving

(9,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-

hicle for a long time while the

engine is running. If that is un-

avoidable, then use the ventila-

tion fan to force fresh air into the

vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the trunk lid closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

& Drinking and Driving

s00ad04

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction and

impairs your perception, judgment

and attentiveness. If you drive after

drinking – even if you drink just a

little – it will increase the risk of

being involved in a serious or fatal

accident, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In

addition, if you are injured in the

accident, alcohol may increase the

severity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent

causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects

all people differently, you may have con-

sumed too much alcohol to drive safely

even if the level of alcohol in your blood is

below the legal limit. The safest thing you

can do is never drink and drive. However if

you have no choice but to drive, stop

drinking and sober up completely before

getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and Driving

s00ad05

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’ and other persons’ risk

of being involved in a serious or fatal

accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the

literature that accompanies the medication

to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive

after taking any medications that can make

you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability

to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you

have a medical condition that requires you

to take drugs, please consult with your

doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

– CONTINUED –

Safety Precautions When Driving

Introduction

(10,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Driving When Tired or Sleepy

s00ad06

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction will be delayed and your

perception, judgment and attentive-

ness will be impaired. If you drive

when tired or sleepy, your, your

passengers’ and other persons’

chances of being involved in a

serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but instead

find a safe place to rest if you are tired or

sleepy. On long trips, you should make

periodic rest stops to refresh yourself

before continuing on your journey. When

possible, you should share the driving with

others.

& Modification of Your Vehicle

s00ad07

WARNING

Do not remove the genuine SUBARU

navigation and/or audio system.

Doing so could cause the following

functions to be inoperable.

. Combination meter display (color

LCD)

. Rear view image and help lines

. Vehicle settings

. Climate control

. Front seat heater

. Clock

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than with genuine SUBARU

parts and accessories. Other types

of modifications could affect its

performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting

from modification may not be cov-

ered under warranties.

& Use of Cell Phones/Texting

and Driving

s00ad16

CAUTION

Do not talk on a cell phone or text

while driving; it may distract your

attention from driving and lead to an

accident. If you use a cell phone to

talk or text, first pull off the road and

park in a safe place. In some States/

Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on

a phone while driving, but only if the

phone is hands-free.

& Driving Vehicles Equipped

with Navigation System

s00ad09

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract

your attention from driving. Also, do

not operate the controls of the

navigation system while driving.

The loss of attention to driving could

lead to an accident. If you wish to

operate the controls of the naviga-

tion system, first take the vehicle off

the road and stop it in a safe

location.

& Driving with Pets

s00ad10

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop,

unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can be

hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be

properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-

strain a pet with a special traveling harness

Safety Precautions When Driving

(11,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

which can be secured to the rear seat with

a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be

secured to the rear seat by routing a

seatbelt through the carrier’s handle.

Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the

front passenger’s seat. For further infor-

mation, consult your veterinarian, local

animal protection society or pet shop.

& Tire Pressures

s00ad11

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-

sure of each tire and the spare (if

equipped) at least once a month and

before any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the values shown on the

tire inflation pressure label. For detailed

information, refer to “Tires and Wheels”

�P438.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with

excessively low tire pressures

can cause the tires to deform

severely and to rapidly be-

come hot. A sharp increase in

temperature could cause tread

separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to

an accident.

& Attaching Accessories

s00ad15

WARNING

. Do not attach any accessories,

labels or stickers (other than

properly placed inspection stick-

ers) to the windshield. Such

items may obstruct your view.

. If it is necessary to attach an

accessory (such as an electronic

toll collection (ETC) device or

security pass) to the windshield,

consult your SUBARU dealer for

details on the proper location.

. Do not connect any unauthorized

accessories or devices to the

data link connector (OBDII port).

This connector should be used

only with compatible diagnostic

devices for inspection and main-

tenance by an authorized service

technician using authorized ser-

vice tools. Connecting unauthor-

ized devices, such as a driver-

behavior tracking device, may

adversely affect vehicle systems,

including safety systems, or al-

low others to access information

stored in your vehicle. The use of

unauthorized devices may also

cause unexpected malfunctions,

such as a drained battery, or may

damage vehicle systems. The

manufacturer’s warranty will not

cover any part that malfunctions,

fails, or is damaged due to the

use of an unauthorized device

with the data link connector.

Safety Precautions When Driving

Introduction

(12,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

General Information

s00ak

& California Perchlorate Advi-

sory

s00ak03

Certain vehicle components such as air-

bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and

keyless entry transmitter batteries may

contain perchlorate material. Special

handling may apply for service or vehicle

end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

& Noise from under the Vehicle

s00ak01

NOTE

You may hear a noise from under the

vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours

after the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this

does not indicate a malfunction. This

noise is caused by the operation of the

fuel evaporation leakage checking sys-

tem and the operation is normal. The

noise will stop after approximately 15

minutes.

& Vehicle Data Recording

s00ak08

The vehicle is equipped with sophisticated

computers that will record certain data,

such as:

. Vehicle speed

. Engine speed

. Engine control information

. Shift state information

. Driving information, etc.

! Data usage

s00ak0801

SUBARU may use the data recorded in

this computer to diagnose malfunctions,

conduct research and development, and

improve quality.

SUBARU will not disclose the recorded

data to a third party except:

. With the consent of the vehicle owner or

with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle

is leased

. In response to an official request by the

police, a court of law or a government

agency

. For use by SUBARU in a lawsuit

. For research purposes where the data

is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle

owner

& Event Data Recorder

s00ak04

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data

that will assist in understanding how a

vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

. How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

. Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash

location) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely ac-

quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the

General Information

(13,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

special equipment, can read the informa-

tion if they have access to the vehicle or

the EDR.

General Information

Introduction

(14,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(15,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

sill

Exterior .............................................................. 14

Interior ............................................................... 16

CVT Models ..........................................................17

MT Models............................................................18

Instrument Panel............................................... 20

Steering Wheel.................................................. 21

Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/

Switches ......................................................... 22

Combination Meter ........................................... 23

U.S.-Spec. Models ................................................23

Except U.S.-Spec. Models.....................................24

Warning and Indicator Lights.......................... 26

Illustrated Index

(16,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Exterior

s00ay

1) Engine hood (page 423)

2) Windshield wipers (page 230)

3) Headlights (page 217, 452)

4) Turn signal lights (page 228, 452)

5) Moonroof (page 137)

6) Door locks (page 123)

7) Outside mirrors (page 243)

8) Tire pressure (page 440)

9) Flat tires (page 381)

10) Snow tires (page 371)

11) Fog lights (page 227, 452)

12) Tie-down hooks (page 398)

13) Towing hook (page 398)

Exterior

(17,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) Rear window defogger (page 231)

2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 284)

3) Child safety locks (page 130)

4) Tie-down holes (page 398)

5) Lights (page 217, 452)

6) Turn signal lights (page 228, 452)

7) Trunk lid (page 134)

8) Towing hook (page 398)

Exterior

Illustrated Index

(18,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Interior

s00az

1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 62)

· U.S.-spec. models:

5 lower anchorages

· Except U.S.-spec. models:

4 lower anchorages

2) Seatbelts (page 42)

3) Center console (page 272)

4) Accessory power outlet (page 274)

5) Front seats (page 30)

6) Rear seats (page 37)

Interior

(19,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& CVT Models

s00az01

1) Accessory power outlet (page 274)

2) Cup holder (page 273)

3) Electronic parking brake switch (page

325)

4) Select lever (page 305)

5) USB power supply (page 276)/AUX*

6) Glove box (page 272)

7) Dual 7.0-inch display models*

(page

202)/Climate control (page 249)/Audio*

8) 11.6-inch display models*

(page 186)/

Climate control (page 252)/Audio*

/Na-

vigation system*

9) Rear seat heater switches (page 36)

*1: Center information display

*2: For details about how to use the audio and

navigation system (if equipped), refer to

the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

– CONTINUED –

Interior

Illustrated Index

(20,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& MT Models

s00az02

1) Accessory power outlet (page 274)

2) Parking brake lever (page 324)

3) Cup holder (page 273)

4) Shift lever (page 303)

5) USB power supply (page 276)/AUX*

6) Glove box (page 272)

7) Dual 7.0-inch display models*

(page

202)/Climate control (page 249)/Audio*

8) 11.6-inch display models*

(page 186)/

Climate control (page 252)/Audio*

/Na-

vigation system*

9) Rear seat heater switches (page 36)

*1: Center information display

*2: For details about how to use the audio and

navigation system (if equipped), refer to

the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

Interior

(21,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) Map light switches (page 270)

2) Moonroof tilt switch (page 138)

3) Moonroof slide switch (page 138)

4) Door interlock switch (page 270)

5) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK

NOTE

For models with SUBARU STARLINK:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for SUBARU STARLINK.

Interior

Illustrated Index

(22,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Instrument Panel

s00ba

1) Power window switches (page 131)

2) Remote control mirror switch (page 243)

3) Combination meter (page 148)

4) Hazard warning flasher switch (page

148)

5) Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 244)

6) Hood release knob (page 423)

7) Fuse box (page 451)

8) Trunk lid opener button (page 135)

9) Illumination brightness control dial (page

151)

10) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(page 320)

Instrument Panel

(23,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Steering Wheel

s00bb

1) Audio control switches*

2) Talk switch for voice command system*

3) Cruise control switches (page 175)*

4) Shift paddles (page 309)

5) SI-DRIVE switches (page 312)/MODE

switch and INDIVIDUAL switch (page

313)

6) SRS airbag (page 68)

7) Horn (page 245)

8) Control switches for combination meter

display (color LCD) (page 177)

9) Hands-free phone switches*

*1: For details about how to use the switches,

refer to the separate navigation/audio

Owner’s Manual.

*2: For models with the EyeSight system, refer

to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the

EyeSight system.

Steering Wheel

Illustrated Index

(24,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches

s00bc

1) Windshield wiper (page 229)

2) Mist (page 230)

3) Windshield washer (page 231)

4) Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 230)

5) Wiper control lever (page 230)

6) Light control switch (page 217)

7) Front fog light switch (page 227)

8) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 217)

9) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change

(page 219)

10) Turn signal lever (page 228)

Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches

(25,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Combination Meter

s00bd

& U.S.-Spec. Models

s00bd01

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be

slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 149)

2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page

173)

3) Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 176)

4) Trip meter and odometer (page 149)

5) Speedometer (page 148)

6) Fuel gauge (page 150)

7) Digital speed screen (page 184)

8) Engine coolant temperature gauge (page

150)

– CONTINUED –

Combination Meter

Illustrated Index

(26,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Except U.S.-Spec. Models

s00bd02

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be

slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 149)

2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page

173)

3) Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 176)

4) Trip meter and odometer (page 149)

5) Speedometer (page 148)

6) Fuel gauge (page 150)

7) Digital speed screen (page 184)

8) Engine coolant temperature gauge (page

150)

Combination Meter

(27,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Combination Meter

Illustrated Index

(28,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Warning and Indicator Lights s00be

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 153

Front passenger’s

seatbelt warning light

153

Rear seatbelt warning

light

155

SRS airbag system

warning light

156

CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction in-

dicator light

157

Charge warning light 157

Oil pressure warning

light

158

Engine low oil level

warning indicator

158

AT OIL TEMP warning

light (CVT models)

158

/ ABS warning light 160

Mark Name Page

Brake system warning

light

160

Electronic parking

brake indicator light

(CVT models)

162

Door open indicator 164

Low fuel warning light 164

All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light

164

Power steering warning

light

164

Hill start assist warning

light/Hill start assist

OFF indicator light (MT

models)

163

Auto Vehicle Hold indi-

cator light (CVT mod-

els)

163

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol warning light/Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light

165

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol OFF indicator light

167

Mark Name Page

TRACK mode indicator

light

167

Access key warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

168

Security indicator light 172

Turn signal indicator

lights

174

High beam indicator

light

174

High beam assist indi-

cator (if equipped)

174

Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light

174

LED headlight warning

light

174

Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF indicator

light (if equipped)

174

Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light

(if equipped)

174

Warning and Indicator Lights

(29,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Mark Name Page

Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)

175

Headlight indicator light 174

Low tire pressure warn-

ing light (U.S.-spec.

models)

158

Front passenger’s fron-

tal airbag ON indicator

156

Front passenger’s fron-

tal airbag OFF indicator

156

Windshield washer fluid

warning light

164

BSD/RCTA warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

175

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator (if equipped)

175

Cruise control indicator

(if equipped)

175

Intelligent (I) mode in-

dicator (if equipped)

173

Sport (S) mode indica-

tor (if equipped)

173

Mark Name Page

Sport Sharp (S#) mode

indicator (if equipped)

173

Normal mode indicator

(if equipped)

173

Sport mode indicator (if

equipped)

173

Sport+ mode indicator

(if equipped)

173

Individual mode indica-

tor (if equipped)

173

Comfort mode indicator

(if equipped)

173

Icy road surface warn-

ing indicator

175

RAB warning indicator

(if equipped)

176

RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)

176

Sonar Audible Alarm

OFF indicator (if

equipped)

176

Electric Damper Sys-

tem warning light (if

equipped)

176

Warning and Indicator Lights

Illustrated Index

(30,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(31,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s01

1-1. Front Seats........................................................ 30

Power Seat (If Equipped) ......................................33

Manual Seat (If Equipped) .....................................33

Head Restraint Adjustment ...................................34

1-2. Seat Heater (If Equipped) ................................. 36

Front Seat Heater .................................................36

Rear Seat Heater (If Equipped) ..............................36

1-3. Rear Seats ......................................................... 37

Head Restraint Adjustment ...................................37

Folding Down the Rear Seatback ..........................39

Armrest (If Equipped)............................................41

1-4. Seatbelts............................................................ 42

Seatbelt Safety Tips..............................................42

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .....................43

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency

Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) ..............................43

Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ........................44

Fastening the Seatbelt ..........................................44

Seatbelt Maintenance............................................47

1-5. Seatbelt Pretensioners ..................................... 47

Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt Pretensioner ..............48

Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt and Lap Belt

Pretensioners .....................................................49

System Monitors...................................................49

System Servicing..................................................49

Precautions against Vehicle Modification ..............50

1-6. Rear Seat Reminder ......................................... 50

1-7. Child Restraint Systems .................................. 51

Safety Precautions ...............................................51

Safety Tips for Installing Child Restraint

Systems.............................................................53

Where to Place a Child Restraint System..............53

Choosing a Child Restraint System ......................56

Installing Child Restraint Systems with ALR/ELR

Seatbelt .............................................................56

Installing a Booster Seat or Booster Cushion .......60

Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use

of Lower and Tether Anchorages (LATCH) ..........62

Top Tether Anchorages ........................................66

1-8. SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System Airbag)............................................... 68

General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag

System ..............................................................68

General Precautions Regarding SRS Airbag

System for Accessories and Any Objects ...........70

General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag

System and Children ..........................................72

Components ........................................................75

SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System,

SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag ...........77

SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag .............89

SRS Airbag System Monitors ...............................96

SRS Airbag System Servicing ..............................97

Precautions against Vehicle Modification..............98

How to Contact the Vehicle Manufacturer

concerning Modifications for Persons with

Disabilities That May Affect the Advanced

Airbag System ...................................................99

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(32,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1-1. Front Seats

s01aa

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing, as personal injury or loss of

vehicle control may occur.

. Before adjusting the seat, ensure

nothing is blocking the adjusting

mechanism.

. After adjusting the seat, move it

back and forth to ensure the seat

is securely locked. If it is not, it

may move suddenly or the seat-

belt may not operate properly.

. Do not put objects under the front

seats. They may interfere with

front seat locking mechanism

and cause an accident.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

back and upright in the seat. To

reduce the risk of sliding under

the seatbelt in a collision, the

front seatbacks should always

be used in the upright position

while the vehicle is running. If the

front seatbacks are not in the

upright position and a collision

occurs, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are not sitting

back and upright when the SRS

airbag deploys could suffer ser-

ious injury. Because the SRS

airbag needs enough space for

deployment, the driver should

always sit upright and well back

in the seat as far from the steer-

ing wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control,

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

WARNING

Seat children in the rear seat prop-

erly restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if they

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults, their

risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater. For that reason, we

strongly recommend that ALL chil-

dren (including those in child re-

straint systems) sit in the REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in a

child restraint system or in a seat-

belt, whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. Se-

Front Seats

(33,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

cure ALL types of child systems in

the REAR seats at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning child restraint sys-

tems, refer to “Child Restraint Sys-

tems” �P51.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the seat-

back. If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest their

feet between the front seatback and

seat cushion. Doing so may interfere

with the proper operation of the

following systems and could result

in serious injury.

. Occupant detection system

. SRS side airbag

. Front seat heater (if equipped)

. Power seat (if equipped)

– CONTINUED –

Front Seats

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(34,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

WARNING

Do not press your feet onto the

instrument panel. Doing so may

prevent the occupant detection

function of the SRS airbag system

from functioning correctly, and may

result in serious injury or death in

the event of an accident.

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits well

back and upright in the seat. Do not

put cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. If you do so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious internal injury or

death.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

Front Seats

(35,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Power Seat (If Equipped)

s01aa02

! Driver’s seat

s01aa0208

1) Seat position forward/backward con-

trol switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or

backward. During forward/backward ad-

justment of the seat, you cannot adjust

the seat cushion angle or seat cushion

height.

2) Seat cushion angle control switch

To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up

or push down the front end of the control

switch.

3) Seat height control switch

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

4) Seatback angle (reclining) control

switch

To adjust the angle of the seatback, move

the control switch.

5) Lumbar support control switch (if

equipped)

To increase lower back support, push the

front side of the switch. To decrease

lower back support, push the rear side of

the switch.

& Manual Seat (If Equipped)

s01aa01

! Forward and backward adjustment

s01aa0101

1. Sit in the seat to adjust.

2. Pull the lever upward, slide the seat to

the desired position, and then release the

lever.

3. Try to move the seat back and forth to

make sure that it is securely locked into

place.

– CONTINUED –

Front Seats

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(36,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Reclining the seatback

s01aa0102

1. Pull up the reclining lever, adjust the

seatback to the desired position, and then

release the lever.

2. Make sure the seatback is securely

locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position

can spring back upward with force when

pulling up the lever. While operating the

lever to return the seatback, hold the

seatback lightly so that it may be raised

back gradually.

! Seat height adjustment (driver’s

seat)

s01aa0103

1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat

is lowered.

2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat

rises.

The height of the seat can be adjusted by

moving the seat adjustment lever up and

down.

& Head Restraint Adjustment

s01aa04

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck

from the rear. Also, never install

the head restraints backwards.

Doing so will prevent the head

restraints from functioning as

intended. Therefore, when the

head restraints are removed, all

head restraints must be rein-

stalled properly to protect vehicle

occupants.

. The vehicle should not be oper-

ated until the head restraints are

installed in their proper posi-

tions.

. The front seat head restraints are

designed to be installed into the

front seats only. The rear seat

head restraints are designed to

be installed into the rear seats

only. Do not attempt to install the

front seat head restraints into the

rear seats, or the rear seat head

restraints into the front seats.

NOTE

It is possible to adjust the angle of the

front seat head restraints only. When

installing the front seat head restraints,

make sure that the angle of the head

restraints can be adjusted.

Both the driver’s seat and front passen-

ger’s seat are equipped with head re-

straints. Both head restraints are adjusta-

Front Seats

(37,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

ble in the following ways.

! Head restraint height adjustment

s01aa0401

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

3) Remove button

To release:

. Lowermost to the 1st step

Pull the head restraint up to the 1st step.

To raise:

. 1st step to the 3rd step

Pull the head restraint up while pressing

the release button on the top of the

seatback.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the

seatback.

To remove:

Use a key or other hard, pointed object to

press the remove button, then pull out the

head restraint.

To install:

Push the head restraint into the holes on

the top of the seatback until it locks.

Each head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

NOTE

It is not possible to remove or install the

head restraint without reclining the

front seatback. Reclining the front seat-

back and then remove or install the

head restraint.

! Head restraint angle adjustment

s01aa0402

The angle of the head restraint can be

adjusted in several steps. While maintain-

ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the

head restraint to a position where the back

of your head is as close to the head

restraint as possible.

To tilt:

Tilt the head restraint by hand to the

preferred position. A click will be audible

when the head restraint is locked.

To return:

Tilt the head restraint once as far forward

as it can go. The head restraint will

automatically return to the fully upright

position. Then, adjust the head restraint

again to the preferred angle.

Front Seats

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(38,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1-2. Seat Heater (If Equipped)

s01ab

The seat heater operates when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

CAUTION

. Do not put hard or heavy objects

or ones with protrusions on the

seat, and do not stab the seat

with sharp objects, such as pins

or needles.

. People with delicate skin may

suffer slight burns even at low

temperatures if they use the seat

heater for a long period of time.

When using the heater, always be

sure to warn the persons con-

cerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

similar items. This may cause the

seat heater to overheat.

. When the seat is warmed enough

or before you leave the vehicle,

be sure to turn off the seat heater.

NOTE

. Use of the seat heater for a long

period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

. When using for a long period of time,

we recommend setting the heater to the

MID or LOW position. Use the HIGH

position for only quick heating at the

start of the function usage.

& Front Seat Heater

s01ab05

Adjust the front seat heater function on the

center information display. Refer to “Front

Seat Heater” �P260.

& Rear Seat Heater (If

Equipped)

s01ab06

CAUTION

Do not open and close the center

console lid while operating the rear

seat heater switch. There is the risk

of fingers being caught in the lid.

Rear seat heater switches

1) Front passenger’s side

2) Indicator lights

3) Driver’s side

Press the rear seat heater switch. Each

time you press the switch, the mode will

change as follows.

HIGH:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

OFF:

All indicator lights turn off.

Seat Heater

(39,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Selecting “HIGH” mode will cause the seat

to heat up quicker.

NOTE

Only the front seat heater switches

retain the previous switch position

even if the vehicle has restarted. The

rear seat switch will reset.

1-3. Rear Seats

s01ac

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits back

and upright in the seat. Do not place

cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. By doing so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious internal injury or

death.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

as it could tumble forward and injure

passengers in the event of a sudden

stop or accident.

& Head Restraint Adjustment

s01ac03

Both the rear window side seats and the

rear center seat are equipped with head

restraints.

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

– CONTINUED –

Rear Seats

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(40,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck

from the rear. Therefore, when

the head restraints are removed,

all head restraints must be re-

installed properly to protect ve-

hicle occupants.

. The vehicle should not be oper-

ated until the head restraints are

installed in the proper position.

! Rear windows side seating position

s01ac0301

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

After installing the head restraint, make

sure it is securely locked.

NOTE

When the head restraint cannot be

pulled out or installed due to insuffi-

cient clearance between the head re-

straint and the roof, tilt the seat and

then perform the installation and re-

moval tasks.

! Rear center seating position

s01ac0302

1) Incorrect (retracted position)

2) Correct (extended position)

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used in the retracted position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to the extended posi-

tion.

Rear Seats

(41,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the

seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

When the rear-center seating position is

occupied, raise the head restraint to the

extended position. When the rear center

seating position is not occupied, lower the

head restraint to improve rearward visibi-

lity.

& Folding Down the Rear Seat-

back

s01ac02

WARNING

. When you fold down the seat-

back, check that there are no

passengers or objects on the rear

seat. Not doing so creates a risk

of injury or property damage if

the seatback suddenly folds

down.

. Never allow passengers to ride

on the folded rear seatback or in

the trunk. Doing so may result in

serious injury or death.

. Secure all objects and especially

long items properly to prevent

them from being thrown around

inside the vehicle and causing

serious injury during a sudden

stop, a sudden steering maneu-

ver or a rapid acceleration.

. When you return the seatback to

its original position, shake the

seatback slightly to confirm that

it is securely fixed in place. If the

seatback is not securely fixed in

place, the seatback may sud-

denly fold down in the event of

sudden braking, or objects may

move out from the trunk, which

could cause serious injury or

death.

Lock release knob

1) Unlocked

2) Locked

A) Unlocking marker in red

– CONTINUED –

Rear Seats

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(42,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) Striker

WARNING

When the seatback is returned to its

original position, observe the fol-

lowing precautions. Failure to do so

may lead to serious injury or an

accident because the proper seat-

belt operation will be affected.

. The seatbelt should not be

caught in the seatback and it

should be fully visible.

. The seatbelt should not pass

behind the striker plate for the

seatback.

CAUTION

Do not hang anything on the striker

plate. The seatback may not be

secured firmly in place. This could

lead to injury or accident.

1. Lower the head restraint of the rear

center seat.

2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock

release knob then fold the seatback down.

! Return the rear seatback

s01ac0204

Rear Seats

(43,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

WARNING

. When returning the seatback to

its original position, observe the

following precaution.

Failure to observe the precaution

may damage the seatbelt, impair-

ing its effectiveness, and possi-

bly result in a serious injury.

. When returning the seatback to

its original position, pull the

seatbelt out towards the vehicle

exterior so that it will not be

caught between the seatback

and the trim.

Lock release knob

1) Unlocked

2) Locked

A) Unlocking marker in red

To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place and make sure that the unlock-

ing marker on the lock release knob is no

longer visible.

WARNING

When you return the seatback to its

original position, check that the

unlocking marker on the lock re-

lease knob is not visible. Also, shake

the seatback slightly to confirm that

it is securely fixed in place. If the

seatback is not securely fixed in

place, the seatback may suddenly

fold down in the event of sudden

braking, or objects may move out

from the trunk, which could cause

serious injury or death.

& Armrest (If Equipped)

s01ac01

To lower the armrest, pull the armrest’s top

edge.

WARNING

. Make sure to have the rear pas-

sengers wear the seatbelts be-

fore lowering the armrest. If the

rear passengers wear the seat-

belts after lowering the armrest,

seatbelts cannot provide maxi-

mum restraint, causing serious

injuries.

– CONTINUED –

Rear Seats

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(44,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. To avoid serious injury, never

allow passengers to sit on the

center armrest while the vehicle

is in motion.

1-4. Seatbelts

s01ae

& Seatbelt Safety Tips

s01ae01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in order

to provide full restraint. Loose

fitting belts are not as effective in

preventing or reducing injury.

. Each seatbelt is designed to sup-

port only one person. Never use a

single belt for two or more per-

sons – even children. Otherwise,

in an accident, serious injury or

death could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assemblies

including retractors and attach-

ing hardware worn by occupants

of a vehicle that has been in a

serious accident. The entire as-

sembly should be replaced even

if damage is not obvious.

. Seat children in the rear seat

properly restrained at all times.

The SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill chil-

dren, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater. For that

reason, we strongly recommend

that ALL children (including

those in child restraint systems)

sit in the REAR seat properly

restrained at all times in a child

restraint system or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s height and weight. Secure

ALL types of child restraint sys-

tems in the REAR seats at all

times.

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

Seatbelts

(45,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

positions than in the front seating

positions. For instructions and

precautions concerning the child

restraint system, refer to “Child

Restraint Systems” �P51.

This vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt by the front

passenger when any of the SRS frontal,

side and curtain airbags deploys.

! Infants or small children

s01ae0101

Use a child restraint system that is suitable

for this vehicle. Refer to “Child Restraint

Systems” �P51.

! Children

s01ae0102

If a child is too big for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear seat

and be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions. Never allow a child to

stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses

the face or neck, move the child closer to

the belt buckle to help provide a good

shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to

securely place the lap belt as low as

possible on the hips and not on the child’s

waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt

cannot be properly positioned, a child

restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the child’s

arm or behind the child’s back.

! Expectant mothers

s01ae0103

Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doctor

for specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips, not over the waist.

& Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR)

s01ae02

The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows

normal body movement but the retractor

locks automatically during a sudden stop,

impact or if you pull the belt very quickly

out of the retractor.

& Automatic Locking Retractor/

Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR/ELR)

s01ae03

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-

matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic

Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor normally functions as an Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/

ELR has an additional locking mode,

“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode”, intended to secure a child restraint

system.

The ALR mode functions as follows.

When the seatbelt is once drawn out

completely and is then retracted even

slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in

that position and the seatbelt cannot be

extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks

will be heard which indicate the retractor

functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is

retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled

and the ELR mode is restored.

When securing a child restraint system on

the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the

seatbelt must be changed over to the

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(46,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

For instructions on how to install the child

restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to

“Installing Child Restraint Systems with

ALR/ELR Seatbelt” �P56.

When the child restraint system is re-

moved, make sure that the retractor is

restored to the Emergency Locking Re-

tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seat-

belt to retract fully.

& Seatbelt Warning Light

and Chime

s01ae04

Refer to “Seatbelt Warning Light and

Chime” �P153.

& Fastening the Seatbelt

s01ae06

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury.

. Keep the lap belt as low as

possible on your hips. In a colli-

sion, this spreads the force of the

lap belt over stronger hip bones

instead of across the weaker

abdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants

and seatbacks or seat cushions.

If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap

belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result

in serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under

the arm or behind the back. If an

accident occurs, this can increase

the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can

become very hot in a vehicle that has

been closed up in sunny weather;

they could burn an occupant. Do not

touch such hot parts until they cool.

Seatbelts

(47,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Front seatbelts

s01ae0601

1. Adjust the seat position:

Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the

upright position. Move the seat as far from

the steering wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-

back to the upright position. Move the seat

as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it

out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let

the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the

shoulder belt.

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

the hips, not on the waist.

! Adjusting the front seat shoulder

belt anchor height

s01ae060101

Adjust the shoulder belt anchor height to

the position best suited for the driver/front

passenger. Always adjust the anchor

height so that the shoulder belt passes

over the middle of the shoulder without

touching the neck.

To raise:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor

up.

To lower:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor

down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure that

it is locked in place.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(48,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

s01ae060102

1) Button

1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it

from getting tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the

belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear seatbelts

s01ae0602

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it

out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let

the belt retract slightly after giving a

strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly

again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

NOTE

The center seatbelt buckle is marked as

“CENTER”.

4. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the

shoulder belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

the hips, not on the waist.

Seatbelts

(49,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Unfastening the seatbelt

s01ae060201

1) Button

1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it

from getting tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the

belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

& Seatbelt Maintenance

s01ae07

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and

lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the

belts because this could seriously affect

their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments

including the webbing and all hardware

periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,

damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-

place the seatbelts even if only minor

damage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes,

oils, chemicals and particularly

battery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica-

tions or changes that will prevent

the seatbelt from operating prop-

erly.

1-5. Seatbelt Pretensioners

s01af

The following seatbelts have a seatbelt

pretensioner.

. Driver’s seatbelt

. Front passenger’s seatbelt

. Window-side rear passengers’ seat-

belts

The seatbelt pretensioners are designed

to be activated in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe frontal and

side collision and rollover accident.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection,

the occupants should sit in an

upright position with their seat-

belts properly fastened. Refer to

“Seatbelts” �P42.

. Do not modify, remove or strike

the seatbelt retractor assemblies

equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners or surrounding area. This

could result in accidental activa-

tion of the seatbelt pretensioners

or could make the system inop-

erative, possibly resulting in ser-

ious injury. Seatbelt preten-

sioners have no user-serviceable

parts. For required servicing of

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelt Pretensioners

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(50,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

seatbelt retractors equipped with

seatbelt pretensioners, consult

your SUBARU dealer.

. When discarding seatbelt retrac-

tor assemblies equipped with

seatbelt pretensioners or scrap-

ping the entire vehicle due to

collision damage or for other

reasons, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

NOTE

. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-

signed to activate in minor impacts or

in rear impacts.

. Pretensioners are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is activated,

the seatbelt retractor assemblies

equipped with seatbelt pretensioners

should be replaced only by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. When replacing

seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only

genuine SUBARU parts.

. If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt

pretensioner does not retract or cannot

be pulled out due to a malfunction or

activation of the pretensioner, contact

your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

. If the seatbelt retractor assembly or

surrounding area has been damaged,

contact your SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible.

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to inform the buyer that the vehicle

is equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners. Also, notify the buyer of the

contents in this section.

& Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt

Pretensioner

s01af01

NOTE

This section is applicable to the follow-

ing components.

. Driver’s seatbelt

. Window-side rear passengers’ seat-

belts

The pretensioner sensor also serves as

follows.

. Front impact sensor

. Side impact sensor

. Front door impact sensor

. Rollover sensor

If the sensor detects a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during frontal or

side collisions or rollover accidents, any

seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is

quickly drawn back in by the retractor to

take up the slack so that the belt more

effectively restrains the seat occupant.

The window-side rear passenger’s seat-

belt pretensioner includes a tension redu-

cing device which limits the peak forces

exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in

the event of a collision.

The driver’s seatbelt pretensioner includes

a tension reducing device which limits the

peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the

occupant in the event of a collision. The

adaptive force limiter will select a reducing

load to suit the body size of the occupant

as detected by the occupant detection

sensors.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

Seatbelt Pretensioners

(51,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt retractor remains

locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot

be pulled out and retracted and therefore

must be replaced.

& Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt

and Lap Belt Pretensioners

s01af02

NOTE

This section is applicable to the front

passenger’s seatbelt.

1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder

belt pretensioner and adaptive force

limiter)

2) Lap belt pretensioner

The shoulder belt pretensioner is supple-

mented by a lap belt pretensioner, which is

located at the base of the center pillar. Like

the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belt

pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the

belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of

frontal collision force is detected. As a

result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat

occupant more effectively.

The front passenger’s seatbelt preten-

sioner includes a tension reducing device

which limits the peak forces exerted by the

seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a

collision.

The adaptive force limiter will select a

reducing load to suit the body size of

occupant as detected by the occupant

detection sensor.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-

mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt

cannot be pulled out and retracted and

therefore must be replaced.

& System Monitors

s01af03

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner

with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.

The seatbelt pretensioners share the

control module with the SRS airbag

system. Therefore, if any malfunction

occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the

SRS airbag system warning light will

illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS Airbag

System Monitors” �P96.

& System Servicing

s01af04

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re-

tractor assembly or scrapping

the entire vehicle damaged by a

collision, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. Tampering with or disconnecting

the system’s wiring could result

in accidental activation of the

seatbelt pretensioner and/or

SRS airbag or could make the

system inoperative, which may

result in serious injury. Do not

use electrical test equipment on

any circuit related to the seatbelt

pretensioner and SRS airbag sys-

tems. For required servicing of

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelt Pretensioners

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(52,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

the seatbelt pretensioner, con-

sult your nearest SUBARU deal-

er.

CAUTION

For the locations of the sensors and

control modules, refer to “Compo-

nents” �P75.

If you need service or repair in those

areas or near the front seatbelt

retractors, have the work performed

by your authorized SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

If the front or side part of the vehicle is

damaged in an accident to the extent

that the seatbelt pretensioner does not

operate, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

& Precautions against Vehicle

Modification

s01af05

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you

want to install any accessory parts to your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the seatbelt pretensioners.

. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er’s Manual.

1-6. Rear Seat Reminder

s01at

This function prompts the driver to confirm

the presence of passengers and cargo in

the rear.

This function will be activated when the

rear doors are opened and closed.

It alerts the driver by warning messages on

the combination meter display (color LCD)

and beeps when the ignition switch is

turned from the “ON” position to the “OFF”

position.

NOTE

. This function does not directly de-

tect passengers and cargo in the rear

seat.

. This function detects the opening

and closing of the rear doors. In this

Rear Seat Reminder

(53,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

situation, there is the possibility that

the following phenomenon may occur.

– It may alert the driver even if there

are no passengers or cargo in the

rear seat.

– It may not alert the driver even if

there are passengers and cargo in

the rear seat.

. This function can be set to on or off

by the “Car settings”. For details, refer

to “Car settings” �P195 (11.6-inch dis-

play models) or “Vehicle setting icons”

�P208 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

. The ON/OFF setting will not be

changed even if the ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” position.

. The ON/OFF setting will be returned

to the default setting if the battery is

removed.

1-7. Child Restraint Systems

s01ag

& Safety Precautions

s01ag19

Infants and small children should always

be placed in an infant or child restraint

system in the rear seat while riding in the

vehicle.

You should use an infant or child restraint

system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standards, is compatible with

your vehicle and is appropriate for the

child’s age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed to

be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or

the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt

(except those described in “Installation of

Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower

and Tether Anchorages (LATCH)” �P62).

Children could be endangered in an

accident if their child restraint systems

are not properly secured in the vehicle.

When installing the child restraint system,

carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint

system at all times while the vehicle is

moving.

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(54,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Lock release knob

1) Unlocked

2) Locked

A) Unlocking marker in red

WARNING

. Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that

the seatback is securely locked

into place. Otherwise, in an acci-

dent, serious injury or death

could result.

. Do not leave children in the car

unattended. High interior tem-

peratures may cause heat stroke

and dehydration that result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child on

his or her lap or in his or her arms

while the vehicle is moving. The

passenger cannot protect the child

(or infant) from injury in a collision,

because the child will be caught

between the passenger and objects

inside the vehicle. Additionally,

holding a child in your lap or arms

in the front seat exposes that child to

another serious danger. Since the

SRS airbag deploys with consider-

able speed and force, the child could

be injured or even killed.

WARNING

Children should be properly re-

strained at all times. Never allow a

child to stand up, or to kneel on any

seat. Unrestrained children will be

thrown forward during sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injured

seriously.

Additionally, children standing up or

kneeling on or in front of the front

seat are exposed another serious

danger. Since the SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed and

force, the child could be injured or

even killed.

Child Restraint Systems

(55,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Safety Tips for Installing

Child Restraint Systems

s01ag16

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not use a seatbelt extender. If

a seatbelt extender is used when

installing a child restraint sys-

tem, the seatbelt will not securely

hold the child restraint system.

Use of a seatbelt extender could

cause death or serious injury to

children or other passengers in

sudden braking, swerving, or

accidents.

. Attach the child restraint system

to the anchors properly. When

using the LATCH anchors, be

sure that there are no foreign

objects around the anchors.

Make sure the child restraint

system is securely attached.

Otherwise, it may cause death or

serious injury to children or other

passengers in sudden braking,

swerving, or accidents.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

& Where to Place a Child Re-

straint System

s01ag01

The following descriptions are SUBARU’s

recommendations on where to place a

child restraint system in your vehicle.

WARNING

. Several types of child restraint

systems may conceal the buckle

of the neighboring seat. If the

occupant of the neighboring seat

cannot correctly fasten the seat-

belt, that person must move to a

different seat. If the seatbelt can-

not be correctly fastened, there is

the risk of serious injury or death

in the event of sudden braking or

a collision.

. If the child restraint system can-

not be correctly installed be-

cause it contacts the driver’s

seat, move the child restraint

system to a different seat. If it

cannot be installed in a different

seat (other than the driver’s seat),

adjust the front seat so that

contact does not occur.

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(56,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

A: Front passenger’s seating position

You should not install a child restraint

system (including a booster seat) due to

the hazard to children posed by the

passenger’s airbag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seating

positions

Recommended positions for all types of

child restraint systems.

In these positions, the following equipment

is provided for installing a child restraint

system.

. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat-

belts

. Lower anchorages (bars)

. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)

Some types of child restraint systems

might not be able to be secured firmly

due to projection of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear seat, center seating position

(U.S.-spec. models)

In this position, the following equipment is

provided for installing a child restraint

system.

. ALR/ELR seatbelts

. Lower anchorages (bars)

. Top tether anchorages

Some types of child restraint systems

might not be able to be secured firmly

due to projection of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

The rear center seat includes lower an-

chorages, and the lower anchorages on

the center side of the rear right seat can be

used to install a child restraint system.

When a child restraint system is installed in

the rear center seat using the lower

anchorages, do not sit in the rear right

seat.

If a child restraint system is not correctly

fixed in place (for example, if a child

restraint system can be moved more than

1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), the child

restraint system should be moved to a

window seat position of the rear seat.

C: Rear seat, center seating position

(other models)

In this position, the following equipment is

provided for installing a child restraint

system.

. ALR/ELR seatbelts

. Top tether anchorages

Some types of child restraint systems

might not be able to be secured firmly

due to projection of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side

seating positions may be used for a seat in

the center seating position if a child

restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-

tions permit and specify using anchors as

far apart as those in this vehicle.

If a child restraint system is not correctly

Child Restraint Systems

(57,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

fixed in place (for example, if a child

restraint system can be moved more than

1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you

should install the child restraint system in a

rear seat, window-side seating position.

WARNING

. Even with advanced airbags, chil-

dren can be seriously injured by

the airbag. Seat children in the

rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill

children, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

For that reason, be sure to secure

ALL types of child restraint sys-

tems in the REAR seats at all

times. You should choose a re-

straint system which is appropri-

ate for the child’s age, height and

weight. According to accident

statistics, children are safer

when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the

front seating positions.

. Do not use lower anchorages

(bars) for a seat in the center

seating position unless a child

restraint system manufacturer’s

instructions permit and specify

using anchors spaced as far

apart as those in this vehicle.

. Do not connect two or more lower

hooks onto the same anchorage

(bar).

WARNING

. SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS

EQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN-

GER’S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER IN-

STALL A CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PAS-

SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Do not allow children to lean their

heads or any other parts of their

bodies against the door or the

area of the seat, front and rear

pillars or roof side rails. The SRS

side airbags and SRS curtain

airbags deploy even if children

are seated in the child restraint

system, and the impact could

cause death or serious injury to

the child.

. To secure the child restraint sys-

tem, be sure to comply with all

installation instructions provided

by the child restraint system

manufacturer. Not doing so could

result in death or serious injury to

children in a sudden stop or

accident.

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(58,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Choosing a Child Restraint

System

s01ag02

Choose a child restraint system that is

appropriate for the child’s age and size

(weight and height) in order to provide the

child with proper protection. The child

restraint system should meet all applicable

requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards for the United States or

of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

for Canada. It can be identified by looking

for the label on the child restraint system or

the manufacturer’s statement of compli-

ance in the document attached to the

system. Also it is important for you to make

sure that the child restraint system is

compatible with the vehicle in which it will

be used.

NOTE

Some sizes of child restraint systems

may not fit the vehicle seat. Before

purchasing a child restraint system,

check whether it fits on the vehicle seat.

& Installing Child Restraint

Systems with ALR/ELR Seat-

belt

s01ag04

CAUTION

. When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufac-

turer’s instructions supplied with

it. After installing the child re-

straint system, check to ensure

that it is held securely in position.

If it is not held tight and secure,

the danger of your child suffering

personal injury in the event of an

accident may be increased.

. When installing a child restraint

system in the rear center seating

position, set both seatbacks to

the original position. Otherwise,

the child restraint system cannot

be securely restrained, which

may result in death or serious

injuries in the event of sudden

stop, sudden steering maneuver

or an accident.

! Installing a rearward facing child

restraint system

s01ag0401

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that

the seatback is securely locked

into place. Otherwise, in an acci-

dent, serious injury or death

could result.

1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child

restraint system in the rear center

seating position, if the child restraint

system does not fit snugly against

the contours of the rear center seat

cushion, install the child restraint

Child Restraint Systems

(59,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

system in the window-side seating

position to be safe. For details, refer

to “Where to Place a Child Restraint

System” �P53.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system follow-

ing the instructions provided by its manu-

facturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is

recommended by the manufacturer’s in-

structions supplied with the child restraint

system, perform the following procedure.

(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to

the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode.

(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the

retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks

will be heard which indicate the retractor

functions as ALR.

6. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back and

forth and right and left to check if it is firmly

secured. Sometimes a child restraint

system can be more firmly secured by

pushing it down into the seat cushion and

then tightening the seatbelt. It should not

be possible to move the child restraint

system more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any

direction along the seatbelt path.

7. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR

mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion

of the belt to confirm that it cannot be

pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(60,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

8. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

! Installing a forward facing child

restraint system

s01ag0402

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that

the seatback is securely locked

into place. Otherwise, in an acci-

dent, serious injury or death

could result.

1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

2. If the child restraint system makes

contact with the head restraint of the rear

seating position where the child restraint

system is to be installed, perform the

following procedure.

– Except rear center seat: Remove

the head restraint.

– Rear center seat: Raise the head

restraint to the extended position. If the

child restraint system still makes con-

tact, remove the head restraint.

For details, refer to “Head Restraint

Adjustment” �P37.

CAUTION

Store the removed head restraint in

the trunk. Do not place the head

restraint in the passenger compart-

Child Restraint Systems

(61,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

ment to prevent it from being thrown

around in the passenger compart-

ment in a sudden stop or a sharp

turn.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child

restraint system in the rear center

seating position, if the child restraint

system does not fit snugly against

the contours of the rear center seat

cushion, install the child restraint

system in a window-side seating

position to be safe. For details, refer

to “Where to Place a Child Restraint

System” �P53.

3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system follow-

ing the instructions provided by its manu-

facturer.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

6. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to

the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into

the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the

retractor functions as ALR.

7. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back and

forth and right and left to check if it is firmly

secured. Sometimes a child restraint

system can be more firmly secured by

pushing it down into the seat cushion and

then tightening the seatbelt. It should not

be possible to move the child restraint

system more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any

direction along the seatbelt path.

8. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(62,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

9. Latch the top tether hook onto the

tether anchorage that is located behind the

rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.

For additional instructions, refer to “Top

Tether Anchorages” �P66.

10. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

& Installing a Booster Seat or

Booster Cushion

s01ag05

Booster seat

Booster cushion

1. Adjust the head restraint as follows.

For booster seat:

If the booster seat makes contact with the

head restraint of the rear seating position

where the booster seat is to be installed,

Child Restraint Systems

(63,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

perform the following procedure.

– Except rear center seat: Remove

the head restraint.

– Rear center seat: Raise the head

restraint to the extended position. If the

booster seat still makes contact, re-

move the head restraint.

For details, refer to “Head Restraint

Adjustment” �P37

CAUTION

Store the removed head restraint in

the trunk. Do not place the head

restraint in the passenger compart-

ment to prevent it from being thrown

around in the passenger compart-

ment in a sudden stop or a sharp

turn

For booster cushion:

Raise the head restraint to the extended

position (center seat). Do not remove the

head restraint.

2. Place the booster seat/cushion in the

rear seating position and sit the child on it.

The child should sit well back on the

booster seat/cushion.

3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the booster seat/cushion and

the child following the instructions pro-

vided by its manufacturer. For booster

seat/cushion with a belt guide, use the

seatbelt through the belt guide.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. Take care not to twist

the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of child’s shoulder and

that the lap belt is positioned as low as

possible on the child’s hips.

5. To remove the booster seat/cushion,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder belt

under the child’s arm or behind

the child’s back. If an accident

occurs, this can increase the risk

or severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly in

order to provide full restraint.

Loose fitting belts are not as

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(64,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

effective in preventing or redu-

cing injury.

. Place the lap belt as low as

possible on the child’s hips. A

high-positioned lap belt will in-

crease the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen, and

both can result in serious internal

injury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. Placing the

shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sud-

den braking or in a collision.

& Installation of Child Restraint

Systems by Use of Lower and

Tether Anchorages (LATCH)

s01ag07

! Lower and tether anchorages

s01ag0701

WARNING

. Attach the child restraint system

to the anchors properly. When

using the LATCH anchors, be

sure that there are no foreign

objects around the anchors.

Make sure the child restraint

system is securely attached.

Otherwise it may cause death or

serious injury to children or other

passengers in sudden braking,

swerving, or accidents.

. When installing a child restraint

system using LATCH anchors

with the rear seatbelt fastened,

ensure that the rear seatbelt does

not become caught in the child

restraint system or the lower

LATCH anchorages.

NOTE

The seatbelt warning system of the rear

seats detects if any of the seats are

occupied by a passenger. Installing a

child restraint system in the rear seat-

ing area, using the LATCH anchors,

may result in the activation of the

passenger seatbelt warning light and

chime. Fastening the rear seatbelt prior

to installing the child restraint system

will avoid activating the passenger

seatbelt warning light and chime. For

details, refer to “Rear passenger’s

seats” �P155.

Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle

without use of the seatbelts. Such child

restraint systems are secured to the

dedicated anchorages provided on the

vehicle body.

Child Restraint Systems

(65,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

The lower and tether anchorages are

sometimes referred to as the LATCH

system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with 5 lower

anchorages (bars) (U.S.-spec. models)

four lower anchorages (bars) (other mod-

els) and three upper anchorages (tether

anchorages) for accommodating such

child restraint systems.

! Lower anchorages

s01ag070101

U.S.-spec. models

WARNING

Do not connect two or more lower

hooks onto the same anchorage

(bar).

There are a total of 5 lower anchorages at

the rear seat. The rear anchorage from the

right side is used for both the right seat and

center seat. Each lower anchorage is

located where the seat cushion meets

the seatback.

Except U.S.-spec. models

WARNING

Do not connect two or more lower

hooks onto the same anchorage

(bar).

Two lower anchorages (bars) are provided

for installing a child restraint system in the

rear seat window-side seating positions.

Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side

seating positions may be used for a seat in

the center seating position if a child

restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-

tions permit and specify using anchors as

far apart as those in this vehicle. Each

lower anchorage is located where the seat

cushion meets the seatback.

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(66,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Tether anchorages

s01ag070102

1) For right seat

2) For center seat

3) For left seat

The tether anchorages (upper an-

chorages) are provided at the locations

shown in the above illustration. For details,

refer to “Top Tether Anchorages” �P66.

! To install a child restraint system

using lower and tether an-

chorages

s01ag070103

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that the

seatback is securely locked into

place. Otherwise, in an accident,

serious injury or death could result.

1. Move the seatback back and forth to

confirm that it is securely locked into place.

– Check that the red colored unlock-

ing marker on the lock release knob is

not visible. For details, refer to “Folding

Down the Rear Seatback” �P39.

U.S.-spec. models

Except U.S.-spec. models

2. You will find “

” marks at the bottoms

of the rear seatback. These marks indicate

the positions of the lower anchorages

(bars).

Child Restraint Systems

(67,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Each lower anchorage is located behind

the cover of seatback bottom.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

Peel off the anchorage cover completely

from the selected side of the rear seatback

to expose the anchorages (bars) to be

used for installation of the child restraint

system.

If it is hard to install the child restraint

system because the anchorage cover

returns to the original position, press the

anchorage cover to the seat cushion until it

is flat.

3. If the child restraint system makes

contact with the head restraint of the rear

seating position where the child restraint

system is to be installed, perform the

following procedure.

– Except rear center seat: Remove

the head restraint.

– Rear center seat: Raise the head

restraint to the extended position. If the

child restraint system still makes con-

tact, remove the head restraint.

For details, refer to “Head Restraint

Adjustment” �P37.

CAUTION

Store the removed head restraint in

the trunk. Do not place the head

restraint in the passenger compart-

ment to prevent it from being thrown

around in the passenger compart-

ment in a sudden stop or a sharp

turn.

4. While following the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint system manu-

facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the

lower anchorages located at “

” marks on

the bottom of the rear seatback. When the

hooks are connected, make sure the

adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

– CONTINUED –

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(68,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

5. If your child restraint system is a

flexible attachment type (which uses tether

belts), push the child restraint system into

the seat cushion and pull both left and right

lower tether belts up to secure the child

restraint system by taking up the slack in

the belt.

6. Latch the top tether hook onto the

tether anchorage that is located on the rear

shelf and tighten the top tether firmly. For

additional instructions, refer to “Top Tether

Anchorages” �P66.

7. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back and

forth and right and left to check if it is firmly

secured. Sometimes a child restraint

system can be more firmly secured by

pushing it down into the seat cushion. It

should not be possible to move the child

restraint system more than 1 in (2.5 cm).

8. To remove the child restraint system,

follow the reverse procedures of installa-

tion.

SUBARU recommends that you check

with a certified Child Passenger Safety

Technician to ensure the proper installa-

tion of your child restraint system. For

more information, and to locate the closest

inspection location in the U.S., refer to the

National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-

tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada,

check with Transport Canada.

& Top Tether Anchorages

s01ag09

Your vehicle is equipped with three top

tether anchorages so that a child restraint

system having a top tether can be installed

in the rear seat. When installing a child

restraint system using top tether, proceed

as follows, while observing the instructions

by the child restraint system manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional

stability by offering another connection

between a child restraint system and the

vehicle, we recommend that you use a top

tether whenever one is required or avail-

able.

Child Restraint Systems

(69,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Tether anchorage location

s01ag0901

1) For right seat

2) For center seat

3) For left seat

Three tether anchorages are installed on

the rear shelf behind the rear seat head

restraint. Open the cover flap to use each

anchorage.

! To hook the top tether

s01ag0902

CAUTION

. When attaching the child re-

straint system using the top

tether, remove the head restraint.

. Store the removed head restraint

in the trunk. Do not place the

head restraint in the passenger

compartment to prevent it from

being thrown around in the pas-

senger compartment in a sudden

stop or a sharp turn.

1. Remove the head restraint of the rear

seating position where the child restraint

system is to be installed. For details, refer

to “Head Restraint Adjustment” �P37.

2. Open the cover and attach the top

tether hook to the appropriate upper

anchorage.

3. Tighten the top tether securely.

SUBARU recommends that you check

with a certified Child Passenger Safety

Technician to ensure the proper installa-

tion of your child restraint system. For

more information, and to locate the closest

inspection location in the U.S., refer to the

National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-

tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada,

check with Transport Canada.

Child Restraint Systems

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(70,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1-8. SRS Airbag (Supplemen-

tal Restraint System Airbag)

s01ah

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

name is used because the airbag system

supplements the vehicle’s seatbelts.

This vehicle is equipped with a supple-

mental restraint system which consists of

seven airbags.

The configurations are as follows.

. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal

airbags

. Driver’s and front passenger’s side

airbags

. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-

senger, and window-side rear passen-

gers)

. Knee airbag for driver

These SRS airbags are designed only

to be a supplement to the primary

protection provided by the seatbelt.

The system also controls front seatbelt

pretensioners. For operation instructions

and precautions concerning the seatbelt

pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt Preten-

sioners” �P47.

& General Precautions Regard-

ing SRS Airbag System

s01ah10

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers must

always wear seatbelts when in

the vehicle. The SRS airbag is

designed only to be a supplement

to the primary protection pro-

vided by the seatbelt. It does not

eliminate the need to fasten seat-

belts. In combination with the

seatbelts, it offers the best pro-

tection in case of a serious acci-

dent.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the seatbelt system,

refer to “Seatbelts” �P42.

. The SRS side airbags and SRS

curtain airbags are designed only

to be a supplement to the primary

protection provided by the seat-

belt. They do not eliminate the

need to fasten seatbelts. It is also

important to wear a seatbelt to

help avoid injuries that can result

when an occupant is not seated

in a proper upright position.

WARNING

The SRS airbags deploy with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are not seated in proper

upright position when the SRS air-

bag deploys could suffer serious

injury. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always sit

upright and back in the seat as far

from the steering wheel as practical

while still maintaining full vehicle

control, and the front passenger

should move the seat as far back

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(71,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

as possible and sit upright and well

back in the seat.

WARNING

. Do not sit or lean close to either

front door. The SRS side airbags

are stored in both front seat

seatbacks next to the door, and

they provide protection by de-

ploying rapidly in the event of a

side impact collision. However,

the force of SRS side airbag

deployment can injure an occu-

pant whose body is too close to

an SRS airbag.

. Since your vehicle is equipped

with SRS curtain airbags, do not

sit or lean close to the front or

rear door on either side. Do not

put body parts out of the window.

The SRS curtain airbags on both

sides of the cabin are stored in

the roof side (between the front

pillar and a point behind the rear

quarter glass), and they provide

protection by deploying rapidly

in the event of a side impact,

rollover or an offset frontal colli-

sion. However, the force of its

deployment can injure an occu-

pant whose body is too close to

an SRS airbag.

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the SRS airbag. Because

the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force to

protect in high speed collisions,

the force of an airbag can injure

an occupant whose body is too

close to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear seat-

belts to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag

contacts an occupant not in their

proper position.

Even when properly positioned,

there remains a possibility that

an occupant may suffer minor

injury, such as abrasions and

bruises to the face or arms,

because of the SRS airbag de-

ployment force.

WARNING

. Keep arms away from either front

door or its internal trim. They

could be injured in the event of

SRS side airbag deployment.

. Do not place any objects over or

near the SRS airbag cover or

between you and the SRS airbag.

If the SRS airbag deploys, these

objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle,

causing injury.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(72,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke will be released.

This smoke could cause breath-

ing problems for people with a

history of asthma or other breath-

ing trouble. If you or your pas-

sengers have breathing pro-

blems after SRS airbag deploys,

get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releases

hot gas. Occupants could get

burned if they come into direct

contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to inform the buyer that the vehicle

is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,

notify the buyer of the applicable sec-

tion in this Owner’s Manual.

. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel

supply will be cut off to reduce the risk

of fire caused by leaking fuel. For

details about restarting of the engine,

refer to “If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an

Accident” �P406.

& General Precautions Regard-

ing SRS Airbag System for

Accessories and Any Objects

s01ah13

WARNING

. Do not put any objects (including

straps or cord) over the steering

wheel pad, column cover, or

dashboard.

– These objects could be en-

tangled with the steering

wheel, preventing the SRS

frontal airbag, etc. from oper-

ating properly.

– If the SRS frontal airbag de-

ploys, these objects could be

propelled inside the vehicle,

causing injury.

. Do not put any objects under the

driver’s side of the instrument

panel. If the SRS knee airbag

deploys, those objects could in-

terfere with its proper operation

and could be propelled inside the

vehicle, causing injury.

. The key must not be attached to

heavy, sharp or hard acces-

sories, or another key. If the SRS

knee airbag deploys, those ob-

jects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle and

cause injury.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(73,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the

windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-

ror over the inside rear view mirror. If

the SRS airbag deploys, those ob-

jects could become projectiles that

could seriously injure vehicle occu-

pants.

WARNING

. Do not attach accessories to the

door trim or near either SRS side

airbags and do not place objects

near the SRS side airbags. In the

event of SRS side airbag deploy-

ment, they could be propelled

dangerously toward the vehicle’s

occupants and cause injuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro-

phone or any other accessory to

a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear

pillar, the windshield, a side win-

dow, an assist grip, or any other

cabin surface that would be near

a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A

hands-free microphone or other

accessory in such a location

could be propelled through the

cabin with great force by the

curtain airbag, or it could prevent

correct deployment of the curtain

airbag. In either case, the result

could be serious injuries.

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other

hard or pointed objects on the coat

hook. If such items were hanging on

the coat hooks during deployment

of the SRS curtain airbags, they

could cause serious injuries by

coming off the coat hooks and being

thrown through the cabin or by

preventing deployment of the cur-

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(74,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

tain airbags.

Before hanging clothing on the coat

hooks, make sure there are no sharp

objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-

ing directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

WARNING

. Do not put any kind of clothes or

other objects over the driver’s

seat and front passenger’s seat-

back and do not attach labels or

stickers to the driver’s seat and

front passenger’s seat surface on

or near the SRS side airbag. They

could prevent proper deployment

of the SRS side airbag, reducing

protection available to the dri-

ver’s seat and front passenger’s

seat’s occupant.

. Do not install a seat cover unless

it is a genuine SUBARU seat

cover exclusively designed for

use with the SRS airbag. Even

when using a genuine SUBARU

seat cover, the SRS side airbag

system may not function nor-

mally if the seat cover is not

installed correctly.

& General Precautions regard-

ing SRS Airbag System and

Children

s01ah14

WARNING

Seat children in the rear seat prop-

erly restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if they

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults, their

risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater. For that reason, we

strongly recommend that ALL chil-

dren (including those in child re-

straint systems) sit in the REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in a

child restraint device or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint

systems (including forward facing

child restraint system) in the REAR

seats at all times.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the child restraint sys-

tem, refer to “Child Restraint Sys-

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(75,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

tems” �P51.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up or

kneel on the front passenger’s seat.

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or in

your arms. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable force and can

injure or even kill the child.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(76,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

WARNING

. Never allow a child to do the

following.

– Kneel on any passenger’s seat

facing the side window.

– Wrap his/her arms around the

front seat seatback.

– Put his/her head, arms or

other parts of the body out of

the window.

In the event of an accident, the

force of SRS side airbag and/or

SRS curtain airbag deployment

could injure the child seriously

because his/her head, arms or

other parts of the body are too

close to the SRS side airbag and/

or SRS curtain airbag.

. Since your vehicle is also

equipped with a front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children

should be placed in the rear seat

anyway and should be properly

restrained at all times.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(77,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Components

s01ah11

1) SRS frontal airbag

2) SRS side airbag

3) SRS curtain airbag

4) SRS knee airbag

The SRS airbags are stowed in the

following locations.

Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center

portion of the steering wheel

An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located on the

pad of the airbag.

Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:

near the top of the dashboard

An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located on the

right corner of the dashboard.

SRS side airbag: in the door side of each

front seat seatback which bears an “SRS

AIRBAG” label

SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side

(between the front pillar and a point over

the rear seat)

“SRS AIRBAG” marks are located at the

top of each center pillar.

SRS knee airbag: under the steering

column

An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the

door of the airbag.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(78,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) Airbag control module (including impact

sensor and rollover sensor)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

4) Front impact sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front impact sensor (right-hand side)

6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)

7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

8) Side impact sensor (center pillar left-

hand side)

9) Side impact sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

10) Airbag wiring

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force

limiter (front passenger’s side)

13) Side impact sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)

14) Side impact sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)

15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)

16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)

17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s

side)

18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)

19) Front passenger’s occupant detection

sensor

20) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator

21) SRS airbag system warning light

22) Side impact sensor (under the rear center

seat)

23) Side impact sensor (front door left-hand

side)

24) Side impact sensor (front door right-hand

side)

25) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)

26) Rear seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-

ger’s side)

27) Rear seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(79,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& SUBARU Advanced Frontal

Airbag System, SRS Side

Airbag and SRS Curtain Air-

bag

s01ah02

This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system that com-

plies with the new advanced frontal airbag

requirements in the amended Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)

No. 208.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system automatically determines the de-

ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag at the time of deployment as well as

whether or not to activate the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if

activated, the deployment force of the SRS

frontal airbag at the time of deployment.

This vehicle has warning labels on the

driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors

beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-

tached to the glove box lid beginning with

the phrase “Even with Advanced Air

Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read

the instructions on the warning labels and

tag.

Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system is a

supplemental restraint system and must

be used in combination with a seatbelt. All

occupants should wear a seatbelt or be

seated in an appropriate child restraint

system.

This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

SRS curtain airbag system that complies

with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.

For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer

to “Components” �P75.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,

the following components deploy.

. SRS frontal airbag for driver

. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger

. SRS curtain airbag*

. SRS side airbag*

. SRS knee airbag for driver

*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.

These components supplement the seat-

belts by reducing the impact to the

occupant’s head, chest and knees.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS side airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the door panel

and supplements the seatbelt by reducing

the impact to the occupant’s chest and

waist.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the side win-

dow and supplements the seatbelt by

reducing the impact to the occupant’s

head.

NOTE

Only driver’s SRS frontal airbag and

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

are controlled by the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system.

! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

s01ah0201

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual

stage inflator. The inflator operates in

different ways depending on the severity

of impact.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(80,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

SRS airbag system warning light

Have the system inspected by your

SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS

airbag system warning light illuminates.

! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag

s01ah0202

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator

operates in different ways depending on

the severity of impact.

1) Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection sensors are in-

stalled between the seat and seat rails,

and monitor the physique and posture of

the front passenger. Using this informa-

tion, the occupant detection system deter-

mines whether the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag should be deployed or not.

The occupant detection system may not

inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal. In this

case, although the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag does not operate, the front

passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-

ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-

sioner. For details about the seatbelt

pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt Preten-

sioners” �P47.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system from functioning correctly

or cause the system to fail.

. Do not apply any strong impact to

the front passenger’s seat such

as by kicking.

. Do not let rear passengers rest

their feet between the front seat-

back and seat cushion.

. Do not spill liquid on the front

passenger’s seat. If liquid is

spilled, wipe it off immediately.

. Do not remove or disassemble

the front passenger’s seat.

. Do not install any accessory

(such as an audio amplifier) other

than a genuine SUBARU acces-

sory under the front passenger’s

seat.

. Do not place anything (shoes,

umbrella, etc.) under the front

passenger’s seat.

. Do not place any objects (books,

etc.) around the front passen-

ger’s seat.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(81,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Do not use the front passenger’s

seat with the head restraint re-

moved.

. Do not leave any articles on the

front passenger’s seat or the

seatbelt tongue and buckle en-

gaged when you leave your vehi-

cle.

. Do not put sharp object(s) on the

seat or pierce the seat uphols-

tery.

. Do not place a magnet near the

seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt

retractor.

. Do not use front seats with their

backward-forward position and

seatback not being locked into

place securely. If any of them are

not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure,

refer to “Manual Seat” �P33

(models equipped with manual

seats only).

SRS airbag system warning light

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front

passenger’s occupant detection system

have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-

ing light will illuminate. Have the system

inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme-

diately if the SRS airbag system warning

light illuminates.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this

may affect the proper function of the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.

Have your vehicle inspected at your

SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front

passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle

to your SUBARU dealer.

! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicators

s01ah0203

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

Refer to “Front Passenger’s Frontal Airbag

ON and OFF Indicators” �P156.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(82,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Occupant detection system

s01ah0209

1) Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection sensors are in-

stalled between the seat and seat rails,

and monitor the physique and posture of

the front passenger. Using this informa-

tion, the occupant detection system deter-

mines whether the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag should be deployed or not.

WARNING

Do not kick the front passenger seat

or subject it to severe impact. Other-

wise, the SRS airbag system warn-

ing light may illuminate to indicate a

malfunction of the front passenger

occupant detection system. In this

case, contact your SUBARU dealer

immediately.

CAUTION

Electrical devices, such as cell

phones, laptops, portable music

players, or electronic games, espe-

cially when connected to the acces-

sory power outlet and placed on the

front passenger’s seat or used by

the person sitting in the front pas-

senger’s seat, may affect the opera-

tion of the occupant detection sys-

tem. If either of the following situa-

tions occurs when using an electro-

nic device in the vehicle, at first try

to relocate that device to avoid it

creating any interference.

. The SRS airbag system warning

light illuminates.

. The front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON and OFF indicators oper-

ate erratically.

If the device continues to cause

interference, the use of that device

in the vehicle should be discontin-

ued.

SRS airbag system warning light

If the front passenger’s seat cushion is

wet, this may adversely affect the ability of

the system to determine deployment.

Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat

dry naturally and then check the SRS

airbag system warning light.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(83,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators do not work properly

even when the front passenger’s seat is

dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front

passenger’s seat and have the occupant

detection system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

Also, if luggage or electronic devices are

placed on the front passenger’s seat, this

may adversely affect the ability of the

system to determine deployment. This

may prevent the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON and OFF indicators from work-

ing properly. Check that the indicators

work properly.

When the OFF indicator turns off and the

ON indicator illuminates, the front passen-

ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a

collision. Remove luggage and electronic

devices from the front passenger’s seat.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not

activated

s01ah0204

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will not be activated when any of the

following conditions are met regarding

the front passenger’s seat:

. The seat is empty.

. The seat is equipped with an appro-

priate child restraint system and an infant

or a child is restrained in it. (See WARN-

ING that follows.)

. The front passenger’s occupant detec-

tion system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE

FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-

TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be

sure to install it in the REAR seat in a

correct manner. Also, it is strongly

recommended that any forward fa-

cing child seat or booster seat be

installed in the REAR seat, and that

even children who have outgrown a

child restraint system be also seated

in the REAR seat. This is because

children sitting in the front passen-

ger’s seat may be killed or severely

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(84,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

injured should the front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR

seats are the safest place for chil-

dren.

CAUTION

When the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an infant in an appro-

priate child restraint system, ob-

serve the following precautions.

Failure to do so may increase the

load on the front passenger’s seat,

activating the front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag even though that

seat is occupied by an infant.

. Do not place any article on the

seat other than the infant in the

child restraint system.

. Do not place more than one infant

in the child restraint system.

. Do not install any accessory such

as a table or TV onto the seat-

back.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occu-

pant to place his/her hands or

legs on the front passenger’s

seatback, or allow him/her to pull

the seatback.

! If the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator illuminates

and the OFF indicator turns off

even when an infant or a small

child is in a child restraint sys-

tem (including booster seat)

s01ah020401

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Remove the child restraint system from

the seat.

3. By referring to the child restraint

manufacturer’s recommendations as well

as the child restraint system installation

procedures in “Child Restraint Systems”

�P51, correctly install the child restraint

system.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and make sure that the front

passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator

turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.

If still the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off, take the

following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the child restraint system

and the child occupant.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth. (Models

equipped with manual seats only)

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off after

taking relevant corrective actions de-

scribed above, relocate the child restraint

system to the rear seat and immediately

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(85,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a child

restraint system or a small adult is

seated in the front passenger’s seat,

the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system may or may not activate the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

depending on the occupant’s seating

posture. Children should always wear a

seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-

spective of whether the airbag is deac-

tivated or activated. If the front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

(the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off), take

the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on

the seat other than the occupant.

If the ON indicator still remains illumi-

nated while the OFF indicator turns off

despite the fact that the actions noted

above have been taken, seat the child/

small adult in the rear seat and imme-

diately contact your SUBARU dealer for

an inspection. Even if the system has

passed the dealer inspection, it is

recommended that on subsequent trips

the child/small adult always take the

rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child

restraint system should always wear the

seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag

is deactivated or activated.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

s01ah0205

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will be activated for deployment upon

impact when any of the following condi-

tions are met regarding the front passen-

ger’s seat.

. When the seat is occupied by an adult.

. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)

are placed on the seat.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by an adult, observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so may lessen

the load on the front passenger’s seat,

deactivating the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat

is occupied by an adult. This may result in

personal injury.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

lift the front passenger’s seat cushion

using his/her feet.

. Do not place any article under the front

passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article

from behind and under the seat. This may

lift the seat cushion.

. Do not squeeze any article between the

front passenger’s seat and side trim/pillar,

door or center console box. This may lift

the seat cushion.

! If the passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator illuminates and the

ON indicator turns off even when

the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an adult

s01ah020501

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

This can be caused by the adult incorrectly

sitting in the front passenger’s seat.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Ask the front passenger to set the

seatback to the upright position, sit up

straight in the center of the seat cushion,

correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(86,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to

the rearmost position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

If the OFF indicator remains illuminated

while the ON indicator remains off, take the

following actions.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Make sure that the front passenger

does not use a blanket, extra seat cushion,

seat cover, extra seat heater or massager,

etc.

3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,

the front passenger should remove any

unnecessary items before sitting in the

front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a

rear seat.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and wait 6 seconds to allow the

system to complete self-checking. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator

should illuminate while the OFF indicator

remains off.

If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-

nated while the ON indicator remains off,

ask the occupant to move to the rear seat

and immediately contact your SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(87,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Operation

s01ah0207

A) Driver’s side

B) Passenger’s side

1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a

collision occurs.

2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to

deflate immediately so that the driver’s

vision is not obstructed.

The SRS airbags can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system is designed to determine the

activation or deactivation condition of the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-

pending on the characteristic of item(s) or

person on the front passenger’s seat

monitored by the front passenger’s occu-

pant detection sensors. For this reason,

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag may

deploy in the event of a collision, but this

does not mean failure of the system.

If the following sensors detect a predeter-

mined amount of force during a frontal

collision, the control module sends signals

to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s

module or both driver’s and front passen-

ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to

inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(88,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. The front impact sensors

. The impact sensors in the airbag

control module

On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag

also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags use dual stage inflators.

The two inflators of each airbag are

triggered either sequentially or simulta-

neously, depending on the severity of

impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS

frontal airbag and depending on the

severity of impact and the characteristic

of item(s) or person on the seat in the case

of the front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag.

! After deployment

s01ah0210

After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-

diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s

vision is not obstructed and the driver’s

ability to maintain control of the vehicle is

not impaired. The time required from

detecting impact to the deflation of the

SRS airbag after deployment is shorter

than the blink of an eye.

Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys and the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,

the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt

pretensioners operate at the same time.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,

fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will be released. These

occurrences are a normal result of the

deployment. This smoke does not indicate

a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system

components around the steering

wheel and dashboard with bare

hands right after deployment. Doing

so can cause burns because the

components can be very hot as a

result of deployment.

! Example of the type of accident

s01ah0211

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-

signed as follows.

. To deploy in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe frontal

collision

. To function on a one-time-only basis

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not

designed as follows.

. To deploy in most lesser frontal im-

pacts*

. To deploy in most side or rear impacts

or in most rollover accidents*

*1: Because the necessary protection can be

achieved by the seatbelt alone.

*2: Because deployment of only the driver’s

SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags

would not protect the occupant in those

situations.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the

level of force experienced in the passen-

ger compartment during a collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on the

visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(89,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Example of accident in which the

driver’s/driver’s and front pas-

senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)

will most likely deploy

s01ah021101

A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19

mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-

vated when the vehicle is exposed to a

frontal impact similar in fashion and

magnitude to the collision described

above.

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which it is possible that

the driver’s/driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy

s01ah021102

Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags may be activated when the vehicle

sustains a hard impact in the undercar-

riage area from the road surface (such as

when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,

is severely impacted or knocked hard

against an obstacle on the road such as

a curb).

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(90,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) is unlikely to occur

S01AH021103

1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a

telephone pole or sign pole.

2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a

truck.

3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset

frontal impact.

4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal

collision.

5) The vehicle strikes an object that can

move or deform, such as a parked

vehicle.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require deployment

of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of

accidents like those illustrated, the dri-

ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-

ing on the level of accident forces involved.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(91,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which the driver’s/dri-

ver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) are not de-

signed to deploy in most cases

s01ah021104

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags are not designed to deploy

in most of the following cases.

. If the vehicle is struck from the side or

from behind

. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed

frontal collision

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is

impacted more than once, the driver’s

and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first

impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision,

first with another vehicle, then against a

concrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are

activated on the first impact, it/they will

not be activated on the second impact.

& SRS Side Airbag and SRS

Curtain Airbag

s01ah03

! SRS side airbag

s01ah0302

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which

bears an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS side airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the door panel

and supplements the seatbelt by reducing

the impact on the occupant’s chest and

waist. The SRS side airbag operates only

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(92,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

for front seat occupants.

! SRS curtain airbag

s01ah0303

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

SRS curtain airbag system that complies

with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the

cabin is stored in the roof side (between

the front pillar and a point over the rear

seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located

at the top of each center pillar.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the side win-

dow and supplements the seatbelt by

reducing the impact on the occupant’s

head.

In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both

sides of the vehicle deploy between the

occupant and the side window and supple-

ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact to

the occupant’s head.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain

airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy

between the occupant and the side win-

dow and supplement the seatbelt by

reducing the impact to the occupant’s

head and chest.

! Operation

s01ah0301

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag can function only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The following airbags deploy indepen-

dently of each other since each has its

own impact sensor.

. Driver’s SRS side airbag

. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag

. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)

. SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)

Therefore, they may not both deploy in the

same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-

dently of the driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel

and instrument panel.

For the locations of the sensors and

control modules, refer to “Components”

�P75.

! After deployment

s01ah0304

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag

immediately starts to deflate. The time

required from detection of an impact to

deflation of an SRS side airbag after

deployment is shorter than the blink of an

eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated

for a while following deployment then

slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag deploy even when no one occupies

the seat on the side on which an impact is

applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud

inflation noise will be heard and some

smoke will be released. These occur-

rences are a normal result of the deploy-

ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire

in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag

system components around the

front seat seatback with bare hands

right after deployment. Doing so can

cause burns because the compo-

nents can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any

part of the SRS curtain airbag sys-

tem (from the front pillar to the part

of the roof side over the rear seat).

Doing so can cause burns because

the components can be very hot as a

result of deployment.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(93,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Example of the type of accident

s01ah0305

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are designed as follows:

. To deploy in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe side impact

collision

. To function on a one-time-only basis

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are not designed to deploy in the

following cases:

. In most lesser side impacts

. In most frontal or most rear impacts

(because the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deployment would not pro-

tect the occupant in those situations)

The SRS curtain airbags are also de-

signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an

extremely inclined state such as during a

rollover. They are not designed to deploy in

most lesser inclined state.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment depend on the level of force

experienced in the passenger compart-

ment during a side impact collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on the

visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of the type of accident in

which the SRS side airbag will

most likely deploy

s01ah030501

1) A severe side impact near the front seat.

2) An offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(94,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy

S01AH030502

1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side

impact near the front seat or the rear seat.

2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or

the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone

laterally.

4) An offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(95,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy

S01AH030503

1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard

surface

2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

3) Landing hard or vehicle falling

It is possible that the SRS side and curtain

airbags will deploy if a serious impact

occurs to the underside of your vehicle.

Some examples are shown in the illustra-

tion.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(96,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy

S01AH030504

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-

on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS side

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS side

airbag may not deploy depending on the

level of accident forces involved.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(97,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy

S01AH030505

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-

on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS curtain

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS

curtain airbag may not deploy depending

on the level of accident forces involved.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(98,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which the SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag

are not designed to deploy in

most cases

s01ah030506

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision

with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

3) The vehicle pitches end over end.

In the event of accidents like those

illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are not designed to deploy

in most cases.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

A) SRS curtain airbag

B) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy

only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double side

impact collision, first with one vehicle and

immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are activated on

the first impact, they will not be activated

on the second.

& SRS Airbag System Monitors

s01ah04

SRS airbag system warning light

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system

(including seatbelt pretensioners) with the

ignition switch in the “ON” position. The

SRS airbag system warning light will show

normal system operation by illuminating

for approximately 6 seconds when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(99,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

. Front impact sensor

– Right-hand side

– Left-hand side

. Airbag control module (including im-

pact sensor and rollover sensor)

. Frontal airbag module

– Driver’s side

– Front passenger’s side

. Knee airbag module

– Driver’s side

. Side impact sensor

– Center pillar left-hand side

– Center pillar right-hand side

– Forward of rear wheel house left-

hand side

– Forward of rear wheel house right-

hand side

– Front door left-hand side

– Front door right-hand side

– Under the rear center seat

. Side airbag module

– Driver’s side

– Front passenger’s side

. Curtain airbag module

– Right-hand side

– Left-hand side

. Front seatbelt pretensioner and adap-

tive force limiter

– Front passenger’s side

. Front seatbelt pretensioner

– Driver’s side

. Lap belt pretensioner

– Front passenger’s side

. Seatbelt buckle switch

– Front passenger’s side

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

sensors

. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

. All related wiring

. Rear seatbelt pretensioner

– Driver’s side

– Passenger’s side

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, immedi-

ately stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-

less a technician checks and repairs

the system as needed, the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag

will not operate properly in the event

of a collision, which may result in

injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

& SRS Airbag System Servicing

s01ah05

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod-

ule or scrapping the entire vehi-

cle damaged by a collision, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user-

serviceable parts. Do not use

electrical test equipment on any

circuit related to the SRS airbag

system. For required servicing of

the SRS airbag, consult your

nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-

ing with or disconnecting the

system’s wiring could result in

accidental inflation of the SRS

airbag or could make the system

inoperative, which may result in

serious injury.

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(100,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areas

indicated in the following list, have

the work performed by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-

bag control module, impact sensors

and airbag modules are stored in

these areas.

. Under the center of the instru-

ment panel

. On both the right and left sides at

the front of the vehicle

. Steering wheel and column and

nearby areas

. Bottom of the steering column

and nearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on front

passenger’s side and nearby

areas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. Inside each front door

. In each roof side (from the front

pillar to a point over the rear seat)

. Between the rear seat cushion

and rear wheel house on each

side

. Under the rear center seat

In the event that the SRS airbag is

deployed, replacement of the system

should be performed only by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-

nents of the SRS airbag system are

replaced, use only genuine SUBARU

parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The front part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which only

the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags did not deploy.

. The pad of the steering wheel, the

cover over the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag, or either roof side (from

the front pillar to a point over the rear

seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

. The center pillar, front door, rear

wheel house or rear sub frame, or an

area near these parts, was involved in

an accident in which the SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not

deploy.

. The fabric or leather of either front

seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise

damaged.

. The rear part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which no

SRS airbag was deployed.

& Precautions against Vehicle

Modification

s01ah06

WARNING

. To avoid accidental activation of

the system or rendering the sys-

tem inoperative, which may re-

sult in serious injury, no modifi-

cations should be made to any

components or wiring of the SRS

airbag system.

This includes following modifica-

tions.

– Installation of custom steering

wheels

– Attachment of additional trim

materials to the dashboard

– Installation of custom seats

– Replacement of seat fabric or

leather

– Installation of additional fabric

or leather on the front seat

– Attachment of a hands-free

microphone or any other ac-

cessory to a front pillar, a

center pillar, a rear pillar, the

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

(101,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

windshield, a side window, an

assist grip, or any other cabin

surface that would be near a

deploying SRS curtain airbag.

– Installation of additional elec-

trical/electronic equipment

such as a mobile two-way

radio on or near the SRS air-

bag system components and/

or wiring is not advisable. This

could interfere with proper

operation of the SRS airbag

system.

– Modifications on or inside the

front door panels for the pur-

pose of a speaker replace-

ment or sound insulation

. The impact sensors, which detect

the pressure of an impact, are

located in the doors. Do not

modify any components of the

doors or door trims, such as the

addition of door speakers for

example. Any modifications to

the doors will create a risk of the

airbag system becoming inop-

erative or unintended airbag de-

ployment.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the SRS airbag system.

. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er’s Manual.

. Attachment of any equipment

(side steps or side sill protectors,

etc.) other than genuine SUBARU

accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you

want to install any accessory parts on your

vehicle.

& How to Contact the Vehicle

Manufacturer concerning

Modifications for Persons

with Disabilities That May

Affect the Advanced Airbag

System

s01ah15

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,

front side frame, radiator panel, instrument

panel, combination meter, steering wheel,

steering column, tire, suspension or floor

panel can affect the operation of the

SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you

have any questions, you may contact the

following SUBARU distributors.

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District

of Columbia>

Subaru of America, Inc.

Customer Advocacy Department

One Subaru Drive

P.O. Box 9103

Camden, NJ 08101-9877

1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Subaru Hawaii

2850-A Pukoloa St.,

Honolulu, HI 96819

877-215-0338

– CONTINUED –

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

(102,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

<Guam>

Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-

biles

491 East Marine Corps Drive,

Dededo, Guam 96929

671-633-2698

Trebol Motors

296 Marginal JF Kennedy, San Juan,

Puerto Rico

787-793-2828

Subaru Canada, Inc.

Consumer Support Department

560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario

L5R 4J7

1-800-894-4212

There are currently no SUBARU distribu-

tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are

in such an area, please contact the

SUBARU distributor or dealer from which

you bought your vehicle.

SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

100

(103,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s02

2-1. Keys ................................................................. 102

Key Number Plate...............................................102

2-2. Keyless Access with Push-Button Start

System (If Equipped) .................................... 102

Safety Precautions.............................................. 103

Locking and Unlocking with “Keyless Access”

Entry Function.................................................. 106

Unlock Using PIN Code Access ..........................109

Power Saving Function ....................................... 111

Power Saving Function of Access Key Fob ......... 112

Disabling Keyless Access Function .................... 112

Selecting Audible Signal Operation ..................... 115

Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation....... 115

Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator .............. 115

When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate

Properly ........................................................... 115

Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob ................. 115

Replacing Access Key Fob ................................. 115

Certification for Keyless Access with

Push-Button Start System................................. 115

2-3. Immobilizer...................................................... 117

Security Indicator Light....................................... 117

Key Replacement................................................ 117

Certification for Immobilizer System.................... 118

2-4. Remote Keyless Entry System ...................... 119

Locking the Doors .............................................. 120

Unlocking the Doors ...........................................120

Opening the Trunk Lid ........................................ 121

Setting Audible Signal Operation ........................121

Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation.......121

Vehicle Finder Function ...................................... 121

Sounding a Panic Alarm..................................... 122

Replacing the Battery ......................................... 122

Replacing Lost Transmitters............................... 122

Certification for Remote Keyless Entry System... 122

2-5. Door Locks ......................................................123

Locking and Unlocking from the Outside............ 123

Locking and Unlocking from the Inside .............. 124

Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking .................... 125

Key Lock-In Prevention Function........................ 126

Battery Drainage Prevention Function ................ 127

2-6. Alarm System ..................................................127

Alarm System Operation .................................... 128

Arming the System ............................................ 128

Disarming the System ........................................ 129

Alarm System Setting......................................... 129

If You Have Accidentally Triggered the Alarm

System ............................................................ 130

Valet Mode ......................................................... 130

2-7. Child Safety Locks ..........................................130

2-8. Windows...........................................................131

Power Window Operation ................................... 131

Initialization of Power Window (Windows with

One-Touch Auto Up and Down Function) .......... 133

2-9. Trunk Lid ..........................................................134

To Open and Close the Trunk Lid from

Outside ............................................................ 134

To Open the Trunk Lid from Inside ..................... 135

Internal Trunk Lid Release Handle ...................... 135

2-10. Moonroof (If Equipped) .................................137

Moonroof Switches ............................................ 138

Sunshade........................................................... 139

Keys and Doors

(104,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

2-1. Keys

s02aa

NOTE

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, refer to

“Keyless Access with Push-Button

Start System” �P102.

1) Master keys

2) Key number plate

The master key fit all locks on your vehicle.

. Ignition switch

. Driver’s door

. Glove box

NOTE

Locking/unlocking using the remote

keyless entry system can also be con-

trolled with the buttons on the key. For

detailed information, refer to “Remote

Keyless Entry System” �P119.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it bangs

against your knees while you are

driving, it could turn the ignition

switch from the “ON” position to

the “ACC” or “LOCK” position,

thereby stopping the engine.

& Key Number Plate

s02aa01

The key number is stamped on the key

number plate attached to the key set. Write

down the key number and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle. This

number is needed to make a replacement

key if you lose your key or lock it inside the

vehicle. Refer to “Key Replacement”

�P117.

2-2. Keyless Access with

Push-Button Start System

(If Equipped)

s02ap

The following access key fobs are pro-

vided with the vehicle.

1) Access key fobs

2) Key number plate

The keyless access with push-button start

system allows you to perform the following

functions when you are carrying the

access key fob.

. Locking and unlocking all the doors

(including the fuel filler lid)

. Opening the trunk

. Starting and stopping the engine. For

detailed information, refer to “Starting and

Stopping Engine (Models with Push-But-

Keys

102

(105,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

ton Start System)” �P292.

. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem. For detailed information, refer to

“Alarm System” �P127.

NOTE

. Locking and unlocking by the re-

mote keyless entry system can also be

controlled with the buttons on the

access key fob. For detailed informa-

tion, refer to “Remote Keyless Entry

System” �P119.

. Carefully store the key number plate

supplied with the access key fob. It is

necessary for vehicle repair and addi-

tional registration of access key fobs.

For details, refer to “Key Replacement”

�P117.

An emergency key is attached to each

access key fob.

1) Release button

2) Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the

access key fob, take out the emergency

key.

The emergency key is used for the follow-

ing operations.

. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door

. Locking and unlocking the glove box

NOTE

The glove box can be kept locked when

you leave your vehicle and the access

key fob (with the emergency key re-

moved) at a parking facility.

& Safety Precautions

s02ap11

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker

or an implanted defibrillator, stay at

least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the

transmitting antennas installed on

the vehicle.

The radio waves from the transmit-

ting antennas on the vehicle could

adversely affect the operation of

implanted pacemakers and im-

planted defibrillators.

If you wear electronic medical equip-

ment other than an implanted pace-

maker or an implanted defibrillator,

before using the keyless access

with push-button start system, refer

to “Radio waves used for the key-

less access with push-button start

system” mentioned later, and con-

tact the electronic medical equip-

ment manufacturer for more infor-

mation. The radio waves from the

transmitting antennas on the vehicle

could adversely affect the operation

of the electronic medical equipment.

“Radio waves used for the keyless

access with push-button start sys-

tem”

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

103

Keys and Doors

(106,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. The keyless access with push-

button start system uses radio

waves of the following fre-

quency* in addition to the radio

waves used for the remote key-

less entry system. The radio

waves are periodically output

from the antennas installed on

the vehicle as shown in the

following illustrations.

*: Radio frequency: 134 kHz

1) Antennas

CAUTION

. Never leave or store the access

key fob inside the vehicle or

within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the

vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The

access key fob may be locked

inside the vehicle, or the battery

may discharge rapidly. Note that

the push-button ignition switch

may not turn on in some cases

depending on the location of the

access key fob.

. The access key fob contains

electronic components. Observe

the following precautions to pre-

vent malfunctions.

– It is recommended to have the

access key fob battery re-

placed at an authorized

SUBARU dealer to avoid the

risk of damage.

– Do not get the access key fob

wet. If the access key fob gets

wet, wipe it off immediately

and let it dry completely.

– Do not apply strong impacts to

the access key fob.

– Never leave the access key

fob in direct sunlight or any-

where that may become hot,

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

104

(107,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

such as on the dashboard. It

may damage the battery or

cause circuit malfunctions.

– Do not wash the access key

fob in an ultrasonic washer.

– Do not leave the access key

fob in humid or dusty loca-

tions. Doing so may cause

malfunctions.

– Keep the access key fob away

from magnetic sources.

– Do not leave the access key

fob near a personal computer

or home electrical appliance.

– Do not leave the access key

fob near a battery charger or

any electrical accessories.

– Do not apply metallic window

tint or attach metallic objects

to the windows.

– Do not fit non genuine acces-

sories or parts.

. If the access key fob is dropped,

the integrated emergency key in-

side may become loose. Be care-

ful not to lose the emergency key.

. When traveling in an airplane, do

not press the button of the ac-

cess key fob. If any button of the

access key fob is pressed, radio

waves are emitted and may affect

the operation of the airplane. In a

bag, take measures to prevent

the buttons from being pressed

accidentally.

NOTE

. The operational/non-operational

setting for the keyless access function

can be changed. For the setting proce-

dure, refer to “Disabling Keyless Ac-

cess Function” �P112.

. For detailed information about the

operation method for the push-button

ignition switch while the keyless ac-

cess function is switched to the non-

operational mode, refer to “Access Key

Fob – If Access Key Fob Does Not

Operate Properly” �P402.

. The keyless access with push-but-

ton start system uses weak radio

waves. The status of the access key

fob and environmental conditions may

interfere with the communication be-

tween the access key fob and the

vehicle under the following conditions,

and it may not be possible to lock or

unlock the doors or start the engine.

– When operating near a facility

where strong radio waves are trans-

mitted, such as a broadcast station

and power transmission lines.

– When products that transmit

radio waves are used, such as an

access key fob or a remote trans-

mitter key of another vehicle.

– When carrying the access key fob

of your vehicle together with the

access key fob or the remote trans-

mitter of another vehicle.

– When the access key fob is

placed near wireless communica-

tion equipment such as a cell

phone.

– When the access key fob is

placed near a metallic object.

– When metallic accessories are

attached to the access key fob.

– When carrying the access key fob

with an electronic appliance such as

a laptop computer.

– When the battery of the access

key fob is discharged.

. The access key fob is always com-

municating with the vehicle and is

continuously using the battery.

Although the life of the battery varies

depending on the operating conditions,

it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the

battery becomes fully discharged, re-

place it with a new one.

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

105

Keys and Doors

(108,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. If an access key fob is lost, it is

recommended that all of the remaining

access key fobs be reregistered. For

reregistration of an access key fob,

contact a SUBARU dealer.

. For a spare access key fob, contact a

SUBARU dealer.

. Up to 7 access key fobs can be

registered for one vehicle.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the storage spaces inside the vehicle,

such as the door pocket, dashboard or

inside the trunk. Vibrations may da-

mage the key fob or turn on the switch,

possibly resulting in a lockout.

. After the vehicle battery is dis-

charged or replaced, initialization of

the steering lock system may be re-

quired to start the engine. In this case,

perform the following procedure to

initialize the steering lock.

(1) Turn the push-button ignition

switch to the “OFF” position. For

details, refer to “Switching Power

Status” �P147.

(2) Open and close the driver’s

door.

(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

When the steering is locked, the initi-

alization is completed.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the following places.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– On the rear shelf

– Inside the trunk

If you do, the following situations

may occur.

– The access key fob is mistakenly

locked inside the vehicle.

– A false warning issues although

no malfunction actually occurs.

– No warning issues even when a

malfunction occurs.

& Locking and Unlocking with

“Keyless Access” Entry

Function

s02ap01

When the access key fob is carried within

the operating range, all the doors (includ-

ing the fuel filler lid) can be locked/

unlocked just by touching the door handle.

NOTE

The vehicle can also be locked/un-

locked with the remote keyless entry

system. For details, refer to “Remote

Keyless Entry System” �P119.

! Operating ranges

s02ap0101

1) Antennas

2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32

in (40 to 80 cm))

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

106

(109,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) LED indicator

When the access key fob is within either of

the operating ranges of the front doors, the

LED indicator on the access key fob

flashes. When the keyless access func-

tions are disabled, the LED indicator does

not flash unless a button on the access key

fob is pressed.

NOTE

. If the access key fob is placed too

close to the vehicle body, the keyless

access functions may not operate

properly. If it does not operate properly,

repeat the operation from farther away.

. If the access key fob is placed near

the ground or in an elevated location

from the ground, even if it is in the

indicated operating range, the keyless

access function may not operate prop-

erly.

. When the access key fob is within

the operating range, it is possible for

anyone, even someone who is not

carrying the access key fob, to operate

the keyless access function. Note that

the keyless access function can be

operated only by the door handle, door

lock sensor or rear lock button in the

operating range in which the access

key fob is detected.

. It is not possible to lock the doors

and fuel filler lid using the keyless

access function when the access key

fob is inside the vehicle. However,

depending on the status of the access

key fob and the environmental condi-

tions, the access key fob may be locked

inside the vehicle. Before locking the

vehicle, make sure that you have the

access key fob.

. When the battery of the access key

fob is discharged, or when operating it

in a location with strong radio waves or

noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power

plant, broadcast station or an area

where wireless equipment is used), or

while talking on a cell phone, the

operating ranges may be reduced, or

the keyless access function may not

operate.

In such a case, perform the procedure

described in “Locking and Unlocking”

�P403.

. The doors may lock or unlock when

the car is being washed or exposed to a

significant amount of water that

touches the door handle while the key

fob is still in the operating range.

! How to lock and unlock

s02ap0108

It is possible to perform the following

operations when you are carrying the

access key fob.

. Lock and unlock the doors and the fuel

filler lid.

. Unlock the trunk lid.

NOTE

. It is not possible to lock the doors

and fuel filler lid using the keyless

access function when the push-button

ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”

position. Refer to “Switching Power

Status” �P147.

. If the door handle is gripped with a

gloved hand, the door lock may not be

released.

. If the door lock sensor is touched

three times or more repeatedly, the

system will ignore the sensor opera-

tion.

. When performing the locking proce-

dure too quickly, locking may not

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

107

Keys and Doors

(110,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

complete. After performing the locking

procedure, it is recommended to pull

the rear door handle to confirm that the

doors have been locked.

. If any of the doors are not fully

closed, the following will occur to alert

you that the doors are not properly

closed.

– An electronic chirp sounds five

times.

– The hazard warning flashers

flash five times.

. It is possible to lock the doors even

when one of the doors is open. After

performing the locking procedure,

close the opened door to lock it.

. Within 3 seconds after locking the

doors using the keyless access func-

tion, it is not possible to unlock doors

using the keyless access function.

. When locking, be sure to carry the

access key fob to prevent locking the

access key fob in the vehicle.

. The setting of the hazard warning

flasher operation can be changed by

operating the center information dis-

play. For details, refer to “Car settings”

�P195 (11.6-inch display models) or

“Vehicle setting icons” �P208 (dual

7.0-inch display models). Also, the

setting of the hazard warning flasher

operation can be changed by your

SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU

dealer for details.

! Locking with the door lock sensor

s02ap010801

1) Door lock sensor

Carry the access key fob, close all the

doors and touch the door lock sensor on

the door handle. All the doors (including

the fuel filler lid) will be locked. Also, an

electronic chirp will sound once and the

hazard warning flashers will flash once.

NOTE

After touching the door lock sensor to

lock all of the doors, if you touch the

door lock sensor once more to attempt

the lock operation without first unlock-

ing the doors, nothing will happen,

even if the door lock sensor is touched.

In this case, perform the unlocking

operation once first. You can then

touch the door lock sensor to lock the

doors.

! Unlocking

s02ap010804

Carry the access key fob, and touch the

sensor behind the door handle.

. When the driver’s door handle is

gripped, only the driver’s door and the fuel

filler lid will be unlocked.

. When the front passenger’s door han-

dle is gripped, all the doors (including the

fuel filler lid) will be unlocked.

Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice

and the hazard warning flashers will flash

twice.

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

108

(111,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Opening trunk

s02ap010806

1) Trunk opener button

Carry the access key fob, and press the

trunk opener button. The trunk will open.

An electronic chirp will sound twice and the

hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

NOTE

Under the following conditions, the

trunk can be opened without the key

fob.

. The trunk lock/unlock setting is on.

. All doors are unlocked.

The trunk lock/unlock setting can be

changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to change the

setting.

! Door unlock selection function

s02ap0105

When the door is unlocked using the

keyless access function, only the doors

that were set and the fuel filler lid can be

unlocked.

The settings can be changed with the

following methods.

. The setting can be changed by operat-

ing the center information display.

For details, refer to “Car settings” �P195.

. The setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer.

& Unlock Using PIN Code Ac-

cess

s02ap21

1) Trunk opener button

While all the doors (including the trunk lid

and the fuel filler lid) are locked, you can

unlock the doors without a key by operat-

ing the trunk opener button.

NOTE

PIN Code Access will be helpful if the

key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It

is recommended that a 5-digit security

code (PIN code) is registered.

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

109

Keys and Doors

(112,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Registration for a PIN code

s02ap2102

Steps Operation Time from the previous step

1 Turn off the ignition switch. —

2 Close all the doors (including the trunk lid). —

Press and hold the “

” button on the access key fob, then press and hold the

trunk opener button until a chirp sounds intermittently.

—

4 Press the “

” button on the access key fob. Within 30 seconds

Input the PIN code using the trunk opener button within 30 seconds after the

chirp sound of step 4.

For example, to register “32468” as the PIN code, perform the following

procedure.

Within 30 seconds

(1) Press the button three times.

(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.

(3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.

(4) After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.

(5) After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.

Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp starts

sounding intermittently.

—

7 All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered.

—

NOTE

Press the “

” button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and move on to the registration stage. Unless the

“

” button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

110

(113,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

NOTE

. Press the trunk opener button/rear

lock button ten times to enter “0”.

. Change the PIN code frequently to

protect your vehicle from theft.

. If you have lent your vehicle to

another person, confirm that the PIN

code has not been changed or deleted.

If the PIN code has been changed or

deleted, reregister a new PIN code.

. If you make an error during the

registration procedure, press the “

”

or “

” button on the access key fob.

Then start over from step 1.

. To protect your vehicle from theft,

you cannot register “00000” to “99999”

or “12345” as a PIN code.

. Do not register your vehicle license

plate number or simple numbers such

as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code.

Doing so will increase the risk of

vehicle theft.

. When you try to register “22222”, the

registered PIN code will be deleted. You

cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code

Access until a new code is registered.

. After registering a new PIN code,

make sure that you can unlock the

doors using the PIN code.

. The PIN code cannot be deleted

while the keyless access function is

disabled by operating the access key

fob.

. Reregister the PIN code in the fol-

lowing case.

– When you forget the PIN code

– When you want to change the PIN

code

! Unlocking

s02ap2103

Perform steps (1) to (5) of step 5 described

in “Registration”.

NOTE

. You cannot unlock by PIN Code

Access in the following cases.

– When the access key fob is within

the operating ranges

– When the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position

. If you make an operation error dur-

ing the unlocking procedure, start over

with the unlocking procedure after

waiting for 5 seconds or longer.

. To protect your vehicle from theft, a

buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes

are entered five times continuously. If

this occurs, you cannot unlock the

doors by PIN Code Access for 5

minutes.

& Power Saving Function

s02ap23

To protect the access key fob battery and

the vehicle battery, the keyless access

function will be disabled as follows.

. When the keyless access function and

the remote keyless entry system have not

been used:

(1) 5 days after the push-button igni-

tion switch has been turned off, com-

munication between the antennas and

the access key fob will be stopped.

(2) 9 days after step (1), the sensors

(both lock sensor and unlock sensor)

on the front passenger’s door will be

disabled.

. When the access key fob has been left

in the operating range for 10 minutes or

longer while all doors are locked, the

keyless access function will be disabled.

! Recovery from power saving mode

s02ap2301

When one of the following operations is

performed, the keyless access function

will be recovered.

. Unlock by gripping the door handle

(only when the sensors on the front

passenger’s door are not disabled) or

pressing trunk opener button on the trunk

lid.

. Lock or unlock by the remote keyless

entry system.

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

111

Keys and Doors

(114,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Open a door and then close it.

. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ON” position.

& Power Saving Function of

Access Key Fob

s02ap26

This function stops the access key fob

from receiving signals and helps minimize

the battery consumption of the access key

fob.

1. Press the “

” button twice while hold-

ing the “

” button.

1) LED indicator

2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4

times to notify that the setting is complete.

When the access key fob is in the power

save mode, the keyless access function

and push-button start system will not be

available.

To cancel the power save mode, press one

of the buttons on the access key fob.

& Disabling Keyless Access

Function

s02ap07

WARNING

If you have an implanted pacemaker

or an implanted defibrillator, per-

form the procedure “By operating

the driver’s door” �P114 to disable

the keyless access function. If you

perform the procedure “By operat-

ing the access key fob” �P112, the

operation of an implanted pace-

maker or implanted defibrillator

may be affected by the radio waves

from the transmitting antennas in-

stalled on the vehicle.

When the vehicle is not going to be used

for a long time, or when you choose not to

use the keyless access function, the key-

less access function can be disabled.

NOTE

. The locking and unlocking function

by the remote keyless entry system is

not disabled.

. To start the engine while the func-

tions are disabled, perform the proce-

dure described in “Starting Engine”

�P403.

! Disabling functions

s02ap0701

! By operating the access key fob

s02ap070102

To disable the keyless access function by

operating the access key fob, register a

PIN code for PIN Code Access. For details

about registering a PIN code, refer to

“Unlock Using PIN Code Access” �P109.

1. Open the driver’s door.

2. Rotate the lock lever forward.

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

112

(115,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3. Press and hold the “ ” button and “ ”

button on the access key fob simulta-

neously for more than 5 seconds.

A chirp sound will be heard, and the

function will be disabled.

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

113

Keys and Doors

(116,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! By operating the driver’s door

s02ap070101

To disable the keyless access function by

operating the driver’s door, perform the

following procedures.

Steps Operation Time Status

1 Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the door. — Close

2 Push “

” on the power door locking switch. — Close

3 Open the driver’s door. Within 5 sec. Close?Open

Push “

” on the power door locking switch

twice.

Within 5 sec. Open

5 Close and open the driver’s door twice. Within 10 sec.

Open?Close?

Open?Close?Open

Push “

” on the power door locking switch

twice while the door is open.

Within 10 sec. Open

7 Close and open the driver’s door once. Within 10 sec. Open?Close?Open

8 Close the door. Within 5 sec.

Open?Close

A chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.

NOTE

In steps 4 and 6, press the power door locking switch firmly. If the switch is not

pressed firmly, the functions may not be disabled.

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

114

(117,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Enabling functions

s02ap0702

When the procedure to disable the func-

tions is performed again, a chirp sound will

be heard, and the functions are enabled.

NOTE

. The keyless access function will be

enabled only if you perform the proce-

dure in the same manner you disabled

the function (for example, when dis-

abling by operating the driver’s door,

the function will not be enabled even if

you operate the access key fob).

. Press the push-button ignition

switch if you do not know the proce-

dure in which the keyless access func-

tion was disabled.

– When disabling by operating the

driver’s door: A chirp will not be

heard.

– When disabling by operating the

access key fob: A chirp will be

heard.

& Selecting Audible Signal Op-

eration

s02ap12

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can

turn the audible signal off by operating the

center information display. For details,

refer to “Car settings” �P195.

Furthermore, the volume setting of the

audible signal can also be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

& Selecting Hazard Warning

Flasher Operation

s02ap18

Using the hazard warning flasher, the

system will give you a visible signal when

the doors are locked or unlocked. If

desired, you can turn the hazard warning

flashers off by operating the center infor-

mation display. For details, refer to “Car

settings” �P195. The setting can also be

changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult

your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Warning Chimes and Warning

Indicator

s02ap06

The keyless access with push-button start

system is equipped with a warning chime

and the access key warning indicator in

order to minimize improper operations and

help protect your vehicle from theft.

For details, refer to “Warning Chimes and

Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access

with Push-Button Start System” �P168.

& When Access Key Fob Does

Not Operate Properly

s02ap08

Refer to “Access Key Fob – If Access Key

Fob Does Not Operate Properly” �P402.

& Replacing Battery of Access

Key Fob

s02ap09

Refer to “Replacing Battery of Access Key

Fob” �P458.

& Replacing Access Key Fob

s02ap13

Access key fobs can be replaced at

SUBARU dealers. For more details, con-

tact a SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for Keyless Ac-

cess with Push-Button Start

System

s02ap14

. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: HYQ14AHK

FCC ID: Y8PSU19S-3

FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

– CONTINUED –

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

115

Keys and Doors

(118,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models

– Type 1

– Type 2

Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

116

(119,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Mexico-spec. models

IFT

RLVDE1415-1661

14AHK

DENSO

2-3. Immobilizer

s02ab

The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unauthorized person from

starting the engine. Only keys registered

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can

be used to operate your vehicle. If engine

start is attempted with an unregistered

access key fob or key, the engine will not

start. Even if the engine does start, it will

stop after a few seconds. This system,

however, is not a 100% anti-theft guaran-

tee.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under direct

sunlight or anywhere it may be-

come hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the key

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

. Do not modify or remove the

system. If modified or removed,

the proper operation of the sys-

tem cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE

. To protect your vehicle from theft,

please pay close attention to the follow-

ing security precautions:

– Never leave your vehicle unat-

tended with its keys inside.

– Before leaving your vehicle,

close all windows and the moon-

roof, and lock all the doors (includ-

ing the trunk lid and the fuel filler

lid).

– Do not leave spare keys or any

record of your key number in the

vehicle.

. The vehicle has a maintenance-free

type immobilizer system.

& Security Indicator Light

s02ab02

Refer to “Security Indicator Light” �P172.

& Key Replacement

s02ab03

Your key number plate will be required if

you ever need a replacement key made.

Any new key must be registered for use

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system

before it can be used. The maximum

number of keys that can be registered for

use with one vehicle is as follows.

. Four (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”)

. Seven (models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”)

– CONTINUED –

Immobilizer

117

Keys and Doors

(120,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

One key that has already been registered

is required in order to register a new key.

NOTE

If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code

still remains in the memory of the

vehicle’s immobilizer system. For se-

curity reasons, the lost key’s ID code

should be erased from the memory. To

erase the lost key’s ID code, all keys

that will be used are required.

For details about new key registration

and erasing the lost key’s ID code,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for Immobilizer

System

s02ab05

. For models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

Refer to “Certification for Keyless Access

with Push-Button Start System” �P115.

. For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

– U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: Y8PFJ18-3

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

– Canada-spec. models

Immobilizer

118

(121,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

– Mexico-spec. models

2-4. Remote Keyless Entry

System

s02ae

CAUTION

. Do not expose the remote trans-

mitter to severe shocks, such as

those experienced as a result of

dropping or throwing.

. Do not take the remote transmit-

ter apart except when replacing

the battery.

. Do not get the remote transmitter

wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with

a cloth immediately.

. When you carry the remote trans-

mitter on an airplane, do not

press the button of the remote

transmitter while in the airplane.

When any button of the remote

transmitter is pressed, radio

waves are sent and may affect

the operation of the airplane.

When you carry the remote trans-

mitter in a bag on an airplane,

take measures to prevent the

buttons of the remote transmitter

from being pressed.

Access key fob

1) Lock/arm button

2) Unlock/disarm button

3) Trunk lid opener

4) PANIC button

– CONTINUED –

Remote Keyless Entry System

119

Keys and Doors

(122,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Transmitter

1) Lock/arm button

2) Unlock/disarm button

3) Trunk lid opener

4) PANIC button

The remote keyless entry system has the

following functions.

. Locking and unlocking all the doors

(including the fuel filler lid)

. Opening the trunk lid

. Sounding a panic alarm

. Arming and disarming. For details, refer

to “Alarm System” �P127.

The operable distance of the remote key-

less entry system is approximately 30 feet

(10 meters). However, this distance will

vary depending on environmental condi-

tions. The system’s operable distance will

be shorter in areas near a facility or

electronic equipment emitting strong radio

waves such as a power plant, broadcast

station, TV tower, or remote controller of

home electronic appliances.

NOTE

. For models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”, the

remote keyless entry system will not

be activated when the push-button

ignition switch is in any position other

than the “OFF” position.

. For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”, the

remote keyless entry system will not

be activated when the key is inserted in

the ignition switch.

. The hazard warning flashers will

flash once or twice when the access

key fob/transmitter button is pressed in

the following cases.

– When locking the doors

– When unlocking the doors

– When unlocking the trunk lid

If desired, you can turn the hazard

warning flashers off by operating the

center information display. For details,

refer to “Car settings” �P195. The

setting can also be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

& Locking the Doors

s02ae01

Press the “ ” button to lock all the doors

(including the fuel filler lid). An electronic

chirp will sound once and the hazard

warning flashers will flash once.

If any of the doors is not fully closed, the

following will occur to alert you that the

doors are not properly closed.

. An electronic chirp sounds five times.

. The hazard warning flashers flash five

times.

When you close the door, it will automati-

cally lock and then the following will occur.

. An electronic chirp sounds once.

. The hazard warning flashers flash

once.

& Unlocking the Doors

s02ae02

Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s

door and fuel filler lid. An electronic chirp

will sound twice and the hazard warning

flashers will flash twice. To unlock all the

Remote Keyless Entry System

120

(123,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

doors, briefly press the “ ” button again

within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and

second presses of the “

” button for

unlocking all the doors is extremely

short, the system may not respond.

& Opening the Trunk Lid

s02ae13

Press and hold the “ ” button to open the

trunk lid. An electronic chirp will sound

twice and the hazard warning flashers will

flash twice.

This operation setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

& Setting Audible Signal Op-

eration

s02ae07

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

If desired, you can turn the audible signal

off by operating the center information

display. For details, refer to “Car settings”

�P195. Furthermore, the volume setting

of the audible signal can also be changed

by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for details.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Perform the following steps to deactivate

the audible signal. Take the same steps to

restore the function.

Steps Operation Time

1 Sit in the driver’s seat. —

2 Close all doors. —

(1)

Press and hold “

” on

the power locking

switch.

Within

10 sec.

(2)

Insert the key into the

ignition switch and pull it

out at least 6 times.

Open and close the dri-

ver’s door.

Within

10 sec.

The hazard warning flashers flash 3 times

to indicate completion of the setting.

Your SUBARU dealer can perform the

above procedure for you.

& Selecting Hazard Warning

Flasher Operation

s02ae26

Using the hazard warning flasher, the

system will give you a visible signal when

the doors are locked or unlocked. If

desired, you can turn the hazard warning

flashers off by operating the center infor-

mation display. For details, refer to “Car

settings” �P195 (11.6-inch display mod-

els) or “Vehicle setting icons” �P208 (dual

7.0-inch display models). The setting can

also be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Vehicle Finder Function

s02ae05

Use this function to find your vehicle

parked among many vehicles in a large

parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet

(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “

”

button three times in a 5-second period will

cause your vehicle’s horn to sound once

and its hazard warning flashers to flash

three times.

NOTE

If the interval between presses is too

short when you press the “

” button

– CONTINUED –

Remote Keyless Entry System

121

Keys and Doors

(124,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

three times, the system may not re-

spond to the signals from the remote

transmitter.

& Sounding a Panic Alarm

s02ae06

To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”

button once.

The horn will sound and the hazard

warning flashers will flash.

To deactivate the panic alarm, press any

button on the remote transmitter. If a

button on the remote transmitter is not

pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after

approximately 30 seconds.

& Replacing the Battery

s02ae08

Refer to “Replacing Battery” �P457.

& Replacing Lost Transmitters

s02ae09

If you lose a transmitter or want to

purchase additional transmitters (up to

four can be programmed), you should re-

program all your transmitters for security

reasons. For details, contact your

SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters

programmed into the remote keyless entry

system.

& Certification for Remote Key-

less Entry System

s02ae18

. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: CWTB1G077

FCC ID: CWTD1G141

CAUTION

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models

Remote Keyless Entry System

122

(125,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Mexico-spec. models

IFETEL RLVSUTB15-1814

SUBARU

MODEL: TB1G077

IFETEL RLVSUTD18-0302

SUBARU

MODEL: TD1G141

2-5. Door Locks

s02ac

& Locking and Unlocking from

the Outside

s02ac01

NOTE

If you unlock the driver’s door with a

key (including an emergency key) and

open the door while the alarm system is

armed, the alarm system is triggered

and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this

case, perform any of the following

operations:

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Press any button on the access key

fob (except when the access key fob

battery is discharged).

. Turn the push-button ignition switch

to the “ACC” position.

. Carry the access key fob and grip the

front door handle.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Press any button on the remote

transmitter (except when the transmit-

ter battery is discharged).

. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

For details about the alarm system,

refer to “Alarm System” �P127.

! How to lock and unlock the vehicle

using the key

s02ac0101

1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock.

2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.

In this case, only the driver’s side door is

locked or unlocked.

NOTE

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The emergency key is directional. If the

key cannot be inserted, change the

direction that the grooved side is facing

and insert it again.

– CONTINUED –

Door Locks

123

Keys and Doors

(126,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! How to lock the vehicle without

using the key

s02ac0102

To lock the door from outside without the

key, the following methods are available.

! Locking using lock lever

s02ac010201

1) Rotate the lock lever forward.

2) Close the door.

In this way, only the door that was operated

will be locked.

! Locking using power door lock-

ing switch

s02ac010202

1) Press the side of the power door

locking switch.*

2) Close the door.

*: For details about the power door locking

switch, refer to “How to operate the power

door locking switches” �P125.

In this case, all the closed doors and the

fuel filler lid are locked at the same time.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside without the key.

& Locking and Unlocking from

the Inside

s02ac02

! How to use the lock lever

s02ac0202

1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock.

2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the

lock lever forward. To unlock the door from

the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.

The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an

unlocked door.

Always make sure that all the doors

(including the trunk lid) are closed before

starting to drive.

Door Locks

124

(127,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

WARNING

. Keep all doors locked when you

drive, especially when small chil-

dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of

seatbelts and child restraint sys-

tems, locking the doors reduces

the chance of being thrown out of

the vehicle in an accident.

It also helps prevent passengers

from falling out by preventing a

door from being accidentally

opened, and intruders from un-

expectedly opening doors and

entering your vehicle.

. Do not pull the front door handle

from inside while driving. The

door could open even if it is

locked.

! How to operate the power door

locking switches

s02ac0203

All the doors (including the fuel filler lid)

can be locked and unlocked by pressing

either side of the power door locking

switches located on the driver’s side and

the front passenger’s side doors.

1) Lock

2) Unlock

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside using the power

door locking switches.

& Automatic Door Locking/Un-

locking

s02ac08

All the doors (including the fuel filler lid) are

automatically locked or unlocked under

the following conditions.

. For automatic door locking

– When the vehicle speed reaches 12

mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory

default setting).

– When the select lever is shifted into

a position other than the “P” position

(CVT models).

. For automatic door unlocking

– When the driver’s door is open

(factory default setting).

– When the ignition switch is turned to

OFF.

– When the select lever is shifted into

the “P” position (CVT models).

NOTE

. The automatic door lock and unlock

setting can be changed with the center

information display. Refer to “Car set-

tings” �P195 (11.6-inch display mod-

els) or “Vehicle setting icons” �P208

(dual 7.0-inch display models).

. When locking the door by the power

door locking switches, automatic door

locking will not operate.

– CONTINUED –

Door Locks

125

Keys and Doors

(128,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. When unlocking the door by the

power door locking switches, auto-

matic door unlocking will not operate.

. If the system detects a strong en-

ough impact to deploy the airbags, all

doors may be automatically unlocked.

For further details, refer to “Automatic

Door Locking/Unlocking Operation

When Involved in an Accident” �P406.

. When getting out of the vehicle from

a rear door, make sure to unlock all the

doors by pushing the unlock side of the

power door locking switch. If a rear

door is unlocked from the inside door

lever then the door is opened and

closed, the Key lock-in prevention

function will be triggered. All doors will

be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention

warning indicator “

” will appear and

the warning chime will also sound.

& Key Lock-In Prevention

Function

s02ac06

Under the following conditions, all the

doors will not lock when the power door

locking switch is pushed with the driver’s

door open.

. The key is still in the ignition switch

(models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”).

. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position (models with “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start system”).

NOTE

. When leaving the vehicle, make sure

you are holding the key before locking

the doors.

. When getting out of the vehicle from

a rear door, make sure to unlock all the

doors by pushing the unlock side of the

power door locking switch.

. When getting out of the vehicle from

a rear door, make sure to unlock all the

doors by pushing the unlock side of the

power door locking switch. If a rear

door is unlocked from the inside door

lever then the door is opened and

closed, the Key lock-in prevention

function will be triggered. All doors will

be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention

warning indicator “

” will appear and

the warning chime will also sound.

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as “operational”.

This function’s operational/non-opera-

tional setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU

dealer for details.

! Non-operation of key lock-in pre-

vention function

s02ac0602

When the system is set so that it does not

operate, the doors are locked by the

following operation.

. If the lock lever is turned to the front

(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door

open and the driver’s door is then closed

with the lock lever in that position, the

driver’s door is locked.

. If the emergency key is used to lock the

driver’s door from the outside of the

vehicle, the door is locked.

Door Locks

126

(129,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Battery Drainage Prevention

Function

s02ac03

If a door is not completely closed, the

interior lights will remain illuminated as a

result. However, several lights are auto-

matically turned off by the battery drainage

prevention function to prevent the battery

from going dead. The following interior

lights are affected by this function.

Item

Switch

position

Automatically turning

off

Map lights DOOR

Approximately 20

minutes later

Dome light DOOR

Approximately 20

minutes later

Ignition

switch light

—

Approximately 20

minutes later

Trunk light —

Approximately 20

minutes later

NOTE

. The default setting for this function

is set as “operational”. The operational/

non-operational setting of this function

can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Contact your SUBARU dealer to

change the setting.

. When leaving the vehicle, please

make sure that all doors are completely

closed.

. The battery drainage prevention

function does not operate under the

following condition.

– While the push-button ignition

switch is in “ACC” or “ON” (models

with the push-button ignition

switch)

– While the key is in the ignition

switch (models without the push-

button ignition switch)

. Models with the push-button ignition

switch are also equipped with the

battery drainage prevention function

for the push-button ignition switch.

For details, refer to “Battery drainage

prevention function” �P148.

2-6. Alarm System

s02af

The alarm system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn

sounds and the hazard warning flashers

flash if someone attempts to break into

your vehicle.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The system can be armed or disarmed

with the keyless access function or access

key fob.

The system will not be activated when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

The system can be armed or disarmed

with the remote transmitter.

The system will not be activated when the

key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set

for activation at the time of shipment from

the factory. You can set the system for

deactivation yourself or have it done by

your SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

Alarm System

127

Keys and Doors

(130,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Alarm System Operation

s02af01

When the alarm system is armed, it is

triggered by the opening any of the doors,

the trunk lid or engine hood.

The alarm system will activate the follow-

ing alarms when triggered.

. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30

seconds.

. The hazard warning flashers will flash

for 30 seconds.

If any of the doors, the trunk lid or engine

hood remains open after the 30-second

period, the horn will continue to sound for a

maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, trunk lid

or engine hood is closed while the horn is

sounding, the horn will stop sounding with

a delay of up to 30 seconds.

NOTE

The alarm system can be set to trigger

the illumination of the following interior

lights.

. Map lights (illuminates only when

the door interlock switch is in the

“DOOR” position)

. Dome light (illuminates only when

the dome light switch is in the “DOOR”

position)

The notifications regarding the map

lights and dome light are deactivated

as the factory setting. A SUBARU deal-

er can activate the system. Contact

your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Arming the System

s02af04

The alarm system becomes armed when

the following operation is performed.

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

equipped) and turn the ignition switch to

the “OFF” position.

2. Carry the key and get out of the

vehicle.

3. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

4. Lock the doors using any of the

following methods.

. Locking using the remote keyless

entry system. For details, refer to

“Remote Keyless Entry System”

�P119.

. Locking using the keyless access

function (if equipped). For details, refer

to “Locking with the door lock sensor”

�P108.

. Locking using the power door lock-

ing switch. For details, refer to “Locking

using power door locking switch”

�P124.

Security indicator light

NOTE

. All doors, the trunk lid and fuel filler

lid will lock, an electronic chirp will

sound once, the hazard warning

flashers will flash once, and the secur-

ity indicator light will start flashing

rapidly.

. If any of the doors or the trunk lid is

not fully closed, an electronic chirp

sounds five times and the hazard

warning flashers flash five times to

alert you that the doors (or the trunk

lid) are not properly closed. When you

close the door, doors will automatically

lock and the system will automatically

arm in 30 seconds.

5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the

Alarm System

128

(131,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

system will enter surveillance state.

When the system is in surveillance state,

the security indicator light will then flash

slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-

onds), indicating that the system has been

armed for surveillance.

NOTE

. The system can be armed even if the

windows and/or moonroof are open.

Always make sure that they are fully

closed before arming the system.

. The 30-second standby time can be

eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-

formed by your SUBARU dealer.

. If any of the following actions is

done during the standby period, the

system will not switch to the surveil-

lance state.

– Doors (including the trunk lid) are

unlocked using the access key fob/

remote transmitter.

– Doors (including the trunk lid) are

unlocked using the keyless access

function (models with “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start sys-

tem”).

– Any door (including the engine

hood) is opened.

– The ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position (models without

“keyless access with push-button

start system”).

– Push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “ACC” position (mod-

els with “keyless access with push-

button start system”).

& Disarming the System

s02af05

Perform either of the following procedures.

. Briefly press a button (for less than 2

seconds) on the access key fob/remote

transmitter.

. Carry the access key fob and perform

either of the following procedures (models

with “keyless access with push-button

start system”).

– Grip the front door handle.

– Press the trunk opener button.

– Unlock using the PIN code access.

The flashing of the security indicator light

will then change slowly (once approxi-

mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-

proximately every 2 seconds), indicating

that the alarm system has been disarmed.

! Emergency disarming

s02af0501

If you cannot disarm the system using the

access key fob/transmitter (i.e., the trans-

mitter is lost, broken or the transmitter

battery is too weak), you can disarm the

system without using the access key fob/

remote transmitter.

The system can be disarmed if you turn the

ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position to the “ON” position with a

registered key/access key fob.

NOTE

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, if the ac-

cess key fob battery is discharged,

perform the procedure described in

“Switching Power Status” �P403. In

such a case, replace the battery im-

mediately. Refer to “Replacing Battery

of Access Key Fob” �P458.

& Alarm System Setting

s02af11

To change the setting of your vehicle’s

alarm system for activation or deactiva-

tion, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to

“Disarming the System” �P129.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors, the trunk lid and engine hood.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

4. Hold down “

” of the driver’s power

door locking switch, open the driver’s door

within the following 1 second, and wait 10

seconds without releasing the switch. The

setting will then be changed as follows.

– CONTINUED –

Alarm System

129

Keys and Doors

(132,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Setting

status

Combination

meter display

(color LCD)

Horn

Activate AL ON Once

Deactivate AL OFF

Twice

NOTE

You may have the above setting change

done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If You Have Accidentally

Triggered the Alarm System

s02af03

! To stop the alarm

s02af0301

Do any of the following operations:

. Press any button on the access key fob/

remote transmitter.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”).

. Turn the push-button ignition to the

“ACC” position (models with “keyless

access with push-button start system”).

NOTE

Only registered keys will stop the

alarm. If the immobilizer transponder

is not registered, the alarm will not

stop.

& Valet Mode

s02af06

When you choose the valet mode, the

alarm system does not operate. In valet

mode, the remote transmitter is used only

for locking and unlocking the doors and

panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the

setting of your vehicle’s alarm system to

deactivation mode. Refer to “Alarm Sys-

tem Setting” �P129. The security indica-

tor light will continue to flash once every 3

seconds, indicating that the system is in

the valet mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting of

your vehicle’s alarm system to activation

mode. Refer to “Alarm System Setting”

�P129.

2-7. Child Safety Locks

s02ag

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks to

the “LOCK” position when children

sit on the rear seat. Serious injury

could result if a child accidentally

opens the door and falls out.

Each rear door has a child safety lock.

When the child safety lock lever is in the

“LOCK” position, the door cannot be

opened from inside. The door can only

be opened from the outside.

Child Safety Locks

130

(133,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

2-8. Windows

s02ah

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-

form to the following instructions

without exception.

. When operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful to

prevent anyone’s body parts or

any other objects from being

caught in the window.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety rea-

sons and never allow an unat-

tended child to remain in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the power

window.

NOTE

. If the power window system detects

resistance, an impact or abnormality,

the window operation may be automa-

tically stopped to prevent further jam-

ming, entrapment or malfunction.

– The closing window slides down

slightly and stops.

– The opening window stops slid-

ing down.

. The power window system may

detect resistance, an impact or an

abnormality in the following cases.

– A substantial sized object is

caught between the window and

the window frame.

– A foreign object is caught be-

tween the window and the window

frame.

– The vehicle drives over a deep

pothole.

. The window cannot be closed for a

few seconds after the window is auto-

matically stopped by the system.

& Power Window Operation

s02ah07

! Power window switches

s02ah0701

. Driver’s side power window switches:

1) For front left window (with one-touch auto

up and down feature)

2) For front right window (with one-touch

auto up and down feature)

3) For rear left window (with one-touch auto

up and down feature (if equipped))

4) For rear right window (with one-touch

auto up and down feature (if equipped))

5) Lock switch

All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster on the driver

side door.

The switch illuminates when operated.

– CONTINUED –

Windows

131

Keys and Doors

(134,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Passenger’s side power window

switches:

Each passenger’s window can be con-

trolled by the power window switch located

on the door.

The switch illuminates when operated.

! Operating the window

s02ah0702

With one-touch auto up and down feature

1) Automatically close*

2) Close

3) Open

4) Automatically open*

*: To stop the window halfway, operate the

switch to the opposite side.

Without one-touch auto up and down

feature

1) Close

2) Open

NOTE

Avoid the following.

. Continuously operating a switch in

the same direction after the window is

fully closed or fully opened.

. Continuously operating three or

more switches all at once in the same

direction after the windows are fully

closed or fully opened.

Either of the operations described

above may cause the power window

breaker to operate making it impossible

to open or close the window. Be sure to

initialize the power windows. Refer to

Windows

132

(135,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

“Initialization of Power Window (Win-

dows with One-Touch Auto Up and

Down Function)” �P133.

! Anti-entrapment function (windows

with one-touch auto up and down

function)

s02ah0703

While closing the window automatically, if

the window senses a substantial enough

object trapped between the window and

the window frame, it automatically moves

down slightly and stops.

If a foreign object is caught while window is

opening automatically, the window will

stop.

CAUTION

. Never attempt to test the power

window operation using body

parts.

. If an object is caught just before

the window fully closes, the sys-

tem may not operate properly.

NOTE

. If a window detects an impact similar

to that caused by trapping an object (for

example, when the vehicle encounters

a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment

function may operate.

. You cannot close the window for a

few seconds after the anti-entrapment

function operates.

! Off delay function (windows with

one-touch auto up and down func-

tion)

s02ah0705

The windows can be operated for approxi-

mately 40 seconds even after the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”

position. If a front door is opened within 40

seconds, the off delay function is can-

celed.

! Locking the passengers’ windows

s02ah0704

1) Lock

2) Unlock

When the lock switch is in the lock position,

the rear passenger’s window switches on

the driver side door and the passengers’

window switches cannot be operated.

When the indicator on the window

switches does not illuminate, the window

switch cannot be operated.

& Initialization of Power Win-

dow (Windows with One-

Touch Auto Up and Down

Function)

s02ah06

If the one-touch auto up and down function

or off delay function does not operate

properly, operate each window according

to the following procedure in order to

initialize the power window system.

1. Close the door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

3. Open the window completely and then

press and hold down the power window

switch for approximately 1 second.

4. Close the window completely and then

pull and hold the power window switch for

approximately 1 second.

Windows

133

Keys and Doors

(136,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

2-9. Trunk Lid

s02ai

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust

gas from entering the vehicle,

always keep the trunk lid closed

while the engine is running.

. Check that the trunk is comple-

tely closed before driving. If it is

not, it may suddenly open, which

could lead to an accident.

. Help prevent children, adults or

animals from locking themselves

in the trunk. On hot or sunny

days, the temperature in the trunk

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause death or serious

heat-related injuries including

brain damage to anyone locked

inside, particularly for small chil-

dren.

. When leaving the vehicle, close

all windows and lock all doors.

Also make certain that the trunk

is closed.

CAUTION

. Be extremely careful not to catch

fingers or other objects when

closing the trunk lid.

. Before opening and closing the

trunk, carefully check your sur-

roundings to make sure it will not

strike any people or objects.

. When loading and unloading car-

go, be careful not to come in

contact with the hot engine ex-

haust gas or the exhaust pipe,

because they could burn you.

. Be careful when opening the

trunk in a strong wind. The trunk

lid could open or close suddenly

and cause injuries.

. Make sure that the trunk is com-

pletely open when using it. If it is

not, the trunk lid may suddenly

drop and cause serious injury.

. Remove snow and ice from the

trunk lid before opening it. Not

doing so could cause the trunk

lid to fall after it is opened.

. Do not push the trunk lid forcibly

to close it. It could deform the

metal.

. Under the following conditions,

the trunk lid may close unexpect-

edly, striking people or objects in

its path:

– Parking on a slope, with the

rear of the vehicle lower than

its front. In this case, make

sure the trunk lid is fully open

and secure before loading or

unloading cargo.

– Installing parts or accessories

that place excess weight on

the trunk lid. Install only gen-

uine SUBARU parts and ac-

cessories.

– Loading baggage or other

heavy items by throwing or

otherwise forcefully loading

them into the trunk. Always

load cargo with care.

& To Open and Close the Trunk

Lid from Outside

s02ai01

The trunk lid can be opened using the

keyless access function or remote keyless

entry system. For details, refer to the

following section.

. For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, refer to “Open-

ing trunk” �P109, or “Opening the Trunk

Lid” �P121.

Trunk Lid

134

(137,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”, refer to

“Opening the Trunk Lid” �P121.

To close the trunk lid, lightly press the trunk

lid down until the latch engages.

NOTE

. Do not leave your valuables in the

trunk when you leave your vehicle.

. Under the following conditions, the

trunk can be opened without the access

key fob.

– The trunk lock/unlock setting is

set to on.

– All doors are unlocked.

The trunk lock/unlock setting can be

changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to change the

setting.

& To Open the Trunk Lid from

Inside

s02ai02

Press and hold the trunk lid opener button

for more than 1 second.

& Internal Trunk Lid Release

Handle

s02ai04

The internal trunk lid release handle is a

device designed to open the trunk lid from

inside the trunk. In the event children or

adults become locked inside the trunk, the

handle allows them to open the lid. The

handle is located on the inside of the trunk

lid.

To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,

pull the yellow handle as indicated by the

arrow on the handle. This operation

unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the lid.

The handle is made of material that

remains luminescent for approximately

an hour in the dark trunk space after it is

exposed to ambient light even for a short

time.

– CONTINUED –

Trunk Lid

135

Keys and Doors

(138,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

WARNING

Never allow any child to get in the

trunk and play with the release

handle. If the driver starts the vehi-

cle without knowing that a child is

inside the trunk and the child opens

the lid using the release handle, the

child could fall out and be killed or

seriously injured.

CAUTION

. Do not close the lid while gripping

the release handle. The handle

may be damaged.

. Do not use the handle as a hook

to fasten straps or ropes to

secure your cargo in the trunk.

Such use may result in damage of

the handle.

. Load the trunk so that cargo

cannot strike the release handle.

If the cargo hits the handle while

the vehicle is being driven, the

handle may be pulled and the

trunk lid may open. That may

cause cargo to fall out of the

trunk, which could create a traffic

safety hazard.

! Inspection

s02ai0401

Perform the following steps at least twice a

year to check the release handle for

correct operation.

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. To lock it, press the latch with the

screwdriver shaft until it clicks.

This places the latch in the locked position.

3. Move the release handle, from outside

the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to

check if the latch is released.

Trunk Lid

136

(139,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

If the latch is not released, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

In that case, use the key to release the

latch, then close the trunk lid.

Also, if the movement of the release

handle feels restricted or not entirely

smooth during operation, or the handle

and/or handle base is cracked, contact

your SUBARU dealer.

2-10. Moonroof (If Equipped)

s02ak

WARNING

Never let anyone’s hands, arms,

head or any objects protrude from

the moonroof. A person could be

seriously injured if any of the follow-

ing conditions occur.

. The vehicle stops suddenly.

. The vehicle turns sharply.

. The vehicle is involved in an

accident.

. Body parts protruding from the

vehicle are struck by outside

objects.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-

form to the following instructions

without exception.

. Before closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will

be accidentally caught in the

moonroof.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety rea-

sons and never allow an unat-

tended child to remain in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the moon-

roof.

. Never try to check the anti-en-

trapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

. The anti-entrapment function

does not operate when the moon-

roof is being tilted down. Be sure

to confirm that it is safe to tilt the

moonroof down before doing so.

. If the moonroof does not close,

have the system checked by a

SUBARU dealer.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding

functions.

The moonroof operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

– CONTINUED –

Moonroof

137

Keys and Doors

(140,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Moonroof Switches

s02ak02

! Tilting moonroof

s02ak0201

1) Up

2) Down

To raise the moonroof, press and hold the

switch in the up side and release. To lower

the moonroof, press and hold the switch in

the down side.

NOTE

Release the switch after the moonroof

has been raised or has been lowered

completely. Pressing the switch con-

tinuously may cause damage to the

moonroof.

! Sliding moonroof

s02ak0202

1) Open

2) Close

To open or close the moonroof using the

automatic function, press and hold the

switch toward the open/close side and

release.

To stop the moonroof halfway, press a

switch on the moonroof switch.

NOTE

After washing the vehicle or after it

rains, wipe away water on the roof prior

to opening the moonroof to prevent

drops of water from falling into the

passenger compartment.

! Anti-entrapment function

s02ak0203

When the moonroof senses a substantial

enough object trapped between its glass

and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it

automatically moves back to the fully open

position and stops there. The anti-entrap-

ment function may also be activated by a

strong shock on the moonroof even when

there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function

using fingers, hands or other parts

of your body.

NOTE

For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

Moonroof

138

(141,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Sunshade

s02ak05

The sunshade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade

also moves back.

Moonroof

139

Keys and Doors

(142,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(143,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s03

3-1. Ignition Switch (Models without

Push-Button Start System) .......................... 144

Key Positions .....................................................144

Key Reminder Chime .......................................... 145

Ignition Switch Light........................................... 145

3-2. Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with

Push-Button Start System) .......................... 146

Safety Precautions.............................................. 146

Operating Range for Push-Button Start System... 146

Switching Power Status ......................................147

When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate

Properly ........................................................... 148

3-3. Hazard Warning Flasher................................. 148

3-4. Meters and Gauges ........................................ 148

Speedometer ...................................................... 148

Tachometer.........................................................149

Odometer ........................................................... 149

Double Trip Meter ............................................... 149

Fuel Gauge.........................................................150

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge .................... 150

Combination Meter Settings ................................ 151

3-5. Illumination Brightness Control .................... 151

Auto Dimmer Cancel Function ............................ 152

3-6. Warning and Indicator Lights ........................ 152

Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ......................153

SRS Airbag System Warning Light ...................... 156

Front Passenger’s Frontal Airbag ON and OFF

Indicators .........................................................156

CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction

Indicator Light .................................................. 157

Charge Warning Light ........................................ 157

Oil Pressure Warning Light ................................ 158

Engine Low Oil Level Warning Indicator ............. 158

AT OIL TEMP Warning Light (CVT Models) .......... 158

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light (U.S.-Spec.

Models)............................................................ 158

ABS Warning Light............................................. 160

Brake System Warning Light .............................. 160

Electronic Parking Brake Indicator Light

(CVT Models) ................................................... 162

Hill Start Assist Warning Light/Hill Start Assist

OFF Indicator Light (MT Models) ...................... 163

Auto Vehicle Hold Indicator Light

(CVT Models) ................................................... 163

Low Fuel Warning Light ..................................... 164

Door Open Indicator........................................... 164

Windshield Washer Fluid Warning Light ............. 164

All-Wheel Drive Warning Light............................ 164

Power Steering Warning Light ............................ 164

Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning Light/

Vehicle Dynamics Control Operation Indicator

Light ................................................................ 165

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light/

TRACK Mode Indicator Light ............................ 167

Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of

the Keyless Access with Push-Button Start

System (If Equipped) ........................................ 168

Security Indicator Light ...................................... 172

SI-DRIVE Indicator Light (If Equipped) ................ 173

Drive Mode Select Indicator Light

(If Equipped) .................................................... 173

Select Lever/Gear Position Indicator................... 173

Instruments and Controls

(144,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Turn Signal Indicator Lights................................ 174

High Beam Indicator Light .................................. 174

High Beam Assist Indicator (If Equipped) ............ 174

Automatic Headlight Beam Leveler Warning

Light ................................................................174

LED Headlight Warning Light ..............................174

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF Indicator

Light (If Equipped) ............................................174

Steering Responsive Headlight Warning Light

(If Equipped)..................................................... 174

Headlight Indicator Light.....................................174

Front Fog Light Indicator Light (If Equipped).......175

Cruise Control Indicator (If Equipped) ................. 175

BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator (If Equipped)..........175

BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator (If Equipped)................ 175

Icy Road Surface Warning Indicator .................... 175

RAB Warning Indicator (If Equipped)...................176

RAB OFF Indicator (If Equipped) ......................... 176

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF Indicator

(If Equipped)..................................................... 176

Electric Damper System Warning Light

(If Equipped)..................................................... 176

3-7. Combination Meter Display (Color LCD) ...... 176

Basic Operation..................................................177

Welcome Screen (Opening Animation) and

Good-Bye (Ending Animation) Screen ............... 178

Warning Screen .................................................. 178

Meter Information Screen.................................... 178

Telltale Screen .................................................... 180

Basic Screens ....................................................181

Digital Speed Screen .......................................... 184

3-8. Center Information Display (CID) ...................184

Features ............................................................ 184

Welcome Screen ................................................ 185

Good-Bye Screen ............................................... 185

Interruption Screen ............................................ 185

Touch Screen Operations ................................... 186

11.6-Inch Display Models.................................... 186

Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models.............................. 202

3-9. Clock ................................................................214

Setting the Clock Manually ................................. 214

Setting the Clock Automatically.......................... 215

3-10. Light Control Switch .....................................217

Headlights ......................................................... 217

High/Low Beam Change (Dimmer) ...................... 219

Headlight Flasher ............................................... 220

High Beam Assist Function ................................ 220

Daytime Running Light System .......................... 225

3-11. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

(If Equipped) ..................................................226

3-12. Headlight Beam Leveler................................227

3-13. Front Fog Light Switch (If Equipped) ..........227

3-14. Turn Signal Lever ..........................................228

One-Touch Lane Changer................................... 228

3-15. Wiper and Washer .........................................229

Windshield Wiper and Washer Switches ............. 230

3-16. Defogger and Deicer .....................................231

3-17. Mirrors ............................................................233

Inside Mirror (without Auto-Dimming Function)

(If Equipped) .................................................... 233

Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped) ..................... 233

Instruments and Controls

(145,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass (If Equipped).......234

Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass with HomeLink

(If Equipped)..................................................... 235

Outside Mirrors .................................................. 243

3-18. Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel .....................244

3-19. Horn................................................................245

Instruments and Controls

(146,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3-1. Ignition Switch (Models

without Push-Button Start

System)

s03aa

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

“LOCK” while the vehicle is being

driven or towed because that will

lock the steering wheel, prevent-

ing steering control. And when

the engine is turned off, it takes a

much greater effort than usual to

steer.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure to

follow this procedure could re-

sult in injury to a child or others.

Children could operate the power

windows, the moonroof or other

controls or even make the vehicle

move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it banged

against your knees or hands while

you are driving, it could turn the

ignition switch from the “ON” posi-

tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-

tion, thereby stopping the engine.

Also, if the key is attached to a

keyholder or to a large bunch of

other keys, centrifugal force may act

on it as the vehicle moves, resulting

in unwanted turning of the ignition

switch.

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE

. Keep the ignition switch in the

“LOCK” position when the engine is

not running.

. Using electrical accessories for a

long time with the ignition switch in the

“ON” or “ACC” position can cause the

battery to go dead.

. If the ignition switch will not move

from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”

position, turn the steering wheel

slightly to the left and right as you turn

the ignition switch.

& Key Positions

s03aa11

Position Description

LOCK

The key can only be inserted

or removed in this position.

The ignition switch will lock

the steering wheel when you

remove the key.

ACC

In this position the electrical

accessories (audio, acces-

sory power outlet, etc.) can be

used.

This is the normal operating

position after starting the en-

gine.

START

The engine is started in this

position.

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while the engine

is running.

Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start System)

144

(147,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

NOTE

. To turn the key from the “ACC” to

“LOCK” position:

– Place the select lever in the “P”

position (CVT models).

– Push in and turn the key.

. If your registered key fails to start

the engine, pull out the key once (the

security indicator light will blink), and

then insert the key again and turn it to

the “START” position again to restart

the engine.

. The engine may not start in the

following cases:

– The key grip is touching another

key or a metallic key holder.

– The key is near another key that

contains an immobilizer transpon-

der.

– The key is near or touching

another transmitter.

& Key Reminder Chime

s03aa05

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door is opened and the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.

The chime stops under the following

conditions.

. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The key is removed from the ignition

switch.

. The driver’s door is closed.

& Ignition Switch Light

s03aa06

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-

nates when driver’s door is opened or

when the driver’s door is unlocked using

the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for approxi-

mately 30 seconds and gradually turns off

under the following conditions.

. The driver’s door is closed.

. The doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry transmitter.

– CONTINUED –

Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start System)

145

Instruments and Controls

(148,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

The light gradually turns off under the

following conditions.

. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The doors are locked using the remote

keyless entry transmitter.

3-2. Push-Button Ignition

Switch (Models with Push-

Button Start System)

s03bg

& Safety Precautions

s03bg04

Refer to “Safety Precautions” �P103.

& Operating Range for Push-

Button Start System

s03bg01

1) Antennas

2) Operating range

NOTE

. If the access key fob is not detected

within the operating range of the anten-

nas inside the vehicle, the push-button

ignition switch and the engine start

cannot be operated.

. Even when the access key fob is

outside the vehicle, if it is placed too

close to the glass, it may be possible to

switch the power or to start the engine.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the following places. It may become

impossible to operate the push-button

ignition switch and the engine start.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– On the rear shelf

– Inside the trunk

. When operating the push-button

ignition switch or starting the engine,

if the access key fob battery is dis-

charged, perform the procedure de-

scribed in “Access Key Fob – If Access

Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly”

�P402. In such a case, replace the

battery immediately. Refer to “Repla-

cing Battery of Access Key Fob”

�P458.

Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with Push-Button Start System)

146

(149,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Switching Power Status

s03bg02

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

The power status is switched every time

the push-button ignition switch is pressed.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Make sure the select lever is in neutral

(MT models) or the select lever in the “P”

position (CVT models).

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

without depressing the clutch pedal (MT

models) or brake pedal (CVT models).

Every time the button is pressed, the

power is switched in the sequence of

“OFF”, “ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”. When

the engine is stopped and the push-button

ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch illuminates in orange.

Power

status

Indicator color Operation

OFF Turned off

Power is turned

off.

ACC Orange

The following

systems can be

used:

audio and ac-

cessory power

outlet.

Orange

(while engine is

stopped)

All electrical

systems can be

used.

Turned off

(while engine is

running)

CAUTION

. To prevent the vehicle battery

from discharging, do not leave

the push-button ignition switch

in the “ON” or “ACC” position for

a long time.

. To avoid a malfunction, observe

the following precautions.

– Do not spill drinks or other

liquids on the push-button

ignition switch.

– Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch with a hand

that is soiled with oil or other

contaminants.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not operate smoothly, stop

the operation. Contact a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If the operation indicator on the

push-button ignition switch does

not illuminate even when the

instrument panel illumination is

turned on, have the vehicle in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer.

. If the vehicle was left in the hot

sun for a long time, the surface of

the push-button ignition switch

may get hot. Be careful not to

burn yourself.

NOTE

. When operating the push-button

ignition switch, firmly press it all the

way.

. If the push-button ignition switch is

pressed quickly, the power may not

turn on or off.

. If the indicator light on the push-

button ignition switch flashes in green

when the push-button ignition switch is

pressed, steering is locked. When this

– CONTINUED –

Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with Push-Button Start System)

147

Instruments and Controls

(150,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

occurs, press the push-button ignition

switch while turning the steering wheel

left and right.

! Battery drainage prevention func-

tion

s03bg0201

When the push-button ignition switch is left

in the “ACC” position for approximately 20

minutes or the “ON” position (the engine is

not running) for approximately 1 hour, the

push-button ignition switch will be auto-

matically switched to “OFF” to prevent the

battery from going dead. (In CVT models,

this function is activated when the select

lever is in the “P” position.)

& When Access Key Fob Does

Not Operate Properly

s03bg03

Refer to “Access Key Fob – If Access Key

Fob Does Not Operate Properly” �P402.

3-3. Hazard Warning Flasher

s03ab

The hazard warning flasher is used to warn

other drivers when you have to park your

vehicle under emergency conditions. The

hazard warning flasher works with the

ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

press the hazard warning flasher switch on

the instrument panel. All the turn signal

lights and the turn signal indicator lights

will flash. To turn off the flasher, press the

switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

3-4. Meters and Gauges

s03ad

NOTE

Liquid crystal displays are used in

some of the meters and gauges in the

combination meter. You will find their

indications hard to see if you wear

polarized glasses.

& Speedometer

s03ad03

The speedometer shows the vehicle

speed.

NOTE

The initial movement of the meter

needles and gauge needles that occurs

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position can be activated or

deactivated.

For details, refer to “General settings”

�P191 (11.6-inch display models) or

“General settings” �P203 (dual 7.0-

inch display models).

Hazard Warning Flasher

148

(151,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Tachometer

s03ad06

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module

to protect the engine from overrev-

ving. The engine will resume run-

ning normally after the engine speed

is reduced below the red zone.

NOTE

The initial movement of the meter

needles and gauge needles that occurs

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position can be activated or

deactivated.

For details, refer to “General settings”

�P191 (11.6-inch display models) or

“General settings” �P203 (dual 7.0-

inch display models).

& Odometer

s03ad04

1) TRIP RESET switch

2) Odometer

This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

NOTE

If you press the TRIP RESET switch

when the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the

odometer/trip meter will light up. The

indicators will turn off when the TRIP

RESET switch is not operated for

approximately 10 seconds.

& Double Trip Meter

s03ad05

1) TRIP RESET switch

2) Trip meter

This meter displays the two trip meters

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

The display can be switched as shown in

the following sequence by pressing the

TRIP RESET switch.

– CONTINUED –

Meters and Gauges

149

Instruments and Controls

(152,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

To reset the trip meter, select either the A

trip or B trip meter, then press and hold the

TRIP RESET switch.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

NOTE

. If the connection between the com-

bination meter and battery is broken for

any reason such as vehicle mainte-

nance or fuse replacement, the data

recorded on the trip meter will be lost.

. If you press the TRIP RESET switch

when the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the

odometer/trip meter will light up. It is

possible to switch between the A trip

meter and B trip meter indications while

the odometer/trip meter is lit up.

In addition, it is possible to reset the trip

meter by pressing and holding the TRIP

RESET switch.

The indicators will turn off when the

TRIP RESET switch is not operated for

approximately 10 seconds.

& Fuel Gauge

s03ad07

The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge

shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains

fuel.

The gauge may move slightly due to fuel

level movement in the tank (e.g., during

braking, turning or acceleration).

NOTE

. You will see the “

” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

lid is located on the right side of the

vehicle.

. If you press the TRIP RESET switch

while the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the

fuel gauge will light up and indicate the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

The gauge will turn off when the TRIP

RESET switch is not operated for

approximately 10 seconds.

& Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge

s03ad08

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine

coolant temperature when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary in

accordance with the outside temperature

and driving conditions.

Meters and Gauges

150

(153,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

We recommend that you drive moderately

until the pointer of the temperature gauge

reaches near the middle of the range.

Engine operation is optimum with the

engine coolant at this temperature range

and high revving operation when the

engine is not warmed up enough should

be avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal

operating range, safely stop the

vehicle as soon as possible.

Refer to “Engine Overheating”

�P397.

& Combination Meter Settings

s03ad16

Meter settings can be set on the center

information display. For details, perform

the procedures described in “General

settings” �P191 (11.6-inch display mod-

els) or “General settings” �P203 (dual

7.0-inch display models).

3-5. Illumination Brightness

Control

s03aj

The illumination brightness of the combi-

nation meter and center information dis-

play dims under the following conditions.

. The light switch is in the “

” or “ ”

position when the ambient light is dark.

. The light switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the headlights illuminate

automatically.

You can adjust the illumination brightness

for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

NOTE

. When the control dial is turned fully

upward, the illumination brightness

becomes the maximum and the auto-

matic dimming function does not work

at all.

. The brightness setting is not can-

celed even when the ignition switch is

turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

. The operation method of illumina-

tion brightness will differ depending

whether or not “Brightness Dial” in the

center information display is on. Refer

to the operation method indicated the

following table.

“Brightness Dial” is on.

Operational

item

Combi-

nation

meter

Center

informa-

tion dis-

play

Control dial Available Available

“Brightness”*

on the center

information

display

Not avail-

able

Not avail-

able

– CONTINUED –

Illumination Brightness Control

151

Instruments and Controls

(154,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

“Brightness Dial” is off.

Operational

item

Combi-

nation

meter

Center

informa-

tion dis-

play

Control dial Available

Not avail-

able

“Brightness”

on the center

information

display

Not avail-

able

Available

*1: When “Brightness Dial” is on,

“Brightness” on the center infor-

mation display is not available.

For details about “Brightness Dial” on/

off settings, refer to “General settings”

�P191 (11.6-inch display models) or

“General settings” �P203 (dual 7.0-

inch display models).

& Auto Dimmer Cancel Func-

tion

s03aj01

When the ambient light is bright, the

illumination brightness is set to the max-

imum regardless of the position of the

control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust

the illumination brightness by using the

control dial. When the ambient light is dark,

you can dim the illumination brightness as

described above.

The operational/non-operational setting

and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel

function can be changed by your SUBARU

dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

3-6. Warning and Indicator

Lights

s03ae

Several of the warning and indicator lights

illuminate momentarily and then go out

when the ignition switch is initially turned to

the “ON” position. This permits checking

the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position. For

the system check, the following lights

illuminate and turn off after several sec-

onds or after the engine has started:

: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt

warning light turns off only when the

driver fastens the seatbelt.)/Front pas-

senger’s seatbelt warning light (The

seatbelt warning light turns off only

when the front seat passenger fastens

the seatbelt.)

: Rear seatbelt warning light

: SRS airbag system warning light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator

/ : CHECK ENGINE warning light/

Malfunction indicator light

Warning and Indicator Lights

152

(155,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

/ : ABS warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

light

: TRACK mode indicator light

/ : Brake system warning light

: Electronic parking brake indicator

light (CVT models)

: Power steering warning light

: Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-

spec. models)

: Low fuel warning light

: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start

assist OFF indicator light (MT mod-

els)

: Automatic headlight beam leveler

warning light

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

& Seatbelt Warning Light

and Chime

s03ae01

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and passen-

ger’s seats, as required by current safety

standards.

! Driver’s and front passenger’s seats

s03ae0114

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver and

front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by

illuminating the warning lights in the loca-

tions indicated in the following illustration

and sounding a chime.

Driver’s seat

Front passenger’s seat

! Operation

s03ae011401

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the driver’s and/or front

passenger’s warning light will illuminate,

then it will blink for several seconds. If the

seatbelt of the driver’s seat is not fastened,

the warning chime may make a peep

sound.

NOTE

. If the driver’s and/or front passen-

ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is not fastened

while driving, the seatbelt warning

system operates as follows according

to the vehicle speed.

– The warning light will illuminate

when driving approximately 4 mph

(6 km/h) or less.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

153

Instruments and Controls

(156,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

– The warning light will blink, and

the warning chime will make a peep

sound when driving between ap-

proximately 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13

mph (20 km/h). The warning chime

will stop when the vehicle stops.

– The warning light will blink, and

the warning chime will sound loudly

when 15 seconds have elapsed

while driving between approxi-

mately 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph

(20 km/h).

– The warning light will blink, and

the warning chime will sound loudly

when driving approximately more

than 13 mph (20 km/h).

. The warning light will turn off and the

warning chime will stop when the

seatbelt is fastened.

. The seatbelt warning system can be

cancelled. However, when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position

after it is turned to the “OFF” position,

the warning system settings will be

restored. For details about the warning

cancellation, contact a SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the front

passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning

system for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The front passenger’s

seatbelt warning system monitors whether

or not there is a passenger on the front

passenger’s seat.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the

device from functioning correctly or

cause the device to fail.

. Do not install any accessory such

as a table or TV onto the seat-

back.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occu-

pant to place his/her hands or

legs on the front passenger’s

seatback, or allow him/her to pull

the seatback.

. Do not use front seats with their

backward-forward position and

seatback not being locked into

place securely. If any of them are

not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure,

refer to “Front Seats” �P30.

If the seatbelt warning system for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take

the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system and

its child occupant, although we strongly

recommend that all children sit in the rear

seat properly restrained.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth.

If still the seatbelt warning system for front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-

tions described above, immediately con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

Warning and Indicator Lights

154

(157,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Rear passenger’s seats

s03ae0115

Rear seatbelt warning light

1) Rear left seat

2) Rear center seat

3) Rear right seat

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, the seatbelt warning light and

chime reminds the rear passenger to

fasten their seatbelt by illuminating the

warning lights in the locations indicated in

the above illustration and sounding a

chime.

WARNING

. The driver must check that all the

passengers have fastened their

seatbelts properly since the seat-

belt warning system may not

detect passengers under the fol-

lowing circumstances.

– When cushions or child re-

straint systems, etc., are used.

– When a child or small adult is

sitting in the seat.

. Observe the following precau-

tions

– Do not apply any strong im-

pact to the rear seat.

– Do not fold the seatback for-

ward when objects are on the

seat.

– Do not spill liquid on the rear

seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it

off immediately.

– Do not remove or disassemble

the rear seat.

NOTE

. The seatbelt warning system of the

rear seat detects if the seat is occupied

by a passenger. Heavy cargo or large

pets on the rear seat may result in the

activation of the passenger seatbelt

warning light and chime. Fastening

the rear seatbelt prior to loading cargo

or large pets will avoid activating the

passenger seatbelt warning light and

chime.

. When folding the rear seat, ensure

that the seat is empty prior to folding.

Items caught between the seat bottom

and seatback, when folded, may da-

mage the seat surface or activate the

passenger seatbelt warning light and

chime.

! Operation

s03ae011501

If passengers in the rear seats do not

fasten their seatbelts while the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, the

seatbelt warning lights will illuminate or

blink to indicate that their seatbelts are not

fastened.

NOTE

. If the rear passenger’s seatbelt(s)

are/is still not fastened while driving,

the seatbelt warning system operates

as follows according to the vehicle

speed.

– The warning light will illuminate

when driving approximately 4 mph

(6 km/h) or less.

– When driving approximately be-

tween 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph

(20 km/h), if the seatbelts are not

fastened for 50 seconds, the seat-

belt warning lights will blink and a

warning chime will sound.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

155

Instruments and Controls

(158,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

The chime will make a peep sound

for 15 seconds, and it then will

become louder and continue for 35

seconds. The warning light will

blink for 50 seconds, then it will

illuminate steadily and the chime

will stop.

– When driving more than approxi-

mately 13 mph (20 km/h), if seatbelts

are not fastened for 35 seconds, the

warning lights of the unfastened

seatbelts will blink and a chime will

sound loudly. If the rear seatbelts

are not fastened after 35 seconds,

the blinking warning light will illu-

minate steadily and the chime will

stop. The warning lights will con-

tinue to illuminate until their seat-

belts are fastened.

. The warning light will turn off and the

warning chime will stop when the

seatbelt is fastened.

& SRS Airbag System

Warning Light

s03ae02

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, immedi-

ately stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-

less a technician checks and repairs

the system as needed, the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag

will not operate properly in the event

of a collision, which may result in

injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

For details about the components mon-

itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS

Airbag System Monitors” �P96.

& Front Passenger’s Frontal

Airbag ON and OFF Indica-

tors

s03ae03

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located as shown in the

illustration.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the

indicators illuminates depending on the

Warning and Indicator Lights

156

(159,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain off.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator will remain off while

the OFF indicator will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indicators

remain illuminated or off simultaneously

even after the system check period, the

system is malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-

spection.

& CHECK ENGINE

Warning Light/Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light

s03ae04

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light illumi-

nates while you are driving, have

your vehicle checked/repaired by

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible. Continued vehicle opera-

tion without having the emission

control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could cause

serious damage, which may not be

covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate

that there is at least one problem or

potential problem somewhere in the emis-

sion control system.

! If the light illuminates constantly

s03ae0401

If the light illuminates constantly while

driving or does not turn off after the engine

starts, an emission control system mal-

function has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light coming on

could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.

Remove the cap and retighten it until it

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with

the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap

will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/malfunction indicator light turn off

immediately. It may take several driving

trips. If the light does not turn off, take your

vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer

immediately.

! If the light is blinking

s03ae0402

If the light is blinking while driving, an

engine misfire condition has been de-

tected which may damage the emission

control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should conform to

the following instructions.

. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard acceleration.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-

function indicator light may stop blinking

and illuminate steadily after several driving

trips. You should have your vehicle

checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer

immediately.

& Charge Warning Light

s03ae05

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

157

Instruments and Controls

(160,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the drive belt. If the belt is loose,

broken or if the belt is in good condition but

the light remains illuminated, contact your

nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Oil Pressure Warning

Light

s03ae06

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

oil pressure warning light on. This

may cause serious engine damage.

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

& Engine Low Oil Level

Warning Indicator

s03ae58

This indicator appears when the engine oil

level decreases to the lower limit.

If the warning indicator appears, check the

engine oil level on a level surface. When

the engine oil level is not within the normal

range, refill with engine oil. Refer to

“Engine Oil” �P426. After adding or

changing the engine oil, warm up the

engine and stop it on a level surface, then

start the engine after a lapse of 1 minute or

more. Confirm that the warning indicator

has turned off after the engine has started.

If the warning indicator does not turn off

after refilling the engine oil, or the indicator

appears even though the engine oil level is

within the normal range, have the vehicle

checked by a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

. The oil level will be detected by the

system just after turning the ignition

switch to the “OFF” position. If the oil

level is below the lower limit when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the engine low oil level warn-

ing indicator will turn on.

. When the vehicle is parked on a

steep slope, the engine low oil level

warning indicator may not illuminate

even if the oil level is below the lower

limit to avoid erroneous lighting.

& AT OIL TEMP Warning

Light (CVT Models)

s03ae07

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the transmis-

sion fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im-

mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place

and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.

! Transmission control system warn-

ing

s03ae0701

If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes

after the engine has started, it may indicate

that the transmission control system is not

working properly. Contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer for service immediately.

& Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light (U.S.-

Spec. Models)

s03ae08

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate for approximately 2

seconds to check that the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning

properly. If there is no problem and all tires

are properly inflated, the light will go out.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

Warning and Indicator Lights

158

(161,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a

different size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label, you should determine the proper tire

inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low

tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-

tions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Should the warning light illuminate steadily

after blinking for approximately one min-

ute, have the system inspected by your

nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate

briefly after the ignition switch is

turned on or the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute, you should have

your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead, per-

form the following procedure. Other-

wise an accident involving serious

vehicle damage and serious perso-

nal injury could occur.

1) Keep driving straight ahead while

gradually reducing speed.

2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, refer to “Flat Tires” �P381.

When a wheel rim is replaced with-

out the original pressure sensor/

transmitter being transferred, the

Low tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking for

approximately one minute. This in-

dicates the TPMS is unable to moni-

tor all four road wheels. Contact

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting. If the

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

159

Instruments and Controls

(162,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

light illuminates steadily after blink-

ing for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked peri-

odically (at least monthly) using a

tire gauge. After any change to tire

pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-

itoring system will not re-check tire

inflation pressures until the vehicle

is first driven more than 20 mph (32

km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-

sures, increase the vehicle speed to

at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the

TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-

tion pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low pres-

sure threshold, the low tire pressure

warning light should turn off a few

minutes later. Therefore, be sure to

install the specified size for the front

and rear tires.

& ABS Warning Light

s03ae09

CAUTION

. If any of the following conditions

occur, we recommend that you

have the ABS repaired at the first

available opportunity by your

SUBARU dealer.

– The warning light does not

illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

– The warning light illuminates

when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position,

but it does not turn off even

after starting the vehicle.

– The warning light illuminates

during driving.

. When the warning light is on (and

brake system warning light is

off), the ABS function shuts

down; however, the conventional

brake system continues to oper-

ate normally.

The ABS warning light illuminates together

with the brake system warning light if the

EBD system malfunctions. For further

details of the EBD system malfunction

warning, refer to “Brake System Warning

Light” �P160.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following conditions,

the ABS may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains illumi-

nated after the engine has been started,

but it turns off while driving.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may illumi-

nate. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a malfunction. When

the battery becomes fully charged, the

light will turn off.

& Brake System Warn-

ing Light

s03ae10

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

Warning and Indicator Lights

160

(163,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

the light remains illuminated,

have the brakes inspected by a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

. If the brake system warning light

illuminates, the electronic park-

ing brake system may be mal-

functioning. Immediately stop

your vehicle in a safe location,

use tire stops under the tires to

prevent the vehicle from moving

and contact your SUBARU deal-

er. For details, refer to “Electro-

nic Parking Brake (CVT Models)”

�P325.

NOTE

. Even if the brake system warning

light illuminates, if the warning light

behavior is as described in the follow-

ing examples, the electronic parking

brake system is not malfunctioning.

– The warning light turns off when

the electronic parking brake is ap-

plied or released.

– The warning light turns off when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position again.

. The brake system warning light may

illuminate immediately after the engine

is started. However, it is not malfunc-

tioning if the warning light turns off

after the electronic parking brake is

released.

. The brake system warning light may

illuminate after the electronic parking

brake is frequently applied and re-

leased. However, the electronic parking

brake system is not malfunctioning if

the light turns off after a short period of

time.

. When the engine is started while the

electronic parking brake is applied/

released, the system may judge an

abnormal situation and the warning

light may illuminate. If the warning light

illuminates, turn the ignition switch

once to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position

and then restart the engine. Then,

apply/release the electronic parking

brake. If the warning light turns off,

the system will be restored.

This light has the following functions.

! Parking brake indicator (MT models)

s03ae1001

This light illuminates with the parking

brake applied while the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position. It turns off when the

parking brake is fully released.

! Brake fluid level warning

s03ae1002

This light illuminates when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of

the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position and with the

parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should

illuminate while driving (with the parking

brake fully released and with the ignition

switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place

and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid

level is below the “MIN” mark in the

reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have

the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU

dealer for repair.

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

s03ae1003

If the warning light remains on even though

the parking brake is released, the brake

fluid level may be low or there could be a

problem with the EBD system. Park the

vehicle in a safe place immediately and

contact a SUBARU dealer.

! Electronic brake booster warning

(models with the electronic brake

booster)

s03ae1009

The brake system warning light illuminates

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

161

Instruments and Controls

(164,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

when the electronic brake booster is

malfunctioning. If the warning light illumi-

nates, promptly park in a safe location as

soon as possible and contact your

SUBARU dealer.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning (CVT models)

s03ae1004

The brake system warning light illuminates

when the electronic parking brake system

is malfunctioning. If the warning light

illuminates, promptly park in a safe loca-

tion as soon as possible and contact your

SUBARU dealer.

The brake system warning light remains

illuminated when the parking brake cannot

be released even if the parking brake

switch is pushed. For details, refer to

“Electronic Parking Brake (CVT Models)”

�P325.

! Frequent operation warning

s03ae100403

The brake system warning light illuminates

and a chirp sound will be heard if the

parking brake switch is operated too

frequently. In this case, the operation of

the parking brake switch is restricted to

protect the electronic parking brake sys-

tem.

& Electronic Parking

Brake Indicator Light

(CVT Models)

s03ae85

! Parking brake indicator

s03ae8501

The light illuminates with the parking brake

applied while the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position. It turns off when

the parking brake is fully released.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

s03ae8502

WARNING

. When you release the electronic

parking brake while the engine is

running, the electronic parking

brake indicator light will turn off.

However, if the light still illumi-

nates, stop the vehicle in a safe

location immediately and have

the system inspected by a

SUBARU dealer.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

. If the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes, the elec-

tronic parking brake system may

be malfunctioning. Immediately

stop your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion, use tire stops under the tires

to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing and contact your SUBARU

dealer. For details, refer to “Elec-

tronic Parking Brake (CVT Mod-

els)” �P325.

NOTE

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the

electronic parking brake applied, the

electronic parking brake indicator light

remains illuminated for approximately

30 seconds and then turns off.

. When the electronic parking brake

switch is pulled to apply the electronic

parking brake while the ignition switch

is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the

electronic parking brake indicator light

illuminates, remains illuminated for

approximately 30 seconds and then

turns off.

. Even if the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes, if the warning

light behavior is as described in the

following examples, the electronic

parking brake system is not malfunc-

tioning.

Warning and Indicator Lights

162

(165,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

– The indicator light turns off when

the electronic parking brake is re-

leased.

. The electronic parking brake indica-

tor light may flash immediately after the

engine is started. However, it is not

malfunctioning if the indicator light

turns off after the electronic parking

brake is released.

. The electronic parking brake indica-

tor light may flash after the electronic

parking brake is frequently applied and

released. However, the electronic park-

ing brake system is not malfunctioning

if the light turns off after a short period

of time.

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes when the electronic parking brake

system is malfunctioning. If the indicator

light flashes, promptly park in a safe

location as soon as possible and contact

your SUBARU dealer.

The electronic parking brake indicator light

remains illuminated when the parking

brake cannot be released even if the

parking brake switch is pushed. For de-

tails, refer to “Electronic Parking Brake

(CVT Models)” �P325.

! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-

ing

s03ae850201

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound

will be heard if the parking brake switch is

operated when the parking brake cannot

be applied.

! Frequent operation warning

s03ae850202

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound

will be heard if the parking brake switch is

operated too frequently. In this case, the

operation of the parking brake switch is

restricted to protect the electronic parking

brake system.

NOTE

Wait until the indicator light turns off.

& Hill Start Assist Warn-

ing Light/Hill Start As-

sist OFF Indicator Light

(MT Models)

s03ae47

! Hill start assist warning light

s03ae4701

While the engine is running, if there are

any malfunctions in the Hill start assist

system, the warning light will illuminate.

WARNING

When the Hill start assist warning

light illuminates, have the vehicle

inspected at an authorized SUBARU

dealer.

! Hill start assist OFF indicator light

s03ae4702

While the Hill start assist system is

deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF

indicator light illuminates continuously to

inform the driver that the Hill start assist

system is not operational.

& Auto Vehicle Hold Indi-

cator Light (CVT Mod-

els)

s03ae94

CAUTION

If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator

light does not illuminate even when

“Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)” is

touched to activate the Auto Vehicle

Hold function, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunction-

ing.

This indicator illuminates when the Auto

Vehicle Hold is activated. This indicator

blinks while the vehicle is stopped by the

Auto Vehicle Hold function. For details,

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

163

Instruments and Controls

(166,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold function”

�P327.

& Low Fuel Warning Light

s03ae11

The low fuel warning light illuminates when

the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.3

US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal). It only

operates when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

illuminates. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

& Door Open Indicator

s03ae61

When any of the doors or the trunk lid is not

fully closed, the door open indicator

appears. This function is effective even if

the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF”

or “ACC” position or the key is removed

from the ignition switch (models without

“keyless access with push-button start

system”).

The open door is indicated by the corre-

sponding part of the door open indicator.

Always make sure this indicator does not

appear before you start to drive.

& Windshield Washer

Fluid Warning Light

s03ae42

This light appears when the fluid level in

the windshield washer fluid tank de-

creases to the lower limit (approximately

0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)).

& All-Wheel Drive Warn-

ing Light

s03ae13

WARNING

Continued driving with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage. If the AWD

warning light flashes, promptly park

in a safe location and then check

whether all four tires are the same

diameter and whether any of the

tires has a puncture or has lost air

pressure for some other reason.

NOTE

If the temporary spare tire is used, the

AWD warning light may flash. Use of the

temporary spare tire should therefore

be restricted to the minimum time

necessary. Replace the temporary

spare tire with a conventional tire as

soon as possible.

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

with tires of different diameters fitted on its

wheels or with the air pressure excessively

low in any of its tires.

& Power Steering Warn-

ing Light

s03ae53

While the engine is running, this warning

light illuminates when a malfunction has

been detected in the electric power steer-

ing system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

Warning and Indicator Lights

164

(167,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn-

ing the steering wheel during parallel

parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period of

time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However, this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too frequently,

that may result in a malfunction of the

power steering control system.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol Warning Light/Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control

Operation Indicator

Light

s03ae14

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

s03ae1401

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem provides its ABS control

through the electrical circuit of the

ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is

inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system becomes unable to

provide ABS control. As a result, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

becomes inoperative, causing the

warning light to illuminate. Although

both the Vehicle Dynamics Control

and ABS are inoperative in this case,

the ordinary functions of the brake

system are still available. You will be

safe while driving in this condition,

but drive carefully and have your

vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

NOTE

. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system itself mal-

functions, the warning light only illumi-

nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System) remains fully opera-

tional.

. The warning light illuminates when

the electronic control system of the

ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

malfunctions.

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-

ing light, ABS warning light, and brake

system warning light illuminate simul-

taneously if the EBD system malfunc-

tions. For further details of the EBD

system malfunction warning, refer to

“Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning” �P161.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably inoperative under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The warning light illuminates while the

vehicle is running.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

165

Instruments and Controls

(168,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following examples,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately and remains off.

. The warning light illuminates after

the engine has started and turns off

while the vehicle is subsequently being

driven.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but turns off immediately and

remains off.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light

s03ae1402

The indicator light flashes during activation

of the skid suppression function and during

activation of the traction control function.

NOTE

. The light may remain illuminated for

a short period of time after the engine

has been started, especially in cold

weather. This does not indicate the

existence of a problem. The light

should turn off as soon as the engine

has warmed up.

. The indicator light illuminates when

the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under the follow-

ing condition. Have your vehicle checked

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not turn off even after the

lapse of several minutes (the engine has

warmed up) after the engine has started.

Warning and Indicator Lights

166

(169,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light/TRACK Mode

Indicator Light

s03ae57

The indicator light shows the activated/deactivated conditions as follows.

Activated/deactivated status for each function

Traction Control

Vehicle

Dynamics

Control system

ABS

Indicator light

Turn off Activated Activated Activated

Deactivated Activated Activated

Deactivated Deactivated

Activated

For details about the Traction Control and Vehicle Dynamics Control system, refer to

“Vehicle Dynamics Control System” �P319.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-

dicator light

s03ae5702

This light illuminates when the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF switch is operated

to select the TRACK mode or the Vehicle

Dynamic Control OFF mode. For details,

refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control Sys-

tem” �P319.

NOTE

. The light may remain illuminated for

a while after the engine has been

started, especially in cold weather. This

does not indicate the existence of a

problem. The light should turn off as

soon as the engine has warmed up.

. The indicator light illuminates when

the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under the follow-

ing conditions. Have your vehicle checked

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not illuminate when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The light does not turn off even after the

lapse of several minutes (the engine has

warmed up) after the engine has started.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

167

Instruments and Controls

(170,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! TRACK mode indicator light

s03ae5703

The light illuminates when the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed

briefly to select the TRACK mode. For

details, refer to “TRACK mode” �P321.

& Warning Chimes and Warning

Indicator of the Keyless Ac-

cess with Push-Button Start

System (If Equipped)

s03ae55

Access key warning indicator

The keyless access with push-button start

system is equipped with a warning chime

and the access key warning indicator in

order to minimize improper operations and

help protect your vehicle from theft.

When the warning chime sounds and/or

the warning indicator appears, take the

appropriate action.

You cannot turn the warning chimes off.

However, the volume setting of the outside

warning chime can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indica-

tor on the push-button ignition

switch is flashing in green when

starting the engine. This indicates

the status that the steering wheel is

not released and could result in an

accident involving serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

. When starting the engine again

after the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in green, if the operation

indicator is still flashing in green,

there could be a steering lock

malfunction. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in orange, contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

. Even when the access key fob is

within the operating ranges inside the

vehicle, the access key warning for

engine start may be provided depend-

ing on the status of the access key fob

and the environmental conditions.

. When the access key fob is taken out

of the vehicle through an open window,

the access key takeout warning or

passenger access key takeout warning

will not be provided.

! List of warnings

s03ae5504

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings

occurs even if the access key warn-

ing indicator does not appear, take

the appropriate action.

Warning and Indicator Lights

168

(171,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indica-

tor on push-button

ignition switch

Status Action

Ding, ding ...

(intermittent)

— —

The driver’s door is opened while the push-

button ignition switch is “ACC” (in CVT

models, when the select lever is in the “P”

position).

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.

When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch

the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.

The push-button ignition switch is switched

to “OFF” while the driver’s door is open.

Close the driver’s door.

Ding

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Lockout warning:

The doors are locked by following methods

when an access key fob is left in the car.

. The door is closed when the lock lever of

the door is in the lock position.

. The door is closed when the power door

locking switch is in the lock position.

Take out the access key fob from the vehicle,

and lock the doors.

The doors cannot be locked while the access

key fob is inside the vehicle.

A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors will

be unlocked.

—

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Access key lock-in warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while the

push-button ignition switch is “OFF” and the

access key fob is inside the vehicle.

Take out the access key fob from the vehicle,

and lock the doors.

If the access key fob is inside the vehicle, the

doors cannot be locked.

—

Beep, beep,

beep, beep,

beep (5 times)

—

Door ajar warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while the

ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and

one of the doors is opened.

Close the doors securely and lock them.

If one of the doors is opened, the doors

cannot be locked.

Ding

Long beep (60

seconds max.)

—

Power warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while you

are carrying the access key fob, the push-

button ignition switch is in a position other

than “OFF” (in CVT models, when the select

lever is in the “P” position).

Return the access key fob inside the vehicle,

or switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”.

If the push-button ignition switch is not

switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be

locked.

Ding, ding ...

(7 seconds)

— —

Access key warning:

The vehicle is driven while the access key fob

is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and drive the

vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

169

Instruments and Controls

(172,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indica-

tor on push-button

ignition switch

Status Action

Ding — —

Access key warning for engine start:

The push-button ignition switch is pressed

while the access key fob is not inside the

vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and press the

push-button ignition switch.

Ding

Beep, beep,

beep (3 times)

—

Access key takeout warning:

The driver exits the vehicle with the access

key fob and closes the driver’s door while the

push-button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF” (in CVT models, when the

select lever is in the “P” position).

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.

Ding

Beep, beep,

beep (3 times)

—

Passenger access key takeout warning:

A fellow passenger exits the vehicle with the

access key fob and closes a door other than

the driver’s door while the push-button

ignition switch is in a position other than

“OFF”.

Return the access key fob to inside the

vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”.

Long beep

(continuous)

Long beep

(continuous)

—

Access key takeout without “P” position

warning (CVT models):

The driver exits the vehicle with the access

key fob and closes the driver’s door while the

push-button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P” position,

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Long beep

(continuous)

— —

Select lever position warning (CVT mod-

els):

. Case 1: The engine is turned off by

pressing the push-button ignition switch

while the select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

. Case 2: The driver’s door is opened

while the push-button ignition switch is in

a position other than “OFF” and the

select lever is in a position other than the

“P” position.

. Case 1: Start the engine, shift the select

lever to the “P” position, switch the push-

button ignition switch to “OFF” and exit

the vehicle.

. Case 2: Shift the select lever to the “P”

position, switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Warning and Indicator Lights

170

(173,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indica-

tor on push-button

ignition switch

Status Action

Ding — — The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.

Ding —

Flashes in green

(15 seconds max.)

Steering lock warning:

The engine start procedure is performed, but

the steering is still locked.

While turning the steering wheel right and left

lightly, depress the brake pedal and press the

push-button ignition switch.

Ding — Flashes in orange

System malfunction warning:

A malfunction is detected in the power

system or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and

have the vehicle inspected.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

171

Instruments and Controls

(174,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Security Indicator Light

s03ae16

This indicator light shows the status of the

alarm system. It also indicates operation of

the immobilizer system.

! Alarm system

s03ae1601

It blinks to show the driver the operational

status of the alarm system. For detailed

information, refer to “Alarm System”

�P127.

! Immobilizer system

s03ae1602

The security indicator light starts blinking

in the following conditions.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Immediately after the push-button igni-

tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.

. Immediately after the driver’s door is

opened or closed when all of the following

conditions are met.

– The push-button ignition switch is in

the “ON” or “ACC” position.

– The engine is not running.

In the event that an unauthorized key is

used (for example, the key is unregistered

or the ID code does not match), the power

is not switched to “ON” and the security

indicator light continues blinking.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

. Approximately 60 seconds after the

ignition switch is turned from the “ON”

position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

. Immediately after the key is pulled out.

If the indicator light does not blink in the

above conditions, it may indicate that

immobilizer system may be malfunction-

ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for

example, an unauthorized duplicate) is

used, the security indicator light illumi-

nates. For details about the immobilizer

system, refer to “Immobilizer” �P117.

NOTE

. The security indicator light remains

off in the following conditions. It means

that the matching of the ID code is

completed and the immobilizer system

is deactivated, and it does not indicate

a malfunction.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

– While the engine is running

– The push-button ignition switch

has been turned to the “ON” or

“ACC” position and the driver’s

door has not been opened or closed

Models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

– While the engine is running

– For approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned

from the “ON” position to the “ACC”

or “LOCK” position

– When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position

. Even if a malfunction occurs, such

as the security indicator light flashes

irregularly, it will not affect the func-

tionality of the immobilizer system.

Warning and Indicator Lights

172

(175,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& SI-DRIVE Indicator Light (If

Equipped)

s03ae52

1) Sport (S) mode

2) Intelligent (I) mode

3) Sport Sharp (S#) mode

This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE

mode.

For details of SI-DRIVE modes, refer to

“SI-DRIVE” �P311.

& Drive Mode Select Indicator

Light (If Equipped)

s03ae51

1) Sport

2) Sport+

3) Individual

4) Comfort

5) Normal

This light indicates the current Drive Mode.

For details of Drive Mode Select, refer to

“Drive Mode Select” �P313.

& Select Lever/Gear Position

Indicator

s03ae43

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Select lever/gear position indicator

This indicator shows the position of the

shift lever (MT models)/select lever (CVT

models).

For CVT models, when the manual mode

is selected, the gear position indicator,

which shows the current gear selection,

and the available upshift/downshift indica-

tor will light up. Refer to “Selection of

Manual Mode” �P309.

For models with SI-DRIVE, when the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode is selected, the gear

position indicator, which shows the current

gear selection, will light up. Refer to

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

173

Instruments and Controls

(176,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

“SI-DRIVE” �P311.

For models with Drive Mode Select, when

the Sport+ mode is selected, the gear

position indicator, which shows the current

gear selection, will light up. Refer to “Drive

Mode Select” �P313.

NOTE

. For models with SI-DRIVE, when

cruise control is set while the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode is selected, the dis-

play in the meter will switch from the

selected gear position to “D”.

. For models with Drive Mode Select,

when cruise control is set while the

Sport+ mode is selected, the display in

the meter will switch from the selected

gear position to “D”.

& Turn Signal Indicator

Lights

s03ae20

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Refer to “Replacing Bulbs” �P452.

& High Beam Indicator

Light

s03ae21

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also illuminates when

operating the headlight flasher.

& High Beam Assist Indi-

cator (If Equipped)

s03ae83

This indicator appears when the high

beam assist function is activated. For

details about the high beam assist func-

tion, refer to “High Beam Assist Function”

�P220.

& Automatic Headlight

Beam Leveler Warning

Light

s03ae33

This light illuminates when the automatic

headlight beam leveler does not operate

normally.

If this light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off approximately 3 seconds after

turning the ignition switch to the “ON”

position, have your vehicle inspected at

your SUBARU dealer.

& LED Headlight Warning

Light

s03ae76

This light illuminates if the LED headlights

malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF Indicator

Light (If Equipped)

s03ae89

This light illuminates when the Steering

Responsive Headlight function is off. For

details about the on/off setting, refer to

“Car settings” �P195.

& Steering Responsive

Headlight Warning

Light (If Equipped)

s03aeb2

The light flashes when a malfunction

occurs in the Steering Responsive Head-

light. Refer to “Steering Responsive Head-

light (SRH)” �P226.

& Headlight Indicator

Light

s03ae24

This indicator light illuminates under the

following conditions.

. The light switch is turned to the “

” or

“

” position.

. The light switch is in the “AUTO”

Warning and Indicator Lights

174

(177,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

position and the headlights illuminate

automatically.

& Front Fog Light Indica-

tor Light (If Equipped)

s03ae25

This indicator light illuminates while the

front fog lights are illuminated.

& Cruise Control Indica-

tor (If Equipped)

s03ae22

This indicator appears when the cruise

control main button is pressed to activate

the cruise control function. For details,

refer to “To Set Cruise Control” �P340.

If this light blinks, do not use the cruise

control. In addition, if it blinks frequently,

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection.

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light illumi-

nates, the cruise control indicator

flashes at the same time. At this

time, avoid driving at high speed and

have your vehicle inspected at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

& BSD/RCTA Warning In-

dicator (If Equipped)

s03ae80

This warning indicator appears on the

combination meter display (color LCD)

when the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) or

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) is mal-

functioning for any reason. For further

details, refer to “BSD/RCTA Warning In-

dicator” �P349. If this indicator remains

displayed, have your vehicle inspected by

your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& BSD/RCTA OFF Indica-

tor (If Equipped)

s03ae86

This indicator appears on the combination

meter display (color LCD) when “BSD/

RCTA” is touched to deactivate the BSD

(Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear

Cross Traffic Alert), or when the BSD/

RCTA is suspended temporarily. For de-

tails, refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator”

�P348.

& Icy Road Surface

Warning Indicator

s03ae82

When the outside temperature is 378F

(38C) or less, the icy road surface warning

indicator will illuminate to inform the driver

that the road surface may be frozen.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the tem-

perature may not be indicated correctly

or the update may be delayed in the

following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example: when

going in and out of an underground

parking area or when passing

through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period of

time

. The icy road surface warning indi-

cator should be treated only as a guide.

Be sure to check the condition of the

road surface before driving.

. Once the icy road surface warning

indicator appears, it will not disappear

unless the outside temperature has

increased to 418F (58C) or higher.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and Indicator Lights

175

Instruments and Controls

(178,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& RAB Warning Indi-

cator (If Equipped)

s03ae91

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunc-

tions. Refer to “Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing (RAB) System” �P352.

& RAB OFF Indicator (If

Equipped)

s03ae92

This indicator illuminates when the Re-

verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is

turned OFF, or when the Reverse Auto-

matic Braking (RAB) system is suspended

temporarily. Refer to “Reverse Automatic

Braking (RAB) System” �P352.

& Sonar Audible Alarm

OFF Indicator (If

Equipped)

s03ae93

This indicator illuminates when the Sonar

Audible Alarm is turned OFF. For the

setting procedure, refer to “Car settings”

�P195.

& Electric Damper Sys-

tem Warning Light (If

Equipped)

s03aeb8

This light illuminates if the Electric Damper

System malfunction.

WARNING

When the Electric Damper System

warning light illuminates, have the

vehicle inspected at an authorized

SUBARU dealer.

3-7. Combination Meter Dis-

play (Color LCD)

s03bn

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the

combination meter display (color

LCD) while the vehicle is in motion.

When operation of the combination

meter display (color LCD) interferes

with your ability to concentrate on

driving, stop the vehicle before

performing operations on the

screen. Also, do not concentrate on

the display while driving. Doing so

may cause you to look away from the

road and could result in an accident.

Various information will be shown on the

combination meter display (color LCD).

Also, a warning message will appear on

the display if a malfunction is detected. In

addition, several settings for the displayed

content can be performed.

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

176

(179,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Combination meter display (color LCD)

1) Meter information screen (Refer to “Me-

ter Information Screen” �P178.)

2) Warning screen (Refer to “Warning

Screen” �P178.)/Basic screen (Refer to

“Basic Screens” �P181.)

3) EyeSight screen*

4) Digital speed screen (Refer to “Digital

Speed Screen” �P184.)

5) Telltale screen (Refer to “Telltale Screen”

�P180.)

6) Select lever/gear position indicator (Re-

fer to “Select Lever/Gear Position Indi-

cator” �P173.)/Gear position indicator

(MT models) (Refer to “Select Lever/

Gear Position Indicator” �P173.)

7) SI-DRIVE indicator (if equipped) (Refer

to “SI-DRIVE Indicator Light” �P173.)/

Drive Mode Select indicator light (Refer

to “Drive Mode Select Indicator Light”

�P173.)

8) Odometer (Refer to “Odometer”

�P149.)/Double trip meter (Refer to

“Double Trip Meter” �P149.)

*: For details, refer to the separate EyeSight

Owner’s Manual.

NOTE

For the cruise control function of

models without the EyeSight system,

refer to “Cruise Control” �P339.

& Basic Operation

s03bn01

Control switches

By operating or of the control

switches, the screens can be changed.

If there are some useful messages, such

as vehicle information, warning informa-

tion, etc., they will interrupt the current

screen, and appear on the display accom-

panied by a beep. If such a screen is

displayed, take proper action according to

the message shown on the screen.

The warning screen will return to the

original screen after a few seconds. While

the

information reminder is shown on

the display, it may be possible to display

– CONTINUED –

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

177

Instruments and Controls

(180,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

the warning screen again. To recall the

message marked with

on the display,

pull the

switch on the steering wheel

toward you.

& Welcome Screen (Opening

Animation) and Good-Bye

(Ending Animation) Screen

s03bn08

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen

are motion graphic displayed on the

combination meter display and center

information display upon entering and

exiting the vehicle.

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed after unlocking the door, the wel-

come screen (opening animation) will

appear on the combination meter display

(color LCD) for approximately 20 seconds.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combination

meter display (color LCD) gradually turns

off by showing good-bye screen (ending

animation).

NOTE

. The welcome screen and the good-

bye screen may differ in the actual

words and appearance.

. The basic screen will be shown

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position while the welcome

screen is displayed.

. Once the welcome screen appears, it

takes a certain period of time to display

it again.

. If the ignition switch is operated

after unlocking the driver’s door, the

welcome screen will not appear even

when the driver’s door is opened and

closed.

. The welcome screen will disappear

when you lock the driver’s door by

using the remote keyless entry system

(all models) or the keyless access

function (if equipped) while the wel-

come screen is displayed.

. The welcome screen including the

audio/navigation unit can be set to on

or off.

. The welcome screen can be set to on

or off. For details, refer to “General

settings” �P191 (11.6-inch display

models) or “General settings” �P203

(dual 7.0-inch display models).

. The good-bye screen can be set to

on or off. For details, refer to “General

settings” �P191 (11.6-inch display

models) or “General settings” �P203

(dual 7.0-inch display models).

& Warning Screen

s03bn05

Example of warning

If there is a warning message or a

maintenance notification, it will appear on

combination meter display (color LCD).

Take the appropriate actions based on the

messages indicated.

& Meter Information Screen

s03bn12

The meter information screen can be

changed. For details, refer to “General

settings” �P191 (11.6-inch display mod-

els) or “General settings” �P203 (dual

7.0-inch display models).

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

178

(181,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! ECO gauge

s03bn1201

The ECO gauge shows the difference

between the average rate of fuel con-

sumption since the trip meter was last

reset and the current rate of fuel consump-

tion.

The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel

efficiency as shown in the following chart.

Displayed unit

Needle position

“+” side “−” side

MPG Better Poorer

l/100km Poorer

Better

NOTE

. The ECO gauge shows only an

approximate indication.

. After resetting the trip meter, the

average rate of fuel consumption is not

shown until driving 0.6 miles (1 km).

Until that time, the ECO gauge does not

operate.

! Clock and temperature

s03bn1202

This screen displays the clock and outside

temperature.

For details about clock setting, refer to

“Clock” �P214.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the tem-

perature may not be indicated correctly

or the update may be delayed in the

following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example: when

going in and out of an underground

parking area or when passing

through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period of

time

– CONTINUED –

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

179

Instruments and Controls

(182,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Compass (if equipped)

s03bn1203

The direction of the vehicle is displayed.

! Driving range on remaining fuel

s03bn1204

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel

is only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

the remaining fuel, so you must im-

mediately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

& Telltale Screen

s03bn09

1) Telltale screen

When the corresponding situation occurs,

the following telltales will be displayed on

the telltale screen.

NOTE

. When there is warning information

to display, it will be displayed in five

warning indicators, starting on the left

in ascending order of severity.

. If there are 6 or more warning

messages to display, the indicators will

be displayed in sequential order.

Mark Name Page

Door open indicator

light

164

LED headlight warning

light

174

High beam assist indi-

cator light (if equipped)

174

Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF indicator

light (if equipped)

174

Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light

(if equipped)

174

Engine low oil level

warning indicator

158

AT OIL TEMP warning

light (CVT models)

158

All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light

164

RAB warning indicator

(if equipped)

176

RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)

176

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

180

(183,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Mark Name Page

BSD/RCTA warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

175

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator (if equipped)

175

Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light

174

Windshield washer fluid

warning light

164

Icy road surface warn-

ing indicator

175

TRACK mode indicator

light

167

Electric Damper Sys-

tem warning light (if

equipped)

176

& Basic Screens

s03bn06

By operating the or switch on the

steering wheel, you can change the screen

that is always displayed.

Average fuel consumption screen:

AVG: Average fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter was

last reset.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel

is only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

the remaining fuel, so you must im-

mediately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

Current fuel consumption screen:

: Current fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel

is only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

the remaining fuel, so you must im-

mediately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

– CONTINUED –

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

181

Instruments and Controls

(184,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Driving information screen:

: Journey time

: Journey distance

This screen displays the journey time (the

time that has elapsed since the ignition

switch was turned to the “ON” position)

and journey distance (the distance that

has been driven since the ignition switch

was turned to the “ON” position).

TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):

This screen displays each tire pressure.

When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire

and the tire pressure will be displayed on

the screen in yellow.

NOTE

. The tire pressure values are dis-

played several minutes after driving.

. You can set the tire pressure units.

For details about setting the units, refer

to “General settings” �P191 (11.6-inch

display models) or “General settings”

�P203 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

. Once the tire pressure monitoring

system detects the low tire pressure,

the tire pressure values will display in

yellow until the system detects the

normal tire pressure.

. Immediately adjust the tire pressure

when the warning light illuminates.

When the tire pressure monitoring

system detects the adjusted tire pres-

sure, the warning light will turn off and

the tire pressure values will turn to

white.

. For information about the specified

value of the air pressure, refer to

“Tires” �P468.

Compass screen (if equipped):

The direction of the vehicle is displayed.

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

182

(185,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Navigation screen (if equipped):

When the route guidance is set in the

navigation system, this item shows the

navigation route information. For details

about the navigation system, refer to the

separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-

ual.

Audio screen:

The audio screen shows the status of

audio information. For details about the

audio system, refer to the separate navi-

gation/audio Owner’s Manual.

Clock and outside temperature screen:

This screen displays the clock and outside

temperature. For details about clock

setting, refer to “Clock” �P214.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the tem-

perature may not be indicated correctly

or the update may be delayed in the

following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example: when

going in and out of an underground

parking area or when passing

through a tunnel)

– CONTINUED –

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

183

Instruments and Controls

(186,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period of

time

Boost pressure screen:

This screen displays the boost pressure.

& Digital Speed Screen

s03bn11

1) Speed limit indicator (if equipped)

2) Vehicle speed

This screen displays the current vehicle

speed.

3-8. Center Information Dis-

play (CID)

s03bs

WARNING

Always pay attention to safe driving

when operating the center informa-

tion display while the vehicle is in

motion. When operation of the cen-

ter information display is disturbing

your awareness and ability to con-

centrate on driving, stop the vehicle

in a safe place before performing

operations on the display. Also, do

not concentrate on the display while

driving. Doing so could result in an

accident.

& Features

s03bs01

All information is displayed on the center

information display, including vehicle set-

tings, vehicle status, navigation system (if

equipped) operation, audio operation, and

climate control operation.

Center Information Display (CID)

184

(187,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Items

Page for

11.6-inch

display

models

Page for

dual 7.0-

inch display

models

Interruption

screen

185

Vehicle status and

maintenance in-

formation

187 208

Vehicle settings 191 203/206

Climate control

operations

191 203

Rear view camera 334

Navigation system

Refer to the navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual.

Audio/telephone

Refer to the navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual.

EyeSight

Refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for

the EyeSight system.

The center information display can also be

used to set and initialize the center

information display itself.

NOTE

. When the vehicle is in motion,

certain functions and selections may

not be available.

. The language and units for both the

center information display and the

combination meter display (color LCD)

can be changed. For details, refer to

“General settings” �P191 (11.6-inch

display models) or “General settings”

�P203 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

. The images displayed in this Own-

er’s Manual are sample images. The

actual image may vary depending on

the region and vehicle specifications.

& Welcome Screen

s03bs02

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen

are motion graphic displayed on the

combination meter display and center

information display upon entering and

exiting the vehicle.

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed, the welcome screen will appear for

a short time.

NOTE

. The welcome screen will disappear

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position while the welcome

screen is shown.

. The welcome screen can be turned

on or off. For details, refer to “General

settings” �P191 (11.6-inch display

models) or “General settings” �P203

(dual 7.0-inch display models).

. For a certain period of time after the

welcome screen has once appeared, it

may not appear again even when the

driver’s door is opened and closed.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

& Good-Bye Screen

s03bs08

The good-bye screen will be displayed

under the following conditions.

. The driver’s door is opened after the

ignition switch is put in the “OFF” position.

. 3 minutes have passed after the ignition

switch is put in the “OFF” position with the

driver’s door closed.

. 10 minutes have passed when the

hands-free phone is used after the ignition

switch is put in the “OFF” position.

. The battery voltage is low when the

ignition switch is put in the “OFF” position.

& Interruption Screen

s03bs03

Useful messages, such as reminders,

weather information (if equipped) and

traffic information (if equipped) may inter-

rupt the current screen and appear on the

display accompanied by a beep. Take the

proper action according to the message.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

185

Instruments and Controls

(188,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Touch Screen Operations

s03bs04

The center information display has a touch

screen. Operations are performed by

touching the touch screen directly.

! Touch

s03bs0401

Quickly touch and release once.

! Drag

s03bs0402

Touch the screen and move the screen to

the desired position.

! Swipe

s03bs0403

Quickly move the screen by swiping with

your finger.

NOTE

Swipe operations may not be per-

formed smoothly in high altitudes.

& 11.6-Inch Display Models

s03bs05

NOTE

For dual 7.0-inch display models, refer

to “Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models”

�P202.

Center Information Display (CID)

186

(189,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Touch screen

s03bs0501

1) HOME icon (Refer to “HOME icon”

�P191.)

2) Status bar (Refer to “Status bar” �P187.)

3) Information bar (Refer to “Information

bar” �P187.)

4) Main screen (Refer to “Main screen”

�P191.)

5) Driver profiles icon (Refer to “Driver

profiles icon” �P191.)

6) Climate control screen (Refer to “Climate

control screen” �P191.)

7) Car settings icon (Refer to “Car settings

icon” �P189.)

While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the touch panel will activate.

! Status bar

s03bs050101

The outside temperature and clock are

displayed on the status bar.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature around the

sensor. However, the temperature may

not be indicated correctly or the update

may be delayed in the following condi-

tions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example: when

going in and out of an underground

parking area or when passing

through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period of

time

. The temperature unit cannot be

changed.

. The clock can be displayed in either

12-hour display or 24-hour display. For

details, refer to “Clock” �P214.

. Touch the clock on the status bar to

display the clock setting screen. Refer

to “Clock” �P214.

. For details about Bluetooth device

information, refer to the navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual.

! Information bar

s03bs050102

Swipe the information bar or touch or

on the information bar to switch the item

displayed.

Audio screen:

The screen of the currently selected audio

source is displayed.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

187

Instruments and Controls

(190,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

For details about how to use the audio set,

refer to the separate navigation/audio

Owner’s Manual.

Navigation screen (models with naviga-

tion system):

The directions to the destination are

displayed on the screen.

NOTE

When a destination is not set in the

navigation system, the compass orien-

tation, street name and speed limit

remain displayed on the screen.

Favorite screen:

Favorite screen

This screen displays up to three optional

pieces of information that can be selected

from the following items.

Item Details

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil temperature

Average vehicle speed

Accelerator opening ratio

Item Details

Vehicle posture

Direction of the vehicle*

Weather information for the

next three hours*

Weather information for the

next six hours*

Posted speed limit of the

road you are currently driv-

ing on*

Calendar

Nothing is displayed.

*1: If equipped

*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio

NOTE

Some items may not be shown depend-

ing on the model and specifications.

The items shown on the favorite screen

can be changed. For details, refer to

“Favorite Widgets” �P200.

Center Information Display (CID)

188

(191,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Weather information screen (if

equipped):

NOTE

. When all of the following conditions

are satisfied, weather information is

displayed.

– The vehicle is equipped with an

audio and navigation system for

SiriusXM satellite radio.

– The SiriusXM satellite radio sub-

scription is active.

. The weather forecast for the set

destination remains displayed until a

new destination is set or until the

destination is reached.

. Depending on the reception timing

of XM, the weather information may be

delayed.

! Main screen

s03bs050103

For details about the following menu, refer

to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

. Radio

. Media

. Phone

. Map

. Apps

. My Subaru

. SUBARU STARLINK

. Add Shortcut

! Car settings icon

s03bs050104

Touch to display the items that are

changeable while driving.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

189

Instruments and Controls

(192,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting procedure

1st menu 2nd menu

Vehicle Control

DRIVE MODE SE-

LECT*

Comfort/Normal/Sport/Sport+/Individual 313 199

Auto Vehicle Hold

(AVH)*

ON/OFF 327 199

Steering Responsive

Headlights (SRH)*

ON/OFF 226 199

Cruise Control Accel-

eration Characteris-

tics*

Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3 (Standard)/Lv.4 (Dy-

namic)

—

Driving Assistance

Pre-Collision Brak-

ing*

Setting ON/Setting OFF

—

Lane Departure Pre-

vention Function*

All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function

Only/Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

BSD/RCTA*

ON/OFF 348 199

Others

Warning Volume Min/Mid/Max 347, 361 and *

—

Units km, km/h, Liter/Miles, MPH, Gallon 148 and 176

199

*1: If equipped

*2: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

Center Information Display (CID)

190

(193,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Driver profiles icon

s03bs050105

Touch (driver profiles icon) to confirm

the driver’s information. For details, refer

to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

! HOME icon

s03bs050106

Touch (HOME) to display the top menu.

! Climate control screen

s03bs050107

The climate control status is shown on the

screen.

1) Set temperature indicator (driver’s side)

2) SYNC mode indicator

3) Climate control ON/OFF icon

4) Airflow mode

5) Climate control mode

6) Air inlet selection

7) Customizable icon

8) Set temperature indicator (front passen-

ger’s side)

9) Seat heater indicator*

(front passen-

ger’s side)

10) Fan speed indicator

11) Seat heater indicator*

(driver’s side)

*1: If equipped

When operating the climate control sys-

tem, the main screen switches to the

climate control screen. For details, refer

to “Climate Control Panel” �P248.

! Main screen

s03bs0502

To display the main screen, touch

(HOME).

In this Owner’s Manual, the following

settings will be explained. For details

about other items, refer to the separate

navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.

– “Settings” ? “General”

– “Settings” ? “Car”

– “Car Info”

! General settings

s03bs050201

Set the time and display general items.

1. Touch (HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. Select the preferred menu.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

191

Instruments and Controls

(194,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting proce-

dure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Clock

Time Setting Auto/Manual

214

Time Zone*

AUTO/Hawaii/Alaska/Pacific/

Mountain/Central/Eastern/Atlantic/

Newfoundland/Guam

199

Daylight Saving Time*

AUTO/ON (+1 hour)/OFF 199

Clock Format 12H/24H 199

Display

Display Off Turn the screen off. — 199

Brightness Dial ON/OFF 151 199

Brightness/Contrast

Set and adjust the brightness and

contrast of the display.

199 199

Wi-Fi Settings

Wi-Fi ON/OFF

—

Connected to: Select the registered devise.

Available Wi-Fi Networks Add

Wi-Fi Protected Setup PIN Setup/Push Button Setup

Registered Wi-Fi Networks —

Wi-Fi Hotspot — ON/OFF *

Center Information Display (CID)

192

(195,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting proce-

dure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Reminder Screen

Maintenance ON/OFF

185

199

Birthday ON/OFF 199

Anniversary ON/OFF 199

Meter Screen

Gauge Initial Movement ON/OFF 148 199

Meter Information Screen

Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/Clock/

Compass*

/Gas Range

178 199

Turn by Turn Screen Interrup-

tion*

ON/OFF 181 199

Peak Value Reset OK/Cancel 181 199

Camera

Rear Camera Delay Control*

ON/OFF 335 199

Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF 337 199

Climate Control Customize Climate Button A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recirculation 257 199

Language — English/Français/Español 176 and 184 199

Tire Pressure Units*

— kPa/PSi 181 199

Home Screen Short-

cuts

— ON/OFF *

199

Welcome Screen — ON/OFF 178 199

Goodbye Screen — ON/OFF 178 199

Favorite Widgets — Set a favorite widget from the list. 187 200

Birthday List — Set a birthday. 185 200

Anniversary List — Set an anniversary day. 185 201

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

193

Instruments and Controls

(196,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting proce-

dure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Periodic Rest Notifica-

tion*

— ON/OFF

—

Software Update

Update Check if a new software update

Automatically Check for Up-

dates

ON/OFF

Automatically Download Up-

dates

ON/OFF

SUBARU STARLINK

Apps Recovery

— OK/Cancel

SUBARU STARLINK

Auto Connect*

— ON/OFF

Factory Data Reset — Reset/Cancel

System Information — —

Free/Open Source

Software Information

—

*1: Models with the navigation system

*2: Models without the navigation system

*3: If equipped

*4: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.

*5: For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK.

NOTE

Touch

to display the explanation of the items.

Center Information Display (CID)

194

(197,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Car settings

s03bs050209

Perform the EyeSight system setting and

vehicle setting.

1. Touch (HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. Select the preferred menu.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

195

Instruments and Controls

(198,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car

EyeSight*

Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF

—

Lane Departure Prevention

Function

All Functions/Lane Departure

Prevention Function Only/

Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

Cruise Control Acceleration

Characteristics*

Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3

(Standard)/Lv.4 (Dynamic)

Lead Vehicle Acquisition

Sound

ON/OFF

Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor ON/OFF

Select Drive on Left/Drive on

Right

Right Lane/Left Lane

EyeSight Assist Monitor*

Red Indicator ON/OFF

Yellow Indicator ON/OFF

Green Indicator ON/OFF

Reverse Automatic Braking*

Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF 352 199

Center Information Display (CID)

196

(199,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car

Keyless Entry System

Audible Signal*

ON/OFF 115 and 121 199

Hazard Warning Flasher ON/OFF 115 and 121 199

Driver Door Unlock*

Driver Door Only/All 109 199

Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 231 199

Interior Light —

10 seconds/20 seconds/30

seconds/OFF

271 199

Auto Light Sensor

Light Sensitivity Min/Low/Mid/Max 217 199

Wiper Link ON/OFF 218 199

Welcome Lighting

Approaching Time Set

30 seconds/60 seconds/90

seconds/OFF

218

199

Leaving Time Set

30 seconds/60 seconds/90

seconds/OFF

199

One-Touch Lane Changer — ON/OFF 228 199

Auto Door Lock/Unlock

Auto Door Lock

Vehicle Speed/Shift into or out

of PARK*

/OFF

125

199

Auto Door Unlock

Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/

Shift into or out of PARK*

/OFF

199

Rear Seat Reminder — ON/OFF 50 199

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)*

— ON/OFF 327 199

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

197

Instruments and Controls

(200,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car

BSD/RCTA*

— ON/OFF 348 199

DRIVE MODE SELECT*

—

Comfort/Normal/Sport/Sport+/

Individual

313 199

Steering Responsive Head-

lights (SRH)*

— ON/OFF 226 199

Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max 347, 361 and *

199

Units —

km, km/h, Liter/Miles, MPH,

Gallon

148 and 176

199

*1: If equipped

*2: With this setting, you cannot change the warning buzzer settings such as jam.

*3: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

NOTE

Touch

to display the explanation of the items.

Center Information Display (CID)

198

(201,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! How to select items on the screen

s03bs0510

! ON/OFF setting

s03bs051001

Example

Touch the changing menu and select ON

or OFF .

! Selecting

s03bs051002

Example

Touch the preferred item.

! How to set items on the screen

s03bs0511

! Brightness/Contrast

s03bs051101

Set and adjust the brightness and contrast

of the center information display.

NOTE

“Brightness” can only be adjusted

when “Brightness Dial” is off. Refer to

“General settings” �P191.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Display”

5. ? “Brightness/Contrast”

6. Drag to adjust the brightness and

contrast.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

199

Instruments and Controls

(202,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Touch “Default” to revert to the factory

setting.

! Favorite Widgets

s03bs051102

The menu on the favorite screen can be

customized.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Favorite Widgets”

5. Select the icon of the display position.

6. Select the display item.

! Birthday List

s03bs051103

If a birthday or anniversary is approaching,

a message will be shown when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. This

function can be set to on or off by

“Reminder Screen”. For details, refer to

“General settings” �P191.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Birthday List”

5. ? “Add”

6. Enter the name.

7. ? “Next”.

8. Enter the date.

9. ? “OK”

Center Information Display (CID)

200

(203,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

NOTE

A maximum of 5 birthdays can be

stored.

! Anniversary List

s03bs051104

The procedure for setting an anniversary is

the same as “Birthday List” �P200, except

that in step 4 “Anniversary List” is selected.

! Car information screen

s03bs0503

1. Touch (HOME) to display the top

menu.

2. ? (Car Info)

! Driving Statistics screen

s03bs050301

1) Driving Statistics

2) Steering angle

3) Running condition

4) Vehicle posture

5) Telltale screen

This screen displays the driving status of

the vehicle and the operation status func-

tions. For functions that are operating, the

indicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE

. The vehicle posture indication may

differ from the actual vehicle posture.

. The vehicle posture angle varies not

only due to the angle of the road

surface, but also due to the vehicle tilt

caused by the occupants, cargo, and

acceleration or deceleration.

! Maintenance screen

s03bs050303

Maintenance reminders can be set.

Engine oil change reminder:

1. Touch “Maintenance” from the 2nd

menu in the car info screen.

2. ?

(Engine Oil)

3. Select “Notification Date” or “Notifica-

tion Distance” of the reminder.

4. ? “Set”

5. ?

Oil Filter change reminder:

The setting procedure is the same as the

“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the “Oil

Filter” item in step 2.

Tires rotation reminder:

The setting procedure is the same as the

“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the “Tires”

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

201

Instruments and Controls

(204,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

item in step 2.

Maintenance Schedule setting:

The setting procedure is the same as the

“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the

“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 2.

NOTE

. Touch “Reset” to reset each setting.

. Touch “Update” to revert to the

default value.

& Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models

s03bs06

NOTE

For 11.6-inch display models, refer to

“11.6-Inch Display Models” �P186.

! Main screens

s03bs0601

A) Upper display

B) Lower display

1) HOME button (Refer to “HOME button”

�P202.)

2) Status bar (Refer to “Status bar” �P202.)

3) Upper main screen (Refer to “Setting of

the upper display” �P203.)

4) Lower main screen (Refer to “Setting of

the lower display” �P206.)

5) Climate control screen (Refer to “Climate

control screen” �P203.)

While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the touch panel will activate.

! HOME button

s03bs0609

Press (HOME) to display the top menu.

! Status bar

s03bs060901

The driver profiles icon, outside tempera-

ture and clock are shown on the display.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature around the

sensor. However, the temperature may

not be indicated correctly or the update

may be delayed in the following condi-

tions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example: when

going in and out of an underground

parking area or when passing

through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period of

time

Center Information Display (CID)

202

(205,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. The temperature unit cannot be

changed.

. The clock can be shown in either 12-

hour display or 24-hour display. For

details about the setting, refer to

“Clock” �P214.

. Touch the clock on the status bar to

display the clock setting screen. Refer

to “Clock” �P214.

! Upper display

s03bs060902

For details about items, refer to “Setting of

the upper display” �P203.

For details about the following menu, refer

to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

. Radio

. Media

. Phone

. Apps

. SUBARU STARLINK

. Add Shortcut

! Lower display

s03bs060903

For details about the setting items, refer to

“Setting of the lower display” �P206.

If this screen changes to the climate

control screen, refer to “Dual 7.0-Inch

Display Models” �P249.

! Climate control screen

s03bs060904

1) Airflow mode

2) Climate control mode

3) Air inlet selection

4) Seat heater indicator*

(driver’s side)

5) Set temperature indicator

6) Seat heater indicator*

(front passen-

ger’s side)

7) Customizable icon

8) Fan speed indicator

9) Climate control ON/OFF icon

*1: If equipped

When operating the climate control sys-

tem, the main screen switches to the

climate control screen. For details about

climate control operation, refer to “Climate

Control Panel” �P248.

! Setting of the upper display

s03bs0602

In this Owner’s Manual, the settings of the

“General” menu will be explained. For

details about other items, refer to the

separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-

ual.

! General settings

s03bs060204

The “General” menu is used to set the

display, language and time.

1. Press

(HOME).

2. Touch (Settings).

3. ? “General”

4. Select the preferred menu.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

203

Instruments and Controls

(206,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Clock

Time Setting*

Sync With Phone/Manual

214

Time Setting*

AUTO/Manual 214

Clock Format 12H/24H 215

Display

Display Off Turn the screen off. — 211

Brightness Dial ON/OFF — 211

Brightness/Contrast

Set and adjust the brightness

and contrast of the screen dis-

play and camera display.

— 211

Wi-Fi Hotspot*

— ON/OFF *

—

Reminder Screen

Maintenance ON/OFF

185

211

Birthday ON/OFF 211

Anniversary ON/OFF 211

Meter Screen

Gauge Initial Movement ON/OFF 148 211

Meter Information Screen

Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/Clock/

Gas Range

178 211

Peak Value Reset OK/Cancel 181 211

Camera

Rear Camera Delay Control ON/OFF 335 211

Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF 337 211

Center Information Display (CID)

204

(207,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Climate Control Customize Climate Button

A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recircu-

lation

257 211

Language — English/Français/Español 176 and 184 211

Tire Pressure Units*

— kPa/PSi 181 211

Home Screen Shortcuts — ON/OFF *

211

Welcome Screen — ON/OFF 178 211

Goodbye Screen — ON/OFF 178 211

Birthday List — Set a birthday. 185 212

Anniversary List — Set an anniversary day. 185 212

SUBARU STARLINK Apps

Recovery

— OK/Cancel

—

SUBARU STARLINK Auto

Connect

— ON/OFF

Factory Data Reset — Reset/Cancel

System Information — —

Free/Open Source Software

Information

—

*1: Models without SUBARU STARLINK

*2: Models with SUBARU STARLINK

*3: For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK.

*4: If equipped

*5: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.

NOTE

Touch

to display the explanation of the items.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

205

Instruments and Controls

(208,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Setting of the lower display

s03bs0605

Touch (Car Settings). Refer to “Vehicle

setting icons” �P208.

This screen displays the driving status of

the vehicle and the operation status of the

functions. Refer to “Driving Statistics”

�P213.

Set the timing of the maintenance. Refer to

“Maintenance” �P213.

! Vehicle settings while driving

s03bs060502

Touch (Vehicle Control), (Driving

Assistance), or

(Others) to display the

items that are changeable while driving.

Center Information Display (CID)

206

(209,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Vehicle Con-

trol*

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)*

— ON/OFF 327 211

Cruise Control Acceleration

Characteristics*

—

Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3

(Standard)/Lv.4 (Dynamic)

—

Driving As-

sistance*

Pre-Collision Braking*

— Setting ON/Setting OFF

—

Lane Departure Prevention

Function*

—

All Functions/Lane Departure

Prevention Function Only/

Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

Others

Warning Volume*

— Min/Mid/Max *

211

Units —

km, km/h, Liter/

Miles, MPH, Gallon

148 and 176

211

*1: If equipped

*2: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

207

Instruments and Controls

(210,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Vehicle setting icons

s03bs060501

1. Press (HOME).

2. Touch

(Car Settings).

Center Information Display (CID)

208

(211,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car Settings

EyeSight*

Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF *

—

Lane Departure Prevention

Function

All Functions/Lane Departure

Prevention Function Only/

Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

—

Cruise Control Acceleration

Characteristics

Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3

(Standard)/Lv.4 (Dynamic)

—

Lead Vehicle Acquisition

Sound

ON/OFF *

211

Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor ON/OFF *

211

Select Drive on Left/Drive on

Right

Right Lane/Left Lane *

—

EyeSight Assist Monitor*

Red Indicator ON/OFF

—Yellow Indicator ON/OFF

Green Indicator ON/OFF

Keyless Entry System Hazard Warning Flasher ON/OFF 121 211

Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 231 211

Interior Light —

10 seconds/20 seconds/30

seconds/OFF

271 211

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

209

Instruments and Controls

(212,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car Settings

Auto Light Sensor

Light Sensitivity Min/Low/Mid/Max 217 211

Wiper Link ON/OFF 218 211

Welcome Lighting

Approaching Time Set

30 seconds/60 seconds/90

seconds/OFF

218

211

Leaving Time Set

30 seconds/60 seconds/90

seconds/OFF

211

One-Touch Lane Changer — ON/OFF 228 211

Auto Door Lock/Unlock

Auto Door Lock

Vehicle Speed/Shift into or out

of PARK/OFF

125

211

Auto Door Unlock

Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/

Shift into or out of PARK/OFF

211

Rear Seat Reminder — ON/OFF 50 211

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)*

— ON/OFF 327 211

Warning Volume*

— Min/Mid/Max *

211

Units —

km, km/h, Liter/

Miles, MPH, Gallon

148 and 176

211

*1: If equipped

*2: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

NOTE

Touch

to display the explanation of the items.

Center Information Display (CID)

210

(213,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! How to select items on the screen

s03bs0610

! ON/OFF setting

s03bs061001

Example

Touch the changing menu and select ON

or OFF .

! Selecting

s03bs061002

Example

Touch the preferred setting.

! How to set items on the screen

s03bs0611

! Brightness/Contrast

s03bs061101

Set and adjust the brightness and contrast

of the center information display.

NOTE

“Brightness” can only be adjusted

when “Brightness Dial” is off. Refer to

“General settings” �P203.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Display”

5. ? “Brightness/Contrast”

6. Drag to adjust the brightness and

contrast.

– CONTINUED –

Center Information Display (CID)

211

Instruments and Controls

(214,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Touch “Default” to revert to the factory

setting.

! Birthday List

s03bs061102

If a birthday or anniversary is approaching,

a message will be displayed when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position. This function can be set to on or

off by the “Reminder Screen”. For details,

refer to “General settings” �P203.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Birthday List”

5. ? “Add”

6. Enter the name.

7. ? “Next”

8. Enter the date.

9. ? “OK”

NOTE

A maximum of 5 birthdays can be

stored.

! Anniversary List

s03bs061103

The procedure for setting an anniversary is

the same as “Birthday List” �P212, except

that in step 4 “Anniversary List” is selected.

Center Information Display (CID)

212

(215,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Driving Statistics

s03bs0603

1) Steering angle

2) Vehicle posture

3) Running condition

This screen displays the driving status of

the vehicle and the operation status of the

functions. For functions that are operating,

the indicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE

. The vehicle posture indication may

differ from the actual vehicle posture.

. The vehicle posture angle varies not

only due to the angle of the road

surface, but also due to the vehicle tilt

caused by the occupants, cargo, and

acceleration or deceleration.

! Maintenance

s03bs0604

Maintenance reminders can be set.

Engine oil setting:

1. Touch

(Maintenance).

2. ?

(Engine Oil)

3. Select “Notification Date” or “Notifica-

tion Distance” of the reminder.

4. ? “Set”

5. ?

Oil Filter setting:

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine Oil” setting, but touch the “Oil

Filter” item in step 2.

Tires setting:

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine Oil” setting, but touch the “Tires”

item in step 2.

Maintenance Schedule setting:

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine Oil” setting, but touch the “Main-

tenance Schedule” item in step 2.

NOTE

. Touch “Reset” to reset each setting.

. Touch “Update” to revert to the

default value.

Center Information Display (CID)

213

Instruments and Controls

(216,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3-9. Clock

s03af

For models with a genuine SUBARU

navigation and/or audio system, the clock

can be adjusted using either auto mode or

manual mode.

& Setting the Clock Manually

s03af03

! Dual 7.0-inch display models

s03af0303

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Press (HOME).

3. Touch

(Settings).

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Time Setting”

7. ? “Manual”

8. ?

9. ? “OK”

NOTE

The clock setting screen can also be

displayed by touching the clock on the

status bar.

! 11.6-inch display models

s03af0304

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Touch (HOME).

3. ?

(Settings)

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Time Setting”

Clock

214

(217,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7. ? “Manual”

8. ?

9. ? “OK”

NOTE

The clock setting screen can also be

displayed by touching the clock on the

status bar.

& Setting the Clock Automati-

cally

s03af02

! Dual 7.0-inch display models

s03af0204

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Press (HOME).

3. Touch

(Settings).

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Time Setting”

7. Models with SUBARU STARLINK:

? “AUTO”

Models without SUBARU STARLINK:

? “Sync With Phone”

! Models with SUBARU STARLINK

s03af020403

The clock will be set automatically where a

DCM (Data Communication Module in

vehicle cellular connection) signal is avail-

able.

! Models without SUBARU

STARLINK

s03af020404

The clock will be set and adjusted auto-

matically when a smartphone is connected

via Bluetooth

for transferring phonebook

data.

1. Register the smartphone to the audio

system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth

SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s

Manual for the audio/navigation system.

2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-

tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth SET-

TINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s

Manual for the audio/navigation system.

The clock will be adjusted automatically.

NOTE

Depending on the model of smart-

phone, the settings of the connected

smartphone may need to be changed.

(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-

tion settings may need to be activated.)

For details, check the instructions on

connecting smartphones.

– CONTINUED –

Clock

215

Instruments and Controls

(218,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! 11.6-inch display models

s03af0205

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Touch (HOME).

3. ?

(Settings)

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Time Setting”

7. Models with navigation system:

? “AUTO”

Models with SUBARU STARLINK without

navigation system:

? “AUTO”

Models without SUBARU STARLINK and

navigation system:

? “Sync With Phone”

! Models with navigation system

s03af020501

The clock will be set automatically where a

GPS signal is available.

! Models with SUBARU STARLINK

without navigation system

s03af020503

The clock will be set automatically where a

DCM (Data Communication Module in

vehicle cellular connection) signal is avail-

able.

! Models without SUBARU

STARLINK and navigation sys-

tem

s03af020504

The clock will be set and adjusted auto-

matically when a smartphone is connected

via Bluetooth

for transferring phonebook

data.

1. Register the smartphone to the audio

system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth

SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s

Manual for the audio/navigation system.

2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-

tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth SET-

TINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s

Manual for the audio/navigation system.

The clock will be adjusted automatically.

NOTE

Depending on the model of smart-

phone, the settings of the connected

smartphone may need to be changed.

(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-

tion settings may need to be activated.)

For details, check the instructions on

connecting smartphones.

Clock

216

(219,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3-10. Light Control Switch

s03ah

CAUTION

. Use of any lights for a long period

of time while the engine is not

running can cause the battery to

discharge.

. Before leaving the vehicle, make

sure that the light control switch

is turned to the off position. If the

vehicle is left unattended for a

long time with the light control

switch set to a position other

than the off position, the battery

may be discharged.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the push-button ignition

switch is turned off.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when the

key is inserted in the ignition switch.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

NOTE

The light control switch can be oper-

ated (except auto on/off headlights)

even when under the following condi-

tions.

. When the push-button ignition

switch is turned off (models with “key-

less access with push-button start

system”)

. When the key is not inserted into the

ignition switch (models without “key-

less access with push-button start

system”)

If the driver’s door is opened while the

headlights are illuminated under such

conditions, a chirp sound will inform

the driver that the lights are illuminated.

& Headlights

s03ah01

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the light control switch.

“OFF” position (except for Canada

models):

The headlights are all off.

“OFF” position (for Canada models):

The headlights are all off.*

*1: When the light switch is switched to the

“OFF” position while the vehicle is stopped,

the lights turn off. Then the light switch will

automatically return to the “AUTO” position.

*2: The headlights will automatically change to

the AUTO mode when the following condi-

tions are met:

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

– CONTINUED –

Light Control Switch

217

Instruments and Controls

(220,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. For CVT models, the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

“AUTO” position: Auto on/off head-

lights

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, the instrument panel illumination,

headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are automatically

on or off depending on the level of the

ambient light.

NOTE

. If the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the headlights do

not turn on when it becomes dark

outside, turn the light switch to the

“

” position. If this happens, have

your vehicle inspected by your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light sensitivity of the auto on/

off headlights can be changed by

operating the center information dis-

play. For details, refer to “Car settings”

�P195 (11.6-inch display models) or

“Vehicle setting icons” �P208 (dual

7.0-inch display models). Also, the

setting can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer

for details.

“

” position:

Instrument panel illumination, parking

lights, front side marker lights, rear side

marker lights, tail lights and license plate

lights are on.

“

” position:

Instrument panel illumination, headlights,

parking lights, front side marker lights, rear

side marker lights, tail lights and license

plate lights are on.

! Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights

s03ah0106

While the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-

matically turn on when the windshield

wipers operate several times. The head-

lights will automatically turn off approxi-

mately 1 minute after the wiper stops.

The ON/OFF setting of this function can be

changed by operating the center informa-

tion display. For details, refer to “Car

settings” �P195 (11.6-inch display mod-

els) or “Vehicle setting icons” �P208 (dual

7.0-inch display models). Also, the setting

can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

! Welcome lighting function

s03ah0103

The welcome lighting function turns on the

low beam headlight for smooth approach-

ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or

in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the

following conditions are met.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position.

. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/

off headlights.

NOTE

If the engine is turned off after turning

off the light switch, the welcome light-

ing function may not operate (for

Canada models).

! When approaching

s03ah010301

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

automatically illuminate when unlocking

the doors by using the remote keyless

entry system.

The low beam headlights will remain

illuminated for 30 seconds*

and then turn

off. However, if any of the following

operations is done, the low beam head-

lights will turn off.

. The doors are locked.

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

! When exiting

s03ah010302

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

Light Control Switch

218

(221,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

remain illuminated even when either of the

following operation is done.

. The push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” status (models with

“keyless access with push-button start

system”).

. The key is pulled out from the ignition

switch (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”).

The low beam headlights will turn off under

any of the following conditions.

. 3 minutes have passed since the low

beam headlights were illuminated by the

welcome lighting function.

. 30 seconds have passed since the door

is opened and closed.*

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

. The locking procedure is performed

twice. When performing the unlocking

procedure after performing the locking

procedure, perform the locking procedure

twice again.

*1: The setting for the period of time in which the

low beam headlights remain on by the

welcome lighting function can be changed

by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for details. Also, you can

change the setting by operating the center

information display. For details, refer to “Car

settings” �P195 (11.6-inch display models)

or “Vehicle setting icons” �P208 (dual 7.0-

inch display models).

! Sensor for the auto on/off head-

lights

s03ah0101

The sensor is on the dashboard as shown

in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near the

sensor, the sensor may not detect

the level of the ambient light cor-

rectly and the auto on/off headlights

may not operate properly.

& High/Low Beam Change

(Dimmer)

s03ah02

While the light control switch is in the “ ”

or “AUTO” position in a dark place, the

headlights will turn on.

Pushing the lever forward and releasing it

will activate the high beam. Pulling the

lever rearward and releasing it will switch

the headlights to low beam.

When the light control switch is in the

– CONTINUED –

Light Control Switch

219

Instruments and Controls

(222,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

“AUTO” position, pushing the lever for-

ward turns the High Beam Assist is on.

Refer to “High Beam Assist Function”

�P220.

When the headlights are on high beam, the

high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter is also on.

& Headlight Flasher

s03ah03

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever. The headlight flasher works even

though the lighting switch is in the off

position.

When the headlights are on high beam, the

high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter also illuminates.

& High Beam Assist Function

s03ah07

NOTE

. Do not overestimate the capacity of

the high beam assist function. The

driver always has the responsibility to

understand the surrounding situation,

to drive safely, and to change the

headlight mode manually if necessary.

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as “operational”.

This setting can be changed to OFF

(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.

For more details, contact a SUBARU

dealer.

! Models with the EyeSight system

s03ah0707

NOTE

. The high beam assist function uti-

lizes the stereo camera installed at the

position of the upper side of wind-

shield.

. For details on how to handle the

stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for the EyeSight

system.

The high beam assist function automati-

cally changes the headlight from high

beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are

met, the headlight will change to high

beam.

. When the vehicle speed increases to or

above 20 mph (32 km/h).

. There is no preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.

. The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions are

met, the headlight will change to low beam.

. When the vehicle speed decreases to

or below 10 mph (16 km/h).

. When the forward area of the vehicle is

bright.

. When there is a preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

. When the EyeSight system is malfunc-

tioning or is temporarily stopped.

Light Control Switch

220

(223,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Models without the EyeSight sys-

tem

s03ah0709

1) Camera for high beam assist function

NOTE

. Observe the following points in

order to operate the high beam assist

function properly.

– Do not attach labels or stickers to

the windshield glass near the cam-

era.

– Do not attach any accessories

near the inside mirror and camera.

If it is necessary to attach a label,

sticker or accessory in the position

shown above, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. Observe the following points in

order to operate the high beam assist

function properly.

– Do not touch the camera or the

lens.

– Do not apply any strong impact to

the camera or the inside mirror.

– Do not disassemble the camera

or inside mirror.

– Do not spill liquid on the inside

mirror and camera.

– Do not place any objects over the

dashboard.

– Do not carry excessive luggage.

– Do not modify the vehicle.

– When replacing the windshield

glass, use the genuine SUBARU

parts (or equivalent products).

The high beam assist function automati-

cally changes the headlight from high

beam to low beam (or vice versa). When

all of the following conditions are met, the

headlight will change to high beam.

. When the vehicle speed increases to or

above 22 mph (35 km/h).

. There is no preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.

. The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions is

met, the headlight will change to low beam.

. When the vehicle speed decreases to

or below 17 mph (27 km/h).

. When the forward area of the vehicle is

bright.

. When there is a preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

! How to use the high beam assist

function (models with the EyeSight

system)

s03ah0701

The high beam assist function will be

activated when all the following conditions

are met.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the low beam headlights are

on automatically.

. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

– CONTINUED –

Light Control Switch

221

Instruments and Controls

(224,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

High beam assist indicator

When the high beam assist function is

activated, the high beam assist indicator

on the combination meter will illuminate.

NOTE

If the high beam assist function is

malfunctioning or is temporarily

stopped, the headlight will be fixed at

low beam.

! How to use the high beam assist

function (models without the

EyeSight system)

s03ah0708

The high beam assist function will be

activated when all the following conditions

are met.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the low beam headlights are

on automatically.

. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

High beam assist indicator (green)

When the high beam assist function is

activated, the high beam assist indicator

on the combination meter will illuminate.

Malfunction of the high beam assist

function:

High beam assist warning indicator (yel-

low)

When the high beam assist function

malfunctions, the high beam assist warn-

ing indicator on the combination meter will

appear. In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by your SUBARU dealer.

! Temporary stop of high beam assist

function

s03ah0706

If the high beam assist function stops

temporarily due to poor visibility or abnor-

mal temperature, the message appears on

the combination meter. Once the condi-

tions have been remedied, drive the

vehicle for a while to restore the system.

Light Control Switch

222

(225,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

NOTE

Even when the operation conditions of

the high beam assist function are met,

there may be a case in which the high

beam assist indicator does not illumi-

nate.

! How to temporarily lower the sensi-

tivity of the high beam assist func-

tion (models with the EyeSight sys-

tem)

s03ah0704

The sensitivity of the high beam assist

function can be lowered by using the

following operations.

1. Before turning the ignition switch to the

“ON” position, set the light control switch to

the “AUTO” position and push the signal

lever forward (high beam position).

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and within approximately 15 sec-

onds, press the “

/ ” (following distance

setting) switch more than 10 times con-

secutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam

assist function is lowered, the high beam

assist indicator light “

” on the combina-

tion meter display (color LCD) will flash.

NOTE

. The sensitivity of the high beam

assist function cannot be lowered in

the following conditions.

– Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise

Control indicator is illuminated.

– The EyeSight warning indicator

(yellow) is illuminated.

. The sensitivity of the high beam

assist function returns to normal level

the next time the ignition switch is

turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position

and the engine is restarted.

! How to temporarily lower the sensi-

tivity of the high beam assist func-

tion (models without the EyeSight

system)

s03ah0710

The sensitivity of the high beam assist

function can be lowered by using the

following operations.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

1) Switch

2. Press and hold the “ ” switch for 15 to

20 seconds.

When the sensitivity of the high beam

assist function is lowered, the LED indi-

cator on the automatic dimming on/off

button will flash.

NOTE

. The sensitivity of the high beam

assist function cannot be lowered while

driving.

. You can resume the sensitivity of the

high beam assist function by using

either of the following operations.

– Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position and then

start the engine.

– CONTINUED –

Light Control Switch

223

Instruments and Controls

(226,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

– Press and hold the “ ” switch

for 15 to 20 seconds again.

! How to change the headlight mode

manually

s03ah0702

Change to the low beam:

. Set the light control switch to “

”.

. Pull the lever while the high beam is

turning on and release it.

Change to the high beam:

Push the lever forward and release it.

At this time, the high beam assist function

will turn off, the high beam assist indicator

will turn off and the high beam indicator

light will turn on.

NOTE

. After manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you turn

on the high beam assist function, push

the lever forward and release it.

. When manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you turn

the light control switch to the “

”

position, the parking lights, front side

marker lights, rear side marker lights,

tail lights and license plate lights will

turn on.

! Tips for the high beam assist sys-

tem

s03ah0703

. The high beam assist function recog-

nizes the condition surrounding the vehicle

based on the brightness of illumination

ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, the

headlight mode may switch in some

situations that do not match to the driver’s

sense.

. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be

detected.

. Under the following situations, the

brightness of ambient illumination may

not be detected correctly and the high

beam assist function may not work prop-

erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam

may disturb the oncoming vehicle or

vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode

may continue although there are no

oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead.

In the such cases, change the headlight

mode manually.

– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand

storm, heavy rain, etc.).

– When the windshield glass is dirty or

fogged.

– When the windshield is cracked or

damaged.

– If there are lights similar to the

headlights or the tail lights in the

surrounding area.

– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-

hicle ahead is driven without its head-

lights and tail lights on.

– If the headlights of an oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the

light beams are not aimed correctly.

– When a rapid change of brightness

continues while driving.

– When driving on a road with many

ups and downs or uneven surfaces.

– When driving on a road with many

curves.

– When there are some objects that

reflect light strongly, such as a road

sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.

– When the rear part of the vehicle

ahead, such as a container, reflects

light strongly.

– When the headlights of your vehicle

are damaged or dirty.

– When your vehicle is tilted, such as

in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is

being towed.

– When the stereo camera (models

with the EyeSight system)/camera

(models without the EyeSight system)

is deformed or the stereo camera

(models with the EyeSight system)/

camera (models without the EyeSight

system) lenses are dirty.

– Immediately after the engine has

Light Control Switch

224

(227,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

started.

. In the following conditions, the head-

light mode will not be automatically chan-

ged from the high beam to the low beam.

– When your vehicle passes an on-

coming vehicle suddenly in a blind

curve.

– When another vehicle passes in

front of your vehicle.

– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-

hicle ahead comes in and out of view

because of continuous curves, median

strips, roadside trees, etc.

. If the stereo camera (models with the

EyeSight system)/camera (models without

the EyeSight system) detects the light of

the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle,

the headlight mode may change from the

high beam to the low beam automatically.

. The headlight mode may change from

the high beam to the low beam, or the low

beam mode may continue, when affected

by a street light, traffic signal, illumination

of an advertisement board, or a reflective

object such as a road sign and signboard.

. The timing of the change of headlight

mode may differ due to the following

factors.

– Color or brightness of the headlights

of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights

of a vehicle ahead.

– The headlights of the oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle

ahead are covered with mud, snow,

etc.

– Movement and direction of an on-

coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.

– When the headlights of an oncom-

ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

ahead illuminate on only one side.

– When the oncoming vehicle or

vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.

– Conditions of a road (slope, curve,

road surface, etc.).

– Number of passengers and weight

of loaded cargo.

– Limitation of the detection ability of

the stereo camera (models with the

EyeSight system)/camera (models

without the EyeSight system).

& Daytime Running Light Sys-

tem

s03ah04

WARNING

When the daytime running lights are

illuminated, the tail lights do not

illuminate. When it becomes dark

outside, turn the light switch to the

“

” position to illuminate the head-

lights and tail lights. This will im-

prove visibility and allow other dri-

vers to see your vehicle more easily.

The daytime running lights will automati-

cally illuminate when the following condi-

tions are fulfilled.

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The light control switch is in “AUTO”,

“

” or “OFF”.

. For CVT models, the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

NOTE

When the light switch is in the “

”

position, the instrument panel illumina-

tion, front side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are also illumi-

nated.

Light Control Switch

225

Instruments and Controls

(228,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3-11. Steering Responsive

Headlight (SRH) (If Equipped)

s03bl

1) The target area of illumination when SRH

is activated

2) The target area of illumination when SRH

is not activated

SRH is a function that automatically moves

the headlight beam to the left or right in

accordance with the steering angle and

vehicle speed. This function helps to

improve the visibility at night by illuminat-

ing the road ahead at corners and inter-

sections.

You can turn the SRH function on or off.

The settings can be changed by using the

center information display. For details,

refer to “Car settings” �P195.

1) SRH OFF indicator light

The SRH OFF indicator light on the

combination meter display (color LCD)

turns off when SRH is turned on.

The SRH OFF indicator light on the

combination meter display (color LCD)

illuminates when SRH is turned off.

1) SRH warning indicator

If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH warning

indicator on the combination meter display

(color LCD) illuminates and a message

appears on the warning screen when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position. It

indicates that SRH has been deactivated.

Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

NOTE

. The SRH function operative/non-op-

erative status is kept when the engine is

turned off, even if the engine is re-

started.

. When you turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position, the SRH OFF indi-

cator light will illuminate and turn off

after several seconds.

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

226

(229,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. SRH only activates when the vehicle

is traveling forward at the speed of

approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.

3-12. Headlight Beam Leveler

s03at

The LED headlights produce more light

than conventional halogen headlights.

When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load

and the headlight beams are angled

upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle

may experience glare.

To prevent this, the automatic headlight

beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the

optimum height automatically depending

on the load the vehicle is carrying.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the head-

lights may become misaligned, and

the headlight beam leveler will not

reset them to the proper angle. This

may occur after transporting your

vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if the

vehicle is parked and restarted on

different angles. In such cases, have

the headlight alignment checked by

a SUBARU dealer.

3-13. Front Fog Light Switch

(If Equipped)

s03ba

1) Headlight switch

2) Fog light switch

To turn on the front fog lights:

Turn the fog light switch to the “

” position

while the headlights are in either of the

following conditions.

. The headlight switch is in the “

”

position with the low beam mode selected.

. The headlight switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the low beam headlights turn

on automatically.

To turn off the front fog lights:

Turn the fog light switch back down to the

“OFF” position.

– CONTINUED –

Headlight Beam Leveler

227

Instruments and Controls

(230,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Indicator light

The indicator light located on the combina-

tion meter will illuminate when the front fog

lights are on.

3-14. Turn Signal Lever

s03ai

1) Right turn

2) Lane change right signal

3) Lane change left signal

4) Left turn

To activate the turn signal:

Pushing the turn signal lever up/down and

releasing it activates the turn signal. Then

the lever returns to its original position.

To cancel the turn signal:

Push and release the turn signal lever

slightly in the opposite direction of the

active turn signal.

To signal a lane change:

1. Push the turn signal lever up or down

slightly.

2. Hold in the signal lever during the lane

change.

The turn signal indicator lights will flash in

the direction of the turn or lane change.

The lever will return automatically to the

neutral position when you release it.

& One-Touch Lane Changer

s03ai01

To flash the turn signal and turn signal

indicator light three times, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and

immediately release it.

NOTE

The operational/non-operational

setting of the one-touch lane changer

can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details. The setting can also be chan-

ged by operating the center information

display. For details, refer to “Car set-

tings” �P195 (11.6-inch display mod-

els) or “Vehicle setting icons” �P208

(dual 7.0-inch display models).

Turn Signal Lever

228

(231,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3-15. Wiper and Washer

s03am

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 10 sec-

onds, or when the washer fluid

tank is empty. This may cause

overheating of the washer motor.

Check the washer fluid level fre-

quently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when

the windshield is dry. This may

scratch the glass, damage the

blade rubbers and might cause

the wiper motor to fail. Before

operating the wiper on a dry

windshield, always use the wind-

shield washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure that

the blade rubbers are not frozen

to the windshield before switch-

ing on the wipers. Attempting to

operate the wiper with the blade

rubbers frozen to the window

glass could cause not only the

blade rubbers to be damaged but

also might cause the wiper motor

to fail. If the blade rubbers are

frozen to the window glass, be

sure to operate the defroster or

windshield wiper deicer (if

equipped) before turning on the

wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, this

might cause the wiper motor to

fail even if the wiper switch is

turned off. If this occurs,

promptly stop the vehicle in a

safe location, turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-

sition and clean the window glass

to allow proper wiper operation.

. Use clean water if windshield

washer fluid is unavailable. In

areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to “Windshield Washer

Fluid” �P446.

Also, when driving the vehicle

when there are freezing tempera-

tures, use non-freezing type wi-

per blades.

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

NOTE

. The windshield wiper motor is pro-

tected against overloads by a circuit

breaker. If the motor operates continu-

ously under an unusually heavy load,

the circuit breaker may trip to stop the

motor temporarily. If this happens, park

your vehicle in a safe location, turn off

the wiper switch, and wait for approxi-

mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker

will reset itself, and the wipers will

again operate normally.

. Clean your blade rubbers and win-

dow glass periodically with a washer

solution to prevent streaking, and to

remove accumulations of road salt or

road film. Operate the windshield

washer for at least 1 second so that

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield.

– CONTINUED –

Wiper and Washer

229

Instruments and Controls

(232,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Grease, wax, insects, or other mate-

rial on the windshield or the wiper blade

results in jerky wiper operation and

streaking on the glass. If you cannot

remove the streaks after operating the

windshield washer or if the wiper

operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-

face of the windshield using a sponge

or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not, however,

use detergent to clean the blade rub-

bers. Use only a sponge or soft cloth

(and no neutral detergent or mild

abrasive cleaner) when you clean the

blade rubbers. After cleaning the win-

dow glass and wiper blade rubbers, be

sure to rinse them with clean water.

Rinse the window until the water does

not form beads on the glass. This

indicates that the glass is clean.

. If you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure,

replace the wiper blades (or blade

rubbers) with new ones. For replace-

ment instructions, refer to “Replace-

ment of Wiper Blades” �P447.

& Windshield Wiper and

Washer Switches

s03am01

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

! Windshield wipers

s03am0101

: Mist (for a single wipe)

OFF

: Off

: Intermittent

: Low speed

High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “OFF” position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the

lever up. The wipers operate until you

release the lever.

! Wiper intermittent time control

s03am0103

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”

position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-

ing interval of the wiper. The operating

interval can be adjusted in several steps

from the shortest interval to the longest.

Wiper and Washer

230

(233,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Windshield washer

s03am0104

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid

sprays until you release the lever. The

wipers operate while you pull the lever.

Windshield washer fluid warning light

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning

light appears when the washer fluid

level in the tank has dropped to the

lower limit. If the warning light appears,

refill the tank with fluid. For the tank

refilling method, refer to “Windshield

Washer Fluid” �P446.

3-16. Defogger and Deicer

s03bi

1) Rear window defogger

2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)

3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The defogger and deicer system is acti-

– CONTINUED –

Defogger and Deicer

231

Instruments and Controls

(234,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

vated only when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

Rear window and outside mirror (if

equipped) defogger button (dual 7.0-inch

display models)

1) Models without the outside mirror defog-

ger

2) Models with the outside mirror defogger

Rear window and outside mirror defogger

button (11.6-inch display models)

To activate the defogger and deicer sys-

tem, press the rear window and outside

mirror defogger button. The rear window

defogger, outside mirror defogger and

windshield wiper deicer are activated

simultaneously. The indicator light on the

button illuminates while the defogger and

deicer system is activated.

To turn them off, press the button again.

They also turn off when the ignition switch

is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF”

position.

The defogger and deicer system will

automatically shut off after approximately

15 minutes. If the rear window and outside

mirrors have been cleared and the wind-

shield wiper blade rubbers have been

deiced completely before that time, press

the button to turn them off. If defrosting,

defogging or deicing is not complete, you

have to press the button to turn them on

again.

It is possible to set the defogger and deicer

system for the continuous operation mode

by operating the center information dis-

play. For details, refer to “Car settings”

�P195 (11.6-inch display models) or

“Vehicle setting icons” �P208 (dual 7.0-

inch display models).

CAUTION

. To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

defogger and deicer system con-

tinuously for any longer than

necessary.

. Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the rear window. They may da-

mage the conductors printed on

the window.

NOTE

. Turn on the defogger and deicer

system if the wipers are frozen to the

windshield.

Defogger and Deicer

232

(235,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. If the windshield is covered with

snow, remove the snow so that the

windshield wiper deicer works effec-

tively.

. While the defogger and deicer sys-

tem is in the continuous operation

mode:

– If the vehicle speed remains at 9

mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15

minutes, the windshield wiper dei-

cer system automatically stops op-

erating. However, the rear window

defogger system and outside mirror

defogger system maintain continu-

ous operation in this condition.

– If the vehicle battery voltage

drops below the permissible level,

continuous operation of the defog-

ger system and deicer system is

canceled and the system stops

operating.

3-17. Mirrors

s03ap

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

& Inside Mirror (without Auto-

Dimming Function) (If

Equipped)

s03ap08

1) Normal position

2) Anti-glare position

Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.

To reduce glare from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-

glare position.

& Auto-Dimming Mirror (If

Equipped)

s03ap02

WARNING

To ensure safety, always adjust the

mirrors and operate the switch be-

fore driving the vehicle. Perform the

automatic dimming on/off operation

only when necessary. Otherwise, an

unexpected accident may occur.

CAUTION

. When cleaning the mirror, use a

paper towel or similar material

dampened with glass cleaner. Do

not spray glass cleaner directly

on the mirror because that may

cause the liquid cleaner to enter

the mirror housing and damage

the mirror.

. Sensors detecting brightness are

located in front of and behind the

mirror. Do not attach any object

such as a sticker on the sensor

areas or put any object over the

mirror.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

233

Instruments and Controls

(236,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! How to use the auto-dimming mirror

s03ap0204

1) LED indicator

2) Automatic dimming on/off switch

3) Sensor

1. Move the main body of the auto-

dimming mirror and adjust the position so

that you can view the rearward direction

sufficiently.

2. Press the automatic dimming on/off

switch to turn the automatic dimming

function on or off. When the automatic

dimming function is on, the LED indicator

will illuminate.

NOTE

. Sensors are located in front of and

behind the mirror.

. Even with the mirror in the automatic

dimming mode, the mirror surface

turns bright if the select lever is shifted

into the “R” position. This is to ensure

good rearward visibility during rever-

sing.

& Auto-Dimming Mirror/Com-

pass (If Equipped)

s03ap12

1) Compass

2) Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming

feature senses distracting glare from

vehicle headlights behind you and auto-

matically dims to eliminate the glare and

preserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

ture

s03ap1201

Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming

feature is enabled when the switch’s green

LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming

feature will default to on with each ignition

cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature

s03ap1202

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “

” switch for more

than 3 seconds or until the display turns

on/off. The compass feature will default to

on with each ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

Compass calibration zones

Mirrors

234

(237,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a zone

number appears in the display.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

the display, toggle the “

” switch

again until your current location zone

number appears. After you stop press-

ing the switch, your new zone number

will be saved. Within a few seconds,

the display will show a compass direc-

tion.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,

recalibrate the compass. Press and hold

the “

” switch for more than 9 seconds or

until a “C” appears in the display. Once a

“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

& Auto-Dimming Mirror/Com-

pass with HomeLink

(If

Equipped)

s03ap07

1) Compass

2) HomeLink

buttons

3) Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming

feature senses distracting glare from

vehicle headlights behind you and auto-

matically dims to eliminate the glare and

help preserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

ture

s03ap0705

Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming

feature is enabled when the switch’s green

LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming

feature will default to on with each ignition

cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature (if

equipped)

s03ap0706

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “

” switch for more

than 3 seconds or until the display turns

on/off. The compass feature will default to

on with each ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

Compass calibration zones (U.S.)

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

235

Instruments and Controls

(238,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Compass calibration zones (South Amer-

ica)

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a zone

number appears in the display.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

the display, toggle the “

” switch

again until your current location zone

number appears. After you stop press-

ing the switch, your new zone number

will be saved. Within a few seconds,

the display will show a compass direc-

tion.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,

recalibrate the compass. Press and hold

the “

” switch for more than 9 seconds or

until a “C” appears in the display. Once a

“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

! HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem

s03ap0704

The HomeLink

Wireless Control System

provides a convenient way to replace up to

three hand-held radio frequency remotes

used to activate devices such as gate

operators, garage door openers, entry

door locks, security systems, even home

lighting. The below steps are generic

programming instructions; for Genie and

Sommer garage door openers please go

directly to the HomeLink

website. Addi-

tional information and programming vi-

deos can be found at www.HomeLink.

com and www.youtube.com/HomeLink-

Gentex.

CAUTION

. Before programming HomeLink

to a garage door opener or gate

operator, make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the device to prevent potential

harm or damage.

. When programming a garage

door opener, it is advised to park

outside of the garage.

. Do not use HomeLink

with any

garage door opener that lacks

safety stop and reverse features

as required by U.S. federal safety

standards (this includes any gar-

age door opener model manufac-

tured before April 1, 1982). A

garage door that cannot detect

an object signaling the door to

stop and reverse does not meet

current U.S. federal safety stan-

dards.

. It is also recommended that a new

battery be placed in the hand-

held remote (garage door opener

remote) of the device for quicker

and more accurate training.

. Turn the ignition switch to the

“ON” or “ACC” position before

programming and/or operating

HomeLink

. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-

age door opener remote) of the

device you are programming for

use in other vehicles as well as

for future HomeLink

program-

ming. It is also suggested that

upon the sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink

buttons

Mirrors

236

(239,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

be erased for security purposes.

Refer to “Erasing HomeLink

but-

tons” �P239.

! Programming a New HomeLink

button

s03ap070409

1) Indicator Light

2) HomeLink

buttons

1. Press and release the HomeLink

button that you would like to program.

The HomeLink

indicator light will flash

orange slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing

HomeLink

buttons” �P239).

1) Garage door opener remote

2. Position the hand-held remote (garage

door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8

cm) away from the HomeLink

button that

you would like to program.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door

opener remotes) may actually train

better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches

(15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you

have difficulty with the programming

process.

3. While the HomeLink

indicator light is

flashing orange, press and hold the hand-

held remote button. Continue pressing the

hand-held remote button until the

HomeLink

indicator light changes from

orange to green. You may now release the

hand-held remote button.

NOTE

Some devices may require you to re-

place this “Programming a New

HomeLink

button” step 3 with proce-

dures noted in the “Gate Operator /

Canadian Programming” section. Refer

to “Gate Operator/Canadian Program-

ming” �P239.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

237

Instruments and Controls

(240,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) Indicator Light

4. Press the HomeLink

button that you

would like to program and observe the

indicator light.

. If the indicator light remains constant

green, your device should operate

when the HomeLink

button is

pressed. At this point, if your device

operates, programming is complete.

. If the indicator light rapidly flashes

green, firmly press, hold for two sec-

onds and release the HomeLink

but-

ton up to three times to complete the

programming process. At this point if

your device operates, programming is

complete. If the device does not

operate, continue with the next step

of the programming instructions.

1) “Learn” button

5. At the garage door opener motor,

(security gate motor, etc.) locate the

“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button. This

can usually be found where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the motor-head

unit (see the device’s manual to identify

this button). The name and color of the

button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may

simplify the following steps.

6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,

“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now

have 30 seconds in which to complete step

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for 2 seconds and release the

HomeLink

button up to three times. At

this point programming is complete and

your device should operate when the

HomeLink

button is pressed and re-

leased.

Mirrors

238

(241,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) Status Indicators

8. If status indicator arrows appear next

to the indicator light, please refer to

“Garage Door Two-Way Communication”

�P240.

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink

information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For

Genie and Sommer garage door openers

please go directly to the HomeLink

website.

! Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-

gramming

s03ap070410

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter remote signals to “time-out”

(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-

sion, which may not be long enough for

HomeLink

to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are de-

signed to “time-out” in the same manner.

The indicator LED on the hand-held

remote will go off when the device times

out, indicating that it has finished transmit-

ting.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator or

garage door opener by using the program-

ming procedures, replace “Programming a

New HomeLink

button” step 3 with the

following:

While the HomeLink

indicator light is

flashing orange, press and release (“cy-

cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every

two seconds until the HomeLink

indicator

light changes from orange to green. You

may now release the hand-held remote

button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener

or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

the device during the “cycling” process

to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with “Programming a New

HomeLink

button” step 4 to complete.

! Using HomeLink

s03ap070411

To operate, simply press and release the

programmed HomeLink

button. Activa-

tion will now occur for the trained device

(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,

security system, entry door lock, home/

office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the

hand-held remote of the device may also

be used at any time.

! Erasing HomeLink

buttons

s03ap070412

To erase programming from the three

buttons (individual buttons cannot be

erased but can be “reprogrammed” as

outlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED

indicator will change from continuously lit

to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.

Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

HomeLink

is now ready to be pro-

grammed at any time beginning with

“Programming a New HomeLink

button”

- step 1.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

239

Instruments and Controls

(242,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Reprogramming a Single

HomeLink

button

s03ap070406

To program a previously trained button,

follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to slowly

flash orange after 20 seconds. The

HomeLink

button can be released at this

point. Proceed with “Programming a New

HomeLink

button” - step 3.

3. If you do not complete the program-

ming of a new device to the button, it will

revert to the previously stored program-

ming.

! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-

nication

s03ap070413

HomeLink

has the capability of commu-

nicating with your garage door opener.

HomeLink

can receive and display “clos-

ing” or “opening” status messages from

compatible garage door opener systems.

At any time, HomeLink

can also recall and

display the last recorded status commu-

nicated by the garage door opener to

indicate your garage door being “closed”

or “opened”.

HomeLink

has the capability of receiving

this communication from the garage door

opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

Range may be reduced by obstacles such

as houses or trees. You may have to slow

your vehicle speed to successfully receive

the garage door opener communication.

! Programming Two-Way Commu-

nication

s03ap070414

1) Status Indicators

Within 5 seconds after programming a new

HomeLink

button, both of HomeLink’s

garage door status indicators will flash

rapidly green indicating that the garage

door two-way communication has been

enabled. If your garage door status in-

dicators flashed, two-way communication

programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do not

flash, additional HomeLink

information

and programming videos can be found

online at www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

! Using Two-Way Communication

s03ap070415

1) Status Indicator

Recall and display (at any time) the last

recorded garage door status message

communicated to HomeLink

by simulta-

neously pressing HomeLink

buttons 1

and 2 for 2 seconds. HomeLink

will

display the last recorded status for 3

seconds.

If two-way communication programming is

successful, HomeLink

will display the

status of your garage door opener with

arrow indicators (see below).

Mirrors

240

(243,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking

Orange)

2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid

Green)

3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-

ing Orange)

4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid

Green)

! Certification

s03ap070416

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink

information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline

at 1-800-355-3515.

. U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

241

Instruments and Controls

(244,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Canada-spec. models

HomeLink

and the HomeLink

house are

registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-

tion.

WARNING

. When programming the

HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem, you may be operating a

garage door opener or other

device. Make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the garage door or other device

to prevent potential harm or da-

mage.

. Do not use the HomeLink

Wire-

less Control System with a gar-

age door opener that lacks the

safety stop and reverse feature

as required by applicable safety

standards. A garage door opener

which cannot detect an object,

signaling the door to stop and

reverse, does not meet these

safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these fea-

tures increases risk of serious

injury or death. For more infor-

mation, consult the HomeLink

website at www.homelink.com or

call 1-800-355-3515.

Mirrors

242

(245,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Mexico-spec. models

& Outside Mirrors

s03ap03

! Convex mirror (passenger side)

s03ap0301

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the

convex mirror to judge the distance

of vehicles behind you when chan-

ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or

glance backwards) to determine the

actual size and distance of objects

that you view in convex mirror.

CAUTION

Make sure to adjust the mirrors

before driving.

! Remote control mirror switch

s03ap0302

: Select side to adjust

: Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”

position.

1. Turn the control switch to the side that

you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,

“R” is for the right mirror.

2. Move the control switch in the direction

you want to move the mirror.

3. Return the control switch to the neutral

position to prevent unintentional opera-

tion.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

243

Instruments and Controls

(246,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

NOTE

The mirrors can also be adjusted

manually.

3-18. Tilt/Telescopic Steering

Wheel

s03bf

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel

tilt/telescopic position while driv-

ing. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in per-

sonal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised to the

fixed position, adjust the steering

wheel again. It is dangerous to

drive without locking the steering

wheel. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in per-

sonal injury.

1) Tilt adjustment

2) Telescopic adjustment

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to “Front

Seats” �P30.

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and down,

and forward and backward.

Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel

244

(247,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3-19. Horn

s03ar

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Horn

245

Instruments and Controls

(248,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(249,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s04

4-1. Ventilator Control............................................ 248

Center Ventilators ............................................... 248

Side Ventilators ..................................................248

4-2. Climate Control Panel .................................... 248

Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models .............................. 249

11.6-Inch Display Models .................................... 252

4-3. Automatic Climate Control Operation........... 255

Sensors.............................................................. 256

4-4. Manual Climate Control.................................. 257

Airflow Mode Selection ....................................... 257

Temperature Control ........................................... 258

Fan Speed Control..............................................259

Air Conditioner Control....................................... 259

Air Inlet Selection ............................................... 259

To Turn Off the Climate Control System .............. 260

4-5. Front Seat Heater (If Equipped)..................... 260

Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models .............................. 260

11.6-Inch Display Models.................................... 261

4-6. Defrosting ........................................................261

4-7. Operating Tips for Heater and Air

Conditioner ....................................................262

Cleaning Ventilator Grille.................................... 262

Efficient Cooling after Parking in Direct

Sunlight ........................................................... 262

Lubrication Oil Circulation in the Refrigerant

Circuit.............................................................. 262

Checking Air Conditioning System before

Summer Season............................................... 262

Cooling and Dehumidifying in High Humidity

and Low Temperature Weather Condition ......... 263

Air Conditioner Compressor Shut-Off When

Engine Is Heavily Loaded ................................. 263

Refrigerant for Your Climate Control System ...... 263

4-8. Air Filtration System .......................................263

Replacing the Cabin Air Filter............................. 264

Climate Control

(250,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

4-1. Ventilator Control

s04af

& Center Ventilators

s04af01

Move the tabs to adjust the flow direction.

To open the ventilator, turn the tab counter-

clockwise. To close the ventilator, turn the

tab clockwise.

& Side Ventilators

s04af02

Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.

To open the ventilator, turn the tab counter-

clockwise. To close the ventilator, turn the

tab clockwise.

4-2. Climate Control Panel

s04ag

WARNING

. The cooling function operates

only when the engine is running.

. Do not leave children or adults

who would normally require the

support of others alone in your

vehicle. Pets should not be left

alone either. On hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or ani-

mals.

Ventilator Control

248

(251,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models

s04ag11

1) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”

�P261.)

2) Rear window and outside mirror defogger

button (if equipped) (Refer to “Defogger

and Deicer” �P231.)

3) Climate control screen (lower display)

4) Temperature control button (Refer to

“Temperature Control” �P258.)

– CONTINUED –

Climate Control Panel

249

Climate Control

(252,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Climate control screen

s04ag1101

Climate control screen (lower display)

: Touch the climate control mode indicator

1) Climate control mode indicator

2) Climate control ON/OFF icon

3) Fan speed indicator

4) Customizable icon*

5) Airflow mode selection screen

6) Climate control mode select icon

7) Fan speed control screen

*: The customizable icon can be changed to

the favorite icon. Refer to “General settings”

�P203.

Climate Control Panel

250

(253,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Temperature control screen

s04ag1102

Temperature control screen (lower display)

: Touch the set temperature indicator

1) Set temperature indicator

2) Climate control ON/OFF icon

3) Fan speed indicator

4) Customizable icon*

5) Temperature control screen

6) Temperature control bar

7) Driver’s seat heater selector icon (if

equipped)*

8) Driver’s seat heater indicator (if

equipped)*

9) Front passenger’s seat heater indicator

(if equipped)*

10) Front passenger’s seat heater selector

icon (if equipped)*

*1: The customizable icon can be changed to

the favorite icon. Refer to “General set-

tings” �P203.

*2: For details, refer to “Front Seat Heater”

�P260.

– CONTINUED –

Climate Control Panel

251

Climate Control

(254,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& 11.6-Inch Display Models

s04ag12

1) Climate control screen

2) Rear window and outside mirror defogger

button (Refer to “Defogger and Deicer”

�P231.)

3) Passenger’s side temperature control

button (Refer to “Temperature Control”

�P258.)

4) Driver’s side temperature control button

(Refer to “Temperature Control” �P258.)

5) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”

�P261.)

Climate Control Panel

252

(255,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Climate control screen

s04ag1201

Climate control screen

: Touch the climate control mode indicator

1) Climate control ON/OFF icon

2) Climate control mode indicator

3) Customizable icon*

4) Fan speed indicator

5) Airflow mode selection screen

6) Climate control mode select icon

7) Fan speed control screen

*1: The customizable icon can be changed to

the favorite icon. Refer to “General set-

tings” �P191.

– CONTINUED –

Climate Control Panel

253

Climate Control

(256,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Temperature control screen

s04ag1202

Temperature control screen

: Touch the temperature control screen

1) Climate control ON/OFF icon

2) Climate control mode indicator

3) Customizable icon*

4) Fan speed indicator

5) Temperature control bar

6) Temperature control screen

7) Seat heater control screen (if equipped)*

8) SYNC mode indicator

9) Set temperature indicator (passenger’s

side)

10) Front passenger’s seat heater indicator

(if equipped)*

11) SYNC icon

12) Driver’s seat heater indicator (if

equipped)*

13) Set temperature indicator (driver’s side)

*1: The customizable icon can be changed to

the favorite icon. Refer to “General set-

tings” �P191.

*2: For details, refer to “Front Seat Heater”

�P260.

Climate Control Panel

254

(257,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

4-3. Automatic Climate Con-

trol Operation

s04ai

Climate control screen (dual 7.0-inch dis-

play models)

Climate control screen (11.6-inch display

models)

1) Airflow mode

2) Air inlet selection

3) Air conditioner compressor

4) Fan speed

When the full auto mode is selected, the

following functions are automatically con-

trolled.

. Airflow mode

. Air inlet selection

. Air conditioner compressor operation

. Fan speed

To activate this mode, perform the follow-

ing.

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator.

2. Touch “AUTO”.

3. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to

“Temperature Control” �P258.

NOTE

. Operate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is running.

. Even when cooling is not necessary,

the air conditioner compressor will

automatically turn on if the temperature

is set much lower than the current

outlet air temperature. Even in this

case, the “A/C” indicator light on the

climate control screen illuminates.

. The air conditioner may not operate

in the following cases:

– When the cabin temperature is

low

– When the ambient temperature

decreases close to 328F (08C)

. The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

. If something other than temperature

control is operated while the display is

in full auto mode, the “FULL” indicator

will turn off and the “AUTO” indicator

light will remain illuminated. You can

then manually control the system as

desired using the climate control

screen. To change the system back to

full auto mode, touch “AUTO”.

– CONTINUED –

Automatic Climate Control Operation

255

Climate Control

(258,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

To turn off the climate control system,

touch “ON/OFF”.

At this time, the air inlet selection mode will

differ depending on the auto mode and

manual mode.

. When the air inlet selection is set to

auto mode: Outside air circulation

. When the air inlet selection is set to

manual mode: No change

& Sensors

s04ai03

1) Solar sensor

2) Interior air temperature sensor

The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors

are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly

and become damaged, the system may

not be able to control the interior tempera-

ture correctly. To avoid damaging the

sensors, observe the following precau-

tions:

– Do not subject the sensors to impact.

– Keep water away from the sensors.

– Do not cover the sensors.

Automatic Climate Control Operation

256

(259,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

4-4. Manual Climate Control

s04aj

& Airflow Mode Selection

s04aj01

Select the preferred airflow mode by the

following operation.

Via the climate control screen:

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator.

2. Touch the preferred airflow mode.

Airflow modes are as follows.

Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets

Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets and

foot outlets

Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and the

foot outlets

Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the

instrument panel and some through wind-

shield defroster outlets (A small amount of

air flows to the windshield and both side

windows to prevent fogging.)

– CONTINUED –

Manual Climate Control

257

Climate Control

(260,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets,

foot outlets and both side outlets of the

instrument panel

& Temperature Control

s04aj02

Perform the following operation to regulate

the temperature of airflow from the air

outlets.

Temperature control buttons:

Press the temperature control button to the

blue side (cool) or the red side (warm).

Temperature control screen:

1. Touch the set temperature indicator.

2. Select the preferred temperature by

the following operation.

. Touch and move the temperature

control bar.

. Touch the “

”/“ ”.

. Touch the preferred temperature in

the temperature control screen.

! Max A/C mode

s04aj0208

For quicker cooling, touch “MAX A/C” on

the climate control mode select icon or

customizable icon.

When the Max A/C mode is on, the

following settings will be changed auto-

matically.

. The air conditioner will turn on.

. The temperature will be set on the

lowest.

. The fan speed will be set on the

maximum speed.

. The air inlet will be set to the recircula-

tion mode.

. The airflow mode setting will be set to

the ventilation mode.

To turn off the Max A/C mode and return to

the previous setting, touch “MAX A/C”

again.

! SYNC mode (11.6-inch display

models)

s04aj0207

When the SYNC mode is turned on, both

the driver’s and passenger’s side tem-

peratures are synchronized using the

driver’s side temperature control button

and temperature control display.

1. Touch the set temperature indicator.

2. Touch “SYNC” to turn the SYNC mode

on or off.

The SYNC mode indicator will turn white.

Touch “SYNC” again, press the passen-

ger’s side temperature control button or

operate the passenger’s side temperature

control bar to cancel the SYNC mode. The

SYNC mode indicator will be grayed out. In

this case, temperature control on the

driver’s side and passenger’s side will be

separated. The temperature will be con-

trolled individually using the driver’s and

passenger’s temperature control button

and the driver’s and passenger’s tempera-

ture control bar.

Manual Climate Control

258

(261,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Fan Speed Control

s04aj03

Select the preferred fan speed by the

following operation.

Via the fan speed indicator:

Touch

or on the climate control

screen.

Via the fan speed control screen:

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator

2. Touch the preferred fan speed. It is

also possible to change the fan speed by

dragging.

& Air Conditioner Control

s04aj04

The air conditioner operates only when the

engine is running.

Perform the following operation while the

fan is in operation to turn on the air

conditioner.

. If “A/C” is displayed on the customiz-

able icon, touch “A/C”. When the air

conditioner is on, the “A/C” indicator

illuminates.

. If a customizable icon other than “A/C”

is displayed, touch the climate control

mode indicator. Then touch “A/C” on the

climate control mode select icon. When

the air conditioner is on, “A/C” will turn

blue.

To turn off the air conditioner, touch “A/C”

again. The indicator light will turn off or it

will be grayed out.

NOTE

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, turn on the air

conditioner. However, if the ambient

temperature decreases to approxi-

mately 328F (08C), the air conditioner

and dehumidification system may not

work properly.

& Air Inlet Selection

s04aj05

Select the air inlet by touching the air inlet

selection icon.

Recirculation mode:

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehi-

cle. This mode is used for the following

cases.

. When driving on a dusty road

. When you want cooling performance to

increase (for example, in particularly hot

weather)

Perform the following operation to select

this mode.

is displayed on the customizable

icon:

(1) Touch

is not displayed on the customiz-

able icon:

(1) Touch the climate control mode

indicator.

(2) Touch

on the climate control

mode select icon.

will be displayed on the climate control

mode indicator.

Outside air circulation mode:

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment. This mode is used for the

following cases.

. When the road is no longer dusty

. When the interior has cooled to a

comfortable temperature

Perform the same operation as the recir-

culation mode to change the mode.

will be displayed on the climate control

mode indicator.

WARNING

Continued operation in the recircu-

lation mode may fog up the win-

dows. Switch to the outside air

circulation mode as soon as the

outside dusty condition clears.

– CONTINUED –

Manual Climate Control

259

Climate Control

(262,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

NOTE

. If the air inlet selection icon and

/ in the climate control mode

indicator are flashing when you start

the engine, there might be a malfunc-

tion in the electrical system. We recom-

mend that you contact your SUBARU

dealer for inspection.

. The indicator light on the air inlet

selection icon may flash in the follow-

ing cases. However, this does not

indicate a malfunction.

– After the vehicle battery has been

disconnected and reconnected.

– When the vehicle battery voltage

is low.

. When outside air circulation is se-

lected, the system may automatically

adjust the air inlet setting depending on

such factors as the temperature

setting, the temperature inside the

vehicle, or conditions outside the ve-

hicle.

& To Turn Off the Climate Con-

trol System

s04aj07

To turn off the climate control system,

touch the climate control ON/OFF icon.

4-5. Front Seat Heater (If

Equipped)

s04al

The seat heater operates when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

Select the seat heater temperature using

the following operation.

& Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models

s04al03

Temperature control screen

1) Driver’s seat heater selector icon

2) Driver’s seat heater indicator

3) Front passenger’s seat heater indicator

4) Front passenger’s seat heater selector

icon

1. Touch the seat heater indicator on the

temperature control screen.

2. Touch the driver’s seat heater selector

icon/front passenger’s seat heater selec-

tor icon.

Each time you touch the seat heater

selector icon, the mode will change as

follows.

HIGH:

3 indicator lights are illuminated.

MID:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

OFF:

All indicator lights turn off.

Selecting HIGH mode will cause the seat

to heat up quicker.

Holding and releasing the seat heater icon

turns the seat heater OFF in any mode.

Front Seat Heater

260

(263,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& 11.6-Inch Display Models

s04al04

Temperature control screen

1) Front seat display

2) Seat heater selector icon

3) Front passenger’s seat heater indicator

4) Driver’s seat heater indicator

1. Touch the driver’s seat heater indica-

tor/front passenger’s seat heater indicator

on the temperature control screen.

2. Touch the seat heater selector icon.

Each time you touch the seat heater

selector icon, the mode will change as

follows.

HIGH:

3 indicator lights are illuminated.

MID:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

OFF:

All indicator lights turn off.

Selecting HIGH mode will cause the seat

to heat up quicker.

Holding and releasing the seat heater icon

turns the seat heater OFF in any mode.

4-6. Defrosting

s04ah

To defrost or dehumidify the windshield

and front door windows, perform the

following procedures.

. To select the “

” mode, press the

defroster button.

. To select the “

” mode, touch “ ” on

the airflow mode selection screen.

NOTE

. When the “

” or “ ” mode is

selected, the air conditioner compres-

sor operates automatically regardless

of the position of the air conditioner

icon to defrost the windshield more

quickly. However, the indicator on the

air conditioner icon may not illuminate.

At the same time, the air inlet selection

– CONTINUED –

Defrosting

261

Climate Control

(264,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

is automatically set to the outside air

circulation mode.

. After defrosting the windshield by

pressing the defroster button “

”,

pressing the button again returns the

system to the setting that had been

selected before the defroster was acti-

vated.

4-7. Operating Tips for Heater

and Air Conditioner

s04ad

& Cleaning Ventilator Grille

s04ad01

1) Front ventilator inlet grille

2) Condenser

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept clean

because cooling performance is impaired

by any accumulation of insects and leaves

on the condenser.

& Efficient Cooling after Park-

ing in Direct Sunlight

s04ad02

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to

allow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quicker

cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the

windows closed during the operation of the

air conditioner for maximum cooling effi-

ciency.

& Lubrication Oil Circulation in

the Refrigerant Circuit

s04ad03

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking Air Conditioning

System before Summer Sea-

son

s04ad04

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper

operation each spring. Have the air con-

ditioning system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

Operating Tips for Heater and Air Conditioner

262

(265,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Cooling and Dehumidifying in

High Humidity and Low Tem-

perature Weather Condition

s04ad05

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a

small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air conditioning

system.

& Air Conditioner Compressor

Shut-Off When Engine Is

Heavily Loaded

s04ad06

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is designed

to temporarily shut off during air condi-

tioner operation whenever the accelerator

is fully depressed such as during rapid

acceleration or when driving on a steep

upgrade.

& Refrigerant for Your Climate

Control System

s04ad07

1) Air conditioner label

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf).

Before adding, changing or checking the

refrigerant, check the air conditioner label

in the location shown in the illustration to

confirm which type of refrigerant is used in

your vehicle.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for service.

Repairs needed as a result of using the

wrong refrigerant are not covered under

warranty.

4-8. Air Filtration System

s04ae

Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

equipped with an air filtration system.

Replace the cabin air filter according to

the replacement schedule found in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This

schedule should be followed to maintain

the filter’s dust collection ability. Under

extremely dusty conditions, the filter

should be replaced more frequently. Have

your filter checked or replaced by your

SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use

only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter.

. Reduction of the airflow through

the vents.

. Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

mance if not properly maintained.

– CONTINUED –

Air Filtration System

263

Climate Control

(266,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Replacing the Cabin Air Filter

s04ae01

1. Remove the glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from the

glove box.

1) Stoppers

(3) Push both sides of the glove box

inward to unlock the stoppers and then

pull down the glove box as far as it will

go.

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

and remove the hinge portion. When

doing this, be careful not to damage

the hinge.

2. Remove the cabin air filter according to

the following procedure in order to prevent

dust on the air cleaner from falling to the

inside of its housing.

(1) Push in the four stoppers to unlock,

and then slowly pull out the filter 4 in

(10 cm) from the housing.

(2) Completely pull out the filter by

gently tilting the front side of the filter

downward.

Air Filtration System

264

(267,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3. Replace the cabin air filter element

with a new one.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must

point UP.

4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.

5. Close the glove box.

Air Filtration System

265

Climate Control

(268,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(269,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s05

5-1. Antenna ........................................................... 268

Roof Antenna .....................................................268

5-2. Audio Set .........................................................268

Audio

(270,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

5-1. Antenna

s05aa

& Roof Antenna

s05aa03

The satellite radio antenna and telematics

antenna (if equipped) are installed in the

center of the roof at the rear.

5-2. Audio Set

s05ac

If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine

SUBARU navigation system or audio

system, refer to the separate navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual for details.

Antenna

268

(271,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s06

6-1. Interior Light ................................................... 270

Dome Light.........................................................270

Map Lights .........................................................270

OFF Delay Timer.................................................271

6-2. Sun Visors....................................................... 271

Vanity Mirror with Light (If Equipped) ..................271

6-3. Storage Compartment .................................... 272

Glove Box .......................................................... 272

Center Console...................................................272

6-4. Cup Holder ...................................................... 273

Front Passenger’s Cup Holder ............................ 273

Rear Passenger’s Cup Holder (If Equipped) ........ 273

6-5. Bottle Holders..................................................274

6-6. Accessory Power Outlets ...............................274

6-7. USB Power Supply ..........................................276

How to Use the USB Power Supply .................... 276

6-8. Ashtray (Dealer Option) ..................................277

6-9. Assist Grip .......................................................278

6-10. Coat Hook ......................................................278

6-11. Floor Mat ........................................................279

6-12. Under-Floor Storage Compartment..............280

Interior Equipment

(272,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

6-1. Interior Light

s06aa

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make

sure the lights are turned off to

avoid battery discharge.

& Dome Light

s06aa01

1) ON

2) DOOR

3) OFF

The dome light switch has the following

positions:

ON: The light turns on.

OFF: The light turns off.

DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-

matically when any of the doors is opened.

Several seconds after all of the doors are

closed, the dome light gradually turns off.

For details, refer to “OFF Delay Timer”

�P271.

& Map Lights

s06aa06

! Map light switches

s06aa0606

To turn on the map light, press the lens.

To turn it off, press the lens again.

! Door interlock switch

s06aa0602

1) Door interlock switch

The door interlock switch has the following

positions.

OFF: The map lights do not illuminate

automatically in conjunction with a door

opening. However, the lights can be turned

on manually by pressing the map light

lens.

DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto-

matically when any of the doors (other than

the trunk lid) is opened even while the map

light is off. Several seconds after all of the

doors (other than the trunk lid) are closed,

the map lights gradually turn off. For

details, refer to “OFF Delay Timer” �P271.

Interior Light

270

(273,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& OFF Delay Timer

s06aa07

The following lights have an automatic

illumination function.

. Dome light*

. Map lights*

. Trunk light

*: When the door interlock switch is set to the

“DOOR” position, the light will automatically

turn on and off depending on the locking and

unlocking of the doors, the opening and

closing of the doors, as well as the position

of the ignition switch.

NOTE

The setting for the period of time in

which the lights remain on (OFF delay

timer) can be changed by operating the

center information display. For details,

refer to “Car settings” �P195 (11.6-

inch display models) or “Vehicle

setting icons” �P208 (dual 7.0-inch

display models). Also, the setting of

the lights remain on (OFF delay timer)

can be changed by your SUBARU

dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for details.

6-2. Sun Visors

s06ac

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

& Vanity Mirror with Light (If

Equipped)

s06ac02

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the car is being driven to avoid

being blinded by glare.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

The lights beside the vanity mirror illumi-

nate when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a long

period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

Sun Visors

271

Interior Equipment

(274,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

6-3. Storage Compartment

s06ad

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-

partment closed while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of sudden stops or an

accident.

. Do not store the following items

in the storage compartment.

Otherwise, it may cause a fire or

accident.

– Spray cans, containers with

flammable or corrosive li-

quids or any other dangerous

items.

– Plastic or other heat-vulner-

able or flammable articles

such as a lighter.

& Glove Box

s06ad01

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

close it, push the lid firmly upward.

To lock the glove box, insert the key and

turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,

insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, use the emer-

gency key to lock or unlock the glove box.

NOTE

The emergency key is directional. If the

key cannot be inserted, change the

direction that the grooved side is facing

and insert it again.

& Center Console

s06ad02

The center console box provides a storage

space.

To open the lid, pull up the lock release.

Storage Compartment

272

(275,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

6-4. Cup Holder

s06ae

CAUTION

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,

if hot, might burn you and/or your

passengers. Spilled beverages may

also damage upholstery, carpets or

audio equipment.

& Front Passenger’s Cup

Holder

s06ae01

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to an acci-

dent.

. Take care not to spill a beverage

on the select lever or any

switch(es) in the adjacent area. If

the beverage is spilled, it may

cause a malfunction of the select

lever and/or switch(es).

CVT models

MT models

The dual cup holder is built into the center

console.

NOTE

With the divider taken out, you can use

the cup holder as a storage box.

& Rear Passenger’s Cup Holder

(If Equipped)

s06ae02

A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.

CAUTION

When a cup containing a beverage is

in the cup holder, do not fold down

or recline any seat. Otherwise, the

beverage could spill while driving

and, if the beverage is hot, it could

burn you and/or your passengers.

Cup Holder

273

Interior Equipment

(276,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

6-5. Bottle Holders

s06av

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from the

bottle holder or put a bottle in the

holder while you are driving, as

this may distract you and lead to

an accident.

. When placing a beverage in a

bottle holder, make sure it is

capped. Otherwise, the beverage

could spill when opening/closing

the door or while driving and, if

the beverage is hot, it could burn

you and/or your passengers.

The bottle holder equipped on each door

trim can be used to hold beverage bottles

and other items.

6-6. Accessory Power Out-

lets

s06af

Power outlet in the center console

Power outlet below the Center Information

Display

Bottle Holders

274

(277,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Accessory power outlets are provided in

the center console and below the Center

Information Display. Electrical power (12 V

DC) from the battery is available at any of

the outlets when the ignition switch is in

either the “ACC” or “ON” position.

You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-

ance by connecting it to an outlet.

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected is 120 W. Do

not use an appliance which exceeds the

indicated wattage for each outlet.

When using appliances connected to two

or more outlets simultaneously, the total

power consumed by them must not ex-

ceed 120 W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power

outlet.

. Do not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the acces-

sory power outlet when it is not in

use.

. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12 V DC.

The maximum power rating of an

appliance that can be connected

is 120 W. Do not use an appliance

which exceeds the indicated wat-

tage for each outlet.

When using appliances con-

nected to two or more outlets

simultaneously, the total power

consumed by them must not

exceed 120 W. Overloading the

accessory power outlet can

cause a short circuit. Do not use

double adapters or more than

one electrical appliance.

. If the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor

contact or cause the plug to get

stuck. Only use plugs that fit

properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery

discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord on

your electrical appliance will not

interfere with your shifting gears

and operating the accelerator

and brake pedals. If they do, do

not use the electrical appliance

while driving.

Power outlet in the center console

NOTE

The power outlets in the center console

can be used even when the lid is

closed, because there are gaps that

allow the cords to come out. Pass the

cord of the electrical appliance through

this gap.

Accessory Power Outlets

275

Interior Equipment

(278,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

6-7. USB Power Supply

s06ay

CAUTION

. The specification of a USB term-

inal that can be used is the A-

type. If a different specification of

terminal is connected, power

supply or charging may not be

possible, or the device may mal-

function.

. There is a risk that a connected

device may malfunction or data

may be damaged. The connec-

tion of a device shall be per-

formed at your responsibility.

. To avoid an electric shock or a

malfunction, observe the follow-

ing precautions.

– Do not connect a USB hub.

– Do not insert any metal or

other foreign object into the

USB terminal.

– Do not spill water or other

liquid on the USB terminal.

. Be careful not to pull the con-

nected cable. Doing so could

break the USB terminal and the

connected device.

. If a device is connected for a long

time when the engine is not

running, doing so may cause the

risk of a discharged battery. Even

when the engine is running, we

recommend that you do not con-

nect a device for an unnecessa-

rily long time.

. Do not connect a malfunctioning

device. Doing so may cause the

risk of smoke and fire.

NOTE

. The rated voltage of each USB

terminal is 5 V/2.1 A (total 4.2 A). For

details about the maximum rated

power, refer to “How to Use the USB

Power Supply” �P276. Before con-

necting a device, be sure to read the

instruction manual of the device and

check whether or not this specification

of the output is supported by the

device. If a device that requires power

exceeding the maximum rating is con-

nected, power supply or charging may

not be possible. Even if charging could

be completed, the time required for

charging may be longer than when the

genuine charger for that device is used.

. Depending on the device, charging

may be possible only when a special

cable is used. In this case, be sure to

connect the device using the special

cable.

. When a device that communicates

with a PC is connected, power supply

or charging may not be possible.

. When connect a device for charging,

disconnect the device promptly after

charging is completed.

& How to Use the USB Power

Supply

s06ay01

Front seat USB power supply (an audio

device can be connected and used)

USB Power Supply

276

(279,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Console USB power supply (charge only)

(if equipped)

Use the USB terminal to use or charge an

electronic device.

When using the USB, open the USB power

supply cover. After use, close it.

When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the power can be supplied

to the electronic device. Up to 5 V/2.1 A

can be supplied from each terminal (total

of 4.2 A).

6-8. Ashtray (Dealer Option)

s06ag

CAUTION

. Do not use ashtrays as waste

receptacles or leave a lighted

cigarette in an ashtray. This could

cause a fire.

. Always extinguish matches and

cigarettes before putting them

into the ashtray, and then close

the ashtray securely. If you keep

the ashtray open, the fire of the

cigarette may spread to another

cigarette butt and start a fire.

. Do not put flammable material in

the ashtray.

. Do not leave a lot of cigarette

butts in the ashtray.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-

mulate around the hinges of the ash-

tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a

toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended

implement.

The portable ashtray can be installed in

each cup holder or bottle holder. For the

locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup

Holder” �P273. For the locations of the

bottle holders, refer to “Bottle Holders”

�P274.

When using the ashtray, open the lid of the

ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the

ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

Ashtray (Dealer Option)

277

Interior Equipment

(280,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

6-9. Assist Grip

s06bd

1) Assist grip

The assist grip is to be held to support the

body of the passengers when they are in

the seat and the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not hold the assist grip when

getting up from the seat. Holding

and pulling the assist grip in the

wrong way could break the grip and

possibly cause injury.

CAUTION

Do not attach heavy objects to the

assist grip. Doing so could break it

and damage the object.

6-10. Coat Hook

s06ah

WARNING

Obey the following instructions.

. Do not hang coat hangers or

other hard or pointed objects on

the coat hooks. Hang clothing

directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

. Before hanging clothing on the

coat hooks, make sure there are

no pointed objects in the pock-

ets.

If these instructions are ignored, the

following may occur in sudden

stops or in a collision.

. Serious injuries by the items

Assist Grip

278

(281,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

thrown through the cabin

. Incorrect SRS curtain airbag de-

ployment

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat

hook that might obstruct the driver’s

view or that could cause injury in

sudden stops or in a collision. And

do not hang items on the coat hook

that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

The coat hook is attached to each rear

passenger’s assist grip.

6-11. Floor Mat

s06aj

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and

interferes with the movement of the

pedals during driving, it could cause

an accident. Observe the following

precautions to prevent the floor mat

from slipping forward.

. Be sure to use a genuine

SUBARU floor mat designed with

grommets in the correct loca-

tions.

. Make sure that the driver’s floor

mat is placed back in its proper

location and is correctly secured

on its retaining pins.

. Do not use more than one floor

mat.

Retaining pins are located on the driver’s

side floor.

The floor mat should be properly secured

using the built-in grommets, by placing the

grommets over the pins and pushing them

downward.

Floor Mat

279

Interior Equipment

(282,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

6-12. Under-Floor Storage

Compartment

s06an

Models with flat tire repair kit

Models with a spare tire

The subfloor storage compartment is

located under the floor of the trunk and

can be used to store small items. To open

the lid, pull the strap up.

NOTE

When storing a flat tire, put the subfloor

storage in the trunk.

CAUTION

. Always keep the lid of the sub-

floor storage compartment

closed while driving to reduce

the risk of injury in the event of

sudden stop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the subfloor storage

compartment.

Under-Floor Storage Compartment

280

(283,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s07

7-1. Fuel .................................................................. 283

Fuel Requirements.............................................. 283

Fuel Filler Lid and Cap........................................ 284

7-2. State Emission Testing (U.S. Only) ............... 287

7-3. Preparing to Drive .......................................... 289

7-4. Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models

without Push-Button Ignition Switch) ......... 289

General Precautions When Starting/Stopping

Engine.............................................................. 289

Starting Engine...................................................290

Stopping the Engine ........................................... 291

Steering Lock .....................................................292

7-5. Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with

Push-Button Start System) .......................... 292

Safety Precautions.............................................. 292

Operating Range for Push-Button Start System... 292

Starting Engine...................................................292

Stopping Engine................................................. 294

When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate

Properly ........................................................... 295

Steering Lock .....................................................295

7-6. Remote Engine Start System (Dealer

Option) ........................................................... 296

Remote Engine Starter Transceiver (Fob) ............ 296

Alternate Operation Method for Models with

“Keyless Access with Push-Button Start

System” ........................................................... 299

Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via

Remote Start (Models without “Keyless Access

with Push-Button Start System”)....................... 299

Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via

Remote Start (Models with “Keyless Access

with Push-Button Start System”) ...................... 300

Entering the Vehicle Following Remote Engine

Start Shutdown ................................................ 300

Pre-heating or Pre-cooling the Interior of

the Vehicle ....................................................... 300

Remote Transmitter Program (Remote Engine

Starter Transceiver).......................................... 300

System Maintenance .......................................... 301

Certification for Remote Engine Starter .............. 302

7-7. Manual Transmission ......................................303

Shifting Speeds.................................................. 304

Driving Tips ....................................................... 304

7-8. Continuously Variable Transmission .............305

Continuously Variable Transmission Features..... 305

Select Lever....................................................... 306

Shift Lock Function............................................ 307

Selection of Manual Mode .................................. 309

Driving Tips ....................................................... 310

7-9. SI-DRIVE (If Equipped)....................................311

Intelligent (I) Mode ............................................. 311

Sport (S) Mode ................................................... 311

Sport Sharp (S#) Mode ....................................... 312

SI-DRIVE Switches ............................................. 312

7-10. Drive Mode Select (If Equipped) ..................313

How to Use Drive Mode Select ........................... 313

7-11. Power Steering ..............................................314

7-12. Braking ...........................................................315

Braking Tips ...................................................... 315

Starting and Operating

(284,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Brake System .....................................................315

Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators ............ 317

7-13. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System).................... 317

ABS Self-Check .................................................. 317

ABS Warning Light .............................................317

7-14. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

System ........................................................... 318

EBD System Malfunctions...................................318

7-15. Vehicle Dynamics Control System .............. 319

Vehicle Dynamics Control System Monitor .......... 320

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Switch ................320

7-16. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(U.S.-Spec. Models) ...................................... 322

TPMS Screen...................................................... 324

7-17. Parking Your Vehicle .................................... 324

Parking Brake (MT Models) ................................. 324

Electronic Parking Brake (CVT Models) ...............325

Parking Tips ....................................................... 330

7-18. Hill Start Assist System ............................... 331

To Activate/Deactivate the Hill Start Assist

System (MT Models) .........................................333

Hill Start Assist Warning Light/Hill Start Assist

OFF Indicator Light (MT Models) .......................334

7-19. Rear View Camera ........................................ 334

How to Use the Rear View Camera......................335

Viewing Range on the Screen ............................. 336

Help Lines ..........................................................337

7-20. Cruise Control (If Equipped).........................339

To Set Cruise Control......................................... 340

To Temporarily Cancel the Cruise Control........... 341

To Turn Off the Cruise Control............................ 341

To Change the Cruising Speed ........................... 341

Cruise Control Indicator Light ............................ 342

7-21. BSD/RCTA (If Equipped) ...............................343

System Features ................................................ 343

System Operation .............................................. 345

BSD/RCTA Approach Indicator Light/Warning

Buzzer ............................................................. 346

BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator.................................... 348

BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator.............................. 349

To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA ............................ 349

Certification for the BSD/RCTA ........................... 350

Handling of Radar Sensors................................. 351

7-22. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

System (If Equipped) ....................................352

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

Overview.......................................................... 352

Operating Conditions ......................................... 354

Sonar Audible Alarm Function............................ 357

Automatic Braking Function Operation ............... 359

Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) System Operation .................................. 360

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

ON/OFF Setting ................................................ 361

RAB Warning Indicator....................................... 361

Handling of the Sonar Sensors........................... 362

Starting and Operating

(285,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7-1. Fuel

s07aa

CAUTION

. Use of a fuel which is low in

quality or use of an inappropriate

fuel additive may cause damage

to the engine and/or fuel system.

. Some gas stations, particularly

those in high altitude areas, offer

fuels posted as regular octane

gasoline with an octane rating

below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of

those fuels are not recom-

mended.

& Fuel Requirements

s07aa01

The engine is designed to operate using

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating

of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher. If 91 AKI

(95 RON) fuel is not readily available,

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of

87 AKI (90 RON) may be used.

Regular unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher may

also be used. Using regular unleaded

gasoline will not be detrimental to engine

durability, nor will it affect your warranty

coverage. However, depending on your

driving habits and conditions, you may

notice a decrease in maximum engine

performance, fuel economy or slight en-

gine vibration or knocking. If you experi-

ence any of these conditions while using a

lower octane rated fuel, you may want to

return to using 91 AKI (95 RON) octane

rated fuel as soon as possible. Addition-

ally, if your vehicle knocks heavily or

persistently, the use of 91 AKI (95 RON)

or higher grade unleaded gasoline is

required.

! Fuel octane rating

s07aa0103

Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating

can cause persistent and heavy knocking,

which can damage the engine. Do not be

concerned if your vehicle sometimes

knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or

when you accelerate. See your dealer or a

qualified service technician if you use a

fuel with the specified octane rating and

your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

! RON

s07aa010301

This octane rating is the Research Octane

Number.

! AKI

s07aa010302

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane and Motor Octane num-

bers and is commonly referred to as the

Anti Knock Index (AKI).

! Unleaded gasoline

s07aa0104

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

! Reformulated gasoline

s07aa0128

SUBARU supports the use of reformulated

gasoline when available. Reformulated

gasoline has been blended to burn more

cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.

! MMT

s07aa0106

Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-

cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-

pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-

function indicator light may turn on. If this

happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is

determined that the condition is caused

by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be

covered by your warranty.

! Gasoline for cleaner air

s07aa0129

Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-

ditives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.

This helps keep your engine in tune and

– CONTINUED –

Fuel

283

Starting and Operating

(286,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

your emission control system working

properly, and is a way of doing your part

for cleaner air. If you continuously use a

high quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never

need to add any fuel system cleaning

agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with

materials called oxygenates. Use of these

fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol

(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your

vehicle, but should contain no more than

15% ethanol for the proper operation of

your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains

more than 15% ethanol, including from any

pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which are

only some examples of fuel containing

more than 15% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformulated gasolines,

which are designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station op-

erators if their gasolines contain deter-

gents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-

sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following description.

. Fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that specified

in this manual.

. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicle

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel

mixture AND if it is accompanied by

sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-

vents and corrosion inhibitors required to

prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not

use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT

under these conditions.

. If undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may be

fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-

line before seeking service at your

SUBARU dealer.

. Fuel system damage or driveability

problems which result from the use of

improper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

& Fuel Filler Lid and Cap

s07aa02

! Locations of the fuel filler lid

s07aa0202

! Refueling

s07aa0201

Only one person should be involved in

refueling. Do not allow others to approach

the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler

pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions

that are posted at the service station.

1. Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/ “OFF” position and

turn off all the other electrical components.

2. To unlock the fuel filler lid, perform one

of the operations below.

– Press the “

” button on the key fob.

– Press the unlock side of the power

door locking switch.

Fuel

284

(287,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.

4. The fuel filler lid opens automatically.

Open it further by hand.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap,

first touch the vehicle body or a

metal portion of the fuel pump or

similar object to discharge any sta-

tic electricity that may be present on

your body. If your body is carrying

an electrostatic charge, there is a

possibility that an electric spark

could ignite the fuel, which could

burn you. To avoid acquiring a new

static electric charge, do not get

back into the vehicle while refueling

is in progress.

1) Open

2) Close

5. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-

mable. Before refueling, always

turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position first and

then close all vehicle doors and

windows. Make sure that there

are no lighted cigarettes, open

flames or electrical sparks in the

adjacent area. Only handle fuel

outdoors. Quickly wipe up any

spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it

firmly and turn it slowly to the left.

Do not remove the cap quickly.

Fuel may be under pressure and

spray out of the fuel filler neck,

especially in hot weather. If you

hear a hissing sound while you

are removing the cap, wait for the

sound to stop and then slowly

open the cap to prevent fuel from

spraying out and creating a fire

hazard.

6. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder

inside the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

. When refueling, insert the fuel

nozzle securely into the fuel filler

– CONTINUED –

Fuel

285

Starting and Operating

(288,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

fully inserted, its automatic stop-

ping mechanism may not func-

tion, causing fuel to overflow the

tank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto-

matic stop mechanism on the

fuel nozzle activates. If you con-

tinue to add fuel, temperature

changes or other conditions

may cause fuel to overflow from

the tank and create a fire hazard.

7. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add any

more fuel.

8. Put the cap back on and turn it clock-

wise until you hear a clicking noise. Be

certain not to catch the tether under the

cap while tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened

until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage

in the event of an accident.

9. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel

may damage the paint, be sure to

wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.

Paint damage caused by spilled fuel

is not covered under the SUBARU

Limited Warranty.

NOTE

. You will see the “

” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

lid is located on the right side of the

vehicle.

. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator

light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK

ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction In-

dicator Light” �P157.

. To lock the fuel filler lid, perform one

of the operations below. However if

these operations are performed when

the fuel filler lid is open, the fuel filler lid

will not lock when it is subsequently

closed.

– Press the “

” button on the key

fob.

– Press the lock side of the power

door locking switch.

. When the doors are locked or un-

locked using the automatic door lock

system, the fuel filler lid will be locked

or unlocked at the same time.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause da-

mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to the

right until it clicks to ensure that

it is fully tightened. If the cap is

not securely tightened, fuel may

leak out while the vehicle is being

driven or fuel spillage could oc-

cur in the event of an accident,

creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be

sure to wipe off any spilled fuel

quickly. Paint damage caused by

spilled fuel is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARU

fuel filler cap. If you use the

wrong cap, it may not fit or have

proper venting and your fuel tank

and emission control system

may be damaged. It could also

lead to fuel spillage and a fire.

Fuel

286

(289,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning

light illuminates. Engine misfires

as a result of an empty tank could

cause damage to the engine.

Continuing to operate your vehi-

cle at an extremely low fuel level

may result in a reduction of

engine performance.

! If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened

s07aa0203

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to

a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be

opened from the trunk.

1. Push the access cover at the right-side

of the trunk trim.

1) Clip

2. Remove the clip.

3. Pull the clip to unlock the fuel filler lid.

7-2. State Emission Testing

(U.S. Only)

s07ab

WARNING

Only use a four-wheel dynamometer

when testing an All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) model.

Testing of an AWD model must

NEVER be performed on a single

two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-

ing to do so will result in uncon-

trolled vehicle movement and may

cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

CAUTION

. At state inspection time, remem-

ber to tell your inspection or

service station in advance not to

place your SUBARU AWD vehicle

on a two-wheel dynamometer.

Otherwise, serious transmission

damage will result.

. Resultant vehicle damage due to

improper testing is not covered

under the SUBARU Limited War-

ranty and is the responsibility of

the state inspection program or

– CONTINUED –

State Emission Testing (U.S. Only)

287

Starting and Operating

(290,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states

have Inspection/Maintenance programs to

inspect your vehicle’s emission control

system. If your vehicle does not pass this

test, some states may deny renewal of

your vehicle’s registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer

that monitors the performance of the

engine’s emission control system. Certi-

fied emission inspectors will inspect the

On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as

part of the state emission inspection

process. The OBDII system is designed

to detect engine and transmission pro-

blems that might cause the vehicle emis-

sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII

inspections apply to all 1996 model year

and newer passenger cars and trucks.

Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-

bia have implemented emission inspection

of the OBDII system.

. The inspection of the OBDII system

consists of a visual operational check of

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-

function indicator light (MIL) and an ex-

amination of the OBDII system with an

electronic scan tool.

. A vehicle passes the OBDII system

inspection if proper operation of the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-

served, there are no stored diagnostic

trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness

monitors are all complete.

. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not

properly operating (light is illuminated or is

not working due to a burned out bulb) or

there is one or more diagnostic trouble

codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.

. A state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of

OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT

READY” is greater than one. If the

vehicle’s battery has been recently re-

placed or disconnected, the OBDII system

inspection may indicate that the vehicle is

not ready for the emission test. Under this

condition, the vehicle driver should be

instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a

few days to reset the readiness monitors

and return for an emission re-inspection.

. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer for

service.

Some states still use dynamometers in

their emission inspection program. A

dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like

testing device that allows your vehicle’s

wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in

one place. Prior to your vehicle being put

on a dynamometer, tell your emission

inspector not to place your SUBARU

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-

ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel

dynamometers in their emission testing

program have EXEMPTED SUBARU

AWD vehicles from the portion of the

testing program that involves a two-wheel

dynamometer. There are some states that

use four-wheel dynamometers in their

testing program. When properly used, this

equipment should not damage a SUBARU

AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected in

an attempt to bypass AWD for state

emission testing. An AWD vehicle must

be tested using an AWD dynamometer

with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

State Emission Testing (U.S. Only)

288

(291,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7-3. Preparing to Drive

s07ac

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition

of the tires. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

4. Check that no small animals enter the

engine compartment.

5. Check that the hood and trunk are fully

closed.

6. Check the adjustment of the seat.

7. Check the adjustment of the inside and

outside mirrors.

8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

9. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine.

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cool-

ing fan and belts of the engine may

result in a malfunction. Check that

no small animal enters the engine

compartment and under the vehicle

before starting the engine.

NOTE

Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,

washer fluid and other fluid levels

should be checked daily, weekly or at

fuel stops.

7-4. Starting and Stopping

the Engine (Models without

Push-Button Ignition Switch)

s07bd

& General Precautions When

Starting/Stopping Engine

s07bd06

WARNING

. Never start the engine from out-

side the vehicle (except when

using the remote engine start

system). It may result in an acci-

dent.

. Do not leave the engine running

in locations with poor ventilation,

such as a garage and indoors.

The exhaust gas may enter the

vehicle or indoors, and it may

result in carbon monoxide poi-

soning.

. Do not start the engine near dry

foliage, paper, or other flammable

substances. The exhaust pipe

and exhaust emissions can cre-

ate a fire hazard at high tempera-

tures.

– CONTINUED –

Preparing to Drive

289

Starting and Operating

(292,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

CAUTION

. If the engine is stopped during

driving, the catalyst may over-

heat and burn.

. When starting the engine, be sure

to sit in the driver’s seat (except

when using the remote engine

start system).

NOTE

. Avoid racing and rapid acceleration

immediately after the engine has

started.

. Until the engine is warmed up suffi-

ciently, the engine speed is maintained

high. The engine speed will gradually

drop as the engine warms up.

. On rare occasions, it may be difficult

to start the engine depending on the

fuel used and the driving condition

(repeated short trips when the engine

is not warmed up sufficiently). In such a

case, it is recommended to switch to a

different brand of fuel.

. On rare occasions, transient knock-

ing may be heard from the engine when

the accelerator is operated rapidly such

as a rapid start-up and a rapid accel-

eration. This is not a malfunction.

. The engine starts more easily when

the headlights, air conditioner and rear

window defogger are turned off.

& Starting Engine

s07bd01

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor

continuously for more than 10 sec-

onds. If the engine fails to start after

operating the starter for 5 to 10

seconds, wait for 10 seconds or

more before trying again.

NOTE

. It may be difficult to start the engine

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for mainte-

nance or other purposes). This diffi-

culty is caused by the electronically

controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis

function. To overcome it, keep the

ignition switch in the “ON” position

for approximately 10 seconds before

starting the engine.

. Do not shift the select lever while the

starter is cranking.

! MT models

s07bd0101

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor

and shift the shift lever to neutral. Hold the

clutch pedal to the floor while starting the

engine.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and Indicator Lights” �P152.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, perform the

following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is applied, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”

position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models without Push-Button Ignition Switch)

290

(293,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

erator pedal and turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine starts, quickly release the ac-

celerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”

position. After waiting for 10 seconds

or longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still does not start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make sure

that the select lever is at the “N” position

and that the parking brake is applied.

! CVT models

s07bd0104

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the select

lever into the “N” position. Do not

attempt to place the select lever of a

moving vehicle into the “P” position.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”

position (preferably “P” position). The

starter will only operate when the select

lever is at the “P” or “N” position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and Indicator Lights” �P152.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, perform the

following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position and wait for at least

10 seconds. After checking that the

parking brake is applied, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”

position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator pedal and turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine starts, quickly release the ac-

celerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”

position. After waiting for 10 seconds

or longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still does not start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make sure

that the select lever is at the “P” or “N”

position and that the parking brake is

applied.

& Stopping the Engine

s07bd02

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the

vehicle is moving. This will cause

loss of power to the power steering

and the brake booster, making steer-

– CONTINUED –

Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models without Push-Button Ignition Switch)

291

Starting and Operating

(294,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

ing and braking more difficult. It

could also result in accidental acti-

vation of the “LOCK” position on the

ignition switch, causing the steering

wheel to lock.

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Move the select lever to the “P”

position (CVT models).

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK/

OFF” position.

The engine will stop, and the power will be

switched off.

& Steering Lock

s07bd07

After stopping the engine and the key is

removed from ignition switch, the steering

wheel will be locked due to the steering

lock function.

When the engine is restarted, the steering

lock will be automatically released.

! When the steering lock cannot be

released

s07bd0701

When you cannot unlock the steering

wheel, perform the following steps.

1. Check that the parking brake is ap-

plied.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Check that the select lever is set in the

“P” position (CVT models).

4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position while turning the steering wheel

left and right.

If you cannot unlock the steering wheel by

doing the steps, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

7-5. Starting and Stopping

Engine (Models with Push-

Button Start System)

s07be

& Safety Precautions

s07be06

Refer to “Safety Precautions” �P103.

& Operating Range for Push-

Button Start System

s07be01

Refer to “Operating Range for Push-

Button Start System” �P146.

& Starting Engine

s07be03

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “General Precau-

tions When Starting/Stopping

Engine” �P289.

. If the indicator on the push-but-

ton ignition switch flashes in

green after the engine has

started, never drive the vehicle.

The steering is still locked, and it

may result in an accident.

Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

292

(295,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

CAUTION

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch is

flashing in orange, there may be a

malfunction with the vehicle.

Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-

diately.

. If the indicator on the push-but-

ton ignition switch is flashing in

green after the engine has

started, it means that the steering

is still locked. While moving the

steering wheel right and left,

depress the brake pedal, and

press the push-button ignition

switch.

. Do not continue pressing the

push-button ignition switch for

more than 10 seconds. Doing so

could cause a malfunction. If the

engine does not start, stop press-

ing the push-button ignition

switch. Instead, press the push-

button ignition switch without

depressing the brake pedal to

switch the power status to

“OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and then

press the push-button ignition

switch to start the engine.

NOTE

. When pressing the push-button igni-

tion switch with the clutch pedal (MT

models) or the brake pedal (CVT mod-

els) depressed:

– The engine starter operates for a

maximum of 10 seconds and after

starting the engine, the starter stops

automatically.

– The engine can be started regard-

less of the power status.

. If the engine does not start, check

the security indicator light. Then press

the push-button ignition switch without

depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod-

els) or the brake pedal (CVT models) to

switch the power to “OFF”.

– If the light had illuminated, try to

start the engine again.

– If the light had been off, press the

push-button ignition switch while

depressing the clutch pedal (MT

models) or the brake pedal (CVT

models) more forcefully.

. The engine start procedures may not

function depending on the radio wave

conditions around the vehicle. In such

a case, refer to “Starting Engine”

�P403.

. If the vehicle battery is discharged,

the steering cannot be unlocked.

Charge the battery.

. It may be difficult to start the engine

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for mainte-

nance or other purposes). This diffi-

culty is caused by the electronically

controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis

function. To overcome it, keep the

ignition switch in the “ON” position

for approximately 10 seconds before

starting the engine.

. Until the engine is warmed up suffi-

ciently, the engine speed will be main-

tained high. The engine speed will

decrease as the engine warms up.

. Do not shift the select lever while the

starter is cranking.

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

When the push-button ignition switch is

– CONTINUED –

Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

293

Starting and Operating

(296,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

pressed while depressing the clutch pedal

(MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT

models), the engine will start. The starting

procedure for the engine is as follows.

! MT models

s07be0301

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Shift the shift lever to neutral.

4. Depress the brake pedal.

5. Depress the clutch pedal until the

indicator on the push-button ignition switch

turns green.

6. While depressing the clutch pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

! CVT models

s07be0304

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Make sure the parking brake is ap-

plied.

3. Make sure the select lever is in the “P”

position. The engine can also start when

the select lever is in the “N” position,

however, for safety reasons, start in the “P”

position.

4. Depress the brake pedal until the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green. When starting

with the select lever in the “N” position, the

indicator does not turn green.

5. While depressing the brake pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

. While pressing the select lever but-

ton in, the indicator on the push-button

ignition switch will not turn green even

when the select lever is in the “P”

position.

. When the engine is not started, the

brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a

case, depress the brake pedal more

forcefully than usual. Check that the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green, and press

the push-button ignition switch to start

the engine.

! In case of the engine does not start

by the normal engine start proce-

dure

s07be0305

1. Move the shift lever to the neutral

position (MT models), or move the select

lever to the “P” position (CVT models).

2. Switch the power status to “ACC”.

3. Press and hold the push-button ignition

switch for at least 15 seconds with the

clutch pedal (MT models)/brake pedal

(CVT models) depressed.

Although the engine may start, only use

this procedure in the case of an emer-

gency. If the engine still does not start,

refer to “Starting Engine” �P403.

& Stopping Engine

s07be04

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Move the select lever to the “P”

position (CVT models).

3. Press the push-button ignition switch.

The engine will stop, and the power will be

switched off.

WARNING

. Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch during driving.

When the push-button ignition

switch is operated as follows,

the engine will stop.

– The switch is pressed and held

for 3 seconds or longer.

– The switch is pressed briefly 3

times or more in succession.

When the engine stops, the brake

booster will not function. A great-

er foot pressure will be required

on the brake pedal.

The power steering system will

not operate either. A greater force

will be required to steer, and it

may result in an accident.

Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

294

(297,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. If the engine stops during driving,

do not operate the push-button

ignition switch or open any of the

doors until the vehicle is stopped

in a safe location. It is dangerous

because the steering lock may be

activated. Stop the vehicle in a

safe place, and contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

For CVT models:

. Do not stop the engine while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

. If the engine is stopped while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position, the power

will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is

left in this condition, the battery

may be discharged.

NOTE

Although you can stop the engine by

operating the push-button ignition

switch, do not stop the engine during

driving except in an emergency.

& When Access Key Fob Does

Not Operate Properly

s07be05

Refer to “Access Key Fob – If Access Key

Fob Does Not Operate Properly” �P402.

& Steering Lock

s07be07

After stopping the engine and any door is

opened, the steering wheel will be locked

due to the steering lock function.

When the engine is restarted, the steering

lock will be automatically released.

! When the steering lock cannot be

released

s07be0701

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

When you cannot restart the engine due to

the steering lock, check the status of

operation indicator and perform the follow-

ing steps.

! Operation indicator flashing in

green

s07be070101

1. Check that the select lever is set in the

“P” position (CVT models).

2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

while turning the steering wheel left and

right.

! Operation indicator flashing in

orange

s07be070102

There may be a malfunction in the steering

lock function. Immediately contact your

nearest SUBARU dealer.

Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

295

Starting and Operating

(298,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7-6. Remote Engine Start

System (Dealer Option)

s07az

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “General Precau-

tions When Starting/Stopping

Engine” �P289.

. Do not remote start a vehicle in an

enclosed environment (e.g.

closed garage). Prolonged opera-

tion of a motor vehicle in an

enclosed environment can cause

a harmful build-up of carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is

harmful to your health. Exposure

to high levels of carbon monox-

ide can cause headaches, dizzi-

ness or in extreme cases uncon-

sciousness and/or death.

The remote engine start system allows you

to start the engine from outside the vehicle.

In addition, the remote engine start system

can activate the heater or air conditioner,

providing you with a comfortable cabin

upon entry. For more details, refer to the

Owner’s Manual supplement for the re-

mote engine start system.

NOTE

. The length of time for which it is

acceptable to allow the engine to

remain idling may be bound by local

laws and regulations. Check the local

rules when using the remote engine

start system.

. When taking your vehicle in for

service, it is recommended that you

inform the service personnel that your

vehicle is equipped with a remote

engine start system.

& Remote Engine Starter

Transceiver (Fob)

s07az21

1) Fob button

! Starting the engine

s07az2101

NOTE

All vehicle doors and the engine hood

must be closed prior to activating the

remote engine start system. Any open

entry point will prevent starting or

cause the engine to stop.

The remote engine start system is acti-

vated by pressing the fob button on your

remote engine starter transceiver (fob)

twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within

operating range of the system and the start

request is received, the following will

occur.

. The fob flashes and beeps once.

. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

If the fob is not within range (the user is too

far away from the vehicle), the fob will

indicate two long flashes without beeping.

The system will check certain safety

preconditions before starting, and if all

conditions are met, the engine will start

within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,

the following will occur.

. The fob flashes and beeps twice.

. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

296

(299,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

parking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remote

engine start system, the following will

occur.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights remain illuminated.

. The fob button flashes once every 3

seconds.

. The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not start

(or starts and stalls) the remote engine

start system will power off and then

attempt to start the engine 3 additional

times. The system will not attempt to

restart the engine if it determines a vehicle

malfunction is preventing starting. If the

engine does not start after 3 additional

attempts, the remote engine start request

will be aborted.

! Stopping the engine

s07az2102

Press and hold the fob button for at least 2

seconds to stop the engine. The fob will

flash and beep three times, indicating the

engine has stopped. If the stop request is

not received (for example, if the user is too

far away from the vehicle), the fob will

continue to flash once every 3 seconds.

The system will automatically stop the

engine after 15 minutes.

! Remote start safety features

s07az2103

For safety and security reasons, the

remote engine start system will prevent

starting (or stop the engine if running) and

sound the horn twice if any of the following

conditions is detected. In addition, the fob

will flash and beep 3 times.

. The total run-time has exceeded 20

minutes.

. The brake pedal is depressed.

. A key is in the ignition switch.

. The engine hood is open.

. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500

rpm.

. The security alarm is triggered.

. The select lever is not in the “P”

position.

If the system detects any door open during

operation, it will prevent starting or stop the

engine, and sound the horn and flash side

marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights

6 times.

In addition to the items above, if the

vehicle’s engine management system

determines there is a safety risk due to a

vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will

power down and the horn will sound 3

times.

NOTE

. If the alarm system is armed at the

time of remote engine starter activation

(the security indicator light on the

combination meter is flashing), the

alarm system will remain armed

throughout the remote start run cycle.

. If the alarm system is disarmed at

the time of remote engine starter acti-

vation (the security indicator light on

the combination meter is not flashing),

the alarm system will remain disarmed

throughout the remote start run cycle.

! Remote start operation - fob con-

firmation

s07az2104

Your remote engine starter fob is a

bidirectional transceiver that can confirm

system operation with several different

visual and audible indications. The fob’s

LED-backlit button and internal piezo

buzzer will indicate the status of the

system using the following the flash and

beep sequences, provided the fob is within

operational range of the system.

– CONTINUED –

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

297

Starting and Operating

(300,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Precondition

Fob Indication

Meaning

Flash Beep

Fob start button is being pressed

Continuous while button is

held down

— The fob is transmitting an RF signal

User attempts to start engine by pressing fob

button twice within 3 sec

1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received

2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully

1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started

2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)

Engine idling by remote engine start operation

1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps

Engine stopped by system time-out or for safety

reasons (see sections above)

User attempts to stop engine by pressing and

holding fob button for at least 2 sec

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request

1 flash every 3 sec —

Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

298

(301,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Alternate Operation Method

for Models with “Keyless Ac-

cess with Push-Button Start

System”

s07az22

Access key fob

1) Lock button

An access key fob can be used as the

remote engine start transmitter. Operate

the lock button to start or stop the engine

as follows.

! Before starting the engine

s07az2201

Before using the remote engine start

system to start the engine, confirm the

following conditions.

. The select lever is in the “P” position.

. All doors are closed.

. The engine hood is closed.

. The push-button ignition switch is in the

“OFF” position.

! Starting the engine

s07az2202

To start the engine with remote engine

start system, briefly press the lock button

twice within 2 seconds, then press and

hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The

hazard warning flashers then flash once

and the buzzer chirps once.

2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button

briefly again. The hazard warning flashers

then flash once again, and the buzzer

chirps once again.

3. After step 2, immediately press and

hold the lock button. The hazard warning

flashers then flash three times, and the

horn will honk once.

4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,

release the lock button. The engine will

then start successfully.

! Stopping the engine

s07az2203

Press and hold the lock button to stop the

engine with remote engine start system.

! Remote start safety features

s07az2204

For detailed information, refer to “Remote

start safety features” �P297.

& Entering the Vehicle While It

Is Running via Remote Start

(Models without “Keyless

Access with Push-Button

Start System”)

s07az03

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

remote keyless entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked

manually using the key, the vehicle’s

alarm system will trigger (if the alarm

system is armed prior to activating the

remote engine start system) and the

engine will turn off. Perform either of

the following procedures to disarm the

alarm system. Refer to “Alarm System”

�P127.

– Insert the key into the ignition

switch and turn it to the “ON”

position.

– Press any button on the remote

keyless entry transmitter.

2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will shut

down when any door is opened.

3. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn it to the “START” position to

restart the engine.

– CONTINUED –

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

299

Starting and Operating

(302,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Entering the Vehicle While It

Is Running via Remote Start

(Models with “Keyless Ac-

cess with Push-Button Start

System”)

s07az24

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

keyless access function and remote key-

less entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked

manually using the key, the vehicle’s

alarm system will trigger (if the alarm

system is armed prior to activating the

remote engine start system) and the

engine will turn off. Perform either of

the following procedures to disarm the

alarm system. Refer to “Alarm System”

�P127.

– Turn the push-button ignition

switch to the “ACC” or “ON” posi-

tion.

– Press any button on the access

key fob.

2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will

remain running provided the access key

fob is present and detected by the vehicle.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

once while depressing the brake pedal

before driving your vehicle. The remote

engine starter transceiver (fob) will flash

and beep 3 times to indicate that the

remote start system has been shut down.

& Entering the Vehicle Follow-

ing Remote Engine Start

Shutdown

s07az10

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is

opened by the remote keyless entry

transmitter within a few seconds immedi-

ately following remote engine start shut-

down.

& Pre-heating or Pre-cooling

the Interior of the Vehicle

s07az04

Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-

perature controls to the desired setting and

operation. After the system starts the

engine, the heater or air conditioning will

activate and heat or cool the interior to

your setting.

& Remote Transmitter Program

(Remote Engine Starter

Transceiver)

s07az13

New transmitters can be programmed to

the remote engine start system in the

event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,

damaged or additional transmitters are

desired (the system will accept up to eight

transmitters). New remote engine start

transmitters can be programmed accord-

ing to the following procedure.

1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s

door must remain open throughout the

entire process).

2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then

“LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/

“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”,

then back to “ON” again and leave the

ignition “ON” throughout the programming

process.

4. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn three times, indicating that

the system has entered the transmitter

learn mode.

5. Press and release the “

” button on

the transmitter that you want to program.

6. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn one time, indicating that the

system has learned the transmitter. Upon

successful programming, the remote start

confirmation transmitter button will flash

one time.

7. Repeat step 5 for any additional

transmitters (the system will accept up to

eight transmitters).

8. The system will exit the transmitter

learn mode if the key is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is closed

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

300

(303,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

or after 2 minutes.

& System Maintenance

s07az09

NOTE

For remote engine starter transceiver:

In the event that the vehicle’s battery is

replaced, discharged or disconnected,

it will be necessary to start the vehicle a

minimum of one time using the key

prior to activating the remote engine

start system. This is required to allow

the vehicle electronic systems to re-

synchronize.

! Changing the battery

s07az0901

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the remote engine start

transmitter when replacing the

battery.

. Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the re-

mote engine start transmitter

when replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could

swallow them.

. There is a danger of explosion if

an incorrect replacement battery

is used. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of bat-

tery.

. Battery should not be exposed to

excessive heat such as sunshine,

fire or the like.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Perform the procedure described in “Re-

placing Battery of Access Key Fob”

�P458.

For remote engine starter transceiver:

The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450)

supplied in your remote engine start

transmitter should last approximately one

year, depending on usage. When the

battery begins to weaken, you will notice

a decrease in range (distance from the

vehicle that your remote control operates).

Follow the instructions below to change

the remote engine start transmitter battery.

1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-

cated on the back side lower left corner of

the transmitter.

2. Carefully pry the remote engine start

transmitter halves apart using a small flat-

head screwdriver.

– CONTINUED –

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

301

Starting and Operating

(304,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and remove the

battery and replace with new one. Be sure

to observe the (+) sign on the old battery

before removing it to ensure that the new

battery is inserted properly (battery “+”

should be pointed away from the transmit-

ter circuit board on battery).

4. Carefully snap the case halves back

together, reinstall the phillips screw and

test the remote engine start system.

& Certification for Remote En-

gine Starter

s07az23

! U.S.-spec. models

s07az2301

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

! Canada-spec. models

s07az2302

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

302

(305,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7-7. Manual Transmission

s07af

This manual transmission is a completely

synchromesh, 6-forward-speed and 1-re-

verse-speed transmission.

The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever

knob.

To change the shift lever position:

1. Depress the clutch pedal.

2. To shift into all positions other than “R”,

move the shift lever accordingly.

1) Slider

3. To shift into the “R” position, hold up the

slider, move the lever to the “R” position,

then release the slider.

4. Gradually release the clutch pedal.

If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the

transmission in neutral, release the clutch

pedal momentarily, and then try again.

WARNING

. Do not drive the vehicle with the

clutch disengaged (i.e., when the

clutch pedal is depressed) or with

the shift lever in the neutral

position. Engine braking has no

effect in either of these condi-

tions and the risk of an accident

is consequently increased.

. Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,

release the clutch pedal) sud-

denly when starting the vehicle.

By doing so the vehicle might

unexpectedly accelerate or the

transmission could malfunction.

CAUTION

Shift into reverse ONLY when the

vehicle has completely stopped. It

may cause damage to the transmis-

sion to try shifting into reverse when

the vehicle is moving.

– CONTINUED –

Manual Transmission

303

Starting and Operating

(306,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Shifting Speeds

s07af01

! Recommended shifting speeds

s07af0101

The best compromise between fuel econ-

omy and vehicle performance during

normal driving is ensured by shifting up

at the speeds listed in the following table.

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th

50 (80)

! Maximum allowable speeds

s07af0102

The following table shows the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will

enter the red area if these speeds are

exceeded.

With the exception of cases where sudden

acceleration is required, do not drive the

vehicle with the tachometer’s needle in-

side the red area. Failure to observe this

precaution can lead to excessive engine

wear and poor fuel economy.

Gear mph (km/h)

1st 28 (45)

2nd

50 (80)

WARNING

When shifting down a gear, ensure

that the vehicle is not travelling at a

speed exceeding the Maximum Al-

lowable Speed for the gear which is

about to be selected. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

engine overrevving and this in turn

can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine brakes when the vehicle is

travelling on a slippery surface can

lead to wheel locking; as a conse-

quence, control of the vehicle may

be lost and the risk of an accident

increased.

NOTE

Never exceed the posted speed limit.

& Driving Tips

s07af02

NOTE

If the accelerator and brake pedals are

depressed at the same time, driving

torque may be restrained. This is not a

malfunction.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to

hold your vehicle at a standstill on an

upgrade. Either of those actions may

cause clutch damage.

Do not drive with your hand resting on the

shift lever. This may cause wear on the

transmission components.

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle

speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,

or driving up steep hills, downshift to a

lower gear before the engine starts to

labor.

On steep downgrades, downshift the

transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear

as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe

speed and to extend brake pad life.

In this way, the engine provides a braking

effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)

the brakes while descending a hill, they

may overheat and not work properly.

The engine may, on rare occasions, knock

when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or

rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This

phenomenon is not an indication of a

problem in your vehicle.

Manual Transmission

304

(307,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7-8. Continuously Variable

Transmission

s07bg

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”

position into the “D” or “R” position

while depressing the accelerator

pedal. This may cause the vehicle

to lurch forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Observe the following precau-

tions. Failure to observe these

precautions could cause damage

to the transmission.

– Shift into the “P” or “R” posi-

tion only after the vehicle has

completely stopped.

– Do not shift from the “D”

position into the “R” position

or vice versa until the vehicle

has completely stopped.

. Do not race the engine for more

than 5 seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position

when the brake is applied or

when chocks are used in the

wheels. This may cause the

transmission fluid to overheat.

. Never move the vehicle rearward

by inertia with the select lever set

in a forward driving position or

move the vehicle forward by

inertia with the select lever set

in the “R” position. Doing so may

result in an unexpected accident

or malfunction.

. When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the select lever in

the “P” position. Do not park for a

long time with the select lever in

any other position as doing so

could result in a dead battery.

& Continuously Variable Trans-

mission Features

s07bg06

The continuously variable transmission is

electronically controlled and provides an

infinite number of forward speeds and 1

reverse speed. It also has a manual mode.

NOTE

. When the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, the transmission will

shift at higher engine speeds than

when the coolant temperature is suffi-

ciently high in order to shorten the

warm-up time and improve driveability.

The gearshift timing will automatically

shift to the normal timing after the

engine has warmed up.

. Immediately after transmission fluid

is replaced, you may feel that the

transmission operation is somewhat

unusual. This results from invalidation

of data which the on-board computer

has collected and stored in memory to

allow the transmission to shift at the

most appropriate times for the current

condition of your vehicle. Optimized

shifting will be restored as the vehicle

continues to be driven for a while.

. When driving under continuous hea-

vy load conditions such as climbing a

long, steep hill, the engine speed,

vehicle speed and air conditioning

system cooling performance may auto-

matically be reduced. This is not a

malfunction. This phenomenon results

from the engine control function main-

taining the cooling performance of the

vehicle. The engine and vehicle speed

will return to a normal speed when the

engine is able to maintain the optimum

cooling performance after the heavy

load decreases. Driving under a heavy

load must be performed with extreme

care.

. The continuously variable transmis-

sion is a chain type system that pro-

vides superior transmission efficiency

– CONTINUED –

Continuously Variable Transmission

305

Starting and Operating

(308,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

for maximum fuel economy. At times,

depending on varying driving condi-

tions, a chain operating noise may be

heard that is characteristic of this type

of system.

. Place the shift boot to the original

position after it is lifted. If the select

lever is operated with the shift boot in

the rolled up position, the shift boot

may have tension and it may disturb the

select lever operation.

& Select Lever

s07bg01

1) Select lever button

: With the brake pedal depressed, shift

while pressing the select lever button in

: Shift while pressing the select lever

button in

: Shift without pressing the select lever

button

The select lever has four positions, “P”,

“R”, “N”, “D” and also has an “M” position

for using the manual mode.

NOTE

. For some models, to protect the

engine while the select lever is in the

“P” or “N” position, the engine is

controlled so that the engine speed

may not become too high even if the

accelerator pedal is depressed hard.

. When you change the select lever

position, make sure to move the select

lever firmly to the selected position.

! P (Park)

s07bg0101

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine. In this position, the

transmission is mechanically locked to

prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the

parking brake, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the mechanical friction of the transmission.

To shift the select lever from the “P” to any

other position, you should depress the

brake pedal fully then move the select

lever. This prevents the vehicle from

lurching when it is started.

! R (Reverse)

s07bg0102

This position is for backing the vehicle. To

shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the

vehicle completely then move the lever to

the “R” position while pressing the select

lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “ACC” position, the movement of the

select lever from the “N” to “R” position is

only possible by depressing the brake

pedal. For details, refer to “Shift Lock

Function” �P307.

Continuously Variable Transmission

306

(309,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! N (Neutral)

s07bg0103

This position is for restarting a stalled

engine. In this position, the transmission is

neutral, meaning that the wheels and

transmission are not locked. Therefore,

the vehicle will roll freely, even on the

slightest incline unless the parking brake

or foot brake is applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission in

neutral. Engine braking has no effect in

this condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

select lever in the “N” (neutral)

position. Engine braking has no

effect in this condition and the risk

of an accident is consequently in-

creased.

! D (Drive)

s07bg0104

This position is for normal driving. The

transmission shifts automatically and con-

tinuously into a suitable gear according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration you

require. Also, while driving up and down a

hill, the transmission assists and controls

the driving performance and engine brak-

ing while corresponding to the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in “D”

position, depress the accelerator pedal

fully to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift.

In this case, the transmission will operate

like a conventional automatic transmis-

sion. When you release the pedal, the

transmission will return to the original gear

position.

If one of the shift paddles behind the

steering wheel is operated while driving in

the “D” position, the transmission will

temporarily switch to the manual mode.

In this mode, you can shift to any gear

position using the shift paddles. For details

about the manual mode, refer to “Selection

of Manual Mode” �P309. Once the

vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmission

will switch from the manual mode back to

the “D” position for normal driving.

! While climbing a grade

s07bg010401

When driving up a hill, undesired upshift is

prevented from taking place when the

accelerator is released. This minimizes

the chance of subsequent downshifting to

a lower gear when accelerating again. This

prevents repeated upshifting and down-

shifting resulting in a smoother operation

of the vehicle.

NOTE

The transmission may downshift, de-

pending on the way the accelerator

pedal is depressed to accelerate the

vehicle again.

& Shift Lock Function

s07bg04

The shift lock function helps prevent the

improper operation of the select lever.

. The select lever cannot be operated

unless the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

. The select lever cannot be moved from

the “P” position to any other position before

the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the

brake pedal first, and then operate the

select lever.

. Only the “P” position allows you to turn

the key from the “ACC” position to the

“LOCK” position and remove the key from

the ignition key cylinder (models without

“keyless access with push-button start

system”).

. Only the “P” position allows you to turn

the push-button ignition switch to the

“OFF” position (models with “keyless

access with push-button start system”).

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“ACC” position while the select lever is in

the “N” position, the select lever may not

– CONTINUED –

Continuously Variable Transmission

307

Starting and Operating

(310,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

be moved to the “P” position without

depressing the brake pedal and pressing

the select lever button.

! Shift lock release

s07bg0401

If the select lever cannot be operated, turn

the ignition switch back to the “ON”

position, then move the select lever to

the “P” position with the select lever button

pressed and the brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, check

and confirm the following and release the

shift lock accordingly.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “P” to “N”:

Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift

lock release portion” �P308.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “N” to “R” or “P”:

Place the ignition switch in the “ACC”

position, then move the select lever to the

“P” position with the brake pedal de-

pressed.

If the select lever still does not move, refer

to “Shift lock release using the shift lock

release portion” �P308.

If the shift lock cannot be released without

using the shift lock release button in the

above cases, there may be a malfunction

in the shift lock system or the vehicle

control system.

Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion as soon as possible.

! Shift lock release using the shift

lock release portion

s07bg0402

Perform the following procedure to release

the shift lock.

1. Apply the parking brake and stop the

engine.

1) Hole

2. Turn over the inner trim of the pocket.

3. Remove the grip portion of the screw-

driver.

4. While depressing the brake pedal,

insert the screwdriver into the hole, press

the shift lock release portion using the

screwdriver, and then move the select

Continuously Variable Transmission

308

(311,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

lever.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, the shift

lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-

tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as

soon as possible.

& Selection of Manual Mode

s07bg02

With the vehicle either moving or station-

ary, move the select lever from the “D”

position to the “M” position to select the

manual mode.

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indica-

tor and/or downshift indicator on the

combination meter illuminate. The gear

position indicator shows the currently

selected gear in the 1st-to-8th gear range.

The upshift and downshift indicators show

when a gearshift is possible. When the

upshift indicator “

” is on, upshifting is

possible. When the downshift indicator

“

” is on, downshifting is possible. When

both indicators are on, upshifting and

downshifting are both possible. When the

vehicle stops (for example, at traffic

signals), the downshift indicator turns off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the

shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

To upshift to the next higher gear position,

pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated

on it. To downshift to the next lower gear

position, pull the shift paddle that has “−”

indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return the

select lever to the “D” position from the “M”

position. While driving with the select lever

in the “D” position, if you change gears by

operating the shift paddle, the gear posi-

tion indicator illuminates and shows the

current gear condition.

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on the

shift paddles. Doing so may result in

– CONTINUED –

Continuously Variable Transmission

309

Starting and Operating

(312,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

accidental gear shifting.

NOTE

Please read the following points care-

fully and bear them in mind when using

the manual mode.

. If you attempt to shift down when the

engine speed is too high, i.e., when a

downshift would push the tachometer

needle beyond the red zone, beeps will

be emitted to warn you that the down-

shift is not possible.

In manual mode, the gear position

automatically shifts up when the en-

gine speed approaches the red zone of

the tachometer (except when using the

Sport Sharp (S#) mode (SI-DRIVE mod-

els) or in the Sport+ mode (Drive Mode

Select models)).

. If you attempt to shift up when the

vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-

sion will not respond.

. You can perform a skip-shift (for

example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating

the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-

sion.

. The transmission automatically se-

lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops

moving.

. If the temperature of the transmis-

sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT

OIL TEMP” warning light will illuminate.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place and let the engine idle until the

warning light turns off.

For models with SI-DRIVE, by selecting

the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, upshifting

will not occur automatically. According

to the road conditions, perform the shift

change manually so that the tach-

ometer needle does not enter the red

zone. Also, if the engine revolutions

reach the specified number, the fuel

supply will be cut. In this case, perform

shift up operation.

For models with Drive Mode Select, by

selecting the Sport+ mode, upshifting

will not occur automatically. According

to the road conditions, perform the shift

change manually so that the tach-

ometer needle does not enter the red

zone. Also, if the engine revolutions

reach the specified number, the fuel

supply will be cut. In this case, perform

shift up operation.

& Driving Tips

s07bg05

NOTE

If the accelerator and brake pedals are

depressed at the same time, driving

torque may be restrained. This is not a

malfunction.

. On a road surface where there is a risk

of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or

gravel-covered road), you can pull away

from a standstill safely and easily by first

selecting the 2nd gear of the manual

mode.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or

“R” position.

. Make sure to apply the parking brake

when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the

vehicle with only the transmission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the “D”

position. Use the brake instead.

. The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-

ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.

This phenomenon does not indicate a

malfunction.

Continuously Variable Transmission

310

(313,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7-9. SI-DRIVE (If Equipped)

s07bc

SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive)

works to maximize engine performance,

control and efficiency.

This system consists of three modes:

. Intelligent (I) mode

. Sport (S) mode

. Sport Sharp (S#) mode

Sport (S) mode is selected when the push-

button ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position. By adjusting the SI-DRIVE

switches, the character of the power unit

changes.

& Intelligent (I) Mode

s07bc02

! For smooth, efficient performance

driving

s07bc0201

The linear acceleration characteristic of

the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal

driving usage.

The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-

balanced performance with greater fuel

efficiency and smooth driveability without

stress. Power delivery is moderate during

acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.

This is ideal for around-town driving and

situations that do not require full power

output. It provides better control in difficult

driving conditions, such as slippery roads

or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle

response.

& Sport (S) Mode

s07bc03

! For all-around performance driving

s07bc0301

The Sport (S) mode provides the engine

power desired by those who want to make

the driving experience their own personal

adventure.

– CONTINUED –

SI-DRIVE

311

Starting and Operating

(314,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Sport Sharp (S#) Mode

s07bc04

! For maximum performance driving

s07bc0401

For sports-minded drivers, the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating

level of engine performance and control.

The throttle becomes more responsive

regardless of the engine speed. Delivering

maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is

ideal for tackling twisting roads and for

merging or overtaking other vehicles on

the freeway with confidence.

& SI-DRIVE Switches

s07bc01

SI-DRIVE switches

To select the Intelligent (I) mode:

. Press the “S/I” switch when the Sport

(S) mode is selected.

. Press the “S#/I” switch when the Sport

Sharp (S#) mode is selected.

To select the Sport (S) mode:

Press the “S/I” switch when any mode

other than Sport (S) mode is selected.

To select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode:

Press the “S#/I” switch when any mode

other than Sport Sharp (S#) mode is

selected.

NOTE

. While the engine is cool, you cannot

change to Sport Sharp (S#) mode.

. While the engine is running, if the

CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-

tion indicator light illuminates, the

SI-DRIVE mode changes to the Sport

(S) mode. In this case, it is not possible

to change to the Sport Sharp (S#) mode

or Intelligent (I) mode.

. If the engine coolant temperature

becomes so high that the engine could

overheat, it is not possible to change to

the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the

vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,

it changes to the Sport (S) mode when

the engine coolant temperature in-

creases.

. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators

blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be

malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU

dealer.

SI-DRIVE

312

(315,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7-10. Drive Mode Select (If

Equipped)

s07bt

Drive Mode Select is a function that allows

you to select your favorite mode from 5

drive modes (Normal, Sport, Sport+, In-

dividual and Comfort).

1) INDIVIDUAL switch

2) MODE switch

By operating the MODE switch or INDIVI-

DUAL switch to select the drive mode, the

characteristics of the engine, steering, and

suspension will change.

& How to Use Drive Mode Select

s07bt01

The Sport mode is selected when the

push-button ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position. Each time the MODE switch

is pressed, the mode changes in the order

of Sport+, Individual, Comfort and Normal.

1) Sport

2) Sport+

3) Individual

4) Comfort

5) Normal

The current mode is displayed on the

combination meter and center information

display.

Press the INDIVIDUAL switch to switch to

Individual mode.

NOTE

. When a mode is selected, the con-

tents of each setting are displayed on

the center information display.

. The mode can also be changed by

operating the center information dis-

play. For details, refer to “Car settings”

�P195 (11.6-inch display models).

. If any of the Drive Mode Select

indicators blink, the Drive Mode Select

system may be malfunctioning. We

recommend that you contact your

SUBARU dealer.

! NORMAL

s07bt0101

This mode combines stress-free driving

performance with low fuel consumption. It

is suitable for regular daily driving.

! SPORT

s07bt0102

This mode improves driving performance

and achieves both sportiness and riding

comfort. It is suitable for cruise driving in

the high speed range.

! SPORT+

s07bt0103

This mode emphasizes response rather

than riding comfort. It is suitable for driving

in the mountains and accelerating to pass.

! COMFORT

s07bt0104

This mode emphasizes riding comfort. The

climate control will also have a slightly

– CONTINUED –

Drive Mode Select

313

Starting and Operating

(316,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

weaker air volume and a gentle setting that

suppresses drying.

! INDIVIDUAL

s07bt0105

Each item can be set on the center

information display according to your pre-

ference.

7-11. Power Steering

s07aj

Power steering warning light

The vehicle is equipped with an electric

power steering system. When the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, the

power steering warning light on the com-

bination meter illuminates to inform the

driver that the warning system is function-

ing properly. Then, if the engine started,

the warning light turns off to inform the

driver that the steering power assist is

operational.

CAUTION

While the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn-

ing the steering wheel during parallel

parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period of

time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However, this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

Power Steering

314

(317,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

assist limitation to occur too frequently,

this may result in a malfunction of the

power steering control system.

7-12. Braking

s07ak

& Braking Tips

s07ak01

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads.

! When the brakes get wet

s07ak0101

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle

at a safe speed while lightly depressing the

brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

s07ak0102

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To help

prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get

stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

s07ak0103

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe place.

& Brake System

s07ak02

! Two separate circuits

s07ak0201

Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake

system. Each circuit works diagonally

across the vehicle. If one circuit of the

brake system should fail, the other half of

the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

! Vacuum brake booster (models with

the vacuum brake booster)

s07ak0202

The vacuum brake booster uses engine

manifold vacuum to assist braking force.

Do not turn off the engine while driving

because that will turn off the vacuum brake

booster, resulting in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the vacuum brake booster comple-

tely stops functioning. If this happens,

however, you will have to depress the

pedal much harder than normal and the

braking distance will increase.

– CONTINUED –

Braking

315

Starting and Operating

(318,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Supplemental booster function

when vacuum pressure fails

s07ak020201

While the ignition switch is turned “ON”

and the engine is running, the supple-

mental booster function operates when the

brake booster performance is decreased

due to insufficient vacuum boost.

When the brake pedal is depressed while

the supplemental booster function is oper-

ating, an operation sound and brake pedal

vibration may be generated. This is not a

malfunction.

! Electronic brake booster (models

with the electronic brake booster)

s07ak0207

The vehicle is equipped with an electronic

brake booster to provide additional braking

force. Do not turn off the ignition switch

while driving because that will turn off the

brake booster, resulting in poor braking

power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, you will have

to depress the pedal much harder than

during normal braking, and the braking

distance will increase.

NOTE

When the following operations are

performed, an operating sound from

the electronic brake boost control

module may be heard. This is not a

malfunction.

. The brake pedal was operated.

. The driver’s door was opened.

. The EyeSight function was acti-

vated.

. Several minutes have passed after

the engine stopped.

! Supplemental booster function

when pressure fails

s07ak020701

If there is a malfunction in the braking

system, the power for the braking will be

stored by controlling the hydraulic pres-

sure of the VDC system.

When the brake pedal is depressed while

the supplemental booster function is oper-

ating, an operation sound and brake pedal

vibration may be generated.

! Brake assist system

s07ak0203

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the

brake assist. It is not a system that

brings more braking ability to the

vehicle beyond its braking capabil-

ity. Always use the utmost care

when driving regarding vehicle

speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,

continue depressing the brake pedal

strongly to bring the effect of the

brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system.

It assists the brake power when the driver

cannot depress the brake pedal strongly

and the brake power is insufficient.

Brake assist generates the brake power

according to the speed at which the driver

depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal

strongly or suddenly, the following

phenomena occur. However, even

though these occur, they do not indi-

cate any malfunctions, and the brake

assist system is operating properly.

. You might feel that the brake pedal is

applied by lighter force and generates a

greater braking force.

. You might hear the sound of ABS

operating from the engine compart-

ment.

Braking

316

(319,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning

Indicators

s07ak03

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, im-

mediately have your vehicle inspected by

the nearest SUBARU dealer.

7-13. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake

System)

s07al

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving with an ABS equipped

vehicle could easily lead to a serious

accident.

CAUTION

. The ABS does not always de-

crease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe

following distance from other

vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy road, or

over newly fallen snow, stopping

distances may be longer for a

vehicle with the ABS than one

without. When driving under

these conditions, therefore, re-

duce your speed and leave ample

distance from other vehicles.

. When you feel the ABS operating,

you should maintain constant

brake pedal pressure. Do not

pump the brake pedal since

doing so may defeat the opera-

tion of the ABS.

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels

which may occur during sudden braking or

braking on slippery road surfaces. This

helps prevent the loss of steering control

and directional stability caused by wheel

lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear

a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration

in the brake pedal. This is normal when the

ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle

speed is below approximately 6 mph (10

km/h).

& ABS Self-Check

s07al01

You may feel a slight shock in the brake

pedal and hear the operating noise of the

ABS from the engine compartment just

after the vehicle is started. This is caused

by an automatic functional test of the ABS

being carried out and does not indicate any

abnormal condition.

& ABS Warning Light

s07al02

Refer to “ABS Warning Light” �P160.

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)

317

Starting and Operating

(320,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7-14. Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD) System

s07am

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of the

braking force. It functions by adjusting the

distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-

nents to perform its function of optimizing

the distribution of braking force. If any of

the ABS components used by the EBD

function fails, the EBD system also stops

working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

& EBD System Malfunctions

s07am01

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the brake

system warning light and ABS warning

light illuminate simultaneously.

. Brake system warning light

. ABS warning light

. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

If both warning light remains on even

though the parking brake is released, the

brake fluid level may be low or there could

be a problem with the EBD system. Park

the vehicle in a safe place immediately and

contact a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains on, have the

brakes inspected by a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System

318

(321,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7-15. Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol System

s07an

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics

Control system equipped vehicle

could easily lead to a serious acci-

dent.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, winter tires should be

used when driving on snow-cov-

ered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having a

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem does not guarantee that the

vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system is an

indication that the road being

travelled on has a slippery sur-

face; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee

that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under

all conditions, its activation

should be seen as a sign that

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle equipped with the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system, have

an inspection of that system

performed by an authorized

SUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating properly.

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four

tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

vehicle placard attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

– When replacing a flat tire, use

only the specified temporary

spare tire. However, even with

the specified temporary spare

tire, the effectiveness of the

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system will be reduced.

. If non-matching tires are used,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system may not operate cor-

rectly.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

adjusts the engine’s output and the

wheels’ respective braking forces to help

maintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to

prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to

maintain traction and directional control.

Activation of this function is indicated by

flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed

to help maintain directional stability by

suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide

sideways during steering operations. Acti-

vation of this function is indicated by

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle Dynamics Control System

319

Starting and Operating

(322,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light.

NOTE

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem may be considered normal when

the following conditions occur.

– Slight twitching of the brake

pedal is felt.

– The vehicle or steering wheel

shakes to a small degree.

– An operating noise from the en-

gine compartment is heard briefly

when starting the engine and when

driving off after starting the engine.

– The brake pedal seems to jolt

when driving off after starting the

engine.

. In the following circumstances, the

vehicle may be less stable than it feels

to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics

Control System may therefore operate.

Such operation does not indicate a

system malfunction.

– On gravel-covered or rutted

roads

– On unfinished roads

– When the vehicle is fitted with

snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation of

the steering wheel to feel slightly

different compared to that for normal

conditions.

. It is always important to reduce

speed when approaching a corner,

even if the vehicle is equipped with

Vehicle Dynamics Control.

. Always turn off the engine before

replacing a tire as failure to do so may

render the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system unable to operate correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

System Monitor

s07an01

Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control Warn-

ing Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control Op-

eration Indicator Light” �P165 and “Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light/

TRACK Mode Indicator Light” �P167.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF Switch

s07an04

1) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

light

2) TRACK mode indicator light

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

Vehicle Dynamics Control System

320

(323,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

When you press the switch briefly or for

more than approximately 2 seconds during

engine operation, the mode of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system will be changed.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control mode

s07an0401

When the ignition switch is on, this mode is

selected first.

This mode enables all controls for ABS,

the Traction Control System, and the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Select

this mode for most driving situations.

When this mode is selected, both indicator

lights on the combination meter turn off.

! TRACK mode

s07an0402

This mode restricts the functions of the

Traction Control System and Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system and thus delays

utilizing their functions as a reaction to

vehicle behavior in comparison with the

Vehicle Dynamics Control mode. Use this

mode in driving situations where the

vehicle dynamic performance will improve

without decreasing engine torque control.

When you press the switch briefly during

engine operation, the TRACK mode in-

dicator light and the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator light on the combi-

nation meter illuminate. When you press

the switch again to reactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system, the TRACK

mode indicator light and the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turn

off.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF

mode

s07an0403

This mode allows only the ABS control.

Press and hold the Vehicle Dynamics

Control mode switch for more than 2

seconds while the vehicle is stopped and

the engine is running. Then the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on

the combination meter illuminates. When

you press the switch again to reactivate

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

light turns off.

Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by

deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system temporarily may help to escape

from the following situations. Use the

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF mode as

necessary.

. A standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or

otherwise slippery surface.

. Extrication of the vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow.

You should not deactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system except under

the above-mentioned situations.

NOTE

. If you turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position with the Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control system deacti-

vated, the system will be automatically

reactivated the next time the engine is

started.

. If you press and hold the switch for

30 seconds or longer, the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is activated, and the system

ignores any further pressing of the

switch. To make the switch usable

again, turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the

engine.

. When the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF mode is selected, the vehicle’s

running performance is comparable

with that of a vehicle that does not have

a Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Do

not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system except when absolutely

necessary.

. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF mode is selected, compo-

nents of the brake control system may

still activate. When the brake control

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle Dynamics Control System

321

Starting and Operating

(324,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control operation indicator

light flashes.

7-16. Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing System (TPMS) (U.S.-

Spec. Models)

s07ao

Low tire pressure warning light

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message by

sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this

system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out caused by running over a sharp

object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and ser-

ious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe place.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the vehicle placard

on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures in-

crease accordingly. Be sure to

let the tires cool thoroughly be-

fore adjusting their pressures to

the standard values shown on the

tire inflation pressure label. Refer

to “Tires and Wheels” �P438.

The tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem does not function when the

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)

322

(325,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

vehicle is stationary. After adjust-

ing the tire pressures, increase

the vehicle speed to at least 20

mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS

rechecking of the tire inflation

pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low

pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should

turn off a few minutes later.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat

Tires” �P381.

. When a wheel rim is replaced

without the original pressure

sensor/transmitter being trans-

ferred, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate steadily

after blinking for approximately

one minute. This indicates the

TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not

operate properly. If a liquid sea-

lant is used, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer or other qualified

service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire

pressure warning valve and

transmitter when replacing the

tire. You may reuse the wheel if

there is no damage to it and if the

sealant residue is properly

cleaned off. Do not inject any tire

liquid or aerosol tire sealant into

the tires, as this may cause a

malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors. If the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for ap-

proximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system in-

spected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal

parts under the driver’s seat. This

may cause poor reception of the

signals from the tire pressure sen-

sors, and the tire pressure monitor-

ing system will not function prop-

erly.

FCC ID: CWTD1G141

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

– CONTINUED –

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)

323

Starting and Operating

(326,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& TPMS Screen

s07ao05

This screen displays each tire pressure.

Refer to “Basic Screens” �P181.

7-17. Parking Your Vehicle

s07ap

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, the tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to them.

. Do not park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If engine

exhaust gas enters the passen-

ger compartment, occupants in

the vehicle could die from carbon

monoxide (CO) contained in the

exhaust gas.

& Parking Brake (MT Models)

s07ap01

To set the parking brake, depress the

brake pedal firmly and hold it down until

the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.

To release the parking brake, perform the

following procedure.

1. Pull the lever up slightly.

2. Press the release button.

3. Lower the lever while keeping the

button pressed.

When the parking brake is set while the

engine is running, the parking brake

warning light illuminates. Be sure that the

warning light is turned off before driving off.

Refer to “Parking brake indicator (MT

models)” �P161.

Parking Your Vehicle

324

(327,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

CAUTION

Never drive while the parking brake

is set because this will cause un-

necessary wear on the brake linings.

Make sure that the parking brake has

been fully released before driving

off.

& Electronic Parking Brake

(CVT Models)

s07ap03

1) Parking brake switch

2) Indicator light

3) Release the electronic parking brake

4) Apply the electronic parking brake

WARNING

. Before exiting the vehicle, make

sure that you turn off the engine.

Otherwise, the parking brake may

be released and an accident may

occur.

. If the brake system warning light

turns on, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunc-

tioning. Immediately stop your

vehicle in a safe location, use tire

stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving and

contact your SUBARU dealer.

. If the electronic parking brake is

operated under the following

conditions, the electronic park-

ing brake indicator light may

flash.

– The brake is overheated.

– The vehicle is on a steep

slope.

In such cases, the vehicle may

start to move which may lead to

an accident. Always use the tire

stops.

CAUTION

. When the electronic parking

brake cannot be applied due to a

malfunction, contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for

an inspection. If you have to park

your vehicle in such conditions,

perform the following procedure.

– Stop your vehicle in a flat

location.

– Shift the select lever in the “P”

position. When the select le-

ver cannot be shifted into the

“P” position, you must release

shift lock. Refer to “Shift Lock

Function” �P307.

– Use tire stops under the tires

to prevent the vehicle from

moving.

. Never drive with the parking

brake applied. Doing so will

cause unnecessary brake pad

wear. Before driving off, always

make sure that the parking brake

has been released and the brake

system warning light has turned

off.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic

parking brake. You can apply/release the

– CONTINUED –

Parking Your Vehicle

325

Starting and Operating

(328,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

parking brake by operating the parking

brake switch.

To apply: Depress the brake pedal and

pull up the parking brake switch.

To release: Press the parking brake

switch firmly while the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

Electronic parking brake indicator light

When the parking brake is applied while

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the following indicator lights illuminate.

. The indicator light on the parking brake

switch

. The electronic parking brake indicator

light on the combination meter (for details,

refer to “Electronic Parking Brake Indicator

Light (CVT Models)” �P162.)

NOTE

. The parking brake will not be re-

leased under the following conditions

even if the parking brake switch is

pressed.

– The ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

– The brake pedal is not depressed.

. The electronic parking brake system

uses motors to apply the parking brake.

Therefore, operating sounds from the

motors will be heard when applying or

releasing the parking brake. Make sure

that the motor sounds are heard when

applying or releasing the parking

brake.

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction or the elec-

tronic parking brake operation is pro-

hibited temporarily, if the parking brake

switch is operated, a chirp sound is

heard and the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes.

. When you cannot release the park-

ing brake due to, for example, a system

malfunction, contact your SUBARU

dealer and have your SUBARU dealer

release the parking brake.

. If the operation of the electronic

parking brake switch is stopped mid-

way or performed extremely slowly, the

system may detect an error and turn on

the brake system warning light. How-

ever, this does not indicate a malfunc-

tion if the warning light turns off after

operating the switch.

. When the electronic parking brake

has not been used for a long period of

time, the electronic parking brake may

operate automatically after the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position. This occurs due to checking

the proper operation of the electronic

parking brake and does not indicate a

malfunction.

. If the electronic parking brake

switch is malfunctioning and the elec-

tronic parking brake cannot be re-

leased, refer to the instructions de-

scribed in “Automatic release function

by accelerator pedal” �P327.

. After activating the electronic park-

ing brake, you may hear a short sound

several minutes after the electronic

parking brake indicator light and the

indicator light on the electronic parking

brake switch illuminate as the system

confirms proper engagement. This

sound is different from the apply and

release sound.

This can occur:

– If the brakes are extremely hot.

– If the car is parked on a steep

incline.

Parking Your Vehicle

326

(329,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

– If the electronic parking brake is

applied after the ignition switch is

turned OFF.

! Automatic release function by ac-

celerator pedal

s07ap0301

The electronic parking brake system has

an automatic release function. The parking

brake will be automatically released by

depressing the accelerator pedal. How-

ever, the automatic release function does

not operate under the following conditions.

. Any door (other than the trunk lid) is

open.

. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.

If the parking brake is automatically

released, the electronic parking brake

indicator light and the indicator light on

the parking brake switch turn off.

NOTE

Even if you have applied the parking

brake, the parking brake will be auto-

matically released when the accelera-

tor pedal is depressed.

! Auto Vehicle Hold function

s07ap0305

The Auto Vehicle Hold function will auto-

matically keep the vehicle stopped even

after releasing the brake pedal when the

vehicle is at a complete stop, such as at

traffic signals.

WARNING

. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold

function on a steep hill or slip-

pery road. The vehicle may move

even when using the Auto Vehicle

Hold function, causing serious

injury or accidents.

. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold

function to park the vehicle. The

vehicle may move unexpectedly,

causing serious injury or acci-

dents. Make sure to shift the

select lever to the “P” position

and apply the electronic parking

brake in the following cases.

– When you are going to park

your vehicle.

– When passengers are getting

in or out of the vehicle.

– When you are loading or un-

. When using the Auto Vehicle

Hold function, do not release the

brake pedal before the Auto Ve-

hicle Hold operation indicator

illuminates. The vehicle may

move unexpectedly, causing ser-

ious injury or accidents.

. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold

function in the following cases.

Otherwise, the vehicle may move

unexpectedly, causing serious

injury or accidents.

– When washing your vehicle in

an automatic car wash

– When being towed

CAUTION

. When stopping on a steep slope

with the Auto Vehicle Hold func-

tion turned on, the electronic

parking brake may be automati-

cally applied. Then the electronic

parking brake indicator light will

flash. In such a case, depress and

hold the brake pedal while stop-

ping. Otherwise, the vehicle may

move.

. When being towed, turn off the

Auto Vehicle Hold function.

NOTE

We recommend turning on the Auto

Vehicle Hold function when stopping

on an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Hold

function is turned off, the vehicle may

roll backward when driving off.

– CONTINUED –

Parking Your Vehicle

327

Starting and Operating

(330,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle

Hold function

s07ap030501

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on

and off, operate the center information

display. Refer to “Car settings” �P195

(11.6-inch display models) or “Vehicle

setting icons” �P208 (dual 7.0-inch dis-

play models).

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

turned ON, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light will turn on.

NOTE

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction while the

Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned on,

a chirp will sound, the Auto Vehicle

Hold indicator light will turn off and the

brake system warning light will turn on.

. Every time when starting the engine,

the Auto Vehicle Hold function will be

set to “OFF”.

! To operate the Auto Vehicle Hold

function

s07ap030503

Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake

pedal when all of the following conditions

are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold

function will operate.

. Driver’s door is closed.

. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

While the vehicle is kept stopped by the

Auto Vehicle Hold function, the Auto

Vehicle Hold indicator light will flash.

! To release the Auto Vehicle Hold

function

s07ap030504

Perform any of the following operations to

release the Auto Vehicle Hold function.

. Depress the accelerator pedal.

. Depress the brake pedal again.

. Apply the electronic parking brake.

. Shift the select lever to the “P” position

with the brake pedal pressed.

. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold func-

tion operating with the center information

display while depressing the brake pedal.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

released, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light will change from flashing to illumi-

nated.

Under any of the following conditions, the

Auto Vehicle Hold function will be auto-

matically released and the electronic

parking brake will be automatically ap-

plied.

. The Auto Vehicle Hold function has

been in operation for 10 minutes.

. The driver’s seatbelt is unfastened.

. The ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position.

Parking Your Vehicle

328

(331,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. The vehicle is stopped on a steep

slope.

. The Auto Vehicle Hold function is

malfunctioning.

In such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold light

will turn off and the electronic parking

brake indicator light will illuminate.

! Tips

s07ap030505

. When the electronic parking brake is

automatically applied with the vehicle kept

stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function,

release the electronic parking brake by

either of the following operations before

starting off. Then make sure that the

electronic parking brake indicator light is

off.

– Depress the accelerator pedal with

the driver’s seatbelt fastened and with

the doors closed.

– Press the electronic parking brake

switch with the brake pedal depressed.

. Under certain conditions, including a

malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a

warning buzzer will sound and a warning

message will appear on the combination

meter display (color LCD). All warning

messages should be strictly observed.

. On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot be

kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold

function. In such a case, depress and hold

the brake pedal.

. When stopping on a steep slope with

the Auto Vehicle Hold function activated,

the electronic parking brake may be

automatically applied after stopping, then

the electronic parking brake indicator light

may flash. In such a case, depress and

hold the brake pedal while stopped.

Otherwise, the vehicle may move. When

getting out of the vehicle, stop the vehicle

on a flat surface, then apply the electronic

parking brake.

. If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

does not illuminates even after touching

“Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)” with the operat-

ing conditions met, the function may have

a malfunction. Contact your SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

. You may hear a sound while the Auto

Vehicle Hold function is keeping your

vehicle stopped. This is normal, and does

not represent a malfunction.

. When you depress the brake pedal to

release the Auto Vehicle Hold function, an

operation sound or vibration may be

generated, or the brake pedal may return

slowly. This is not a malfunction.

. While the vehicle is kept stopped by the

Auto Vehicle Hold function, the brake

pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not a

malfunction.

. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold

function, depress the brake pedal firmly.

Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle Hold may not

operate.

! Emergency brake

s07ap0303

CAUTION

Use the emergency brake only in

case of an emergency. If the emer-

gency brake is excessively used, the

brake parts will wear down faster or

the brake may not work sufficiently

due to brake overheating.

NOTE

. While using the emergency brake,

the electronic parking brake indicator

light and the indicator light on the

parking brake switch illuminate and a

chirp sounds.

. While using the emergency brake, a

sound may be heard from the engine

compartment. This is the operating

sound of the brake that is activated by

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system,

and does not indicate a malfunction.

If the foot brake has a malfunction, you can

stop the vehicle by pulling the parking

brake switch continuously.

– CONTINUED –

Parking Your Vehicle

329

Starting and Operating

(332,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

While applying the emergency brake, the

electronic parking brake indicator light and

the indicator light on the parking brake

switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

s07ap0304

CAUTION

If the brake system warning light

turns on, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunction-

ing. Immediately stop your vehicle in

the nearest safe location and con-

tact your SUBARU dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the electronic

parking brake system, the brake system

warning light turns on. Refer to “Electronic

parking brake system warning (CVT mod-

els)” �P162.

& Parking Tips

s07ap02

When parking your vehicle, always per-

form the following items.

. Apply the parking brake.

. For MT models, put the shift lever in the

“1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a

downgrade.

. For CVT models, put the select lever in

the “P” (Park) position.

Never rely on the transmission alone to

hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel as described here. When

the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front

wheels should be turned away from the

curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

Parking Your Vehicle

330

(333,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7-18. Hill Start Assist System

s07au

WARNING

. The Hill start assist system is a

device only for helping the driver

to START the vehicle on an uphill

grade. To prevent accidents

when the vehicle is parked on a

slope, be sure to firmly set the

parking brake. When setting the

parking brake, make sure that the

vehicle remains stationary when

the clutch pedal (MT models) and

brake pedal (both MT and CVT

models) are released.

. Do not turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while

the Hill start assist system is

operating. The Hill start assist

system will be deactivated, caus-

ing an accident.

NOTE

For CVT models:

. The Hill start assist system will

activate when the Auto Vehicle Hold

function is deactivated.

. The Hill start assist system will

deactivate when the Auto Vehicle Hold

function is activated.

The Hill start assist system is a device to

make the following vehicle operations

easier.

1) Starting forward facing uphill

2) Starting backward facing downhill

A) Brake pedal

B) Clutch pedal (MT models)

In both these cases, the Hill start assist

system operates under the following con-

ditions.

– CONTINUED –

Hill Start Assist System

331

Starting and Operating

(334,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. When depressing both the clutch pedal

and the brake pedal (MT models).

. When the vehicle has stopped with the

brake pedal depressed (CVT models).

Braking power is maintained temporarily

(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill

start assist system after the brake pedal is

released. The driver is therefore able to

start the vehicle in the same way as on a

level grade, just using the clutch pedal (MT

models only) and accelerator pedal (all

models).

If the braking power of the Hill start assist

system is insufficient after the brake pedal

is released, apply more braking power by

depressing the brake pedal again.

The Hill start assist system may not

operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill

start assist system does not operate in the

following cases.

. When starting backward facing uphill.

. When starting forward facing downhill.

. While the parking brake is applied.

. While the ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

. While the Hill start assist warning light/

Hill start assist OFF indicator light is

illuminated (MT models).

When using the Hill start assist system, a

braking effect may be felt even after the

brake pedal has been released. However,

for MT models, this braking effect should

disappear once the clutch pedal is re-

leased.

NOTE

A slight jolt may be felt when the

vehicle begins to move forward after

being reversed.

Hill Start Assist System

332

(335,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& To Activate/Deactivate the

Hill Start Assist System (MT

Models)

s07au02

Hill start assist OFF indicator light

CAUTION

When starting on an uphill grade,

make sure the Hill start assist OFF

indicator light is off. If the Hill start

assist OFF indicator light is on,

make sure the parking brake is

applied.

To activate and deactivate the Hill start

assist system, perform the following steps.

NOTE

If you make an error when performing

any steps in the following procedure,

place the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position once and then start

over again.

! To deactivate

s07au0201

1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe

location and apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

3. Restart the engine.

4. Confirm the following items.

(1) The Brake system warning light

illuminates.

(2) The Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light turns off.

(3) The Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light turns off.

(4) The ABS warning light turns off.

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

5. Press and hold the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF switch for 30 seconds until

the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-

tor light “

” on the combination meter turns

on and off.

6. Within 5 seconds, release the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF switch.

– CONTINUED –

Hill Start Assist System

333

Starting and Operating

(336,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Hill start assist OFF indicator light

7. Within 2 seconds, press back the

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch.

The Hill start assist OFF indicator light

turns on and off.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position. The Hill start assist system

is deactivated.

NOTE

When the Hill start assist system is

deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF

indicator light illuminates continu-

ously.

! To reactivate

s07au0202

To reactivate the Hill start assist system,

repeat steps 1 to 8. When the Hill start

assist system is activated, the Hill start

assist OFF indicator light turns off.

& Hill Start Assist Warning

Light/Hill Start Assist OFF

Indicator Light (MT Models)

s07au01

Refer to “Hill Start Assist Warning Light/Hill

Start Assist OFF Indicator Light (MT

Models)” �P163.

7-19. Rear View Camera

s07br

A rear view camera is attached to the trunk

lid. When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position and the select lever is set to “R”,

the rear view camera automatically dis-

plays the rear view image behind the

vehicle on the center information display.

WARNING

. Since the rear view camera uses a

wide-angle lens, the image on the

monitor is different from the

actual view in terms of distance.

. Since the range of the image on

the monitor is limited, always

check the rear view and the

surrounding area with your eyes

Rear View Camera

334

(337,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

and mirrors, and move backward

at a slow speed. Moving back-

ward only by checking the rear

view image from the camera

could cause an accident.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

camera, switch or wiring. If

smoke comes out or you smell a

strange odor, stop using the rear

view camera immediately. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection. Continued use may

result in accident, fire or electric

shock.

CAUTION

. When washing your vehicle with

a high-pressure washer, do not

allow water to touch the camera

directly. Entry of water in the

camera lens may result in con-

densation, malfunction, fire or

electric shock.

. Since the camera is a precision

device, do not subject it to strong

impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,

fire or electric shock may occur.

. If mud or snow sticks to or is

frozen on the camera, you must

be very careful when removing it.

Otherwise, damage to the camera

may cause a fire or electric

shock. Pour water or lukewarm

water over the camera to remove

mud and ice, and wipe it with a

soft, dry cloth.

. Do not put a flame close to the

camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-

mage or fire may occur.

. When replacing the fuse, be sure

to use a fuse with the specified

rating. Use of a fuse with a

different rating may result in a

malfunction.

. If you use the rear view camera

for a long time while the engine is

not operated, the battery may

become completely discharged.

NOTE

. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,

benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,

discoloration may occur. To remove

contamination, wipe the camera with a

cloth moistened with a diluted neutral

detergent. Then wipe it with a soft, dry

cloth.

. When waxing the vehicle, be careful

not to apply the wax to the camera. If it

comes in contact with the camera,

moisten a clean cloth with a diluted

neutral detergent to remove the wax.

. The camera lens has a hard coating

to help prevent scratches. However,

when washing the vehicle or cleaning

the camera lens, be careful not to

scratch the camera lens. Do not use a

washing brush directly on the camera

lens. The image quality of the rear view

camera may deteriorate.

. Strong light shined on the camera

lens may develop vertical lines around

the light source. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

. Under the fluorescent light, the dis-

play may flicker. However, this is not a

malfunction.

. The image of the rear view camera

may be slightly different from the actual

color of the objects.

. If there is a malfunction on the center

information display, refer to “Malfunc-

tions of the Center Information Dis-

play” �P404.

& How to Use the Rear View

Camera

s07br01

When the select lever is set to “R”, the rear

view camera automatically displays the

rear view image from the vehicle. When

the lever is set to other positions, the

image before setting to “R” is displayed.

– CONTINUED –

Rear View Camera

335

Starting and Operating

(338,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.

2. Set the select lever to “R”.

NOTE

. The image of the rear view camera is

horizontally reversed as is the case

with the vehicle inside mirror or the

outside mirror.

. When “Rear Camera Delay Control”

is on, the rear view image will be

displayed on the center information

display for a certain period of time after

the select lever is shifted to a position

other than the “P” position from “R”. To

turn the function on and off, refer to

“General settings” �P191 (11.6-inch

display models) or “General settings”

�P203 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

. It may be difficult to see the image of

the rear view camera in the following

cases. This is not a malfunction of the

camera.

– The vehicle is in a dark place (at

night, in a tunnel, etc.).

– The vehicle is in an extremely hot

or cold place.

– An object (such as raindrops,

snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the

view of the rear view camera sticks

to the lens of the camera.

– Strong light is shining directly on

the camera lens (occasionally, there

are vertical lines on the screen).

& Viewing Range on the Screen

s07br02

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with

the rear view camera is limited.

Always be sure to check with your

eyes when moving backward and

proceed slowly. Otherwise, it may

cause an accident or injury.

Range of view

Image from camera

The area from the rear end of the bumper

can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the

bumper and areas just under the bumper

cannot be viewed.

Rear View Camera

336

(339,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Also, the image from the rear view camera

looks shorter than the actual distance.

Range of view

Image from camera

The area above the camera cannot be

viewed. If there is an object that has a wide

projection on its upper part such as a sign

pole behind the vehicle, the projection

cannot be seen on the screen.

& Help Lines

s07br03

The help lines are a guide to help you

realize the actual distance from the screen

image.

NOTE

If you shift to the “R” range within

several seconds after turning on the

ignition switch, the warning message

may not be displayed. Wait for several

seconds after turning on the ignition

switch before shifting to the “R” range.

Then, the warning message will be

displayed.

Help lines

1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)

2) Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

3) Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

4) Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line)

5) Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line)

6) Vehicle centerline

7) Dynamic guidelines

When the select lever is set to “R”, the

monitor screen displays the help lines

together with the rear view image.

CAUTION

. When moving backward, always

check the back with your eyes

without relying on the help lines.

– CONTINUED –

Rear View Camera

337

Starting and Operating

(340,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Otherwise, it may cause an acci-

dent or injury.

. The actual position may be differ-

ent from the indication of the help

lines.

. Differences may occur due to the

number of passengers or the

loaded cargo.

. When the vehicle is on a slope or

inclined against the road, the

indication is different from the

actual position.

NOTE

When “Steering Angle Lines” is off, the

dynamic guidelines will disappear on

the center information display. To turn

the dynamic guidelines on and off, refer

to “General settings” �P191 (11.6-inch

display models) or “General settings”

�P203 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

! Difference between screen image

and actual road

s07br0301

The distance markers show the distance

for a level road when the vehicle is not

loaded. It may be different from the actual

distance depending on the loading condi-

tions or road conditions.

! When there is an upward slope at

the back

s07br030101

1) 3 ft (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance.

! When there is a downward slope

at the back

s07br030102

1) 3 ft (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks nearer

than the actual distance.

NOTE

When cargo is loaded, the rear view

distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance as in an

upward slope.

Rear View Camera

338

(341,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Feature of distance marker

s07br0302

1) 3 ft (1 m) line

2) 10 ft (3 m) line

The distance marker shows the distance

on the road. If there is a car or another

object close behind, distance cannot be

correctly displayed.

7-20. Cruise Control (If

Equipped)

s07aq

NOTE

For models with the EyeSight system:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

Cruise control enables you to maintain a

constant vehicle speed without holding

your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is

operative when the vehicle speed is 20

mph (30 km/h) or more.

WARNING

. Do not use the cruise control

under any of the following condi-

tions. These may cause loss of

vehicle control.

– Driving up or down a steep

grade

– Driving on slippery or winding

roads

– Driving in heavy traffic

. When using the cruise control,

always set the speed appropri-

ately according to the speed limit,

traffic flow, road conditions, and

other conditions.

NOTE

. On uphill and downhill slopes, de-

pending on the degree of the slope and

the load of the vehicle, there may be

cases when a constant speed cannot

be guaranteed.

. If the cruise control indicator does

not appear even after pressing the

cruise control main button, it is possi-

ble that there is a malfunction in the

system. We recommend that you con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

. Make sure the cruise control system

is turned off when the cruise control is

not in use to avoid unintentionally

setting the cruise control.

– CONTINUED –

Cruise Control

339

Starting and Operating

(342,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& To Set Cruise Control

s07aq01

Cruise control main button

1. After the engine has started, press the

cruise control main button.

Cruise control indicator light

The cruise control indicator light on the

combination meter will illuminate in white.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the

“SET” side and release it. Then release the

accelerator pedal.

NOTE

When setting a cruise speed for the first

time during a drive, both “SET” and

“RES” may be used to set the initial

cruise speed.

Cruise control indicator light

1) When setting the displayed unit as “MPH”

2) When setting the displayed unit as “km/h”

At this time, the cruise control indicator

light is illuminated in green in the combina-

tion meter. The set speed will be shown on

the combination meter. You can change

the displayed units by operating the

combination meter display. For details,

refer to “Combination Meter Settings”

�P151.

The vehicle will maintain the desired

speed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-

creased while driving with the cruise

control activated. Simply depress the

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-

cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-

Cruise Control

340

(343,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

leased, the vehicle will return to and

maintain the previous cruising speed.

& To Temporarily Cancel the

Cruise Control

s07aq02

The cruise control can be temporarily

canceled in the following ways.

. Press the “CANCEL” button.

. Depress the brake pedal.

. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models

only).

WARNING

You can cancel the cruise control by

shifting the select lever into the “N”

position. However, do not shift the

lever into the “N” position while

driving except in case of emergency.

If the select lever is shifted into the

“N” position, the engine brake will

no longer work. This could result in

an accident.

The cruise control indicator light in the

combination meter illuminates in white

when the cruise control is canceled.

To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehi-

cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30

km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”

switch to the “RES” side to return to the

original cruising speed automatically.

The cruise control indicator light in the

combination meter will automatically illu-

minate in green at this time.

& To Turn Off the Cruise Control

s07aq03

There are two ways to turn off the cruise

control:

. Press the cruise control main button

again.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or

“OFF” position (but only when the vehicle

is completely stopped).

& To Change the Cruising

Speed

s07aq04

! To increase the speed (by the “RES/

SET” switch)

s07aq0405

Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches

the desired speed. Then, release the

switch. The vehicle speed at that moment

will be memorized and treated as the new

– CONTINUED –

Cruise Control

341

Starting and Operating

(344,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

set speed.

When setting the displayed unit as

“MPH”:

The set speed can be increased 1 mph

(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/

SET” switch to the “RES” side.

When setting the displayed unit as

“km/h”:

The set speed can be increased 1 km/h

each time by pressing the “RES/SET”

switch to the “RES” side.

! To increase the speed (by accelera-

tor pedal)

s07aq0402

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to ac-

celerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the

“SET” side once. Now the desired speed is

set and the vehicle will keep running at that

speed without depressing the accelerator

pedal.

! To decrease the speed (by the “RES/

SET” switch)

s07aq0406

Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches

the desired speed. Then, release the

switch. The vehicle speed at that moment

will be memorized and treated as the new

set speed.

When setting the displayed unit as

“MPH”:

The set speed can be decreased 1 mph

(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/

SET” switch to the “SET” side.

When setting the displayed unit as

“km/h”:

The set speed can be decreased 1 km/h

each time by pressing the “RES/SET”

switch to the “SET” side.

! To decrease the speed (by brake

pedal)

s07aq0404

1. Depress the brake pedal to release

cruise control temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to the

desired speed, press the “RES/SET”

switch to the “SET” side once. Now the

desired speed is set and the vehicle will

keep running at that speed without depres-

sing the accelerator pedal.

& Cruise Control Indicator Light

s07aq05

Refer to “Cruise Control Indicator” �P175.

Cruise Control

342

(345,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7-21. BSD/RCTA (If

Equipped)

s07bm

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner

radars with Blind Spot Detection and Rear

Cross Traffic Alert.

These functions of BSD/RCTA are the

systems that detect objects and vehicles to

the rear and draw attention to the driver

when changing a lane or when driving in

reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving

safely. Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

changing lanes or reversing the

vehicle.

The system is designed to assist the

driver in changing lanes or rever-

sing safely by monitoring the rear

and side areas of the vehicle. How-

ever, you cannot rely on this system

alone in assuring the safety during a

lane change or reversing. Overcon-

fidence in this system could result in

an accident and lead to serious

injury or death. Since the system

operation has various limitations,

the flashing or illumination of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

may be delayed or it may not operate

at all even when a vehicle is present

in a neighboring lane or approach-

ing from either side.

The driver is responsible for paying

attention to the rear and side areas

of the vehicle.

& System Features

s07bm01

BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-

tions.

. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an

adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at

high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind

Spot Detection)

. To detect a vehicle approaching from

the right or left while reversing the vehicle

(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The system uses radar sensors for the

following features.

NOTE

The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been

certified by the radio wave related laws

of the U.S. and other FCC compliant

countries, Canada and Mexico. When

driving in other countries, certification

of the country where the vehicle is

driven must be obtained. For certifica-

tion in the U.S. and other FCC compli-

ant countries, Canada and Mexico,

refer to “Certification for the BSD/

RCTA” �P350.

! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

s07bm0101

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of the

presence of vehicles in its blind spot.

. If the system detects a vehicle in its

blind spot, it warns the driver by illuminat-

ing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

(s) on the outside mirror(s).

. If the driver operates the turn signal

lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light is illuminating, the

system warns the driver of dangers by

flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indica-

tor light.

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

343

Starting and Operating

(346,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Lane Change Assist (LCA)

s07bm010101

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles

approaching at a high speed in the

neighboring lanes.

. If the system detects a vehicle ap-

proaching at a high speed in the neighbor-

ing lanes, it warns the driver of dangers by

illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach in-

dicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s).

. If the driver operates the turn signal

lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light is illuminating, the

system warns the driver of dangers by

flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indica-

tor light.

! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

s07bm0103

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another

vehicle approaching from either side when

driving in reverse. This feature helps the

driver check the rear and side areas of the

vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approach-

ing from either side while moving back-

ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the

following way.

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.

. A warning buzzer sounds.

. An icon appears on the center informa-

tion display.

! Limitations of the detectability of

RCTA

s07bm010301

Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,

the RCTA may not operate properly in

angled parking.

Example 1

1) The detection range of the radar sensors

2) Area out of detection range of the radar

sensors

A) Vehicle that may not be detected

B) Parked vehicle

WARNING

An approaching vehicle (A) may not

be detected because the detection

range is limited by the parked vehi-

cle (B). Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

BSD/RCTA

344

(347,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

reversing the vehicle.

Example 2

1) The detection range of the radar sensors

C) Vehicle that may be detected

NOTE

The system may detect that a vehicle

Always be sure to check the surround-

ings with your eyes when reversing the

vehicle.

& System Operation

s07bm02

! Operating conditions

s07bm0201

The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the

following conditions are met.

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.

. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7

mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).

. The select lever is in the “R” position

(RCTA only).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the

following situations.

. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears.

. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10

km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF

indicator does not appear (except when

reversing).

NOTE

. In the following cases, the BSD/

RCTA will stop operating and the BSD/

RCTA warning indicator will appear.

– When a malfunction occurs in the

system, including the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light

. If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator

appears, exercise proper caution. For

details, refer to “BSD/RCTA Warning

Indicator” �P349.

. In the following cases, the BSD/

RCTA will temporarily stop operating

(or may stop operating) and the BSD/

RCTA OFF indicator will appear.

– When the radar sensor becomes

significantly misaligned (If the or-

ientation of the radar sensor is

shifted for any reason, readjust-

ment is required. Have the sensor

adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)

– When a large amount of snow or

ice sticks to the rear bumper sur-

face around the radar sensors

– When the vehicle is driven on a

snow-covered road or in an envir-

onment in which there are no ob-

jects around (such as in a desert) for

a prolonged period of time

– When the temperature around the

radar sensors increases exces-

sively due to long driving on uphill

grades in the summer, etc.

– When the temperature around the

radar sensors becomes extremely

low

– When the vehicle battery voltage

lowers

– When the vehicle voltage ex-

ceeds the battery voltage rating

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

345

Starting and Operating

(348,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

The BSD/RCTA will resume operation

once these conditions are corrected,

and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will

disappear. However, if the BSD/RCTA

OFF indicator appears for a prolonged

period of time, have the system in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

. The detectability of the radar sen-

sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-

tection may be impaired and the system

may not operate properly under the

following conditions.

– When the rear bumper around the

radar sensors is distorted

– When ice, snow or mud adheres

to the rear bumper surface around

the radar sensors

– When stickers, etc. are affixed on

the areas of the radar sensors on

the rear bumper

– During adverse weather condi-

tions such as rain, snow or fog

– When driving on wet roads such

as snow-covered roads and through

puddles

. The radar sensors may not detect or

may have difficulty detecting the fol-

lowing vehicles and objects.

– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-

destrians, stationary objects on the

road or road side, etc.

– Vehicles with body shapes that

the radar may not reflect (vehicles

with lower body height such as a

trailer with no cargo and sports

cars)

– Vehicles that are not approaching

your vehicle even though they are in

the detection area (either on a

neighboring lane to the rear or be-

side your vehicle when reversing)

(The system determines the pre-

sence of approaching vehicles

based on data detected by the radar

sensors.)

– Vehicles traveling at significantly

different speeds

– Vehicles driving in parallel at al-

most the same speed as your vehi-

cle for a prolonged time

– Oncoming vehicles

– Vehicles in a lane beyond the

neighboring lane

– Vehicles travelling at a signifi-

cantly lower speed that you are

trying to overtake

. On a road with extremely narrow

lanes, the system may detect vehicles

driving in a lane next to the neighboring

lane.

& BSD/RCTA Approach Indica-

tor Light/Warning Buzzer

s07bm03

While the BSD/RCTA is active, the follow-

ing item(s) will operate to alert the driver:

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light (when there are vehicles in the

neighboring lanes).

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light and warning buzzer (when a vehicle

is approaching from the left or right side

while your vehicle is reversing)

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

s07bm0301

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

It is mounted on each side of the outside

mirrors.

The indicator light will illuminate when a

vehicle approaching from behind is de-

BSD/RCTA

346

(349,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

tected.

The indicator light will flash to warn the

driver of dangers under the following

conditions.

. While the indicator light is illuminating, if

the turn signal lever is operated toward the

side in which this light turned on

. When reversing the vehicle while the

system detects a vehicle approaching

from either side

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light dimming function

s07bm030101

When the headlights are turned on, the

brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE

. You may have difficulty seeing the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

under the following conditions.

– When sunlight shines directly on

– When the headlight beams from a

vehicle traveling behind shines di-

rectly on it

. While the illumination brightness

control dial is in the fully upward

position, even if the headlights are

turned on, the brightness of the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light will not

be reduced. For details about the

illumination brightness control dial,

refer to “Illumination Brightness Con-

trol” �P151.

! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-

zer (only when reversing)

s07bm0302

A warning buzzer sounds along with

flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-

dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume

can be changed by operating the center

information display. For details, refer to

“Car settings” �P195 (11.6-inch display

models) or “Vehicle setting icons” �P208

(dual 7.0-inch display models).

! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light/warning

buzzer

s07bm0303

. In the following cases, operation of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and

the warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings.

– When a vehicle moves to the neigh-

boring lane from a lane next to the

neighboring lane

– When driving on a steep incline or

on repeated sharp uphill and downhill

grades

– When going beyond a pass

– When both your vehicle and a

vehicle driving on a neighboring lane

are driving on the far side of each lane.

– When several narrowly-spaced ve-

hicles are approaching in a row

– In low radius bends (tight bends or

when making turns at an intersection)

– When there is a difference in height

between your lane and the neighboring

lane

– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is

activated by touching “BSD/RCTA”

– Immediately after the select lever is

shifted to the “R” position

– When extremely heavy cargo is

loaded in the trunk

. During reversing, operation of the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light and the

warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings

under the following conditions.

– When backing out of an angled

parking space

– When a large-sized vehicle is

parked next to your vehicle (That

vehicle prevents the propagation of

radar waves.)

– When reversing on sloped roads

– When reversing at a high speed

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

347

Starting and Operating

(350,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may illuminate when driving close to

solid objects on the road or road side (such

as guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).

. When turning at an intersection in

urban areas, or a multilane intersection,

the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

may flash.

. If a building or a wall exists in the

reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA ap-

proach indicator light may flash and the

warning buzzer may sound.

. In the following cases, the system may

detect a vehicle driving two lanes away

from your vehicle.

– When your vehicle drives on the

near side of its lane from the corre-

sponding vehicle

– When the vehicle driving two lanes

away drives on the near side of its lane

from your vehicle

& BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator

s07bm08

! System temporary stops

s07bm0801

1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message

2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the system is

used at extremely high or low tempera-

tures or when abnormal voltage exists.

Once these conditions are corrected, the

system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will dis-

appear.

If the indicator remains displayed for a

prolonged time, have the system in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer.

! System temporary stops due to

reduced radar sensitivity

s07bm0802

1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due

to reduced radar sensitivity

2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the detectabil-

ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Once

the condition is corrected, the system will

recover from the temporary stop condition

and the indicator will disappear.

If the indicator remains displayed for a

prolonged time, have the system in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer.

BSD/RCTA

348

(351,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator

s07bm04

! System malfunction

s07bm0403

1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message

2) At first, this message will appear

3) Then this message will appear

4) BSD/RCTA warning indicator

This display appears when a malfunction

occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

& To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA

s07bm09

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

To turn the BSD/RCTA system on and off,

operate the center information display.

Refer to “Car settings” �P195 (11.6-inch

display models) or “Vehicle setting icons”

�P208 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

When the BSD/RCTA system is turned

OFF, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator on the

combination meter display (color LCD) will

illuminate.

NOTE

. In the following cases, turn off the

BSD/RCTA system. The system may

not operate properly due to blocked

radar waves.

– When a bicycle carrier or other

item is fitted to the rear of the

vehicle

– When using a chassis dynam-

ometer or free roller device, etc.

– When running the engine and

making the wheels rotate while

lifting up the vehicle

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known

status of the system is maintained. For

example, if the ignition switch is turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the

BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA

remains deactivated the next time the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

349

Starting and Operating

(352,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Certification for the BSD/

RCTA

s07bm06

. The U.S. and other FCC compliant

countries

FCC ID: OAYSRR3A

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models

BSD/RCTA

350

(353,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Mexico-spec. models

& Handling of Radar Sensors

s07bm07

Radar sensors

The radar sensors, one on each side of the

vehicle, are mounted inside the rear

bumper.

CAUTION

To ensure correct operation of the

BSD/RCTA, observe the following

precautions.

. Always keep the bumper surface

near the radar sensors clean.

. Do not affix any stickers or other

items on the bumper surface near

the radar sensors. For details,

consult your SUBARU dealer.

. Do not modify the bumper near

the radar sensors.

. Do not paint the bumper near the

radar sensors.

. Do not expose the bumper near

the radar sensors to strong im-

pacts. If a sensor becomes mis-

aligned, a system malfunction

may occur, including the inability

to detect vehicles entering the

detection areas. If any strong

shock is applied to the bumper,

be sure to contact your SUBARU

dealer for inspection.

. Do not disassemble the radar

sensors.

NOTE

If the radar sensors require repair or

replacement, or the bumper area

around the radar sensors requires

repair, paintwork or replacement, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-

tance.

BSD/RCTA

351

Starting and Operating

(354,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7-22. Reverse Automatic

Braking (RAB) System (If

Equipped)

s07bn

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a

system designed to help avoid collisions or

reduce collision damage when reversing

the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is

detected in the reversing direction, the

system will notify the driver with a warning

sound and may activate the vehicle’s

brakes automatically.

WARNING

. Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) is not a system intended

to replace the driver’s responsi-

bility to check their surroundings

for vehicles or obstacles to avoid

a collision.

. The driver is responsible for driv-

ing safely. Before reversing, be

sure to first depress the brake

pedal and visually check the

surroundings.

. There are some cases in which

the vehicle cannot avoid colli-

sion, because the system opera-

tion has limitations. The warning

sound or automatic braking may

be delayed or may not operate at

all even when an obstacle is

present.

. Make sure to set the Automatic

Braking function to OFF when the

vehicle is on the free roller or on

the chassis dynamometer. Other-

wise, the vehicle may move and it

may cause an accident.

. The system is not designed to

detect people (including chil-

dren), animals or other moving

objects.

. Depending on the vehicle condi-

tion or the surrounding environ-

ment, the sonar sensor’s ability

to detect objects may become

unstable.

NOTE

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system records and stores the follow-

ing data when automatic braking oper-

ates. It does not record conversations,

personal information or other audio

data.

. Distance from the object

. Vehicle speed

. Accelerator pedal operation status

. Brake pedal operation status

. Select lever position

. Outside temperature

. The sensitivity setting of the sonar

sensors

SUBARU and third parties contracted

by SUBARU may acquire and use the

recorded data for the purpose of vehi-

cle research and development.

SUBARU and third parties contracted

by SUBARU will not disclose or provide

the acquired data to any other third

party except under the following con-

ditions.

. The vehicle owner has given his/her

consent.

. The disclosure/provision is based

on a court order or other legally en-

forceable request.

. Data that has been modified so that

the user and vehicle cannot be identi-

fied is provided to a research institution

for statistical processing or similar

purposes.

& Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) System Overview

s07bn01

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system will operate the following 2 func-

tions using 4 sonar sensors.

. Sonar Audible Alarm function

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system detects objects rearward and

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

352

(355,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

warns the driver by warning message on

the center information display and warning

beeps.

. Automatic Braking function

The Automatic Braking function detects

objects rearward and if there is a high risk

of a collision, the system decelerates the

vehicle and controls the braking to reduce

damage.

1) When reversing

2) When either strong automatic braking or

torque control is applied to prevent

collision (in this case, short warning

beeps or continuous warning beeps will

sound)

3) When the vehicle is stopped by the

system (in this case, the continuous

beep will remain sounding)

4) Object (e.g., a wall)

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

353

Starting and Operating

(356,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Detecting range

s07bn0101

1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6

in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width

2) Range that the system cannot detect:

Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the

rear of the vehicle

3) Detecting range (length): Approximately

5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

WARNING

If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-

road crossing and you are trying to

escape by reversing through the

crossing gate, the system may re-

cognize the crossing gate as an

obstacle and brake may activate. In

this case, remain calm and either

continue to depress the accelerator

pedal or cancel the system. To

cancel the system, refer to “Cancel-

ing the Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) System Operation” �P360.

& Operating Conditions

s07bn02

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system will operate when all of the follow-

ing conditions are met.

1) EyeSight warning indicator

2) RAB warning indicator

3) RAB OFF indicator

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.

. The RAB warning indicator is off.

. The RAB OFF indicator is off.

. The select lever is in the “R” position.

Sonar Audible Alarm function

. Sonar Audible Alarm is set to “ON”.

. The vehicle speed is from 0 to 9 mph (0

to 15 km/h).

Automatic Braking function

. Automatic Braking is set to “ON”.

. The vehicle speed is from 1 to 9 mph

(1.5 to 15 km/h).

NOTE

. In the following cases, the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system will

not operate. Promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected.

– The EyeSight warning indicator

is illuminated.

– The RAB warning indicator is

illuminated.

. In the following cases, the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system can-

not be operated.

– The

(EyeSight Temporary Stop

indicator: White) is illuminated, and

the messages corresponding to the

EyeSight temporary stop are dis-

played on the combination meter

display (color LCD). For details,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

– The RAB OFF indicator is illumi-

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

354

(357,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

nated.

. In the following cases, the functions

may not be able to properly work.

Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to

have the system inspected.

– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is

applied to the sonar sensors or the

rear bumper near the sonar sensor.

– The rear bumper is modified.

– The rear bumper has been re-

moved and attached.

– The ground clearance is changed

due to the vehicle’s loading condi-

tion or modification.

– There is damage to the sonar

sensors or the rear bumper near

the sonar sensor.

– The rear bumper is exposed to

strong impact, or the rear bumper is

deformed.

. On a steep hill, the system’s auto-

matic braking ability will be reduced.

. The system is designed to avoid

collisions by automatic hard braking

when the vehicle’s reversing speed is

less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).

However, the system does not guaran-

tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid

collisions in any situation.

. If the vehicle is reversed at an

extremely slow speed, the driver’s

operation may be prioritized. In this

case, automatic braking will not oper-

ate.

. The system may not be able to detect

and apply the brake with the following

objects.

– Sharp or thin objects such as

poles, fences and ropes which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted

from the sonar sensor.

– Objects that are too close to the

rear bumper when the select lever is

set to the “R” position.

– Objects with a surface which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted

from the sonar sensor such as a

chain link fence.

. Objects the system is not designed

to detect and apply brake.

– Pedestrians.

– Moving objects including moving

vehicles.

– Objects which absorbs sound

waves such as cloth or snow.

– Objects whose surface has a

diagonal angle.

– Objects that are low to the ground

such as parking blocks.

– Objects that are high above the

ground such as objects hanging

from above.

– Objects that are out of range of

the center of the vehicle in the

horizontal direction.

– Objects that are not perpendicu-

lar to the ground.

– The surface of the object is

uneven or wavy.

. When reversing the vehicle, the

functions may not be able to work

properly or may cause a system mal-

function if the following conditions

exist.

High frequency sound from other

sources are nearby:

– Horn sound from another vehicle.

– Engine sound from other vehi-

cles.

– Sound of an air brake.

– Vehicle detection equipment or a

sonar from another vehicle.

– A sound wave with a frequency

similar to the vehicle’s system is

transmitted near by.

– A vehicle equipped with the same

system is reversing toward your

reversing direction.

Weather conditions:

– Extremely high or extremely low

temperatures in which the area near

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

355

Starting and Operating

(358,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

the sonar sensor becomes too hot

or too cold to operate.

– The sonar sensors or the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors are

exposed to heavy rain or a signifi-

cant amount of water.

– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.

– Air is moving rapidly such as

when a strong wind is blowing.

Parts attached to the rear bumper

near the sonar sensor:

– Commercial electronic parts (fog

light, fender pole, radio antenna) or

commercial attachment parts (trai-

ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper

guard) are attached.

– Parts that emit high frequency

sound, such as a horn or speaker,

are attached.

Vehicle conditions:

– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to

the sonar sensors or the rear bum-

per near the sonar sensor.

– The vehicle is significantly in-

clined.

– The ground clearance is signifi-

cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s

loading condition, etc.

– When the sonar sensor is mis-

aligned due to a collision or an

accident.

Surrounding environment:

– A cloth banner, flag, hanging

branch or railroad crossing bars

are present in the reversing direc-

tion.

– When reversing on a gravel or

grassy area.

– When reversing in an area where

objects or walls are adjacent to the

vehicle such as narrow tunnels,

narrow bridges, narrow roads or

narrow garages.

– Wheel track or hole is present in

the ground of the reversing direc-

tion.

– When reversing over a drainage

cover (grating cover).

– The path of the reversing direc-

tion is inclined such as on a steep

uphill.

– When reversing downhill.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

356

(359,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

– A curb or step is present in the

reversing direction.

– Reversing in a garage with a low

ceiling or a tunnel.

– There is a patch of snow rear-

ward.

– There is a puddle of water.

– There is an obstacle that is next

to an object.

– Going back along a wall.

– The area where the road starts

touching dirt and snow

– When reversing on an uneven

road.

. In circumstances such as the follow-

ing, it may not be possible to avoid a

collision even when the system oper-

ates normally.

– Roads are slippery.

– The tire air pressure is not cor-

rect.

– The tires have become worn.

– Tire chains are installed.

– Tires which are not the desig-

nated size are installed.

– Emergency repairs were per-

formed using a puncture repair kit.

– The suspension was modified.

– Vehicle driving is unstable due to

accident or malfunction.

– The brake warning light is illumi-

nated.

& Sonar Audible Alarm Func-

tion

s07bn03

When the Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system is in operation, audible

warning beeps will sound to warn the

driver of a potential collision in 3 levels:

medium proximity, short proximity, closest

proximity.

NOTE

It may take time to display the wall and

sound warning beeps after the object

was recognized by the Sonar Audible

Alarm function.

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

357

Starting and Operating

(360,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern

Long proximity (ob-

ject detected)

35 in (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound

Medium proximity

alert (approaching the

object)

28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm) Yellow Short beeps

Short proximity alert

(approaching closer

to the object)

20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm) Orange Rapid short beeps

Closest proximity

alert (too close to the

object)

20 in (50 cm) or less Red

Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

! Obstacle detected and alert level

s07bn0301

Long proximity alert (object detected)

1) Green: 35 in (90 cm) or more

Medium proximity alert (approaching the

object)

1) Yellow: 28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

358

(361,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Short proximity alert (approaching the

object closer)

1) Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to the

object)

1) Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less

When an object is detected in the rever-

sing direction, the range of detected object

will be shown on the center information

display.

A warning alarm will sound and, depend-

ing on the speed, either torque control to

generate engine braking or automatic

braking will be applied.

& Automatic Braking Function

Operation

s07bn08

! Object close behind warning

s07bn0801

Automatic braking warning

1) Warning message

If the system determine the risk of collision

with the object. Short warning beeps or

continuous warning beeps will sound and

either strong automatic braking or torque

control will be applied to prevent collision.

At this time, a warning message is also

displayed on the combination meter dis-

play (color LCD).

Depress brake pedal warning

1) Warning message

Make sure to depress the brake pedal

once the vehicle has been stopped by

automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is

depressed, a message will be displayed

on the center information display and the

continuous beep will remain sounding.

At this time, a warning message is also

displayed on the combination meter dis-

play (color LCD).

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

359

Starting and Operating

(362,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

NOTE

The Sonar Audible Alarm function and

Automatic Braking function are differ-

ent in operation conditions. Therefore,

there are cases in which only one of

these functions will activate.

WARNING

Depress the brake pedal immedi-

ately after the system stops the

vehicle by automatic braking. De-

pending on the conditions of the

road surface and tires, the vehicle

may not remain stopped, possibly

leading to an accident.

! After the vehicle is stopped by the

system

s07bn0802

After the brake pedal is depressed, the

RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the

system will temporarily stop operating.

The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when

the select lever is shifted to a position other

than the “R” position.

The system will operate again the next

time the select lever is shifted to the “R”

position.

NOTE

. In the following cases, after the

vehicle has been stopped by the Re-

verse Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-

tem, brake control is released and the

electronic parking brake operates. For

details about releasing the parking

brake, refer to “Electronic Parking

Brake (CVT Models)” �P325.

– When 2 minutes pass after the

vehicle is stopped

– When any door is opened

. The Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system may stop operating tem-

porarily in the following cases and the

RAB OFF indicator will illuminate.

– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to

the sonar sensors or the rear bum-

per near the sonar sensor

– Objects are too close to the rear

bumper when the select lever is set

to the “R” position

– The system detects sounds of a

similar frequency to the RAB sonar

– The Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF mode and TRACK mode are

selected.

& Canceling the Reverse Auto-

matic Braking (RAB) System

Operation

s07bn04

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system can be temporarily canceled by

any of the following operations.

. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the brake

pedal is depressed.

. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the accel-

erator pedal is depressed.

. The accelerator pedal is depressed

continuously (In this case, limited accel-

eration will be canceled and the vehicle will

continue reversing.)

. The select lever is shifted to a position

other than the “R” position.

NOTE

The system will be canceled if the

object is no longer detected.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

360

(363,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) System ON/OFF

Setting

s07bn05

While the select lever is shifted to the “R”

position, the below functions of the Re-

verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

can be set by operating the center in-

formation display.

1) ON setting key of Automatic Braking

function

2) OFF setting key of Automatic Braking

function

3) ON setting key of the Sonar Audible

Alarm function

4) OFF setting key of the Sonar Audible

Alarm function

When the ON setting key is shown, the

corresponding setting is ON.

Touch the ON setting key to turn the setting

OFF.

When the OFF setting is shown, the

corresponding setting is OFF.

Touch the OFF setting key to turn the

setting ON.

When the Automatic Braking function is

turned OFF, the following indicator(s) will

illuminate.

The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when

the corresponding function is turned ON.

NOTE

When the settings cannot be changed,

the ON/OFF setting key will be grayed

out.

Also, the following settings can be chan-

ged by operating the center information

display.

. Warning volume

. Sonar Audible Alarm

For details, refer to “Car settings” �P195.

& RAB Warning Indicator

s07bn07

1) RAB malfunction message

2) RAB warning indicator

If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system malfunctions, the above indicator

illuminates on the combination meter.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details.

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

361

Starting and Operating

(364,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Handling of the Sonar Sen-

sors

s07bn06

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear

bumper. To ensure the proper operation of

the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system, observe the following precau-

tions.

. Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface

near the sonar sensors.

. Always keep the sonar sensor and the

rear bumper surface near the sonar

sensors clean.

. Do not modify rear bumper.

. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar

sensors.

. Do not apply high pressure water to the

sonar sensors with a high pressure car-

washing machine.

. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor

becomes misaligned, a system malfunc-

tion may occur, including inability to detect

objects in the reversing direction. If any

strong impact is applied to the rear

bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to

have the system inspected.

. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

NOTE

If the sonar sensors require repair or

replacement, or if the area of the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors re-

quires repair, paintwork or replace-

ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for

assistance.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

362

(365,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s08

8-1. New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First

1,000 miles (1,600 km) .................................. 364

8-2. Fuel Economy Hints ....................................... 364

8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)...... 364

8-4. Catalytic Converter......................................... 365

8-5. Periodic Inspections....................................... 366

8-6. Driving in Foreign Countries ......................... 366

8-7. Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles ...................... 366

8-8. Driving Precaution.......................................... 368

8-9. Winter Driving ................................................. 368

Operation during Cold Weather........................... 368

Driving on Snowy and Icy Roads........................ 369

Corrosion Protection.......................................... 370

Snow Tires......................................................... 371

Tire Chains ........................................................ 371

Rocking the Vehicle ........................................... 372

8-10. Loading Your Vehicle ....................................372

Vehicle Capacity Weight ..................................... 373

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating).............. 373

Roof Molding and Crossbar (If Equipped) ........... 374

8-11. Trailer Towing ................................................375

Driving Tips

(366,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

8-1. New Vehicle Break-In

Driving – the First 1,000 miles

(1,600 km)

s08aa

The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

. Do not race the engine. And do not

allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm

except in an emergency.

. Do not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or

slow.

. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac-

celeration, except in an emergency.

. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer-

gency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to a newly installed or overhauled

engine or when brake pads are replaced

with new ones.

8-2. Fuel Economy Hints

s08ab

The following suggestions will help to save

your fuel.

. Select the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try to

maintain that speed for as long as possi-

ble.

. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

. Keep the engine properly tuned.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire inflation pres-

sure label, which is located under the door

latch on the driver’s side. Low pressure will

increase tire wear and fuel consumption.

. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

. Keep the front and rear wheels in

proper alignment.

. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or

cargo.

. The indication of the ECO gauge shows

a reference for saving fuel. For details,

refer to “ECO gauge” �P179.

8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas

(Carbon Monoxide)

s08ac

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-

hicle for a long time while the

engine is running. If that is un-

avoidable, then use the ventila-

tion fan to force fresh air into the

vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

New Vehicle Break-In Driving – the First 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

364

(367,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the trunk lid closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

engine has been shut off. This sound is

normal.

8-4. Catalytic Converter

s08ad

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive

or park the vehicle anywhere

near flammable materials (e.g.

grass, paper, rags or leaves),

because the catalytic converter

operates at very high tempera-

tures.

. Keep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,

thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:

. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a

small amount of leaded gasoline will

damage the catalytic converter.

. Never start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

. Avoid racing the engine.

. Never turn off the ignition switch while

the vehicle is moving.

. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring, back-

firing or incomplete combustion), have

your vehicle checked and repaired by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

. Do not apply undercoating or rust

prevention treatment to the heat shield of

catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-

tem.

. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level.

Catalytic Converter

365

Driving Tips

(368,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

8-5. Periodic Inspections

s08ae

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recom-

mended maintenance services listed in

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-

formed at the specified time or mileage

intervals.

8-6. Driving in Foreign Coun-

tries

s08af

When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:

. Confirm the availability of the correct

fuel. Refer to “Fuel Requirements”

�P283.

. Comply with all regulations and require-

ments of each country.

8-7. Driving Tips for AWD Ve-

hicles

s08ag

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

. When replacing or installing

tire(s), all four tires must be the

same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Speed symbol

(d) Circumference

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

Periodic Inspections

366

(369,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

For items (a) to (c), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire inflation pres-

sure label. The tire inflation pres-

sure label is located on the dri-

ver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), serious mechan-

ical damage could be caused to

the drivetrain of the car, and

affect the followings.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and the tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire to

replace a flat tire, be sure to use the

original temporary spare tire stored

in the vehicle. Using other sizes may

result in severe mechanical damage

to the drive train of your vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By

shifting power between the front and rear

wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide

added traction during acceleration, and

added engine braking force during decel-

eration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging the

AWD system, you should keep the follow-

ing tips in mind:

. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.

There is little difference in handling, how-

ever, during extremely sharp turns or

sudden braking. Therefore, when driving

down a slope or turning corners, be sure to

reduce your speed and maintain an ample

distance from other vehicles.

. Always check the cold tire pressure

before starting to drive. The recommended

tire pressure is provided on the tire inflation

pressure label, which is located on the

door pillar on the driver’s side.

. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle

under hard-driving conditions such as

steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate

more frequent replacement of the follow-

ing items than that specified in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

– Engine oil

– Brake fluid

– Rear differential gear oil

– Manual transmission oil (MT mod-

els)

– Continuously variable transmission

fluid (CVT models)

– Front differential gear oil (CVT

models)

. There are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehicle.

For detailed information, refer to “Towing”

�P398.

Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles

367

Driving Tips

(370,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

8-8. Driving Precaution

s08aq

WARNING

Never attempt to drive through

pools and puddles, or roads flooded

with water. Water entering the en-

gine air intake or the exhaust pipe or

water splashing onto electrical parts

may damage your vehicle and may

cause it to stall. In this case, contact

your SUBARU dealer immediately.

Regardless of its depth, it can wash

away the ground from under your

tires, resulting in possible loss of

traction and even vehicle rollover.

CAUTION

After driving on gravel roads or

rough roads, check the undercar-

riage of the vehicle body for any

damage, deformation, or paint re-

moval. If you notice any irregulari-

ties, contact a SUBARU dealer for an

inspection as soon as possible.

8-9. Winter Driving

s08ai

& Operation during Cold

Weather

s08ai01

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares,

a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-

peratures reduce battery capacity. The

battery must be in good condition to

provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

It normally takes longer to start the engine

in very cold weather conditions. Use an

engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity

for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil

will make it harder to start the engine.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or separate the rubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen, use

hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards

thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes

because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

If you fill the windshield washer tank with a

fluid with a different concentration from the

one used previously, purge the old fluid

from the piping between the windshield

washer tank and washer nozzles by

operating the washer for a certain period

of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of

the fluid remaining in the piping is too low

for the outside temperature, it may freeze

and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the windshield washer tank.

. Be careful foreign matter does

not contaminate the washer fluid

when filling the tank. Contamina-

tion could cause malfunctions,

such as clogging the pump.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

Driving Precaution

368

(371,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

! Before driving your vehicle

s08ai0101

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and driving

dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before

driving, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accu-

mulated under the fenders to avoid making

steering difficult. During severe winter

driving, stop when and where it is safe to

do so and check under the fenders

periodically.

! Parking in cold weather

s08ai0102

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine

running.

CAUTION

. Do not use the parking brake

when parking for long periods in

cold weather since it could freeze

in that position.

. When the vehicle is parked in

snow or when it snows, raise the

wiper blades off the glass to

prevent damage to them.

. Under either of the following

conditions, icing may develop

on the brake system, which could

cause poor braking action.

– When the vehicle has been left

parked after use on roads

heavily covered with snow

– When the vehicle has been left

parked during a snowstorm

Check for snow or ice buildup on

the suspension, disc brakes and

brake hoses underneath the ve-

hicle. If there is caked snow or

ice, remove it, being careful not

to damage the disc brakes and

brake hoses and ABS harness.

When parking for long periods in cold

weather, you should observe the following

tips.

1. For MT models, place the shift lever in

the “1” or “R” position. For CVT models,

place the select lever in the “P” position.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving.

! Refueling in cold weather

s08ai0103

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weather.

Use only additives that are specifically

designed for this purpose. When an anti-

freeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used for

an extended period, it is best to have the

fuel tank filled to capacity.

& Driving on Snowy and Icy

Roads

s08ai02

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of vehi-

cle control.

– CONTINUED –

Winter Driving

369

Driving Tips

(372,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’s intake system and may

hinder the airflow, which could re-

sult in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the

engine brake effectively to control the

vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear

when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-

hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-

mance on snowy and icy roads. For

information about braking on slippery

surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-Lock Brake

System)” �P317 and “Vehicle Dynamics

Control System” �P319.

! Wiper operation when snowing

s08ai0201

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to

the windshield.

If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the

windshield, perform the following proce-

dure.

. To thaw the windshield wiper blade

rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow

selection in “

” and the temperature set

for maximum warmth until the wiper blade

rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to

“Climate Control” �P247.

. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper

deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the

windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to

“Defogger and Deicer” �P231.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts

to stick on the surface of the windshield

despite wiper operation, use the defroster

with the airflow selection in “

” and the

temperature set for maximum warmth.

After the windshield gets warmed enough

to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away

using the windshield washer. Refer to

“Windshield washer” �P231.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the

vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer

to “Hazard Warning Flasher” �P148.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

wiper blades (winter blades) during the

seasons you could have snow and freez-

ing temperatures. Blades of this type give

superior wiping performance in snowy

conditions. Be sure to use blades that are

suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During high-speed driving, non-

freezing type wiper blades may not

perform as well as standard wiper

blades. If this happens, reduce the

vehicle speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freez-

ing type wiper blades is over, replace

them with standard wiper blades.

& Corrosion Protection

s08ai03

Refer to “Corrosion Protection” �P412.

Winter Driving

370

(373,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Snow Tires

s08ai04

WARNING

. When replacing or installing win-

ter tire(s), all four tires must be

the same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Speed symbol

(d) Circumference

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire inflation pres-

sure label. The tire inflation pres-

sure label is located on the dri-

ver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), serious mechan-

ical damage could be caused to

the drivetrain of the car, and

affect the followings.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and the tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Do not use a combination of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “summer

tires” as original equipment, which are

inadequate for driving on slippery roads

such as on snow-covered or icy roads.

If you choose to install winter tires on your

vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size

and type. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, construction,

brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

& Tire Chains

s08ai05

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your

vehicle because of the lack of clear-

ance between the tires and vehicle

body.

NOTE

When tire chains cannot be used, use of

another type of traction device (such as

spring chains) may be acceptable if use

on your vehicle is recommended by the

device manufacturer, taking into ac-

count tire size and road conditions.

Follow the device manufacturer’s in-

structions, especially regarding max-

imum vehicle speed.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle,

drive slowly, readjust or remove the

device if it is contacting your vehicle,

and do not spin your wheels. Damage

caused to your vehicle by use of a

traction device is not covered under

warranty.

Make certain that any traction device

you use is an SAE class S device, and

use it on the front wheels only. Always

use the utmost care when driving with a

traction device. Overconfidence be-

– CONTINUED –

Winter Driving

371

Driving Tips

(374,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

cause you are using a traction device

could easily lead to a serious accident.

& Rocking the Vehicle

s08ai06

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the shift

lever/select lever back and forth between

“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the

engine. For the best possible traction,

avoid spinning the wheels when trying to

free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission in

2nd than in 1st (MT models and CVT

models).

If your vehicle is a CVT model, for

information about holding the transmission

in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of

Manual Mode” �P309.

8-10. Loading Your Vehicle

s08aj

WARNING

Never allow passengers to ride on a

folded rear seatback, in the trunk.

Doing so may result in serious

injury.

WARNING

. Never stack luggage or other

cargo higher than the top of the

seatback because it could tumble

forward and injure passengers in

the event of a sudden stop or

accident. Keep luggage or cargo

low, as close to the floor as

possible.

. When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

. Secure long items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicle

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place cargo or luggage in

or on the following locations as

the item may get under the

clutch, brake, or accelerator ped-

al and prevent the pedals from

being depressed properly, block

the driver’s vision, or hit the

driver or passengers, causing

Loading Your Vehicle

372

(375,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

an accident:

– At the feet of the driver

– On the front passenger or rear

seats (when stacking items)

– On the rear shelf

– On the instrument panel

– On the dashboard

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

& Vehicle Capacity Weight

s08aj01

Vehicle placard

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available

cargo space. The maximum load you can

carry in your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the driver’s

side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their

belongings, any optional equipment such

as a roof rack or bike carrier, etc.

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

s08aj02

Certification label

The certification label attached to the

driver’s side door pillar shows GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR

(Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage and

any optional equipment. Therefore, the

GVW changes depending on the situation.

In addition, the total weight applied to each

axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

– CONTINUED –

Loading Your Vehicle

373

Driving Tips

(376,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight,

either front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle

scale, found at a commercial weighing

station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because they

may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-

tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

range than the originals do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

& Roof Molding and Crossbar

(If Equipped)

s08aj06

CAUTION

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof molding must be used to-

gether with a roof crossbar kit

and the appropriate carrying at-

tachment. Otherwise, damage to

the roof or paint or a road hazard

due to loss of cargo could result.

. When using the roof crossbar kit,

make sure that the total weight of

the crossbars, carrying attach-

ment and cargo does not exceed

the maximum load limit. Over-

loading may cause damage to

the vehicle and create a safety

hazard.

. Do not install a roof tent on the

vehicle. Doing so may damage

the vehicle and create a safety

hazard. SUBARU warranties do

not cover vehicle damage result-

ing from use of a roof tent.

Cargo can be carried after securing the

roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and

installing the appropriate carrying attach-

ment. When installing the roof crossbar kit,

follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

When carrying cargo on the roof using the

roof crossbar kit and carrying attachments,

never exceed the maximum load limit as

explained below. You should also be

careful that the vehicle does not exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

and front and rear Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR). For information about

loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,

refer to “Loading Your Vehicle” �P372.

The maximum total load on the roof

(including crossbars, carrying attachments

and cargo) must not exceed 88 lbs (40

kg). Refer to the crossbar installation

instructions for the maximum crossbar

capacity. Place the heaviest load at the

bottom, close to the roof, and evenly

distribute the cargo. Always properly se-

cure all cargo.

Loading Your Vehicle

374

(377,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Installing carrying attachments on

the crossbars

s08aj0601

When installing any carrying attachments

such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike

carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo

basket, etc., follow the manufacturer’s

instructions for the load capacity and make

sure that the attachments are securely

installed. Use only attachments designed

specifically for the crossbars. Before oper-

ating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo

is properly secured on the attachment.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting the

driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

! Removal and installation of the

crossbars

s08aj0602

Each of the two roof moldings has two

mounting points for crossbars. Each

mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use

a screwdriver to open the covers. When

installing the crossbars on the roof mold-

ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

8-11. Trailer Towing

s08ar

CAUTION

Your vehicle is neither designed nor

intended to be used for trailer tow-

ing. Therefore, never tow a trailer

with your vehicle.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that may result

from trailer towing, from any trailer towing

equipment or from any errors or omissions

in the instructions accompanying such

equipment. SUBARU warranties do not

apply to vehicle damage or malfunction

caused by trailer towing.

Trailer Towing

375

Driving Tips

(378,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(379,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s09

9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency ... 378

9-2. Temporary Spare Tire (If Equipped) .............. 378

9-3. Maintenance Tools.......................................... 379

Models with Flat Tire Repair Kit .......................... 380

Models with the Spare Tire ................................. 380

9-4. Flat Tires ......................................................... 381

Changing a Flat Tire ...........................................381

Sealing a Flat Tire (Models with the Flat Tire

Repair Kit) ........................................................ 384

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 393

TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................394

9-5. Jump Starting ................................................. 394

How to Jump Start.............................................. 395

9-6. Engine Overheating ........................................ 397

If Steam Is Coming from the Engine

Compartment....................................................397

If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine

Compartment....................................................397

9-7. Towing ..............................................................398

Towing Hook and Tie-Down Hooks/Holes............ 398

Using a Flat-Bed Truck ....................................... 401

Towing with All Wheels on the Ground ............... 401

9-8. Electronic Parking Brake – If the Electronic

Parking Brake Cannot Be Released

(CVT Models) .................................................402

9-9. Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob

Does Not Operate Properly ..........................402

Locking and Unlocking....................................... 403

Switching Power Status ..................................... 403

Starting Engine .................................................. 403

9-10. Malfunctions of the Center Information

Display ...........................................................404

9-11. Moonroof (If Equipped) – If the Moonroof

Does Not Close .............................................406

9-12. If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident...406

To Restart the Engine When Involved in

an Accident...................................................... 406

Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation

When Involved in an Accident .......................... 406

In Case of Emergency

(380,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle

in an Emergency

s09aa

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch

position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pressing

the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it

off by pressing the switch again.

When the hazard warning flasher are

flashing, the corresponding turn signal

indicator will also flash.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

9-2. Temporary Spare Tire (If

Equipped)

s09ab

CAUTION

. Never use any temporary spare

tire other than the original. Using

other sizes may result in severe

mechanical damage to the drive

train of your vehicle.

. Always conform to the following

instructions when using the tem-

porary spare tire. Otherwise, a

seriously dangerous situation

may occur.

The temporary spare tire is stored under

the under-floor storage compartment.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is

designed for emergency use only. Re-

move the temporary spare tire and re-

install the conventional tire as soon as

possible because the spare tire is de-

signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-

porary spare tire periodically to keep the

tire ready for use. For the correct tire

pressure, refer to “Tires” �P468.

When using the temporary spare tire, note

If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency

378

(381,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

the following precautions.

. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary

spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,

a tire chain will not fit properly.

. Do not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance

is reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar

2) Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears on

the tread, replace the tire.

. The temporary spare tire must be used

only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire

gets punctured, replace the wheel with a

rear wheel and install the temporary spare

tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

9-3. Maintenance Tools

s09ah

Your vehicle is equipped with the following

maintenance tools.

. Jack

. Jack handle

. Screwdriver

. Towing hook (eye bolt)

. Wheel nut wrench

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance Tools

379

In Case of Emergency

(382,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Models with Flat Tire Repair

Kit

s09ah19

1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer

to “Under-Floor Storage Compartment”

�P280.)

2) Screwdriver

3) Wheel nut wrench

4) Jack handle

5) Towing hook (eye bolt)

6) Jack

7) Flat tire repair kit

The maintenance tools are stored in the

under-floor storage compartment.

For the method to use the jack, refer to

“Flat Tires” �P381.

& Models with the Spare Tire

s09ah20

1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer

to “Under-Floor Storage Compartment”

�P280.)

2) Jack handle

Maintenance Tools

380

(383,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Towing hook (eye bolt)

3) Screwdriver

4) Jack

9-4. Flat Tires

s09ac

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

& Changing a Flat Tire

s09ac01

! Models with flat tire repair kit

s09ac0103

It may be difficult to change a flat tire.

However, it may be possible to seal the

tire. For details, refer to “Sealing a Flat Tire

(Models with the Flat Tire Repair Kit)”

�P384.

! Models without flat tire repair kit

s09ac0104

WARNING

. Use only the jack and the jack

handle provided with your vehi-

cle. The jack supplied with the

vehicle is designed only for chan-

ging a tire. Never get under the

vehicle while supporting the ve-

hicle with this jack.

. Do not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.

The jack can come out of the

jacking point or sink into the

ground and this can result in

serious injury or death.

. Before jacking up the vehicle, be

sure that there are no occupants

or cargo on board.

. Do not jack up the vehicle with an

object on or underneath the jack.

The jack can be unstable and this

can result in a severe accident.

. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or

push the vehicle supported with

the jack. The jack can come out of

the jacking point due to a jolt and

this can result in serious injury or

death.

. All passengers must exit the

vehicle before you raise it with

the jack. Raising the vehicle with

someone inside of it could result

in serious injury or death.

. Do not start the vehicle while it is

supported by the jack. Doing so

could result in serious injury or

death.

– CONTINUED –

Flat Tires

381

In Case of Emergency

(384,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

CAUTION

Do not hit and bend the disc rotor

backing plate when removing and

installing the tire. A bent backing

plate may scrape against the disc

rotor and cause noise while the

vehicle is in motion.

NOTE

Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking

up the vehicle using a garage jack.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the engine.

2. Apply the parking brake securely and

shift the shift lever to reverse (MT models)

or the select lever to the “P” (Park) position

(CVT models).

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and

unload all occupants and luggage from the

vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

5. Take out the jack, jack handle and

wheel nut wrench.

The tools and the spare tire are stored

under the floor of the trunk. Refer to

“Maintenance Tools” �P379.

NOTE

. Make sure that the jack is well

lubricated before using it.

. To take out the tools and spare tire,

open the under-floor storage. Refer to

“Maintenance Tools” �P379.

6. Take out the under-floor storage com-

partment and turn the attaching bolt

counterclockwise, then take the spare tire

out.

NOTE

Carefully read “Temporary Spare Tire”

�P378 and strictly follow the instruc-

tions.

Flat Tires

382

(385,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

8. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat

tire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

9. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle

higher than necessary.

10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean

the mounting surface of the wheel and hub

with a cloth.

– CONTINUED –

Flat Tires

383

In Case of Emergency

(386,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts when the spare tire is

installed. This could cause the nuts

to become loose and lead to an

accident.

13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in the

illustration.

For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer

to “Tires” �P468. Never use your foot on

the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension

on the wrench because you may exceed

the specified torque. Have the wheel nut

torque checked at the nearest automotive

service facility.

1) Support holder

15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment. Install with the support

holder facing upward and secure the flat

tire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt.

NOTE

If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try

turning the support holder upside

down.

16. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel

nut wrench in their storage locations.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compartment

after changing wheels. In a sudden

stop or collision, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in

the proper place.

& Sealing a Flat Tire (Models

with the Flat Tire Repair Kit)

s09ac03

WARNING

Read these instructions and

warnings carefully before sealing a

flat tire.

Compliance with these instructions

is vital to ensuring vehicle safety.

Noncompliance with these instruc-

tions means risking tire damage,

which can affect vehicle handling

and lead to loss of vehicle control.

This may result in serious injury or

death.

If the tire is punctured, you can seal the flat

tire temporarily by using the flat tire repair

kit. You can seal a flat tire caused, for

Flat Tires

384

(387,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

example, by nails or similar objects with

less than 0.2 in (4 mm). However, depend-

ing on the type and extent of tire damage,

some tires can only be partially sealed or

not sealed at all, and this condition may

cause a loss of tire pressure. A loss of tire

pressure can affect vehicle handling,

leading to the loss of vehicle control.

After sealing the flat tire temporarily,

change the tires with new ones as soon

as possible. We recommend that you have

the sealed tire changed by your nearest

SUBARU dealer. You may reuse the wheel

if the attached sealant is wiped off, but the

valve of the wheel must be replaced with a

new one. If you reuse the wheel without

replacing the valve, air may leak from the

valve. For tire replacement, refer to “Tire

Replacement” �P444.

! Safety precautions when sealing a

flat tire

s09ac0301

Observe the following rules when sealing a

flat tire.

1) Sealing is possible

2) Sealing is not possible

WARNING

. Do not use the flat tire repair kit in

the following cases.

– The tire has already been

damaged as a result of being

driven in the under inflated

condition.

– The tire damage is not located

within the visible tread of the

tire.

– The tire damage is on the

sidewall of the tire.

– When the tire has been taken

off of the wheel.

– The wheel or the tire valve of

the flat tire is damaged.

– Two or more tires have been

punctured.

– The expiration date of the

sealant has passed.

– The tire is punctured by

pointed items such as nails

of 0.2 in (4 mm) or larger.

. When inflating the flat tire, if the

tire inflation pressure does not

reach the green zone of the

pressure gauge within 10 min-

utes, do not continue to seal the

tire. We recommend that you

contact your SUBARU dealer.

. Drive with caution and avoid

making sudden steering or driv-

ing maneuvers.

. Do not exceed a maximum speed

of 50 mph (80 km/h).

. Do not exceed a maximum driv-

ing distance of 125 miles (200

km).

. Do not use tire chains on a sealed

tire.

– CONTINUED –

Flat Tires

385

In Case of Emergency

(388,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Do not tow a trailer.

. If used for a purpose other than

sealing a flat tire, the flat tire

repair kit may cause a severe

accident or injury due to the fact

that compressed air can act as an

explosive or propellant.

. Safely park your vehicle on the

roadside so that you do not

obstruct the flow of traffic and

so that you are able to seal the flat

tire without being in danger.

. Apply the parking brake, even if

the vehicle is parked on a level

road, to make sure that the vehi-

cle will not move.

. Stop the engine before sealing

the flat tire.

. Turn on the hazard warning

flasher while sealing the flat tire.

. Do not attempt to remove foreign

objects like nails or screws that

have penetrated the tire. Leave

them as they are.

. Never leave the flat tire repair kit

unattended while in use.

. Only one tire can be repaired with

one bottle of sealant.

. The tires can be repaired when

the ambient temperature is −228F

(−308C) or higher.

CAUTION

. Remember that the flat tire repair

kit only provides temporary mo-

bility. Regulations concerning

tire repair after usage of flat tire

repair kit may differ from country

to country. We recommend that

you consult your SUBARU dealer

or tire dealer for advice.

. Store the flat tire repair kit safely

and secure it in the trunk. Storing

it anywhere in the passenger

compartment is not advisable

because it could strike an occu-

pant in the event of a sudden stop

or collision and cause injury.

. Use the flat tire repair kit with

original vehicle tires only.

. Do not keep the air compressor

operating for more than 10 min-

utes, otherwise there is a risk of

overheating.

. The temperature of the air com-

pressor may become high. Be

careful not to burn yourself.

. When raining, take measures to

prevent the air compressor from

being exposed directly to the

rain. Exposing to rain may cause

a malfunction.

. Do not use air compressors other

than the one in the repair kit.

Using an air compressor other

than the one in the repair kit may

damage the tires.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

air compressor to enable the use

of a power supply or a battery

other than DC12 V.

. If a temporary puncture repair is

performed with the repair kit, the

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) may not operate nor-

mally.

Flat Tires

386

(389,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Location of the flat tire repair kit

s09ac0305

Flat tire repair kit

The flat tire repair kit is stored in the portion

shown in the illustration.

! Contents of the flat tire repair kit

s09ac0304

1) Sealant bottle

2) Quick reference guide

3) Air compressor

4) Speed limit label

The above repair kits are packed in a

plastic bag. Return them to the plastic bag

after use.

Air compressor (front side)

1) Air gauge

2) Power plug

Air compressor (rear side)

1) Hose

2) Compressor switch

– CONTINUED –

Flat Tires

387

In Case of Emergency

(390,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Sealant bottle

1) Hose

2) Valve

WARNING

. Do not drink the sealant. If the

sealant is accidentally swal-

lowed, seek medical attention

immediately.

. If the sealant splashes onto your

skin or eyes, wash it away im-

mediately with plenty of water. If

necessary, seek medical atten-

tion immediately.

. Keep the flat tire repair kit out of

the reach of children.

. If a person who is allergic to

natural rubber comes in contact

the sealant, allergy symptoms

may occur.

1) Expiration date

CAUTION

Replace the sealant bottle with a

new one before the expiration date

passes.

! How to seal the flat tire

s09ac0302

To seal the flat tire, perform the following

steps.

. First, pump in the sealant and air. Drive

the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes

or 3 miles (5 km) so that the sealant can

seal the damaged area.

. Stop the vehicle again, check and, if

necessary, adjust the pressure of the

damaged tire.

. After that, you can continue to drive

carefully no faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)

and within the maximum distance of 125

miles (200 km).

Inform all other users of the vehicle that the

tire has been temporarily sealed with the

flat tire repair kit and make them aware of

the special driving conditions to be ob-

served.

1. Shake the sealant bottle well. Loosen

the hose.

Flat Tires

388

(391,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) Valve

2. Connect the air compressor hose to

the valve on the bottle.

CAUTION

. Make sure that the air compres-

sor switch is OFF.

. The sealant may leak if the fitting

is not tight enough.

Connect the hose from the bottle to the tire

valve stem tightly.

CAUTION

The sealant may leak if the fitting is

not tight enough.

3. Turn the bottle upside down and tilt the

bottle cap into the bottle holder of the air

compressor. Make sure that the air com-

pressor switch is OFF.

– CONTINUED –

Flat Tires

389

In Case of Emergency

(392,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

4. Connect the power plug of the air

compressor into the accessory power

outlet.

Apply the parking brake and turn on the

ignition switch to the “ACC” position. Turn

the air compressor switch on and adjust

the air pressure to the appropriate level

(green zone of the air gauge).

CAUTION

. Do not run the air compressor for

more than 10 minutes as it can

get hot. Be careful not to get

burned.

. If tire pressure doesn’t reach the

green zone for 10 minutes, this kit

will be unable to seal the tire.

Please contact your SUBARU

dealer for help.

NOTE

. After the compressor starts to oper-

ate, the air pressure will temporarily

rise to 45 psi (300 kPa, 3.0 kgf/cm

) or

higher. After about 30 seconds when all

of the sealant is inside the tire, the air

pressure will lower, representing the air

pressure in the tire.

. In extremely low temperatures −228F

to −48F (−308C to −208C), the viscosity

of the sealant increases and the sealant

will flow more slowly. In such tempera-

tures, bring the sealant into the vehicle

to warm it up before use.

. When mending the tire, if the air

pressure gauge is hard to read, turn the

compressor switch off once to get an

accurate reading.

5. While filling the tire with air, attach the

Flat Tires

390

(393,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

speed limit label on the position shown in

the illustration.

WARNING

Do not attach the speed limit label in

a position where the label hides the

warning lamp or on the steering

wheel. It may interfere with the

normal operation of the airbag and

lead to a critical failure.

6. Turn the air compressor power switch

off when the air pressure reaches the

green zone of the air gauge.

Remove the power plug from the acces-

sory power socket.

Remove the hose after filling the tire with

air and fasten the valve cap.

Connect the hose of the bottle to the valve

of the bottle in a circular fashion to avoid

leakage of the remaining sealant.

CAUTION

The sealant may stain clothing.

7. Stow the kit back in the vehicle and

drive your vehicle immediately for 10

minutes or 3 miles (5 km).

WARNING

. Drive carefully. Do not exceed 50

mph (80 km/h). Driving faster

than that can result in the vehicle

shaking.

. Do not use tire chains on a sealed

tire.

. Do not tow a trailer.

. If heavy vibrations, unsteady

steering behavior or noises oc-

– CONTINUED –

Flat Tires

391

In Case of Emergency

(394,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

cur while driving, reduce your

speed and drive with caution to

a location where it is safe for you

to stop the vehicle. Recheck the

tire and its pressure. If the tire

pressure is in the red zone of the

air gauge or if there are any

cracks, bumps or similar tire

damage visible, temporary re-

pairs cannot be performed with

the repair kit. We recommend that

you consult with your SUBARU

dealer or road service provider.

8. After driving for 10 minutes or 3 miles

(5 km), whichever comes first, stop the

vehicle in a safe place to recheck the air

pressure (see step 4).

If necessary, fill the tire with air to the

appropriate air pressure again and drive

carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer

for tire, valve stem and sealant bottle

replacement.

NOTE

Connect the air compressor only to the

tire valve.

CAUTION

. If the air pressure is in red zone of

the air gauge, the kit did not

successfully seal the puncture.

In this case, please stop driving

and contact your SUBARU dealer

for help.

. Do not drive your vehicle with the

sealed tire for more than 125

miles (200 km). Failure to replace

the valve stem may result in air

leakage at the valve stem.

Before the tire is removed from the rim,

inform your SUBARU dealer or other tire

dealer that the tire contains sealant.

CAUTION

The sealant bottle and speed limit

label need to be replaced after using

the flat tire repair kit.

NOTE

New sealant and replacement parts can

be purchased from your authorized

repair shop or SUBARU dealer, and

they should also be installed into the kit

by a specialist. Empty sealant bottles

and replacement parts must be re-

turned to your SUBARU dealer or

disposed of in compliance with local

waste disposal regulations.

! Technical data of air compressor

s09ac0303

Line voltage DC 12 V

Operating voltage DC 10 – 15 V

Amperage

Max. 10 A

Flat Tires

392

(395,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec.

Models)

s09ac02

Low tire pressure warning light

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with the warning message

indicated by sending a signal from a

sensor that is installed in each wheel when

tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven.

Also, this system may not react immedi-

ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused by running

over a sharp object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and ser-

ious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe place.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the vehicle placard

on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat

Tires” �P381.

. When a wheel rim is replaced

without the original pressure

sensor/transmitter being trans-

ferred, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate steadily

after blinking for approximately

one minute. This indicates the

TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not

operate properly. If a liquid sea-

lant is used, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer or other qualified

service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire

pressure warning valve and

transmitter when replacing the

tire. You may reuse the wheel if

there is no damage to it and if the

sealant residue is properly

cleaned off.

If the light illuminates steadily

after blinking for approximately

one minute, promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the sys-

tem inspected.

– CONTINUED –

Flat Tires

393

In Case of Emergency

(396,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec.

Models)

s09ac05

This screen displays each tire pressure.

Refer to “Basic Screens” �P181.

9-5. Jump Starting

s09ad

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the

vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thor-

oughly flush the exposed area

with water immediately. Get med-

ical help if the fluid has entered

your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and obtain immediate medical

help.

Keep everyone including chil-

dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a battery

explodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst

or explode.

. Whenever working on or around a

battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors, and remove metal

objects such as rings, bands or

other metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not have

loose or missing insulation.

. Do not jump start unless cables in

suitable condition are available.

. A running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away

from the cooling fan, belts and

any other moving engine parts.

Removing rings, watches and

ties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it is

done incorrectly. If you are un-

sure about the proper procedure

for jump starting, consult a com-

petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

Jump Starting

394

(397,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& How to Jump Start

s09ad01

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

– CONTINUED –

Jump Starting

395

In Case of Emergency

(398,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

A) Booster battery

B) Strut mounting nut

1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive

(+) terminal on the discharged battery.

2) Connect the other end of the jumper

cable to the positive (+) terminal of the

booster battery.

3) Connect one end of the other cable to the

negative (−) terminal of the booster

battery.

4) Connect the other end of the cable to the

strut mounting nut.

Make sure that the cables are not near any

moving parts and that the cable clamps are

not in contact with any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle

that has the discharged battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

Jump Starting

396

(399,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

9-6. Engine Overheating

s09ae

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap until

the engine has been shut off and has

fully cooled down. When the engine

is hot, the coolant is under pressure.

Removing the cap while the engine

is still hot could release a spray of

boiling hot coolant, which could

burn you very seriously.

CAUTION

If the engine overheats, the engine

speed or the vehicle speed may be

reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe

place immediately.

& If Steam Is Coming from the

Engine Compartment

s09ae01

Turn off the engine and get everyone away

from the vehicle until it cools down.

& If No Steam Is Coming from

the Engine Compartment

s09ae02

NOTE

For details about how to check the

coolant level or how to add coolant,

refer to “Engine Coolant” �P429.

1. Keep the engine running at idling

speed.

2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine

compartment. Refer to “Engine Hood”

�P423.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If

the fan is not turning, immediately turn off

the engine and contact your authorized

dealer for repair.

3. After the engine coolant temperature

has dropped, turn off the engine.

If the temperature gauge stays in the

overheated zone, turn off the engine.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve tank.

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”

mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then

remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator

with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

Engine Overheating

397

In Case of Emergency

(400,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

9-7. Towing

s09af

WARNING

Never tow AWD vehicles (both CVT

and MT models) with the front

wheels raised off the ground while

the rear wheels are on the ground, or

with the rear wheels raised off the

ground while the front wheels are on

the ground. This will cause the

vehicle to spin away due to the

operation or deterioration of the

center differential.

If towing is necessary, SUBARU recom-

mends it be done by your SUBARU dealer

or a commercial towing service.

& Towing Hook and Tie-Down

Hooks/Holes

s09af01

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency.

SUBARU recommends towing be done

by your SUBARU dealer or a commer-

cial towing service.

CAUTION

. Use only the specified towing

hook and tie-down hooks/holes.

Never use suspension parts or

other parts of the body for towing

or tie-down purposes.

. Never use the tie-down hole clo-

sest to the muffler under the

vehicle for towing purposes.

Front towing hook:

1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook

and jack handle from the under-floor

storage compartment.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head

screwdriver into the cutout of the cover and

pry open the cover.

3. Screw the towing hook into the

Towing

398

(401,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

threaded hole until the threads can no

longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

the jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor

storage compartment.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook for

purposes other than towing your

vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system in a frontal collision.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bum-

per and the towing hook, do not

apply an excessive load to the tow-

ing hook.

Rear towing hook:

1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook

and jack handle from the under-floor

storage compartment.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head

screwdriver into the cutout of the cover and

pry open the cover.

3. Screw the towing hook into the

threaded hole until its thread can no longer

be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

the jack handle.

– CONTINUED –

Towing

399

In Case of Emergency

(402,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor

storage compartment.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook for

purposes other than towing your

vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the fuel pump

shut off function when the vehi-

cle is struck from behind.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bum-

per and the towing hook, do not

apply an excessive load to the tow-

ing hook.

Front tie-down hooks:

The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the

front bumper.

Front tie-down hooks are for tying down

the vehicle. They are not for towing.

Rear tie-down holes:

1) Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.

There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.

To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the

Towing

400

(403,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes,

return the plugs to their original places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only for

downward anchoring. If they are

used to anchor the vehicle in any

other direction, cables may slip out

of the holes, possibly causing a

dangerous situation.

& Using a Flat-Bed Truck

s09af02

This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to

ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position for CVT models. Shift the shift

lever to the “1st” position for MT models.

2. Apply the parking brake firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each safety

chain should be equally tightened and care

must be taken not to pull the chains so

tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION

Transport by flat-bed truck may

cause the headlights to become

misaligned. In such a case, have

the headlight alignment checked by

a SUBARU dealer after transporting

the vehicle by flat-bed truck.

& Towing with All Wheels on the

Ground

s09af03

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while

the vehicle is being towed be-

cause the steering wheel and the

direction of the wheels will be

locked.

. Remember that the brake booster

and power steering do not func-

tion when the engine is not run-

ning. Because the engine is

turned off, it will take greater

effort to operate the brake pedal

and steering wheel.

CAUTION

. If transmission failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

. Sometime damaged vehicles can-

not be towed because of their

damaged condition. In that case,

use a flat-bed truck for transpor-

tation.

. For CVT models, the traveling

speed must be limited to less

than 20 mph (32 km/h) and the

traveling distance to less than 31

miles (50 km). For greater speeds

– CONTINUED –

Towing

401

In Case of Emergency

(404,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

and distances, transport your

vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

. Use a flat-bed truck if there are

long distance downgrades or

steep slopes. However, do not

apply the brake pedal for a long

time because the engine braking

will not work while towing. Doing

so could overheat the brake.

. Drive carefully and do not make

an impact on the towing rope by

suddenly starting.

. Use a specific towing rope for

towing. If wire ropes and metal

chains are needed to be used for

towing, wrap the contact portion

of the bumper with cloth to pro-

tect it from damage.

1. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in neutral.

2. The ignition switch should be in the

“ON” position while the vehicle is being

towed.

3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

9-8. Electronic Parking Brake

– If the Electronic Parking

Brake Cannot Be Released

(CVT Models)

s09an

Contact your SUBARU dealer and have

your SUBARU dealer release the electro-

nic parking brake.

9-9. Access Key Fob – If Ac-

cess Key Fob Does Not Op-

erate Properly

s09ap

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magnetic

sources and signal transmitters

away from the area between the

access key fob and the push-button

ignition switch. They may interfere

with the communication between

the access key fob and the push-

button ignition switch.

The following functions may be inoperable

because of strong radio signals in the

surrounding area or a low battery condition

of the access key fob.

. Locking/unlocking all the doors (includ-

ing the trunk lid)

. Switching the power status

. Starting the engine

In such cases, perform the following

procedure. When the battery of the access

key fob is discharged, replace it with a new

one. Refer to “Replacing Battery of Access

Key Fob” �P458.

Electronic Parking Brake – If the Electronic Parking Brake Cannot Be Released (CVT Models)

402

(405,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Locking and Unlocking

s09ap01

1) Release button

2) Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the

access key fob, take out the emergency

key.

Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the

emergency key in the procedure described

in “Locking and Unlocking from the Out-

side” �P123.

NOTE

After locking or unlocking, be sure to

attach the emergency key back to the

access key fob.

& Switching Power Status

s09ap02

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the shift lever to neutral (MT

models) or the select lever into the “P”

position (CVT models).

3. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models)

or brake pedal (CVT models).

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the push-

button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is com-

pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the

same time, the status of the push-button

ignition switch changes to either of the

following.

. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated:

“ACC”

. Under other conditions: “ON”

5. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated, press

the push-button ignition switch with the

brake pedal (all models) and the clutch

pedal (MT models) released. The status of

the push-button ignition switch then

changes to “ON”.

NOTE

If the power does not switch even

though the above procedure was fol-

lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

& Starting Engine

s09ap03

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the shift lever to neutral (MT

models) or the select lever into the “P”

position (CVT models).

3. Depress the brake pedal (all models).

4. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models).

– CONTINUED –

Access Key Fob – If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly

403

In Case of Emergency

(406,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

5. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the push-

button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is com-

pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the

same time, the push-button ignition switch

turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position.

6. After the push-button ignition switch

turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while

depressing the brake pedal (all models)

and the clutch pedal (MT models), press

the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

If the engine does not start even though

the above procedure was followed

precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

9-10. Malfunctions of the

Center Information Display

s09av

If the following screens are displayed,

temporary errors or malfunctions may

occur in the center information display.

If they are only temporary errors, the

following procedure may help to eliminate

them.

Shutting down the screen

Freezing the screen

Blacking out the screen

Malfunctions of the Center Information Display

404

(407,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Error A

Error B

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Turn the ignition switch once to the

“LOCK/OFF” position, then start the en-

gine.

1) Volume button (dual 7.0-inch display

models)

1) Volume button (11.6-inch display models)

3. If the center information display cannot

be recovered even though the engine has

been restarted, press and hold the volume

button for more than 10 seconds. The

center information display will start up

again.

4. If the center information display is not

recovered by restarting it, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

Malfunctions of the Center Information Display

405

In Case of Emergency

(408,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

9-11. Moonroof (If Equipped)

– If the Moonroof Does Not

s09aj

If the moonroof does not close, we

recommend that you have the system

checked by a SUBARU dealer.

9-12. If Your Vehicle Is In-

volved in an Accident

s09ar

& To Restart the Engine When

Involved in an Accident

s09ar02

CAUTION

If your vehicle is involved in an

accident, be sure to inspect the

ground under the vehicle before

restarting the engine. If you find that

fuel has leaked on the ground, do

not try to restart the engine. The fuel

system has been damaged and is in

need of repair. Immediately contact

the nearest automotive service facil-

ity. We recommend that you consult

your SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off

system. When the vehicle sustains an

impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump

shut off system stops supplying the fuel in

order to minimize fuel leakage. However,

depending on the impact conditions at the

time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off

system may not operate.

Perform the following procedures to restart

the engine after the system is activated.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

or “ACC” position.

2. Restart the engine.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ACC” or “OFF” position.

2. Restart the engine.

& Automatic Door Locking/Un-

locking Operation When In-

volved in an Accident

s09ar03

When the automatic door locking/unlock-

ing function is ON, all the doors will be

locked automatically while driving. For

further details, refer to “Automatic Door

Locking/Unlocking” �P125.

When the vehicle sustains a strong impact

which may trigger the airbags to deploy,

the door locks may be unlocked automa-

tically to enable emergency escape. Gen-

erally, an impact sustained from a rear end

collision does not trigger the airbags to

deploy. However if the impact is strong

enough to deploy the airbags, it can also

trigger the unlocking function.

Under such circumstance, the automatic

door locking/unlocking function will be

Moonroof – If the Moonroof Does Not Close

406

(409,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

suspended and the doors will remain

unlocked.

Confirm the safety of the surroundings first

and carry out the following to retrieve the

automatic door locking/unlocking function.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “OFF” position.

2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ON” position.

NOTE

Depending on the severity of the im-

pact, the emergency unlocking may not

function.

CAUTION

If the following occur, there may be a

malfunction in the system.

Have the system inspected by a

SUBARU dealer.

. The doors unlock automatically

while driving.

. With all doors shut, the doors

unlock when pressing the lock

side of the power door locking

switch.

. The automatic door locking/un-

locking function does not oper-

ate.

If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident

407

In Case of Emergency

(410,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(411,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s10

10-1. Exterior Care ................................................. 410

Washing ............................................................. 410

Waxing and Polishing ......................................... 411

Cleaning Alloy Wheels ........................................ 411

10-2. Corrosion Protection .................................... 412

Most Common Causes of Corrosion.................... 412

To Help Prevent Corrosion.................................. 412

10-3. Cleaning the Interior .....................................413

Seat Fabric Material ........................................... 413

Leather Seat Materials........................................ 413

Synthetic Leather Upholstery ............................. 414

Instrument Panel, Console Panel, Switches,

Combination Meter, and Other Plastic

Surface ............................................................ 414

Center Information Display ................................. 414

Appearance Care

(412,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

10-1. Exterior Care

s10aa

& Washing

s10aa01

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes, drive

the vehicle at a safe speed while

lightly pressing the brake pedal

to heat up the brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and areas adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air intake

or electrical parts, it will cause

engine trouble or a malfunction

of the power steering.

. When washing inner fenders, un-

derbody, bumpers and protrud-

ing objects such as exhaust

pipes and exhaust finishers, be

careful to prevent injuries from

contacting sharp ends.

. Do not use any organic solvents

when washing the surface of the

bulb assembly cover. However, if

a detergent with organic solvents

is used to wash the cover sur-

face, completely rinse off the

detergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be da-

maged.

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in an

automatic car wash, make sure before-

hand that the car wash is of suitable

type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the

vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the

vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-

light.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,

and bird droppings should be washed off

by using a light detergent, as required. If

you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

strong soap or chemical detergents. All

cleaning agents should be promptly

flushed from the surface and not allowed

to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly

with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the

remaining water off with a chamois or soft

cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand

brush when washing down underbody,

inner fenders and suspension to effec-

tively remove mud and dirt off.

! Washing the underbody

s10aa0101

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for

deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-

rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-

derbody components, such as the exhaust

system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,

floor pan and fenders, and suspension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside

of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water

at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful

effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy

roads, wash the mud and sand off the

underbody.

Carefully flush the suspension and axle

parts, as they are particularly prone to mud

and sand buildup. Do not use a sharp-

edged tool to remove caked mud.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to damage brake

hoses, sensor harnesses, and

other parts when washing sus-

pension components.

. Be careful not to flush the engine

bottom for a long time. It may

Exterior Care

410

(413,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

cause damage of some electrical

parts.

! Using a warm water washer

s10aa0102

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle and

the vehicle.

. Do not wash the same area continu-

ously.

. If a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers are of

the high temperature, high pressure type,

and they can damage or deform the resin

parts such as mouldings, or cause water to

leak into the vehicle.

& Waxing and Polishing

s10aa02

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and

apply them according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when

the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the

surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-

face with a fine-grained compound. Never

polish just the affected area, but include

the surrounding area as well. Always

polish in only one direction. A No. 2000

grain compound is recommended. Never

use a coarse-grained compound. Coarser

grained compounds have a smaller grain-

size number and could damage the paint.

After polishing with a compound, coat with

wax to restore the original luster. Frequent

polishing with a compound or an incorrect

polishing technique will result in removing

the paint layer and exposing the under-

coat. When in doubt, it is always best to

contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto

paint specialist.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organic

solvents on the surface of the bulb

assembly cover. However, if a polish

or wax with organic solvents is

applied to the cover surface, com-

pletely wipe off the polish or wax.

Otherwise, the cover surface may be

damaged.

NOTE

Be careful not to block the windshield

washer nozzles with wax when waxing

the vehicle.

& Cleaning Alloy Wheels

s10aa04

! Vehicles without matte painted

wheels

s10aa0403

. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of

any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on

too long, it may be difficult to clean off.

. Do not use soap containing grit to clean

the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral

cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly

with water. Do not clean the wheels with a

stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed

washing device.

. Clean the vehicle (including the alloy

wheels) with water as soon as possible

when it has been splashed with sea water,

exposed to sea breezes, or driven on

roads treated with salt or other agents.

– CONTINUED –

Exterior Care

411

Appearance Care

(414,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Vehicles with matte painted wheels

s10aa0404

CAUTION

Be sure to observe the following

precautions as matte painted

wheels can be damaged.

. Do not scrub or polish the wheels

using a brush or dry cloth.

. Do not use any wheel coatings or

abrasive detergents.

As matte painted wheels require different

cleaning methods than conventional alloy

wheels, be sure to observe the following.

For details, consult your SUBARU dealer.

. Remove dirt using water. If the wheels

are excessively dirty, use a sponge or soft

cloth dampened with a diluted neutral

detergent to remove the dirt.

10-2. Corrosion Protection

s10ab

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

& Most Common Causes of

Corrosion

s10ab01

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

. The accumulation of moisture retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone chips

or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

. It is exposed to road salt or dust control

chemicals, or used in coastal areas where

there is more salt in the air, or in areas

where there is considerable industrial

pollution.

. It is driven in areas of high humidity,

especially when temperatures range just

above freezing.

. Dampness in certain parts of the

vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may be

dry.

. High temperatures will cause corrosion

to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry

quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

& To Help Prevent Corrosion

s10ab02

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent

corrosion of the body and suspension

components. Also, wash the vehicle

promptly after driving on any of the

following surfaces.

. Roads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

. Mud, sand, or gravel

. Coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

Corrosion Protection

412

(415,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion. Oc-

casionally check under the mats to make

sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar-

age. In such a garage, corrosion can be

caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into

the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood

latch should be inspected and lubricated

periodically.

10-3. Cleaning the Interior

s10ac

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use

organic solvents.)

& Seat Fabric Material

s10ac01

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung

cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If

the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution

of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry

thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a

commercially available fabric cleaner.

Use the cleaner on a hidden place and

make sure it does not affect the fabric

adversely. Use the cleaner according to its

instructions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials. Doing so could damage

the surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Leather Seat Materials

s10ac02

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause leather to become

brittle and wear prematurely. To maintain

its resiliency, leather should be cleaned

monthly or whenever it becomes soiled.

Before cleaning leather upholstery, va-

cuum it to remove dust. Use a soft and

lint-free cloth dampened with lukewarm

water and mild soap, taking care not to

soak the leather or allow water to pene-

trate the stitched seams. Use a gentle

circular motion while cleaning the leather -

do not rub or apply extreme pressure.

Wipe the leather again with another clean,

slightly damp cloth to remove soap residue

and dry with a soft cloth.

Minor surface blemishes or difficult dirt

spots may be treated with a commercial

leather spray. Never use alcohol, cleaning

solvents, leather oils, varnishes or

polishes on your leather as it will dry out

the leather finish.

– CONTINUED –

Cleaning the Interior

413

Appearance Care

(416,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and headrests be covered,

or the windows shaded, to prevent fading

or shrinkage.

You will discover that each leather seat

section will develop soft folds or wrinkles,

which is characteristic of genuine leather.

& Synthetic Leather Upholstery

s10ac03

The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when

necessary.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such as

solvents, paint thinners, window

cleaner or gasoline must never be

used on leather or synthetic interior

materials. Doing so could damage

the surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Instrument Panel, Console

Panel, Switches, Combina-

tion Meter, and Other Plastic

Surface

s10ac04

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the

instrument panel, center console, combi-

nation meter panel, and switches.

CAUTION

. Do not use organic solvents such

as paint thinners or gasoline, or

strong cleaning agents that con-

tain those solvents. Doing so

could damage the surface and

cause the color to deteriorate.

. Do not use chemical solvents that

contain silicone on the vehicle

audio system, electrical compo-

nents of the air-conditioner or

any switches. If silicone adheres

to these parts, it may cause

damage to electrical compo-

nents.

& Center Information Display

s10ac11

To clean the center information display,

wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft

cloth. If the display(s) is/are extremely

dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened

with neutral detergent then carefully wipe

off any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

. Do not spray neutral detergent

directly onto the display(s).

Doing so could damage the moni-

tor’s components.

. Do not wipe the display(s) with a

hard cloth. Doing so could

scratch the monitor.

. Do not use cleaning fluid that

contains thinner, gasoline, or

any other volatile substance.

Such cleaning fluid could erase

the lettering on the switches on

the display(s).

Cleaning the Interior

414

(417,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(418,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(419,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s11

11-1. Maintenance Schedule ................................. 419

11-2. Maintenance Precautions ............................. 419

Before Checking or Servicing in the Engine

Compartment....................................................420

When Checking or Servicing in the Engine

Compartment....................................................421

When Checking or Servicing in the Engine

Compartment While the Engine Is Running ....... 421

11-3. Maintenance Tips.......................................... 421

Removing and Reinstalling Clips ........................ 421

11-4. Engine Hood.................................................. 423

11-5. Engine Compartment Overview ................... 425

11-6. Engine Oil ...................................................... 426

Engine Oil Consumption .....................................426

Checking the Oil Level........................................426

Changing the Oil and Oil Filter............................ 427

Recommended Grade and Viscosity.................... 427

Synthetic Oil.......................................................428

11-7. Cooling System............................................. 428

Cooling Fan, Hose and Connections ...................428

Engine Coolant................................................... 429

11-8. Air Cleaner Element...................................... 430

Replacing the Air Cleaner Element......................430

11-9. Spark Plugs ................................................... 431

Recommended Spark Plugs ................................ 431

11-10. Drive Belts ................................................... 431

11-11. Manual Transmission Oil ............................ 431

Recommended Grade and Viscosity.................... 431

11-12. Continuously Variable Transmission

Fluid ...............................................................432

11-13. Front Differential Gear Oil (CVT Models)

and Rear Differential Gear Oil......................432

Recommended Grade and Viscosity ................... 432

11-14. Brake Fluid ...................................................432

Checking the Fluid Level .................................... 432

Recommended Brake Fluid................................. 433

11-15. Clutch Fluid (MT Models)............................434

Checking the Fluid Level .................................... 434

Recommended Clutch Fluid ............................... 434

11-16. Vacuum Brake Booster (Models with

the Vacuum Brake Booster) .........................435

11-17. Brake Pedal ..................................................435

11-18. Clutch Pedal (MT Models)...........................435

11-19. Hill Start Assist System ..............................436

11-20. Replacement of Brake Pad and Lining ......436

Breaking-In of New Brake Pads (CVT Models)..... 436

Breaking-In of New Brake Pads and Linings

(MT Models) ..................................................... 437

11-21. Parking Brake Stroke (MT Models) ............437

11-22. Tires and Wheels .........................................438

Types of Tires .................................................... 438

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 438

Tire Inspection ................................................... 440

Tire Pressures and Wear .................................... 440

Wheel Balance ................................................... 442

Wear Indicators .................................................. 443

Maintenance and Service

(420,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Rotational Direction of Tires ............................... 443

Tire Rotation.......................................................444

Tire Replacement................................................ 444

Wheel Replacement ............................................ 445

11-23. Alloy Wheels ............................................... 446

11-24. Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 446

11-25. Replacement of Wiper Blades.................... 447

Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly...................... 448

Window Wiper Blade Rubber ..............................449

11-26. Battery ......................................................... 450

11-27. Fuses ........................................................... 451

11-28. Installation of Accessories......................... 452

11-29. Replacing Bulbs ..........................................452

Headlights ......................................................... 453

Rear Combination Lights.................................... 453

License Plate Lights........................................... 455

Dome Light ........................................................ 455

Map Lights......................................................... 456

Vanity Mirror Light (If Equipped)......................... 456

Trunk Light ........................................................ 456

Other Bulbs ....................................................... 456

Adjusting Headlight Aim..................................... 456

11-30. Replacing Battery ........................................457

Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob................. 458

Replacing Battery of Transmitter ........................ 459

Maintenance and Service

(421,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11-1. Maintenance Schedule

s11aa

U.S. models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”. For details, read the

separate “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

Canada models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Service

Booklet”. For details, read the separate

“Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Except for U.S. and Canada models

Some items of your vehicle are required to

be serviced at scheduled intervals. For

details about your maintenance schedule,

read the separate “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

11-2. Maintenance Precau-

tions

s11ab

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service by

yourself, you should familiarize yourself

with the information provided in this sec-

tion on general maintenance and service

for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive

vehicle must NEVER be per-

formed on a single two-wheel

dynamometer or similar appara-

tus. Attempting to do so will

result in transmission damage

and in uncontrolled vehicle

movement and may cause an

accident or injuries to persons

nearby.

. Always select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-

cle. Remember that some of the

materials in the vehicle may be

hazardous if improperly used or

handled, for example, battery

acid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

safety stands to support the

vehicle.

. Never keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as

a garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or allow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only

by your SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance Schedule

419

Maintenance and Service

(422,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Wear adequate eye protection to

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes, thoroughly

wash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seat-

belt pretensioner system, or at-

tempt to take its connectors

apart, as that may activate the

system or it can render it inop-

erative. NEVER use a circuit tes-

ter for these wiring. If your SRS

airbag or seatbelt pretensioner

needs service, consult your near-

est SUBARU dealer.

. Check the inside of the engine

compartment to see if there are

any cloths and tools left. If they

are left inside, they may be a

cause of malfunction and fire.

NOTE

SUBARU does not endorse the use of

non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against

performing these services on a

SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-

proved flushing systems use chemi-

cals and/or solvents which have not

been tested or approved by SUBARU.

SUBARU warranties do not cover any

part of the vehicle which is damaged by

adding or applying chemicals and/or

solvents other than those approved or

recommended by SUBARU.

& Before Checking or Servicing

in the Engine Compartment

s11ab01

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and apply

the parking brake to prevent the

vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after the

engine is stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

. When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position, the cooling fan

may operate suddenly even when

the engine is stopped. If your

body or clothes come into con-

tact with a rotating fan, that could

result in serious injury. To avoid

risk of injury, perform the follow-

ing precautions.

– Models with push-button start

system:

Always turn the push-button

ignition switch to the “OFF”

position and confirm that the

operation indicator on the

switch is turned off. Then take

the access key fob out from

the vehicle.

– Models without push-button

start system:

Always remove the key from

the ignition switch.

. Before performing any servicing

on a vehicle equipped with a

remote engine start system tem-

porarily place that system in the

service mode to prevent it from

unexpectedly starting the engine.

Maintenance Precautions

420

(423,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& When Checking or Servicing

in the Engine Compartment

s11ab03

CAUTION

. Do not contact the belt cover

while checking the components

in the engine compartment.

Doing so may cause your hand

to slip off the belt cover and

result in an unexpected injury.

. Do not touch the oil filter until the

engine has cooled down comple-

tely. Doing so may result in a burn

or other injury. Note that the oil

filter becomes very hot when the

engine is running and remains

hot for some time after the engine

has stopped.

& When Checking or Servicing

in the Engine Compartment

While the Engine Is Running

s11ab02

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, belts and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,

watches and ties is advisable.

11-3. Maintenance Tips

s11bi

Some clips and fender linings must be

removed before replacing the air cleaner

elements or specific bulbs.

& Removing and Reinstalling

Clips

s11bi01

! Removing clips

s11bi0101

There are several types of clips used for

your vehicle.

! Type A and D clips

s11bi010107

Type A clips

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance Tips

421

Maintenance and Service

(424,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Type D clips

1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver until the center

portion of the clip is raised.

2. Remove the clips with a flat-head

screwdriver using leverage.

! Type B clips

s11bi010102

1. Pull out the center portion of the clip

using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in

the illustration.

2. Pull the protruded center portion to

remove the entire body of the clip.

! Type C clips

s11bi010103

1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a

Phillips screwdriver until the center portion

of the clip is raised.

2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

Maintenance Tips

422

(425,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Reinstalling clips

s11bi0102

Type A clips

Type B clips

Type C clips

Type D clips

Insert the clip without the center portion

first and then push the center portion of the

clip into the hole.

11-4. Engine Hood

s11ac

CAUTION

. Be extremely careful not to catch

fingers or other objects when

closing the engine hood.

. Do not push the hood forcibly to

close it. It could deform the metal.

. Be extremely careful opening the

engine hood when the wind is

strong. The engine hood could

close suddenly, possibly causing

injuries from slamming.

. Do not install accessories other

than genuine SUBARU parts to

the engine hood. If the engine

hood becomes too heavy, the

stay may not be able to support

holding it open.

. Do not jam a plastic bag in or

place cellophane tape on the

engine hood stays or scratch

the stays. That could cause leak-

age of gas from the stays, which

may result in their inability to

hold the engine hood open.

. Do not put your hands on the

engine hood stay or push it

horizontally. Doing so could bend

– CONTINUED –

Engine Hood

423

Maintenance and Service

(426,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

the engine hood stay and the

trunk will not open or close.

. Do not disassemble the engine

hood stays. Also, do not dispose

of them in a fire.

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

position.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front grille

and the hood toward the left.

4. Lift up the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Lower the hood carefully, and then

press down on the front edge of the hood

to close it.

2. After closing the hood, be sure the

hood is securely locked.

WARNING

Always check that the hood is

properly locked before you start

driving. If it is not, it might fly open

while the vehicle is moving and

block your view, which may cause

an accident and serious bodily in-

jury.

Engine Hood

424

(427,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11-5. Engine Compartment Overview

s11ad

1) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir

(MT models) (page 432)

2) Main fuse box (page 451)

3) Battery (page 450)

4) Windshield washer tank (page 446)

5) Engine oil filler cap (page 426)

6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 429)

7) Radiator cap (page 429)

8) Engine oil filter (page 427)

9) Engine oil level gauge (page 426)

10) Air cleaner case (page 430)

Engine Compartment Overview

425

Maintenance and Service

(428,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11-6. Engine Oil

s11ae

CAUTION

. If the level gauge is not pulled out

easily, twist the level gauge right

and left, then pull it out. Other-

wise, you may be injured acci-

dentally straining yourself.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

& Engine Oil Consumption

s11ae07

Some engine oil will be consumed while

driving. The rate of consumption can be

affected by such factors as transmission

type, driving style, terrain and tempera-

ture. Under the following conditions, oil

consumption can be increased and thus

require refilling between maintenance in-

tervals:

. When the engine is new and within the

break-in period

. When the engine oil is of lower quality

. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used

. When engine braking is employed

(repeatedly)

. When the engine is operated at high

engine speeds (for extended periods of

time)

. When the engine is operated under

heavy loads (for extended periods of time)

. When the engine idles for extended

periods of time

. When the vehicle is operated in stop

and go and/or heavy traffic situations

. When the vehicle is used under severe

thermal conditions

. When the vehicle accelerates and

decelerates frequently

Under these or similar conditions, you

should check your oil at least every 2nd

fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more

frequently. Different drivers in the same

car may experience different results. If

your oil consumption rate is greater than

expected, contact your authorized

SUBARU retailer who may perform a test

under controlled conditions.

& Checking the Oil Level

s11ae01

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine. If you check the oil level

just after stopping the engine, wait for at

least 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan before checking the level.

1) Oil level gauge

2) Oil filler cap

3) Oil filter

CAUTION

If the level gauge is not pulled out

easily, twist the level gauge right and

left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you

may be injured accidentally strain-

ing yourself.

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

Engine Oil

426

(429,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

and insert it again.

3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly

inserted until it stops.

1) Full level

2) Low level

3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9

Imp qt) from low level to full level

4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.

5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the

level gauge. The engine oil level must be

judged by the lowest of the two levels. If

the oil level is below the low level mark,

add oil so that the full level is reached.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to touch the engine

oil filter when removing the oil

filler cap. Doing so may result in a

burn, a pinched finger, or may

cause some other injury.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil

filler cap and slowly pour engine oil

through the filler neck. After pouring oil

into the engine, you must use the level

gauge to confirm that the oil level is

correct.

NOTE

. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,

do not add any additional oil above the

full level when the engine is cold.

. After adding or changing the engine

oil, warm up the engine and stop it on a

level surface, then start the engine after

a lapse of 1 minute or more. Confirm

that the warning light has turned off

after the engine has started. Refer to

“Engine Low Oil Level Warning Indica-

tor” �P158.

& Changing the Oil and Oil Filter

s11ae02

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

NOTE

. Changing the engine oil and oil filter

should be performed by a well-trained

expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for changing the engine oil and oil filter.

Fully trained mechanics are on standby

at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the

special tools, spare parts and recom-

mended oil for this work, and also, used

oils are properly disposed of.

. If performing oil replacement your-

self, observe the local regulations and

dispose of waste oil properly.

& Recommended Grade and

Viscosity

s11ae03

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

Refer to “Engine Oil” �P464.

NOTE

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects

fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity

– CONTINUED –

Engine Oil

427

Maintenance and Service

(430,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

provide better fuel economy. However,

in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is

required to properly lubricate the en-

gine.

& Synthetic Oil

s11ae05

You should use synthetic engine oil that

meets the same requirements given for

conventional engine oil. When using syn-

thetic oil, you must use oil of the same

classification, viscosity and grade shown

in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine

Oil” �P464. Also, you must follow the oil

and filter changing intervals shown in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

NOTE

Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity

noted in chapter 12 is the recom-

mended engine oil for optimum engine

performance. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

11-7. Cooling System

s11af

WARNING

. Never remove the radiator cap

until the engine has been shut off

and has cooled down completely.

Since the coolant is under pres-

sure, you may suffer serious

burns from a spray of boiling

hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

. Be careful of the rotating cooling

fan when the engine hood is

open. When the engine tempera-

ture is high, the cooling fan in the

engine compartment may oper-

ate when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position, even if the

engine is stopped. Touching the

cooling fan while it is rotating

may result in injury.

CAUTION

. Vehicles are filled at the factory

with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

that does not require the first

change for 11 years/137,500

miles (11 years/220,000 km). Do

not mix this coolant with any

other brand or type of coolant

during this period. Mixing with a

different coolant will reduce the

life of the coolant. When neces-

sary to top up the coolant for any

reason, use only SUBARU

SUPER COOLANT.

If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is

diluted with another brand or

type, the maintenance interval is

shortened to that of the mixing

coolant.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

& Cooling Fan, Hose and Con-

nections

s11af03

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

Cooling System

428

(431,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) Normal operating range

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be

defective. Refer to “Engine Coolant Tem-

perature Gauge” �P150.

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.

Refer to “Fuses” �P451. If the fuse is not

blown, have the cooling system checked

by your SUBARU dealer.

If the frequent addition of coolant is

necessary between vehicle service visits,

it is recommended that you have your

vehicle inspected by an authorized

SUBARU dealer to check for leaks, da-

mage, or looseness.

& Engine Coolant

s11af02

! Checking the coolant level

s11af0201

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the

“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is

empty, remove the radiator cap and refill

coolant up to just below the filler neck as

shown in the following illustration.

1) Fill up to this level.

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the cap and check that

the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

– CONTINUED –

Cooling System

429

Maintenance and Service

(432,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolant

s11af0202

It may be difficult to change the coolant.

Have the coolant changed by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

11-8. Air Cleaner Element

s11ag

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters in-

take air but also stops flames if the

engine backfires. If the air cleaner

element is not installed when the

engine backfires, you could be

burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment, use a genuine SUBARU air

cleaner element. If it is not used,

there is the possibility of causing a

negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a filter

screen. When the element is perforated or

removed, engine wear will be excessive

and engine life shortened.

The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is

unnecessary to clean or wash the element.

& Replacing the Air Cleaner

Element

s11ag01

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under

extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts. It

may be difficult to replace the air cleaner

element. We recommend that you have

the air cleaner element replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Air Cleaner Element

430

(433,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11-9. Spark Plugs

s11ah

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have the

spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

& Recommended Spark Plugs

s11ah01

Refer to “Electrical System” �P468.

11-10. Drive Belts

s11ai

It is unnecessary to check the deflection of

the drive belt periodically because your

engine is equipped with an automatic belt

tension adjuster. However, replacement of

the belt should be done according to the

maintenance schedule in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for replacement.

If the belt is loose, cracked or worn,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

11-11. Manual Transmission

Oil

s11aj

It is not necessary to check the transmis-

sion oil level. Check that there are no

cracks, damage or leakage. However,

have the oil inspected by your SUBARU

dealer according to the maintenance

schedule in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

& Recommended Grade and

Viscosity

s11aj02

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to

“Manual Transmission, Front Differential

and Rear Differential Gear Oil” �P466.

Spark Plugs

431

Maintenance and Service

(434,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11-12. Continuously Variable

Transmission Fluid

s11ay

There is no fluid level gauge. It is un-

necessary to check the continuously vari-

able transmission fluid level. However, if

necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer

for inspection.

11-13. Front Differential Gear

Oil (CVT Models) and Rear

Differential Gear Oil

s11bl

It is not necessary to check the gear oil

level. Check that there are no cracks,

damage or leakage. However, the oil

inspection should be performed according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult

your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Recommended Grade and

Viscosity

s11bl01

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to

“Manual Transmission, Front Differential

and Rear Differential Gear Oil” �P466.

CAUTION

Using a differential gear oil other

than the specified oil may cause a

decline in vehicle performance.

11-14. Brake Fluid

s11ao

& Checking the Fluid Level

s11ao01

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake

fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-

ately flush them thoroughly with

clean water. For safety, when

performing this work, wearing

eye protection is advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause a dangerous loss

of braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

. When adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid

432

(435,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Alcohol contained in the brake

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

Visually check the brake fluid level of the

reservoir monthly on the even surface.

! CVT models

s11ao0101

1) “MAX” level line

2) “MIN” level line

Be sure to check the brake fluid level from

the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid level

is below “MIN”, top up brake fluid to “MAX”.

Use only brake fluid from a sealed contain-

er.

! MT models

s11ao0102

1) “MAX” level line

2) Check the brake fluid level in this area.

3) “MIN” level line

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. Because this reservoir is used

for both the brake and clutch systems and

has chambers for each system, be sure to

check the fluid level for the brake system at

the front part of the reservoir (shaded

area in the illustration). If the fluid level is

below “MIN”, add the recommended brake

fluid to “MAX”.

Use only brake fluid from a sealed contain-

er.

& Recommended Brake Fluid

s11ao02

Refer to “Fluids” �P467.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brake

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

Brake Fluid

433

Maintenance and Service

(436,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11-15. Clutch Fluid (MT Mod-

els)

s11ap

& Checking the Fluid Level

s11ap01

WARNING

Never let clutch fluid contact your

eyes because clutch fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid

gets in your eyes, immediately flush

them thoroughly with clean water.

For safety, when performing this

work, wearing eye protection is

advisable.

CAUTION

. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause improper clutch

operation.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

. When you add clutch fluid, be

careful not to allow any dirt into

the tank.

. Never splash the clutch fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the clutch

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid

when adding it. If clutch fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

. Check the fluid level for the clutch

system at the inboard side of the

reservoir. You cannot check the

fluid level at the outboard side of

the reservoir.

1) “MAX” level line

2) “MIN” level line

3) Check the clutch fluid level in this area.

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. Because this reservoir is used

for both the brake and clutch systems and

has chambers for each system, be sure to

check the fluid level for the clutch system

at the inboard side of the reservoir

(shaded area in the illustration). If the fluid

level is below “MIN”, add the recom-

mended clutch fluid to “MAX”.

Use only clutch fluid from a sealed contain-

er.

& Recommended Clutch Fluid

s11ap02

Refer to “Fluids” �P467.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of clutch

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

Clutch Fluid (MT Models)

434

(437,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11-16. Vacuum Brake Booster

(Models with the Vacuum

Brake Booster)

s11aq

The brake booster utilizes the vacuum

produced by the engine manifold to reduce

the force required to depress the brake

pedal.

The vacuum in the brake booster may be

insufficient if the brake pedal is depressed

when the engine is stopped or after the

vehicle has been parked for a long period

of time. It such cases, it is necessary to

depress the brake pedal using greater

force than usual.

11-17. Brake Pedal

s11ar

Check the brake pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

11-18. Clutch Pedal (MT Mod-

els)

s11as

Check the clutch pedal free play according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Vacuum Brake Booster (Models with the Vacuum Brake Booster)

435

Maintenance and Service

(438,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11-19. Hill Start Assist Sys-

tem

s11bf

Ensure that the Hill start assist system

operates properly under the following

circumstances.

1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by

depressing the brake pedal (all models)

and clutch pedal (MT models only), with

the engine running.

2. Make sure that the vehicle does not

move backward for several seconds after

the brake pedal is released.

3. Then make sure the vehicle starts

climbing the grade by following the normal

starting procedures.

If the Hill start assist system does not

operate as described above, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

11-20. Replacement of Brake

Pad and Lining

s11at

CAUTION

. If you continue to drive despite

the scraping noise from the audi-

ble brake pad wear indicator, it

will result in the need for costly

brake rotor repair or replace-

ment.

. It is recommended that you dis-

connect the vehicle battery be-

fore replacing the brake pad.

However, it is dangerous to dis-

connect the vehicle battery. We

recommend that you have your

SUBARU dealer replace the brake

pad.

The disc brakes have audible wear in-

dicators on the brake pads. If the brake

pads wear close to their service limit, the

wear indicator makes a very audible

scraping noise when the brake pedal is

applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

& Breaking-In of New Brake

Pads (CVT Models)

s11at02

When replacing the brake pad, use only

genuine SUBARU parts. After replace-

ment, the new parts must be broken in.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

Hill Start Assist System

436

(439,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Breaking-In of New Brake

Pads and Linings (MT Mod-

els)

s11at01

When replacing the brake pad or lining,

use only genuine SUBARU parts. After

replacement, the new parts must be

broken in as follows.

! Brake pad and lining

s11at0101

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph

(50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal

lightly. Repeat this five or more times.

! Parking brake lining

s11at0102

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of approxi-

mately 22 mph (35 km/h).

2. With the parking brake release button

pushed in, pull the parking brake lever

SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a

force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,

15.3 kgf]).

3. Drive the vehicle for approximately 220

yards (200 meters) in this condition.

4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking

brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-

dure.

5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the

parking brake stroke is out of the specified

range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut

located on the parking brake lever.

Parking brake stroke:

7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)

WARNING

A safe location and situation should

be selected for break-in driving.

CAUTION

Pulling the parking brake lever too

forcefully may cause the rear wheels

to lock. To avoid this, be certain to

pull the lever up slowly and gently.

11-21. Parking Brake Stroke

(MT Models)

s11au

Check the parking brake stroke according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Parking Brake Stroke (MT Models)

437

Maintenance and Service

(440,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11-22. Tires and Wheels

s11av

& Types of Tires

s11av01

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

! Summer tires

s11av0102

The factory installed tires on your new

vehicle are summer tires.

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving on

slippery roads such as on snow-covered or

icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

replace all four tires.

! All season tires

s11av0101

All season tires are designed to provide an

adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving including snowy and icy road

conditions. However, all season tires do

not offer as much traction performance as

winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow

or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

! Winter (snow) tires

s11av0103

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However,

winter tires do not perform as well as

summer tires and all season tires on roads

other than snow-covered and icy roads.

NOTE

If the tread wears down below 0.16 in (4

mm) on the snow tires the effectiveness

of snow tires is lost.

! Low profile tires

s11av0104

Generally, low profile tires will wear more

rapidly and tire grip performance will be

reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when

compared to standard tires. Be sure to use

snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or

icy roads and drive carefully at a speed

appropriate for road and weather condi-

tions.

NOTE

Low profile tires may cause greater

damage than usual to the wheel when

receiving impact from the road surface.

Therefore pay attention to the follow-

ing:

. Be sure to use the proper tire infla-

tion pressure. If tires are under-inflated,

they may be damaged more severely.

. Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement,

curbs and other road hazards. Failure

to do so may lead to severe tire and

wheel damage.

& Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec.

Models)

s11av02

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message by

sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-

ing system will activate only when the

vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not

react immediately to a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example, a blow-out caused

by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and will then drive the vehicle in

cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire

pressures may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. To avoid this

problem when adjusting the tire pressures

in a warm garage, inflate the tires to

pressures higher than those shown on

the tire inflation pressure label. Specifi-

cally, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9

kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm

) for every difference of

108F (5.68C) between the temperature in

the garage and the temperature outside.

Tires and Wheels

438

(441,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

By way of example, the following table

shows the required tire pressures that

correspond to various outside tempera-

tures when the temperature in the garage

is 608F (15.68C).

Example:

Tire size: 235/45R17 97W, 245/40R18

97Y

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

Front Rear

308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

108F (−128C) 38 (265, 2.65) 37 (255, 2.55)

−108F (−238C) 41 (280, 2.8)

39 (270, 2.7)

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method described

above. Then, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to

see that the low tire pressure warning light

goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire

pressure warning light does not go off, the

tire pressure monitoring system may not

be functioning normally. In this event, go to

a SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any

increase in the tire pressures caused by an

increase in the outside air temperature or

by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure

warning light to go off.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

in the instrument panel will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately

one minute.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not illuminate briefly after the

ignition switch is turned on or the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

ing for approximately one minute,

you should have your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead, per-

form the following procedure. Other-

wise an accident involving serious

vehicle damage and serious perso-

nal injury could occur.

1) Keep driving straight ahead while

gradually reducing speed.

2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, refer to “Flat Tires” �P381.

When a wheel rim is replaced with-

out the original pressure sensor/

transmitter being transferred, the

low tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking for

approximately one minute. This in-

dicates the TPMS is unable to moni-

tor all four road wheels. Contact

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting. If the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

– CONTINUED –

Tires and Wheels

439

Maintenance and Service

(442,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

ing for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

! TPMS valve self-registration

s11av0201

When the wheels are replaced (such as

when installing snow tires) or when a new

TPMS valve is mounted on a new installed

wheel, you will need to perform TPMS

valve self-registration. Refer to the follow-

ing procedure to perform TPMS valve self-

registration.

1. Install the wheels with TPMS valves on

the vehicle.

2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified

value. For information about the specified

value of the tire pressure, refer to “Tires”

�P468.

3. Drive at speeds above 25 mph (40

km/h) for at least 4 miles (6 km) or until the

low tire pressure warning light turns off.

NOTE

. When installing TPMS valves, use

only genuine SUBARU parts.

. Registration of TPMS valves can

also be done at a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer.

& Tire Inspection

s11av03

Check on a daily basis that the tires

are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer im-

mediately if you find any problem.

NOTE

. When the wheels and tires

strike curbs or are subjected to

harsh treatment as when the

vehicle is driven on a rough

surface, they can suffer damage

that cannot be seen with the

naked eye. This type of damage

does not become evident until

time has passed. Try not to drive

over curbs, potholes or on other

rough surfaces. If doing so is

unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s

speed down to a walking pace or

less, and approach the curbs as

squarely as possible. Also, make

sure the tires are not pressed

against the curb when you park

the vehicle.

. If you feel unusual vibration

while driving or find it difficult to

steer the vehicle in a straight line,

one of the tires and/or wheels

may be damaged. Drive slowly to

the nearest authorized SUBARU

dealer and have the vehicle in-

spected.

& Tire Pressures and Wear

s11av04

Maintaining the correct tire pres-

sures helps to maximize the tires’

service lives and is essential for

good running performance. Check

and, if necessary, adjust the pres-

sure of each tire and the spare (if

equipped) at least once a month

and before any long journey.

Tires and Wheels

440

(443,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Tire inflation pressure label

Check the tire pressures when the

tires are cold. Use a pressure

gauge to adjust the tire pressures

to the values shown on the tire

inflation pressure label. The tire

inflation pressure label is located

on the door pillar on the driver’s

side.

Driving even a short distance

warms up the tires and increases

the tire pressures. Also, the tire

pressures are affected by the out-

side temperature. It is best to check

tire pressure outdoors before driv-

ing the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air

inside it expands, causing the tire

pressure to increase. Be careful not

to mistakenly release air from a

warm tire to reduce its pressure.

NOTE

. The air pressure in a tire

increases by approximately 4.3

psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm

) when the

tire becomes warm.

. The tires are considered cold

when the vehicle has been

parked for at least 3 hours or

has been driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires

to adjust pressure. Doing so

will result in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from

controllability and ride comfort, and

they cause the tires to wear abnor-

mally.

. Correctly inflated tires (tread

worn evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering

is responsive. Rolling resistance is

low, so fuel consumption is also

lower.

– CONTINUED –

Tires and Wheels

441

Maintenance and Service

(444,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Under inflated tires (tread worn at

shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel

consumption is also higher.

. Over inflated tires (tread worn in

center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire

magnifies the effects of road sur-

face bumps and dips, possibly

resulting in vehicle damage.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with

excessively low tire pressures

can cause the tires to deform

severely and to rapidly be-

come hot. A sharp increase in

temperature could cause tread

separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to

an accident.

& Wheel Balance

s11av05

Each wheel was correctly balanced

when your vehicle was new, but the

wheels will become unbalanced as

the tires become worn during use.

Wheel imbalance causes the steer-

ing wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts

from the vehicle’s straight-line sta-

bility. It can also cause steering and

suspension system problems and

abnormal tire wear. If you suspect

that the wheels are not correctly

balanced, have them checked and

adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.

Also have them adjusted after tire

repairs and after tire rotation.

CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel align-

ment causes the tires to wear

on one side and reduces the

vehicle’s running stability.

Tires and Wheels

442

(445,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Contact your SUBARU dealer

if you notice abnormal tire

wear.

NOTE

The suspension system is de-

signed to hold each wheel at a

certain alignment (relative to the

other wheels and to the road) for

optimum straight-line stability

and cornering performance.

& Wear Indicators

s11av06

1) New tread

2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear

indicator, which becomes visible

when the depth of the tread grooves

decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A

tire must be replaced when the

tread wear indicator appears as a

solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indi-

cator becomes visible, the tire

is worn beyond the acceptable

limit and must be replaced

immediately. With a tire in this

condition, driving at high

speeds in wet weather can

cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. The resulting loss of

vehicle control can lead to an

accident

NOTE

For safety, inspect the tire tread

regularly and replace the tires

before their tread wear indicators

become visible.

& Rotational Direction of Tires

s11av11

Example of rotational direction

marked on the sidewall

1) Front

If the tires have specific rotational

direction, refer to the arrow marked

on the side wall.

The arrow should be pointing for-

ward direction when the wheels are

fitted.

– CONTINUED –

Tires and Wheels

443

Maintenance and Service

(446,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Tire Rotation

s11av07

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-

unidirectional tires

1) Front

Vehicles equipped with unidi-

rectional tires

1) Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to

wheel. Move the tires to the posi-

tions shown in the illustration each

time they are rotated. For the tire

rotation schedule, refer to the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Replace any damaged or unevenly

worn tire at the time of rotation. After

tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-

sures and make sure the wheel nuts

are correctly tightened.

After driving approximately 600

miles (1,000 km), check the wheel

nuts again and retighten any nut

that has become loose.

& Tire Replacement

s11av08

The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they

cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires

fitted as standard equipment are optimally

matched to the characteristics of the

vehicle and were selected to give the best

possible combination of running perfor-

mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is

essential for every tire to have a size and

construction matching those shown on the

tire inflation pressure label and to have a

speed symbol and load index matching

those shown on the tire inflation pressure

label.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’s ground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to

Tires and Wheels

444

(447,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU

recommends replacing all four tires at the

same time.

WARNING

. When replacing or installing

tire(s), all four tires must be the

same for the following items.

(a) Size

(b) Speed symbol

(d) Circumference

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire inflation pres-

sure label. The tire inflation pres-

sure label is located on the dri-

ver’s door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in

items (a) to (h), serious mechan-

ical damage could be caused to

the drivetrain of the car, and

affect the followings.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and the tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can dangerously re-

duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

& Wheel Replacement

s11av09

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could

interfere with brake caliper opera-

tion and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

NOTE

. When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to

change a flat tire, always check the

tightness of the wheel nuts after driving

approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If

any nut is loose, tighten it to the

specified torque.

Tires and Wheels

445

Maintenance and Service

(448,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11-23. Alloy Wheels

s11bm

Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-

maged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

. When any of the wheels is removed and

replaced for tire rotation or to change a flat,

always check the tightness of the wheel

nuts after driving approximately 600 miles

(1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to

the specified torque.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

. Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU parts

designed for alloy wheels.

11-24. Windshield Washer

Fluid

s11ax

Windshield washer fluid warning light

When there is only a small amount of

washer fluid remaining, the windshield

washer fluid warning light will appear.

When this occurs, refill the washer fluid

as follows.

1) “FULL” mark

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

add fluid until it reaches the “FULL” mark

on the tank.

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield

washer fluid is unavailable use clean

water.

In areas where water freezes in winter, use

an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid.

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

If you fill the windshield washer tank with a

fluid with a different concentration from the

Alloy Wheels

446

(449,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

one used previously, purge the old fluid

from the piping between the windshield

washer tank and washer nozzles by

operating the washer for a certain period

of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of

the fluid remaining in the piping is too low

for the outside temperature, it may freeze

and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the windshield washer tank.

. Be careful foreign matter does

not contaminate the washer fluid

when filling the tank. Contamina-

tion could cause malfunctions,

such as clogging the pump.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

11-25. Replacement of Wiper

Blades

s11az

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on

the windshield or the wiper blade results in

jerky wiper operation and streaking on the

glass. If you cannot remove the streaks

after operating the windshield washer or if

the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer

surface of the windshield using a sponge

or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not, however,

use detergent to clean the blade rubbers.

Use only a sponge or soft cloth (and no

neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaner)

when you clean the blade rubbers. After

cleaning the window glass and wiper blade

rubbers, be sure to rinse them with clean

water. Rinse the window until the water

does not form beads on the glass. This

indicates that the glass is clean.

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

. When you wish to raise the pas-

senger-side wiper arm, first raise

the driver-side wiper arm. Other-

– CONTINUED –

Replacement of Wiper Blades

447

Maintenance and Service

(450,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

wise, the passenger-side wiper

assembly and driver-side wiper

assembly will touch each other,

possibly resulting in scratches.

. Return the passenger-side wiper

arm to its original position before

returning the driver-side wiper

arm to its original position. Other-

wise, the passenger-side wiper

assembly and driver-side wiper

assembly will touch each other,

possibly resulting in scratches.

. When returning the raised wipers

to the original positions, return

the wipers slowly on the wind-

shield by hand. Returning the

wipers from the detached posi-

tions by the spring operation

might change the shape of the

wiper arm or scratch the wind-

shield.

. While removing the wiper blades

from the wiper arms, do not

return the wiper arms to the

original positions. Otherwise,

the windshield surface may be

scratched.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures.

& Windshield Wiper Blade As-

sembly

s11az01

NOTE

Do not lower the wiper arm while the

wiper blade assembly is removed.

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

First raise the driver’s side wiper arm and

then raise the front passenger’s side wiper

arm.

CAUTION

Hold the wiper arm when replacing

the wiper blade. Holding the wiper

blade, may result in blade deforma-

tion.

1) Lock knob

2. Hold the wiper blade connection by

hand, push the lock knob to release the

lock, and then pull out the wiper blade

assembly.

NOTE

Do not use a hard object to push the

lock knob. The lock knob may be

scratched.

Replacement of Wiper Blades

448

(451,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3. When installing the wiper blade as-

sembly, align it with the wiper arm connec-

tion part and then slide it in the opposite

direction of removal to install. After instal-

ling the wiper blade assembly, check that

the connection part is locked completely.

4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

& Window Wiper Blade Rubber

s11az05

Replace the wiper blade rubber according

to the following procedure.

1. Pull the wiper blade rubber until the slit

on the underside of the wiper blade is in

the removal position, as shown in the

illustration, so that it can be removed.

2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber

through the slit to remove it.

3. To install a new wiper blade rubber,

perform the removal procedure in the

reverse order. After installation, check that

the tip of the wiper rubber has reached the

end of the cap.

NOTE

It may be difficult to perform the wiper

blade rubber replacement. We recom-

mend that you contact your SUBARU

dealer for wiper blade rubber replace-

ment if necessary.

Replacement of Wiper Blades

449

Maintenance and Service

(452,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11-26. Battery

s11ba

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks.

Batteries give off a gas which is

highly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when working

near any battery. Never lean over

a battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and seek medical attention im-

mediately.

. To lessen the risk of sparks,

remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never

allow metal tools to contact the

positive battery terminal and any-

thing connected to it WHILE you

are at the same time in contact

with any other metallic portion of

the vehicle because a short cir-

cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-

ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals, and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because

it will shorten battery life.

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

Battery

450

(453,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11-27. Fuses

s11bb

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one having

a higher rating or with material other

than a fuse because serious damage

or a fire could result.

NOTE

Fuse rating and used circuit are de-

scribed on behind each fuse box cover.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s

seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

The other one (main fuse box) is housed in

the engine compartment. Also, the spare

fuses are stored in the fuse box cover.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

box in the engine compartment.

1) Good

2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the corre-

sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace

it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and turn off all electrical

accessories.

2. Remove the fuse box cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

Look at the back side of each fuse box

cover.

– CONTINUED –

Fuses

451

Maintenance and Service

(454,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,

replace it with a spare fuse of the same

rating.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this

indicates that its system has a problem.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

11-28. Installation of Acces-

sories

s11bd

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other

electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such

accessories may cause the electronic

system to malfunction if they are incor-

rectly installed or if they are not suited for

the vehicle. We recommend that you

install only genuine SUBARU accessories

on your vehicle.

11-29. Replacing Bulbs

s11be

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is

the risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire. For the specified

wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb

Chart” �P470. For replacement,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

Installation of Accessories

452

(455,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Headlights

s11be18

The LED headlight warning light illumi-

nates if the LED headlights malfunction.

Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

& Rear Combination Lights

s11be05

1. Use a screwdriver to remove the

secured clips of the covers.

2. Remove the side cover.

3. Remove the upper and lower bolts.

4. Slide the rear combination light as-

sembly diagonally backward to remove it

from the vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Replacing Bulbs

453

Maintenance and Service

(456,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

5. Disconnect the electrical connector.

1) Rear turn signal light

6. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

7. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and

replace it with a new one.

8. Set the bulb holder into the rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

9. Reconnect the electrical connector.

10. Reinstall the rear combination light

assembly by sliding the two-pronged part

of the combination light assembly securely

to each holder of the vehicle side.

11. Tighten the upper and lower bolts.

12. Reinstall the side cover.

Replacing Bulbs

454

(457,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& License Plate Lights

s11be06

NOTE

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

We recommend that you have the bulbs

replaced by your SUBARU dealer if

necessary.

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the trunk trim lining by remov-

ing the clips indicated in the illustration.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and remove it.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

5. Install the bulb socket by turning it

clockwise.

6. Reconnect the electrical connector.

7. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.

& Dome Light

s11be08

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

its ends are aligned vertically.

– CONTINUED –

Replacing Bulbs

455

Maintenance and Service

(458,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

3. Pull the bulb straight downward to

remove it.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the lens.

& Map Lights

s11be09

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause

burns since the bulb may be very

hot. Have the bulb replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Vanity Mirror Light (If

Equipped)

s11be34

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause

burns since the bulb may be very

hot. Have the bulb replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Trunk Light

s11be12

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause

burns since the bulb may be very

hot. Have the bulb replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Other Bulbs

s11be29

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

We recommend that you have the bulbs

replaced by your SUBARU dealer if

necessary.

& Adjusting Headlight Aim

s11be57

1) Adjustment bolt A

2) Adjustment bolt B

NOTE

For some models, the position of the

adjustment bolt may differ from that

shown in the illustration.

! Before checking the headlight aim-

ing

s11be5701

1. Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of

gasoline and the area around the headlight

is not deformed.

2. Park the vehicle on level ground.

3. Sit in the driver’s seat.

4. Bounce the vehicle several times.

! Headlight aim adjustment

s11be5702

Right-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on

the air intake duct, and then remove the air

Replacing Bulbs

456

(459,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

intake duct.

1) Adjustment direction mark

2. Turn the bolt A clockwise or counter-

clockwise to adjust it.

Remember the direction of the rotation and

number of rotations.

1) Adjustment direction mark

3. Turn bolt B the same number of turns

and in the same direction as step 2.

NOTE

. If the headlight aim cannot be ad-

justed, contact your SUBARU dealer.

. To inspect of the headlight aim

position, consult a SUBARU dealer.

11-30. Replacing Battery

s11bk

The access key fob/transmitter battery

may be discharged under the following

conditions.

. The operation of the keyless access

function is unstable.

. The operating distance of the remote

keyless entry system is unstable.

. The transmitter does not operate prop-

erly when used within the standard dis-

tance.

Replace the battery with a new one.

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the access key fob/transmit-

ter when replacing battery.

. Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the ac-

cess key fob/transmitter when

replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could

swallow them.

. There is a danger of an explosion

if the battery is incorrectly re-

placed. Replace only with the

– CONTINUED –

Replacing Battery

457

Maintenance and Service

(460,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

same or equivalent type of the

battery.

. Batteries shall not be exposed to

excessive heat such as bright

sunlight, fire or the like.

NOTE

. Replace only with the same or

equivalent type of battery recom-

mended by the manufacturer.

. Dispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

. Mount the battery in the correct

orientation to prevent fluid leakage.

Be careful not to bend the terminals. It

may result in a malfunction.

. It is recommended that the battery

should be replaced by a SUBARU deal-

er.

. Use a new battery.

. After replacing the battery, confirm

that the access key fob/transmitter

functions properly.

& Replacing Battery of Access

Key Fob

s11bk01

CAUTION

. When removing or fitting the

access key fob cover, make sure

that the plastic part does not

come off or become misaligned.

. Before replacing the battery, re-

move any static electricity.

Battery: Button battery CR2032 or

equivalent

1) Release button

2) Emergency key

1. Take out the emergency key.

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl

tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to

remove the cover.

3. Take out the battery using a flat-head

screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

Replacing Battery

458

(461,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)

side facing upward as shown in the figure.

5. Attach the cover to the access key fob

by fitting the projections and recesses

together.

& Replacing Battery of Trans-

mitter

s11bk02

CAUTION

Before replacing the battery, remove

any static electricity.

Battery: Button battery CR1620 or

equivalent

1. Open the key head using a flat-head

screwdriver.

2. Remove the transmitter case from the

key head.

3. Open the transmitter case by releasing

the hooks.

– CONTINUED –

Replacing Battery

459

Maintenance and Service

(462,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

1) Negative (−) side facing up

4. Replace the old battery with a new

battery (type CR1620 or equivalent) mak-

ing sure to install the new battery with the

negative (−) side facing up.

5. Put together the transmitter case by

fitting the hooks on the case.

6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the

key head.

7. Refit the removed half of the key head.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-

mitter must be synchronized with the

remote keyless entry system’s control

unit. Press either the “

” or “ ” button

six times to synchronize the unit.

Replacing Battery

460

(463,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s12

12-1. Specifications ............................................... 462

Dimensions ........................................................ 462

Engine................................................................ 463

Fuel....................................................................463

Engine Oil .......................................................... 464

Manual Transmission, Front Differential and

Rear Differential Gear Oil ..................................466

Fluids ................................................................. 467

Engine Coolant................................................... 467

Electrical System................................................468

Tires...................................................................468

Temporary Spare Tires........................................ 469

Brake Disc ......................................................... 469

Brake Pad .......................................................... 469

12-2. Bulb Chart......................................................470

Safety Precautions ............................................. 470

Bulb Chart ......................................................... 471

12-3. Vehicle Identification.....................................473

12-4. Function Settings ..........................................474

Function Settings and Adjustments on

the Center Information Display ......................... 474

Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding

Center Information Display ............................... 474

Function Settings and Adjustments Performed

by a Dealer ...................................................... 474

Specifications

(464,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

12-1. Specifications s12aa

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensions

s12aa01

in (mm)

Overall length 183.8 (4,670)

Overall width 71.9 (1,825)

Overall height 57.8 (1,465)

Wheel base

Models with 17-inch wheel tires 105.2 (2,670)

Models with 18-inch wheel tires 105.2 (2,675)

Tread

Front 61.5 (1,560)

Rear

Models with 17-inch wheel tires 61.7 (1,570)

Models with 18-inch wheel tires 61.8 (1,570)

Ground clearance*

5.4 (135)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty

Specifications

462

(465,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Engine

s12aa02

Engine model FA24 (2.4 L, DOHC, turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine

Displacement cu-in (cc) 146 (2,387)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.70 6 3.39 (94.0 6 86.0)

Compression ratio 10.6 : 1

Firing order

1 – 3 – 2 – 4

& Fuel

s12aa08

NOTE

The engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline.

Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity

91 AKI (95 RON) or higher*

16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)

*1: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher

may be used.

– CONTINUED –

Specifications

463

Specifications

(466,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Engine Oil

s12aa12

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine Oil” �P426.

NOTE

Have the procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended that

you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

! Approved engine oil

s12aa1201

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

Specifications

464

(467,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Alternative engine oil

s12aa1202

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

. Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on

the temperature and other factors.

. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower

viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the

engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.

. When adding oil, you may use different brands together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity

as those recommended by SUBARU.

Oil grade

SAE viscosity No. and

applicable temperature

Engine oil capacity

API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) classification SP with the

words “RESOURCE CONSER-

VING”

ILSAC (International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Commit-

tee) GF-6A, which can be identi-

fied with the ILSAC certification

mark (Starburst mark)

0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil for

optimum engine performance and protection.

Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is

unavailable.

*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available, 5W-30

conventional oil may be used if replenish-

ment is needed but should be changed to

0W-20 synthetic oil at the next oil change.

· Adding the oil from L to F

level:

1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9

Imp qt)

· Changing the oil and oil

filter:

4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0

Imp qt)

· Changing the oil:

4.5 US qt (4.3 liters, 3.8

Imp qt)

– CONTINUED –

Specifications

465

Specifications

(468,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Manual Transmission, Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil

s12aa13

Oil Manual transmission oil

Front differential gear oil (CVT

models)

Rear differential gear oil

Oil grade

. SUBARU Extra MT*

. API classification GL-5

(75W-90)*

. SUBARU Extra MT*

. API classification GL-5

(75W-90)

API classification GL-5 (75W-90)

Oil capacity*

3.5 US qt (3.3 liters, 2.9 Imp qt) 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)

Remarks*

“Manual Transmission Oil” �P431

“Front Differential Gear Oil (CVT

Models) and Rear Differential Gear

Oil” �P432

“Front Differential Gear Oil (CVT

Models) and Rear Differential Gear Oil”

�P432

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. Check the oil level after refilling the gearbox with oil.

*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this oil.

*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.

Specifications

466

(469,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Fluids

s12aa10

Fluid Fluid type*

Fluid capacity*

Remarks*

Continuously variable transmission

fluid (CVT models)

Consult your SUBARU dealer.

Models with air-cooled continuously

variable transmission fluid cooler:

12.9 US qt (12.2 liters, 10.7 Imp qt)*

Models without air-cooled continu-

ously variable transmission fluid

cooler: 12.6 US qt (11.9 liters, 10.5

Imp qt)*

“Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion Fluid” �P432

Brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake

fluid

— “

Brake Fluid” �P432

Clutch fluid (MT models)

FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake

fluid

—

“

Clutch Fluid (MT Models)”

�P434

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors.

*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*4: Continuously variable transmission type TR690SXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to

“

Vehicle Identification” �P473.)

*5: Continuously variable transmission type TR690GXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to

“Vehicle Identification” �P473.)

& Engine Coolant

s12aa11

Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type

MT models 9.0 US qt (8.5 liters, 7.5 Imp qt)

SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

CVT models

9.2 US qt (8.7 liters, 7.7 Imp qt)

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “

Cooling System” �P428.

– CONTINUED –

Specifications

467

Specifications

(470,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Electrical System

s12aa03

Battery type 75D23L

Alternator 12 V-150 A

Spark plugs

SILKFR8D6Y (NGK)

& Tires

s12aa05

Tire size 235/45R17 97W 245/40R18 97Y

Wheel size 17 6 8J 18 6 8 1/2J

Pressure

Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Wheel nut tightening torque

89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts

by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,

refer to “

Changing a Flat Tire” �P381.

Specifications

468

(471,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Temporary Spare Tires

s12aa15

Temporary spare tire size 205/50R17

Temporary spare tire inflation pressure

(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm

)

Wheel nut tightening torque

89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts

by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,

refer to “

Changing a Flat Tire” �P381.

& Brake Disc

s12aa18

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, consult your SUBARU dealer.

& Brake Pad

s12aa28

in (mm)

Brake pad wear limit

0.06 (1.5)

Specifications

469

Specifications

(472,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

12-2. Bulb Chart

s12ac

& Safety Precautions

s12ac03

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is

a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire.

Bulb Chart

470

(473,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

& Bulb Chart

s12ac04

NOTE

Lights indicated by letters are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

– CONTINUED –

Bulb Chart

471

Specifications

(474,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Wattage Bulb No.

1) Vanity mirror lights (if equipped) 12 V-2 W —

2) Map lights 12 V-8 W —

3) Dome light 12 V-8 W —

4) Front parking lights (if equipped) 12 V-8 W 7444NA

Front turn signal lights (if equipped) 12 V-28 W 7444NA

5) Front side marker lights (if equipped) 12 V-5 W W5W

6) Trunk light 12 V-3.8 W SAE #194

7) License plate lights 12 V-5 W W5W

8) Rear turn signal lights 12 V-21 W WY21W

A) Side turn signal lights — —

B) Low and high beam headlights — —

C) Front fog lights (if equipped) — —

D) Front turn signal lights (if equipped) — —

Front parking lights (if equipped) — —

Daytime running lights — —

E) Front side marker lights — —

F) High-mounted stop light — —

G) Backup lights — —

H) Tail and stop lights — —

I) Rear side marker lights — —

Bulb Chart

472

(475,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

12-3. Vehicle Identification

s12ad

1) Vehicle identification number (under the

floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)

2) Emission control label

3) Tire inflation pressure label (vehicle

placard)

4) Certification label

5) Vehicle identification number

6) Model number label

7) Fuel label

8) Air conditioner label

Vehicle Identification

473

Specifications

(476,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

12-4. Function Settings s12ag

& Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center Information Display

s12ag01

Setting adjustments can be manually changed within the center information display to meet your personal requirements. Refer to

“Center Information Display (CID)” �P184.

& Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding Center Information Display

s12ag02

For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 129

Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

121

& Function Settings and Adjustments Performed by a Dealer

s12ag03

Item Function Available settings

Factory default

setting

Alarm system

Monitoring start delay time (after closing

doors)

0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds

Map lights/Dome light illumination ON/OFF OFF

Keyless access with push-button

Audible signal volume*

Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Trunk open without key ON/OFF ON

Remote keyless entry system Audible signal volume*

Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Remote trunk open function Operation of trunk opening/access key fob

Non-operation/Pressing twice/Pressing

and holding

Pressing and holding

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation

Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation

Auto dimmer cancel

Sensitivity of the operation of the auto

dimmer cancel

OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid

Function Settings

474

(477,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Item Function Available settings

Factory default

setting

High beam assist function*

High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation

Operation

*1: The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.

*2: If equipped

Function Settings

475

Specifications

(478,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(479,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s13

13-1. For U.S.A. ...................................................... 478

13-2. Tire Information ............................................ 478

Tire Labeling ......................................................478

Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure.................480

Glossary of Tire Terminology .............................. 481

Tire Care – Maintenance and Safety Practices .....485

Vehicle Load Limit – How to Determine ............... 486

Determining Compatibility of Tire and Vehicle

Load Capacities................................................ 489

Adverse Safety Consequences of Overloading

on Handling and Stopping and on Tires ............ 489

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit........... 490

13-3. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards.....490

TREADWEAR ..................................................... 491

TRACTION AA, A, B, C ....................................... 491

TEMPERATURE A, B, C ...................................... 491

13-4. Reporting Safety Defects (USA)...................492

13-5. How to Contact Transport Canada in

Order to Report a Safety Concern

Relating to the Vehicle (Canada) .................492

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(480,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

13-1. For U.S.A.

s13aa

The following information has been

compiled according to Code of

Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

13-2. Tire Information

s13ab

& Tire Labeling

s13ab01

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by

tire manufacturers. These marking

can provide you with useful infor-

mation on the tire.

! Tire size

s13ab0101

Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to

understand the sizing system in

selecting the proper tire for your

vehicles. Here is a brief review of

the tire sizing system with a break-

down of its individual elements.

! P Metric

s13ab010101

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.

To convert millimeters into inches,

divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio

(Section Height divided by Section

Width) helps provide more dimen-

sional information about the tire

size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as passen-

ger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height

7 section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

! Load and Speed Rating

Descriptions

s13ab010102

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number

designation is its load index. Sec-

ond, the letter designation indicates

the tire’s speed rating.

For U.S.A.

478

(481,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum load

a tire can carry at the speed

indicated by its speed symbol, at

maximum inflation pressure.

For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs

(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600

kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting

a load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s capability

to travel at established and prede-

termined speeds.

For example, “V” means 149 mph

(240 km/h)

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be operated

at the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void if

the tires are worn out, da-

maged, repaired, retreaded,

or otherwise altered from

their original condition. If

tires are repaired, re-

treaded, or otherwise al-

tered, they may not be sui-

table for original equipment

tire designed loads and

speeds.

! Tire Identification Number

(TIN)

s13ab0102

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. The TIN is composed of

four groups. Here is a brief review of

the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

(1) DOT symbol*

(2) Manufacturer’s Identification

Mark

(3) Tire Size Code

(4) Tire Type Code

(5) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the

tire conforms to applicable Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards.

– CONTINUED –

Tire Information

479

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(482,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

! Other markings

s13ab0103

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

! Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

s13ab010301

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which this tire may be

inflated. For example, “350 kPa

(51 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

! Maximum load rating

s13ab010302

The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.

For example, “MAX. LOAD 615 kg

(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI)

MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the

vehicle. Putting a load rated

tire on any vehicle does not

mean the vehicle can be

loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

! Construction type

s13ab010303

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

! Construction

s13ab010304

The generic name of each cord

material used in the plies (both

sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1

NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-

STER”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grad-

ing (UTQG)

s13ab010305

For details, refer to “Uniform Tire

Quality Grading Standards” �P490.

& Recommended Tire Inflation

Pressure

s13ab02

! Recommended cold tire in-

flation pressure

s13ab0201

For the recommended cold tire

inflation pressure for your vehicle’s

tires, refer to “

Tires” �P468.

! Vehicle placard

s13ab0202

The vehicle placard is affixed to the

driver’s side B-pillar.

Example:

Tire Information

480

(483,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire

inflation pressure on each tire at

maximum loaded vehicle weight,

seating capacity and loading infor-

mation.

! Adverse safety conse-

quences of under-inflation

s13ab0203

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and failure of the

tire(s). Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper

inflation

s13ab0204

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and

before any long journey. Check the

tire pressures when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the

specific values. Driving even a short

distance warms up the tires and

increases the tire pressures. Also,

the tire pressures are affected by

the outside temperature. It is best to

check tire pressure outdoors before

driving the vehicle. When a tire

becomes warm, the air inside it

expands, causing the tire pressure

to increase. Be careful not to mis-

takenly release air from a warm tire

to reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of Tire Terminology

s13ab03

. Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of automatic transmis-

sion, power steering, power brakes,

power windows, power seats, radio,

and heater, to the extent that these

items are available as factory-in-

stalled equipment (whether in-

stalled or not).

. Bead

The part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced

by ply cords and that is shaped to fit

the rim.

. Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between

components in the bead.

. Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at alternate angles substantially

less than 90 degrees to the center-

line of the tread.

. Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when in-

flated, bears the load.

. Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the

tread or sidewall.

. Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

. Cord

The strands forming the plies in the

tire.

– CONTINUED –

Tire Information

481

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(484,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent

rubber compounds.

. Cracking

Any parting within the tread, side-

wall, or inner liner of the tire

extending to cord material.

. Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, and if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight

optional engine.

. Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and higher inflation pressure

than the corresponding standard

tire.

. Groove

The space between two adjacent

tread ribs.

. Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside sur-

face of a tubeless tire that contains

the inflating medium within the tire.

. Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from

cord material in the carcass.

. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand,

and/or model name molding that

is higher or deeper than the

same molding on the other side-

wall of the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that has a

particular side that must always

face outward when mounting on

a vehicle.

. Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufac-

turer as primarily intended for use

on lightweight trucks or multipur-

pose passenger vehicles.

. Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is

rated to carry for a given inflation

pressure.

. Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the

maximum permissible inflation

pressure for that tire.

. Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

physical dimension requirements.

. Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants specified in the second

column of Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section.

. Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehi-

cle as specified in the third column

of Table 1 that is appended to the

Tire Information

482

(485,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

end of this section.

. Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread,

sidewall, or innerliner that extends

to cord material.

. Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated

new tire.

. Overall width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, including elevations

due to labeling, decorations, or

protective bands or ribs.

. Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passen-

ger cars, multipurpose passenger

vehicles, and trucks, that have a

gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)

of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.

. Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.

. Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound

between adjacent plies.

. Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rub-

ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or

other materials, that, when

mounted on an automotive wheel,

provides the traction and contains

the gas or fluid that sustains the

load.

. Production options weight

The combined weight of those

installed regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in

excess of those standard items

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or acces-

sory weight, including heavy duty

brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,

heavy duty battery, and special trim.

. Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at substantially 90 degrees to

the centerline of the tread.

. Recommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

. Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and at higher inflation pres-

sures than the corresponding stan-

dard tire.

. Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

. Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead seat.

. Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

. Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer’s des-

ignation for a rim by style or code.

. Rim width

Nominal distance between rim

flanges.

. Section width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, excluding elevations

due to labeling, decoration, or pro-

tective bands.

– CONTINUED –

Tire Information

483

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(486,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the

tread and bead.

. Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound

from the cord material in the side-

wall.

. Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index

equal to or greater than 110, com-

pared to the ASTM E1136-93 Stan-

dard Reference Test Tire, when

using the snow traction test as

described in ASTM F-1805-00,

Standard Test Method for Single

Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight

Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered

Surfaces, and that is marked with

an Alpine Symbol “

” on at least

one sidewall.

. Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

testing, and it may be any rim listed

as appropriate for use with that tire.

. Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into

contact with the road.

. Tread rib

A tread section running circumfer-

entially around a tire.

. Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the

tire carcass.

. Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal

grooves designed to give a visual

indication of the degrees of wear of

the tread.

. Vehicle capacity weight

The rated cargo and luggage load

plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the

vehicle’s designated seating capa-

city.

. Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the maximum

loaded vehicle weight and dividing

by two.

. Vehicle normal load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight (distributed in accor-

dance with Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section) and

dividing by 2.

. Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel

and tire assembly securely during

testing.

Tire Information

484

(487,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for

various designated seating capacities

Designated seating

capacity, number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load,

number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a

normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front.

5 through 10 3

2 in front, 1 in second

seat.

11 through 15 5

2 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

16 through 22 7

2 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

& Tire Care – Maintenance and

Safety Practices

s13ab04

. Check on a daily basis that the

tires are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

. Inspect the tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visi-

ble. When a tire’s tread wear in-

dicator becomes visible, the tire is

worn beyond the acceptable limit

and must be replaced immediately.

With a tire in this condition, driving

at even low speeds in wet weather

can cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control can lead to an

accident.

– CONTINUED –

Tire Information

485

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(488,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

. To maximize the life of each tire

and ensure that the tires wear

uniformly, it is best to rotate the

tires every 6,000 miles (10,000 km).

For details about tire rotation, refer

to “

Tire Rotation” �P444. Replace

any damaged or unevenly worn tire at

the time of rotation. After tire rotation,

adjust the tire pressures and make

sure the wheel nuts are correctly

tightened. For information about the

tightening torque and tightening se-

quence for the wheel nuts, refer to

“Flat Tires” �P381.

& Vehicle Load Limit – How to

Determine

s13ab05

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s side

B-pillar. Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg

or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s

placard.

The vehicle placard also shows

seating capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all pas-

sengers and their belongings, any

cargo, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike

carrier, etc., and the tongue load of

a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity

can be calculated by the following

method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total

weight of occupants + total weight

of optional equipment + tongue load

of a trailer (if applicable))

! Calculating total and load ca-

pacities varying seating con-

figurations

s13ab0501

Calculate the available load capa-

city as shown in the following

examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 363 kg or

800 lbs”.

Tire Information

486

(489,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total

weight from the vehicle capacity

weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to two), the calculations

are as follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.

Example 2A

CAUTION

Your vehicle is neither de-

signed nor intended to be

used for trailer towing. There-

fore, never tow a trailer with

your vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Tire Information

487

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(490,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 363 kg or

800 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)

plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120

kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted

with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs

(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer

weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of

the trailer weight is applied to the

trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =

176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 2B

CAUTION

Your vehicle is neither de-

signed nor intended to be

used for trailer towing. There-

fore, never tow a trailer with

your vehicle.

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing

40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to three), and a child

restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5

kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

Tire Information

488

(491,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

child to use, the calculations are as

follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.

& Determining Compatibility of

Tire and Vehicle Load Capa-

cities

s13ab06

The sum of four tires’ maximum

load ratings must exceed the max-

imum loaded vehicle weight

(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the

maximum load ratings of two front

tires and of two rear tires must

exceed each axle’s maximum

loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original

equipment tires are designed to

fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle

weight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And each

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-

ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle’s GAWR are shown on the

vehicle certification label affixed to

the driver’s door.

The GVWR and front and rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehi-

cle’s suspension, axles and other

parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the

vehicle cannot necessarily be

loaded up to the tire’s maximum

load rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse Safety Conse-

quences of Overloading on

Handling and Stopping and

on Tires

s13ab07

Overloading could affect vehicle

handling, stopping distance, vehicle

and tire as shown in the following.

This could lead to an accident and

possibly result in severe personal

injury.

. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

. Heavy and/or high-mounted

loads could increase the risk of

rollover.

. Stopping distance will increase.

. Brakes could overheat and fail.

. Suspension, bearings, axles and

other parts of the body could break

or experience accelerated wear that

– CONTINUED –

Tire Information

489

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(492,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

will shorten vehicle life.

. Tires could fail.

. Tread separation could occur.

. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

s13ab08

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be

five 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in

your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capa-

city is 650 lbs (1,400 − 750 (5 6

150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your ve-

hicle.

13-3. Uniform Tire Quality

Grading Standards

s13ac

This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car

tires in the area of treadwear,

traction, and temperature resis-

tance. This is to aid the consumer

in making an informed choice in the

purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maximum

section width. For example:

TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on passen-

ger cars. However, they do not

apply to deep tread, winter type

snow tires, space-saver or tempor-

ary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 12 inches

or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

490

(493,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Safety Require-

ments in addition to these grades.

& TREADWEAR

s13ac02

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified

government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1-

1/2) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

& TRACTION AA, A, B, C

s13ac03

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteris-

tics.

& TEMPERATURE A, B, C

s13ac04

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor labora-

tory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or

in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire

failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

491

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

(494,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

13-4. Reporting Safety De-

fects (USA)

s13ah

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-

ministration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying Subaru of America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA can-

not become involved in individual

problems between you, your dealer,

or Subaru of America, Inc. To

contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to http://www.safercar.

gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,

SE, West Building, Washington, DC

20590. You can also obtain other

information about motor vehicle

safety from http://www.safercar.

gov.

13-5. How to Contact Trans-

port Canada in Order to Re-

port a Safety Concern

Relating to the Vehicle

(Canada)

s13cf

Reporting Safety Defects (USA)

492

(495,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(496,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(497,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

s14

Index

(498,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

11.6-inch display models......................................... P186

Abbreviation .............................................................. P4

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ................................. P317

Warning light ..................................................... P160

Access key

Warning indicator............................................... P168

Access key fob ...................................................... P102

Accessories .......................................................... P452

Accessory power outlet .......................................... P274

Air cleaner element ................................................ P430

Air conditioner

Automatic climate control.................................... P255

Manual climate control system ............................ P257

Air filtration system ................................................ P263

Airflow mode selection............................................ P257

Alarm system ........................................................ P127

All season tires...................................................... P438

All-Wheel Drive warning light................................... P164

Alloy wheel ........................................................... P446

Cleaning ............................................................ P411

Antenna................................................................ P268

Roof antenna .................................................... P268

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................................. P317

Arming the system ................................................. P128

Armrest .................................................................. P41

Ashtray................................................................. P277

Assist grip............................................................. P278

AT OIL TEMP warning light ..................................... P158

Audio

Antenna ............................................................ P268

Set ................................................................... P268

Auto dimmer cancel function.................................... P152

Auto on/off headlights ............................................. P217

Sensor.............................................................. P219

Auto Vehicle Hold................................................... P327

ON indicator light ............................................... P163

Auto Vehicle Hold function....................................... P327

Auto-dimming mirror ............................................... P233

Auto-dimming mirror/compass........................ P234, P235

Automatic climate control operation .......................... P255

Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................. P227

Warning light ..................................................... P174

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR).............................................. P43

Battery .................................................................. P450

Drainage prevention function ............................... P127

Jump starting..................................................... P394

Replacement (access key fob)............................. P458

Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ...... P301

Replacement (transmitter) ................................... P459

Vehicle battery ................................................... P450

Blind Spot Detection (BSD) ..................................... P343

Booster cushion ....................................................... P60

Booster seat ............................................................ P60

Bottle holder .......................................................... P274

Brake

Assist ............................................................... P316

Index

496

(499,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Booster.................................................... P315, P435

Disc ................................................................. P469

Fluid........................................................ P432, P467

Pad .................................................................. P437

Parking.................................................... P324, P437

Pedal ............................................................... P435

Brake system ........................................................ P315

Warning light ..................................................... P160

Braking................................................................. P315

Tips.................................................................. P315

Breaking-in of new brake pads ................................ P437

BSD/RCTA............................................................ P343

Approach indicator light/warning buzzer................ P346

OFF indicator ........................................... P175, P348

Warning indicator...................................... P175, P349

Warning volume................................................. P347

Bulb

Chart................................................................ P470

Replacement..................................................... P452

Camera

Rear view camera.............................................. P334

Catalytic converter ................................................. P365

Center console ...................................................... P272

Center information display (CID).............................. P184

11.6-inch display models..................................... P186

Cleaning ........................................................... P414

Dual 7.0-inch display models............................... P202

Changing

Coolant............................................................. P430

Flat tire ............................................................. P381

Oil and oil filter .................................................. P427

Charge warning light ............................................... P157

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator

light ................................................................... P157

Checking

Coolant level ..................................................... P429

Fluid level (brake fluid)........................................ P432

Fluid level (clutch fluid) ....................................... P434

Fluid level (washer fluid) ..................................... P446

Oil level (engine oil)............................................ P426

Child restraint systems .............................................. P51

Installation of a booster cushion............................ P60

Installation of a booster seat................................. P60

Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt......................... P56

Lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .................. P62

Top tether anchorages ......................................... P66

Child safety .............................................................. P5

Locks................................................................ P130

Chime

Key reminder..................................................... P145

Light ................................................................. P217

Seatbelt ............................................................ P153

Cleaning

Alloy wheels ...................................................... P411

Center information display................................... P414

Interior .............................................................. P413

Ventilation grille.................................................. P262

Climate control system ............................................ P248

Automatic.......................................................... P255

Manual ............................................................. P257

Index

497

Index

(500,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Clock.................................................................... P214

Clutch

Fluid........................................................ P434, P467

Pedal ............................................................... P435

Coat hook............................................................. P278

Combination meter display (color LCD) .................... P176

Compass ..................................................... P234, P235

Console

Center .............................................................. P272

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)................. P305

Fluid........................................................ P432, P467

Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP)........ P158

Coolant........................................................ P429, P467

Cooling system...................................................... P428

Corrosion protection............................................... P412

Cruise control........................................................ P339

Indicator ........................................................... P175

Cup holder............................................................ P273

Front passenger’s .............................................. P273

Rear passenger’s .............................................. P273

Daytime running light (DRL) system......................... P225

Defogger .............................................................. P231

Defrosting ............................................................. P261

Deicer .................................................................. P231

Differential gear oil................................................. P432

Front ................................................................ P466

Rear................................................................. P466

Dimensions ........................................................... P462

Disarming the alarm system.................................... P129

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators .................... P317

Dome light................................................... P270, P455

Door

Locks................................................................ P123

Open indicator ................................................... P164

Unlock selection function..................................... P109

Double trip meter.................................................... P149

Drive belts ............................................................. P431

Drive Mode Select .................................................. P313

Drive Mode Select indicator light .............................. P173

Driving

All-Wheel Drive model ........................................ P366

Drinking ............................................................... P7

Drugs .................................................................. P7

Foreign countries ............................................... P366

Pets..................................................................... P8

Snowy and icy roads .......................................... P369

Tips ............................................... P304, P310, P366

Tired or sleepy...................................................... P8

Winter............................................................... P368

Dual 7.0-inch display models ................................... P202

Electric Damper System warning light ....................... P176

Electrical system .................................................... P468

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system ...... P318

Warning ............................................................ P161

Electronic parking brake .......................................... P325

Automatic release function by accelerator pedal .... P327

Indicator light..................................................... P162

Switch............................................................... P325

Index

498

(501,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Warning................................................... P162, P330

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .......................... P43

Engine.................................................................. P463

Compartment overview....................................... P425

Coolant.................................................... P429, P467

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................... P6, P364

Hood ................................................................ P423

Hood release knob............................................. P423

Low oil level warning indicator............................. P158

Oil........................................................... P426, P464

Overheating ...................................................... P397

Starting & stopping ................................... P289, P292

Event data recorder ................................................. P10

Exterior care ......................................................... P410

Flat tire repair kit ................................................... P387

Technical data of air compressor ......................... P392

Flat tires ............................................................... P381

Floor mat .............................................................. P279

Fluid level

Brake ............................................................... P432

Clutch............................................................... P434

Continuously variable transmission ...................... P432

Fog light ............................................................... P227

Indicator light..................................................... P175

Switch .............................................................. P227

Front

Differential gear oil.................................... P432, P466

Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators ........................................................ P156

Passenger’s seatbelt warning light ....................... P153

Seatbelt pretensioners ......................................... P47

Front seat heater.................................................... P260

Front seats .............................................................. P30

Forward and backward adjustment........................ P33

Head restraint adjustment .................................... P34

Manual seat ....................................................... P33

Power seat......................................................... P33

Reclining............................................................ P34

Seat heater ........................................................ P36

Seat height adjustment (driver's seat).................... P34

Fuel ............................................................ P283, P463

Consumption indicator ........................................ P181

Economy hints ................................................... P364

Filler lid and cap ................................................ P284

Gauge .............................................................. P150

Requirements .......................................... P283, P463

Tank capacity..................................................... P463

Fuses.................................................................... P451

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)........................... P373

Glove box.............................................................. P272

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) ...................... P373

Hazard warning flasher ................................. P148, P378

Head restraint adjustment

Front seat .......................................................... P34

Rear seat ........................................................... P37

Headlight............................................................... P217

Index

499

Index

(502,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Aim adjustment.................................................. P456

Beam leveler..................................................... P227

Control switch ................................................... P217

Flasher ............................................................. P220

Indicator light..................................................... P174

Welcome lighting function ................................... P218

High Beam Assist

Function ........................................................... P220

Indicator ........................................................... P174

High/low beam change (dimmer) ............................. P219

Hill start assist.............................................. P331, P436

OFF indicator light ............................................. P163

To activate/deactivate......................................... P333

Warning light ..................................................... P163

Hill start assist warning light.................................... P163

HomeLink

............................................................ P235

Hook

Coat................................................................. P278

Towing and tie-down .......................................... P398

Horn..................................................................... P245

Hose and connections............................................ P428

Icy road surface warning indicator............................ P175

Ignition switch ....................................................... P144

Light................................................................. P145

Illumination brightness control ................................. P151

Immobilizer ............................................................ P117

Indicator light

Auto Vehicle Hold ON ........................................ P163

BSD/RCTA OFF ....................................... P175, P348

Cruise control .................................................... P175

Door open......................................................... P164

Drive Mode Select.............................................. P173

Electronic parking brake...................................... P162

Front fog light .................................................... P175

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF ....... P156

Headlight........................................................... P174

High beam ........................................................ P174

High beam assist ..................................... P174, P221

Hill start assist OFF............................................ P163

Immobilizer........................................................ P172

Intelligent (I) mode .................................... P173, P311

Malfunction........................................................ P157

RAB OFF .......................................................... P176

Security ................................................... P117, P172

Select lever/Gear position ................................... P173

SI-DRIVE .......................................................... P173

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF ................................... P176

Sport (S) mode ......................................... P173, P311

Sport Sharp (S#) mode............................. P173, P312

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF..................... P174

Traction control OFF........................................... P167

Turn signal ........................................................ P174

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF ............................ P167

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ..................... P165

Inside mirror .......................................................... P233

Interior lights.......................................................... P270

Internal trunk lid release handle ............................... P135

Jack and jack handle .............................................. P379

Index

500

(503,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Jack-up point......................................................... P381

Jump starting ........................................................ P394

Key ...................................................................... P102

Number plate .................................................... P102

Positions........................................................... P144

Reminder chime ................................................ P145

Replacement...................................................... P117

Keyless access with push-button start system........... P102

Disabling keyless access functions ....................... P112

Locking and unlocking doors ............................... P106

Opening trunk ................................................... P109

Warning chimes and warning indicator ........ P115, P168

When access key fob does not operate properly ... P402

Keyless entry system .............................................. P119

Lane Change Assist (LCA)...................................... P344

Lap belt pretensioner ............................................... P49

Leather seat materials ............................................ P413

LED headlight warning light ........................... P174, P453

LED headlights...................................................... P453

Light

Backup ............................................................. P471

Control switch ................................................... P217

Daytime running ................................................ P225

Dome ...................................................... P270, P455

Front fog........................................................... P227

Front side marker .............................................. P217

Ignition switch ................................................... P145

License plate ..................................................... P455

Map........................................................ P270, P456

Rear combination............................................... P453

Rear turn signal ....................................... P228, P453

Trunk ................................................................ P456

Turn signal ........................................................ P228

Vanity mirror ............................................ P271, P456

Loading your vehicle ............................................... P372

Low fuel warning light ............................................. P164

Low tire pressure warning light................................. P158

Lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) .......... P62

Lower and top tether anchorage................................. P62

Maintenance

Precautions ....................................................... P419

Schedule........................................................... P419

Seatbelt ............................................................. P47

Tips .................................................................. P421

Tools ................................................................ P379

Malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE

warning light) ...................................................... P157

Manual

Climate control................................................... P257

Mode (continuously variable transmission) ............ P309

Seat .................................................................. P33

Manual transmission ............................................... P303

Manual transmission oil................................. P431, P466

Map light ..................................................... P270, P456

Meters and gauges................................................. P148

Mirror defogger ...................................................... P231

Index

501

Index

(504,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Mirrors.................................................................. P233

Moonroof ..................................................... P137, P406

Switch .............................................................. P138

New vehicle break-in driving ................................... P364

Odometer ............................................................. P149

Oil filter................................................................. P427

Oil level

Differential gear ................................................. P432

Engine.............................................................. P426

Manual transmission .......................................... P431

Warning light ..................................................... P158

Oil pressure warning light ....................................... P158

One-touch lane changer ......................................... P228

Outside

Mirror defogger.................................................. P231

Mirrors.............................................................. P243

Overheating engine................................................ P397

Parking................................................................. P324

Brake ............................................................... P324

Brake stroke...................................................... P437

Tips.................................................................. P330

Passenger seatbelt reminder................................... P153

Periodic inspections ............................................... P366

Petrol fuel ............................................................. P283

PIN code Access.................................................... P109

Power

Outlets.............................................................. P274

Outside mirrors .................................................. P243

Seat .................................................................. P33

Steering ............................................................ P314

Steering warning light ......................................... P164

Window switches ............................................... P131

Windows ........................................................... P131

Precautions against vehicle modification ............. P50, P98

Preparing to drive ................................................... P289

Push-button

Ignition switch.................................................... P146

Starting and stopping engine ............................... P292

Rear

Combination lights.............................................. P453

Differential gear oil ................................... P432, P466

Turn signal light ................................................. P453

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ............................... P344

Rear Seat Reminder ................................................. P50

Rear seatbelt warning light ...................................... P155

Rear seats............................................................... P37

Armrest.............................................................. P41

Folding down...................................................... P39

Head restraint adjustment .................................... P37

Heater ............................................................... P36

Rear view camera .................................................. P334

Rear window

Defogger........................................................... P231

Index

502

(505,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Recommended

Brake fluid ........................................................ P467

Clutch fluid........................................................ P467

Continuously variable transmission fluid ............... P467

Differential gear oil............................................. P432

Engine oil ......................................................... P464

Front differential gear oil ..................................... P466

Manual transmission oil ...................................... P466

Rear differential gear oil ..................................... P466

Spark plugs....................................................... P468

Refueling .............................................................. P284

Remote control mirror switch................................... P243

Remote engine start system.................................... P296

Replacing battery............................................... P301

Remote keyless entry system................................... P119

Replacing battery............................................... P457

Replacement

Access key fob battery ....................................... P458

Air cleaner element ............................................ P430

Brake pad......................................................... P436

Cabin air filter.................................................... P264

Key ................................................................... P117

Remote engine start transmitter battery ................ P301

Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ..... P122, P459

Tire .................................................................. P444

Wheel............................................................... P445

Wiper blade rubber ............................................ P447

Wiper blades..................................................... P447

Replacing bulbs..................................................... P452

Dome light ........................................................ P455

Headlight .......................................................... P453

License plate light .............................................. P455

Map light........................................................... P456

Rear combination light ........................................ P453

Rear turn signal light .......................................... P453

Trunk light ......................................................... P456

Vanity mirror light ............................................... P456

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

OFF indicator..................................................... P176

ON/OFF setting.................................................. P361

Warning indicator ..................................... P176, P361

Rocking the vehicle ................................................ P372

Roof

Antenna ............................................................ P268

Molding and crossbar ......................................... P374

Safety

Precautions when driving ....................................... P5

Symbol ................................................................ P4

Warnings.............................................................. P3

Sealing flat tire ....................................................... P384

Flat tire repair kit................................................ P387

How to seal ....................................................... P388

Safety precautions ............................................. P385

Seat

Fabric ............................................................... P413

Front ................................................................. P30

Heater ............................................................... P36

Height adjustment ............................................... P34

Manual .............................................................. P33

Power ................................................................ P33

Index

503

Index

(506,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Rear................................................................... P37

Seatbelt ............................................................ P5, P42

Fastening............................................................ P44

Maintenance ....................................................... P47

Pretensioners ...................................................... P47

Safety tips........................................................... P42

Warning light and chime ..................................... P153

Security

Alarm system .................................................... P127

Immobilizer ........................................................ P117

Indicator light..................................................... P172

Select lever........................................................... P306

Position indicator ............................................... P173

Shift lock function .............................................. P307

Shift lever ............................................................. P303

Shift paddle........................................................... P309

Shoulder pretensioners............................................. P48

SI-DRIVE............................................................... P311

Indicator light..................................................... P173

Intelligent (I) mode indicator ....................... P173, P311

Mode................................................................. P311

Sport (S) mode indicator...................................... P311

Sport Sharp (S#) mode indicator ................ P173, P312

Switches........................................................... P312

Snow tires.................................................... P371, P438

Snowy and icy roads.............................................. P369

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator.......................... P176

Sounding a panic alarm.......................................... P122

Spark plugs.................................................. P431, P468

Specifications ........................................................ P462

Speedometer......................................................... P148

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System

airbag) ........................................................... P5, P68

System monitors ................................................. P96

System servicing................................................. P97

System warning light .......................... P77, P96, P156

Starting & stopping engine............................. P289, P292

State emission testing (U.S. only)............................. P287

Steering lock................................................ P292, P295

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)....................... P226

OFF indicator light.................................... P174, P226

OFF switch........................................................ P226

Warning light ..................................................... P174

Steering wheel

Lock ....................................................... P292, P295

Power ............................................................... P314

Tilt/telescopic..................................................... P244

Storage compartment.............................................. P272

Summer tires ......................................................... P438

Sun visors ............................................................. P271

Sunshade .............................................................. P139

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........................ P68

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) .............. P68

Curtain airbag..................................................... P89

Side airbag......................................................... P89

Synthetic leather upholstery..................................... P414

Tachometer............................................................ P149

Temperature gauge................................................. P150

Temperature warning light

AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P158

Index

504

(507,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Temporary spare tire ..................................... P378, P469

Tether (child restraint system) ............................ P62, P66

Tie-down hooks ..................................................... P398

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ................................... P244

Tire ............................................................. P438, P468

All season......................................................... P438

Chains.............................................................. P371

Information........................................................ P478

Inspection ......................................................... P440

Pressures and wear ........................................... P440

Replacement..................................................... P444

Rotation............................................................ P444

Size and pressure.............................................. P468

Summer............................................................ P438

Types ............................................................... P438

Winter (snow).................................................... P438

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)................................... P158, P322, P393, P438

Screen ............................................................. P324

Warning light ..................................................... P158

Tires and wheels ................................................... P438

Tools .................................................................... P379

Top tether anchorages....................................... P62, P66

Towing.................................................................. P398

All wheels on the ground .................................... P401

Flat-bed truck .................................................... P401

Hooks............................................................... P398

Tie-down hooks ................................................. P398

Trailer

Towing.............................................................. P375

Trip meter ............................................................. P149

Trunk lid ................................................................ P134

Opener button ................................................... P135

Release handle.................................................. P135

Trunk light ............................................................. P456

Turn signal

Indicator lights ................................................... P174

Lever ................................................................ P228

Under-floor storage compartment ............................. P280

USB power supply .................................................. P276

Valet mode ............................................................ P130

Vanity mirror .......................................................... P271

Light ....................................................... P271, P456

Vehicle

Capacity weight ................................................. P373

Identification ...................................................... P473

Symbols............................................................... P5

Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light.............................................. P167

OFF switch........................................................ P320

Operation indicator light ...................................... P165

Warning light ..................................................... P165

Vehicle Dynamics Control system............................. P319

Ventilator ............................................................... P248

Warning and indicator lights..................................... P152

Index

505

Index

(508,1)

北米Model "A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

Warning chimes

Keyless access with push-button start system....... P168

Seatbelt ............................................................ P153

Warning indicator

Access key ....................................................... P168

BSD/RCTA........................................................ P175

Engine low oil level ............................................ P158

Icy road surface................................................. P175

Keyless access with push-button start system....... P168

RAB ........................................................ P176, P361

Warning light

ABS ................................................................. P160

All-Wheel Drive.................................................. P164

AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P158

Automatic headlight beam leveler ........................ P174

Brake system .................................................... P160

Charge ............................................................. P157

CHECK ENGINE ............................................... P157

Electric Damper system...................................... P176

Front passenger’s seatbelt.................................. P153

Hill start assist................................................... P163

LED headlight ................................................... P174

Low fuel............................................................ P164

Low tire pressure ............................................... P158

Oil pressure ...................................................... P158

Power steering .................................................. P164

Rear seatbelt..................................................... P155

Seatbelt ............................................................ P153

SRS airbag system ............................................ P156

Steering Responsive Headlight............................ P174

Vehicle Dynamics Control ................................... P165

Windshield washer fluid ...................................... P164

Warranties ................................................................ P2

Washing ................................................................ P410

Waxing and polishing .............................................. P411

Wear indicators ...................................................... P443

Welcome lighting function........................................ P218

Wheel

Alloy ................................................................. P446

Balance ............................................................ P442

Nut tightening torque ................................ P468, P469

Replacement ..................................................... P445

Windows ............................................................... P131

Windshield

Washer fluid ...................................................... P446

Washer fluid warning light ................................... P164

Wiper and washer switches ................................. P230

Wiper blades ..................................................... P448

Wiper deicer ...................................................... P231

Winter

Driving .............................................................. P368

Tires ....................................................... P371, P438

Wiper and washer .................................................. P229

Wiper deicer .......................................................... P231

Index

506

(1,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Right Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Left Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(1,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Right Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Left Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(1,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Right Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Left Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(1,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Right Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(2,1)

北米Model"A9020BE-B" EDITED: 2022/ 5/ 16

GAS STATION REFERENCE

S99AA

& Fuel

S99AA01

Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95

RON) or higher. If 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel is not readily available,

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) may

be used.

& Fuel Octane Rating

S99AA02

! AKI

S99AA0202

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and

Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti

Knock Index (AKI).

! RON

S99AA0201

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

& Limit of ethanol content

S99AA09

No more than 15%

& Fuel Tank Capacity

S99AA03

16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)

& Engine Oil

S99AA04

Use only the following oils.

. API classification SP with the words “RESOURCE CON-

SERVING”

. or ILSAC GF-6A, which can be identified with the ILSAC

certification mark (Starburst mark)

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine Oil”

�P464.

& Engine Oil Capacity

S99AA05

4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated

based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.

Check the oil level using an oil level gauge after refilling the

engine with oil. For more details about maintenance and

service, refer to “Engine Oil” �P426.

& Cold Tire Pressure

S99AA06

Refer to “Tires” �P468.

Subaru 2022 WRX Base

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Subaru 2022 WRX BASE Questions and Answers

Related Products

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT Leather

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited

Vevor YB06-11 High Flow Catalytic Converter Direct Fit Exhaust Manifold for Subaru Impreza Legacy Forester Outback 06-12

Subaru 2026 Solterra Premium